Your search for 'Gor' returned 129 results within BCE Curriculum

Arabic - Arabic Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Students who enter the background language learner pathway in Arabic in Year 7 may have strong connections to Arabic language and culture through family and community and varying degrees of oracy in Arabic. Their textual knowledge developed through English literacy supports the development of literacy in Arabic. Skills in analysing, comparing and reflecting on language and culture in both languages are mutually supportive. Arabic language learning and use Learners use modelled and rehearsed language in familiar and unfamiliar contexts and increasingly generate original and personal language. They interact in class routines and activities, expressing their ideas and feelings ( أحب جدي كثيراَ), exchanging opinions ( هذا الواجب صعب؛ الإمتحان طويل) and managing shared tasks (أولا؛ نختار أفراد الفريق؛ ثانيا نوزع الأدوار). They listen to, read and view a range of texts and create spoken and written texts to present ideas and information to a variety of audiences in different contexts. Learners work both collaboratively and independently, exploring different modes and genres of communication with particular reference to their current social, cultural and communicative interests. They explore and discuss themes, characters and events in Arabic folk tales, fables and films, and plan, draft and present imaginative texts, such as stories, plays, cartoons and comics. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural perspectives and experiences through interaction with an increasing range of Arabic speakers. Contexts of interaction Learners come to the classroom understanding and using Arabic within the world of their experience, which is likely to be the home and community domains. At this level, possible contexts of interaction could include the world of learning, for example, discussing the shift from primary to secondary school, the concepts of home and friendship, family, shared events and leisure activities. Learners contextualise and use their background language and culture as much as possible while socialising and exchanging information. They pool language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. This will not necessarily be characterised by the fluent use of Arabic, but rather by the way they use their background knowledge of Arabic language and culture in communication. Interactions are authentic in relating to the world of teenage experience, and performance based. Additional opportunities for interaction are provided through purposeful and integrated use of information and communications technologies (ICT), for example, videoconferencing and online activities such as e-learning. Texts and resources Learners work with a range of texts designed for language learning, such as textbooks, audio recordings, teacher-generated materials and online resources. They also use authentic materials such as blogs, newsletters, advertisements, magazines, video clips and apps. Their knowledge is extended through exploration of Arabic texts on the internet, and audiovisual materials, cultural performances, and community events and activities, such as the Arabic Film Festival. As background language learners, they are also likely to engage with bilingual, subtitled and captioned texts. Features of Arabic language use Learners understand and use features of the Arabic sound and writing systems, and make connections between spoken and written texts. They use appropriate pronunciation and intonation when communicating and interacting in a range of contexts, and apply spelling rules when writing in Arabic script. They explore Arabic syntax and linguistic structures and begin to use metalanguage by identifying grammatical terms. They apply elements of Arabic grammar to the production of texts, such as articles, nouns, adjectives, personal pronouns, verb tenses, conjunctions, adverbs, statements, negation and questions, to describe people, actions and events ( أستيقظ في الصباح), discuss preferences ( أحب طعام أمي؛ لا أحب الأكل السريع), expand on expression ( في الطريق إلى المدرسة ), and link ideas and information ( أو؛ أيضا؛ كذلك). They understand ways in which the English language works as a system and how English is similar to and different from Arabic. They discuss the influence of other languages and cultures on Arabic language, and recognise variations in language use across Arabic-speaking countries, regions and communities. They make connections between texts and cultural contexts, identifying how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in language and how language choices determine ways in which people, issues and circumstances are represented. Level of support Learners have varying degrees of Arabic oracy and literacy competence and are supported through multilevel and differentiated tasks. Support includes scaffolding, modelling and monitoring, explicit instruction and feedback, structured activities for practising new language, and the use of gesture and movement. Students are supported to develop autonomy as language learners and users, and to self-monitor and adjust their language use in response to their experience in diverse contexts. Opportunities to review and consolidate are an important component of learning at this level. The role of English Arabic is the main language of instruction and interaction. Arabic and English may be used when discussing concepts, functions and structures relating to language use, and when exchanging and comparing experiences in learning Arabic and English. English may be used for conceptually demanding explanations and discussions, particularly when making connections between Arabic and other languages and cultures and discussing how language and culture connect to make meaning. Learners are encouraged to reflect on how they interact in Arabic and English, and on their own sense of identity from a bilingual perspective.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and use aspects of key grammatical forms and structures in spoken and written texts, such as articles, nouns, adjectives, personal pronouns, verbs andtenses, conjunctions, adverbs, statements, negation and questions, and use vocabulary that relates to familiar environments and activities

[Key concepts: grammar, syntactic relationship; Key processes: understanding, applying, comparing]

(ACLARU013)

  • learning frequently used words related to the home and school environment, for example,بيت؛ عائلة؛ أب؛ أم؛ إخوة؛ معلمة؛ مدرسة؛ حصّة؛ صف؛ كتاب؛ دراسة؛ فرصة؛ وقت فراغ؛ ايام الأسبوع
  • understanding the effect of word order in phrases and sentences, for example,الجملة الفعلية: كتب الولد القصة؛ جاءت البنت إلى المدرسة؛ يعمل أبي في المطار
  • recognising the different parts of speech and categorising words into groups, for example, الاسم؛ الفعل ؛ الصّفة؛ الحرف
  • recognising definite and indefinite articles with nouns and knowing that nouns have a gender, for example, تلميذ/التلميذ؛ مُعلّمة العلوم؛ المعلمة
  • understanding that adjectives have a gender and that they follow the noun and its gender, for example, الأب حنون؛ الأم جميلة؛ الكرسي كبير؛ الطاولة صغيرة
  • describing aspects of own daily activities, using simple present tense verbs, for example, أستيقظ في الصباح؛ اتناول الفطور؛ أستقلّ الباص؛ أدخل الصف؛ أكمل الواجب؛ ألبس ثيابي
  • understanding and using simple verbs to express likes and dislikes, for example, أحب طعام أمي؛ لا أحب الأكل السريع؛ أحب الرياضة ولا أحب الرسم
  • using demonstrative pronouns to identify people, objects or animals, for example, هذا كتاب؛ هذه مسطرة
  • using singular possessive pronouns, for example, بيتي؛ سريري؛ معلمتي؛ غرفتكَ؛ كتابكِ؛ حقيبتها؛ دفتره
  • using singular personal pronouns, both masculine and feminine, with appropriate simple present tense verbs to describe aspects of home or school life, for example, تحبّ أمي العمل؛ هي نشيطة؛ يحب أبي الطبخ؛ هو ماهر
  • understanding and responding to basic familiar instructions using imperatives, for example, إفتح الباب؛ أجلس في مكانك؛ لا تتكلم دون إذن؛ نظّف غرفتك؛ اكمل عملك
  • exploring the use of simple conjunctions such as و؛ أو؛ أيضا؛ كذلك
  • using adverbs of place and time to expand expression, for example,باكراً؛ صباحاً؛ بعيداً ؛ قريباً؛ شرقاً؛ غرباً
  • understanding and using singular nouns and regular plural noun endings in masculine and feminine forms, for example, معلم/معلمون؛ معلمة/معلمات؛
  • expressing negation in simple sentences, for example, لا أحب السفر؛ ليس لدي إخوة
  • using a range of adjectives in singular form to describe appearance, feelings and personalities, for example,أمي طويلة وأبي وسيم؛ صديقي سعيد ومعلمتي حزينة؛ أخي ظريف وأختي مزعجة
  • using past tense verbs to recount events related to home and school contexts, for example,قدمت فرضي للمعلمة؛ تأخرت عن الدرس؛ نمت متأخرا؛ نسيت كتبي في البيت
  • understanding and using simple question words in their interactions with peers, for example,متى أتيت إلى البيت؟ من أعدّ لك الفطور؟ ماذا احضرتِ للغداء؟ كيف أتيت إلى المدرسة؟
  • developing knowledge of cardinal and ordinal numbers to describe time and date, for example, (آذار) الساعة الواحدة ظهراً؛ اليوم السادس من إبريل (نيسان)/اليوم أربعة مارس
  • applying rules of present tense verb conjugation when speaking to peers and the teacher, for example,أنتَ تدرس كثيرا؛ أنتِ تلعبين مع غيري؛ أنتم تلاميذ مجتهدون
  • building metalanguage to describe grammatical concepts and develop learning resources, for example, verb charts, vocabulary lists, and groups of pronouns, adverbs or adjectives

Content description

Elaborations

Listen to,and view a range of spoken, written and multimodal texts; identify, sequence and classify key points of information such as details about people and events; and use the information in new ways

[Key concepts: information, text; Key processes: listening, reading, viewing, locating, transposing]

(ACLARC004)

  • listening to and viewing texts such as stories, songs, notices or video clips and identifying key points of information, using intonation and visual cues such as gestures and facial expressions to assist understanding
  • identifying letters, words and phrases in written Arabic, for example, titles, labels and captions
  • participating in shared reading of print and digital texts such as short stories or other texts relating to familiar events and contexts, using pictures, intonation and contextual cues to predict meaning and identify key information
  • locating and sequencing information used to describe people and events, for example,البنت تدرس؛ الولد يساعد أمه؛ الأب ينظف الحديقة؛ في الصباح أمي تحضر الفطور؛ في المساء أبي ينظف السيارة
  • responding to questions that elicit details such as colour, quantity and place about participants and objects, for example,ما لون الفستان ؟ لون الفستان أحمر؛ ما لون المقلمة؟ لون المقلمة أحمركم عدد الأقلام؟ كم كتابا يوجد هنا؟ يوجد أربعة كتبأين تعمل أمك؟ تعمل أمي في المستشفى؛ يدرس أخي في المدرسة
  • classifying and categorising information gained from others, such as favourite foods and places to visit, for example,سالم يحب التبولة؛ عادل يحب الدجاج؛ سعاد تفضل الخضار؛ علي يحب كرة القدم؛ ماجد يفضل السباحة؛ رامي يفضل العزف على الغيتارتحب البنات الموسيقى بينما الأولاد يحبون الرياضة
  • listening to short spoken texts with unfamiliar language, and identifying specific details, for example, the name and number on a recorded voice messageمرحباًإسمي سهاماود التكلم مع سامر بخصوص الإمتحانأرجو الإتصال بي على الرقم 0456566777
  • gathering information about other peers’ activities through conducting interviews about weekend activities and selecting specific information to use in a short report

Arabic - Arabic Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use written and spoken Arabic to exchange information about their personal worlds and to express feelings, likes and dislikes. They use formulaic language for a range of classroom functions and processes, such as asking and responding to questions, following instructions, requesting repetition and asking for permission and assistance, for example, متى أكملت البحث؟؛ من ساعدك في إكمال الواجب المدرسي؟؛ هل يمكن أن تعيد السؤال؟؛ لو سمحت؛ ممكن أن أستخدم الهاتف؟؛ من فضلك ممكن أن تساعدني في حمل صندوق الكتب؟. Students use rehearsed and some spontaneous language to engage in planning, transacting, making arrangements and negotiating. They apply features of pronunciation and rhythm in spoken Arabic to a range of sentence types. They locate, classify and sequence key points of information from a range of sources and communicate information and ideas related to home, school, leisure and interests using different modes of presentation. They share their responses to different imaginative texts by expressing feelings and ideas about the ways in which characters, settings and events are represented. Students use modelled language to create imaginative texts or alternative versions of texts they have listened to, read or viewed. They use key grammatical forms and structures in spoken and written texts, such as articles, nouns, adjectives, personal pronouns, verbs and verb tenses, conjunctions, adverbs (for example, ال التعريف البيت؛ المدرسة؛ الدراسة؛ العائلة؛ المواد الدراسية؛الهوايات كبير/كبيرة؛ طويل/طويلة؛ ممتع/ممتعة؛ مفيد/مفيدة؛ مدرستي كبيرة؛ عائلتي صغيرة؛ بيتي واسع؛ شارعنا ضيق؛, أنتَ؛ أنتِ؛ أنتم؛ هو؛ هي؛ هم؛ أذهب إلى المدرسة؛ نذهب إلى السينما؛ ذهبت إلى السينما؛ ذهبنا إلى زيارة الأقارب و؛ أو؛ كذلك؛ أيضاً؛ لأنّ يوميا؛ غالبا؛ أحيانا؛ بكيت بشدّة؛ تكلمت بحماسٍ؛ إستيقضت متأخراً؛ وصلت إلى المسرح باكراً ),They apply writing conventions to written texts, such as لا أستطيع أن أكمل البحث؛ لم أستطع أن أجيب على جميع أسئلة الإمتحان أين تتمرن لكرة القدم؟ متى تلعب الرياضة؟ ما هي مادتك المفضلة؟ كم شخص يوجد في عائلتك؟ إستخدام العنوان؛ الفقرات؛ الفواصل؛ أدوات الترقيم؛ التوقيع في خاتمة الرسالة . They use contextual cues and textual features to translate and interpret everyday texts from Arabic into English and vice versa, and identify similarities and differences in translation. They create texts in Arabic and English, identifying words and expressions that do not readily translate, such as بالهناء والشفاء؛ والله ولي التوفيق . They compare ways of communicating in Arabic and English and explain how their own biography influences their cultural identity and ways of communicating. Students identify and apply the writing conventions of the Arabic alphabet and script, making connections between spoken and written Arabic in texts. They identify the structure and features of different personal, informative and imaginative texts and provide simple explanations as to how these elements contribute to meaning. They identify ways in which spoken Arabic varies according to regions and countries, and provide examples of how Arabic has changed over time due to influences from other languages and cultures. Students identify how written Arabic varies in style and in the use of formal and informal forms, for example, أنتَ/حضرتكَ/حضرتكم , according to context, situation and the relationship between participants. They identify ways in which language use reflects cultural ideas, thoughts and perceptions.

Arabic - Arabic Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Children enter the early years of schooling with varying degrees of early literacy capability in Arabic and/or English. For young students, learning typically focuses on their immediate world of family, home, school, friends and neighbourhood. They are learning how to socialise with new people in settings outside the home, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Arabic language learning and use Arabic is learnt in parallel with English language and literacy. While the learning of Arabic differs from the learning of English, each supports and enriches the other. Arabic is used at home and in familiar Arabic-speaking settings, and in classroom interactions, routines and activities, supported by the use of materials and resources, gestures and body language. At this stage, there is a focus on play, imaginative activities, games, music, dance and familiar routines, which provide scaffolding for language development. Repetition and consolidation help learners to identify familiar and new words and simple phrases, and to recognise the purpose of simple texts. Learners use Arabic for functions such as greeting (مرحبا؛ صباح الخير), sharing information ( هذه أختي لينا؛ عمري ست سنوات ), responding to instructions ( نعم؛ أنا هنا؛ حاضر ), and taking turns in games and simple shared tasks. The transition from spoken to written language is scaffolded via shared exploration of simple texts and language features. Learners use a variety of cues, including images, context and frequently used word patterns, to comprehend texts and communicate. Contexts of interaction The primary contexts for interaction in Arabic are the immediate environment of home and the classroom. Learners use Arabic to interact with each other and the teacher within the learning environment at school and with immediate family members at home. The use of information and communications technologies (ICT) enriches the learning of Arabic language and culture by providing alternative experiences, a range of resources, and opportunities to access authentic language in different contexts. Texts and resources Learners engage with a variety of spoken, written and visual texts, such as children’s songs and nursery rhymes, stories from Big Books and interactive resources. Writing skills progress from identifying the alphabet to tracing, labelling and copying letters, and then to constructing simple, short texts using familiar vocabulary. Features of Arabic language use Learners become familiar with how the sounds of the Arabic language are represented in letters and words. They practise pronunciation and intonation through activities such as reciting rhymes and poems and singing songs, and experiment with sounds, short and long vowels, phonemes, words, simple phrases and sentences relating to pictures, objects and actions, for example, طاولة صغيرة . They learn to recognise the letters of the Arabic alphabet, including new sounds, for example,خ؛ ع؛غ؛ ق؛ ص؛ ض؛ ط؛ ظ , and the way letters are joined to make words, for example, طار؛ طير؛ ذهب, and make comparisons with the English alphabet. They write letters, words and simple sentences using familiar vocabulary, prelearnt language features and structures, and formulaic expressions, for example, كان يا ما كان. They begin to recognise how language use changes according to the speakers and context. Level of support The classroom is a new context of communication where learners rely on the teacher to assist their learning. Learning experiences are supported by the teacher through scaffolding, modelling, cueing, monitoring, feedback and encouragement. Multiple and varied sources of input and stimulus are used, including visual cues, such as the use of gestures, and resources, for example, bilingual Big Books and picture books, subtitled cartoons and video programs, and realia, objects, maps and charts. The role of English Arabic is used as the medium for class interaction and to demonstrate and model new language acquisition. English may be used to explain features of language and aspects of culture. Both English and Arabic may be used when learners are communicating about similarities and differences between Arabic and other languages and cultures and reflecting on how they talk and behave in Arabic-speaking and English-speaking contexts.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate and organise information from simple spoken, written and visual texts to identify details about people and objects

[Key concepts: meaning, context; Key processes: listening, reading, locating, categorising]

(ACLARC106)

  • listening for key words in stories, rhymes or songs, using intonation and visual cues such as gestures and facial expressions to assist understanding
  • identifying letters, words and phrases in written Arabic, for example, titles, labels and captions, by labelling, matching, clicking and dragging, miming and using actions
  • participating in shared reading of print and digital texts such as stories in Big Books and other texts relating to familiar events and contexts, using pictures, intonation and contextual cues to predict meaning and identify key information
  • sorting and categorising information in graphic representations such as tables, including details about colour, quantity and place relating to people and objects, for example,ما لون الفستان ؟ لون الفستان أحمر؛ ما لون المقلمة؟ لون المقلمة أحمركم عدد الأقلام؟ كم كتاباً يوجد هنا؟ يوجد أربعة كتبأين تعمل أمك؟ تعمل أمي في المستشفى؛ يدرس أخي في المدرسة

Arabic - Arabic Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with the teacher and peers to exchange information about themselves, their family and friends, for example, إسمي هاني؛ أنا ليلى؛ عمري ست سنوات؛ أمي سميرة؛ أبي خالد؛ عندي أخ وأخت؛ صديقي رامي؛ صديقتي رنا , and initiate interactions by asking and responding to questions. They use repetitive language when participating in shared activities and transactions and responding to classroom instructions. When speaking, they use the sounds of the Arabic language, for example, حروف مثل خ؛ ح؛ ط؛ ظ؛ ص؛ ض؛ ع؛ غ؛ ق . They locate information about people, places and objects in simple texts, and share information in different formats, using illustrations and gestures to support meaning, for example, ما اسمك أين تسكن؛ كيف حالك؟ هل عندك أصدقاء؟ كم أخت عندك؟ ماذا يعمل أبوك؟ ما اسم مدرستك؟ من هي معلمتك؟ هل تحب المدرسة؟ . They make simple statements about favourite elements in response to imaginative experiences, and create own representations of imagined characters and events, using illustrations, familiar language and non-verbal forms of expression. Students identify specific parts of speech, such as nouns, verbs and adjectives, in spoken and written texts, and use familiar words and phrases, for example, المدرسة؛ العائلة؛ الأم؛ الأب؛ الأصدقاء؛الصف؛ المعلمة؛ البيت أسكن مع عائلتي؛ أحب؛ آكل؛ أذهب؛ ألعب؛ أغني؛ صغير/كبير؛ طويل/قصير؛ جميل؛ نظيف؛ المدرسة؛ بيتي؛ أختي؛ صديقي يوم السبت؛ في الصباح؛ الأمس؛ كل يوم and sentence patterns in simple texts, such as أحب أن آكل.../ لا أحب أن....؛ أذهب إلى؛ أذهب مع؛ . They recognise questions and commands, for example, ما أسمك؛ /اذا تحب أن تلعب؟ من صديقك في المدرسة؟ هل بيتك كبير؟ ما هي لعبتك المفضلة؟ أجلس هنا من فضلك؛ تكلم الآن؛ إرفع يدك؛ تعال إلى هنا , and use vocabulary and simple sentences to communicate information about themselves , their family and classroom, such as ذهب سمير إلى المدرسة؛ ذهبت لينا إلى البيت , applying basic rules of word order and gender . Students translate frequently used words and simple phrases using visual cues, and create word lists, labels and captions in both Arabic and English for their immediate environment, for example, البيت؛ الغرفة؛ الحديقة؛ المدرسة؛ الصف؛ المعلمة؛ الدرس؛ المدير؛ الشارع؛ الباص؛ الملعب؛ الدكان هذا أبي؛ .إسمه عادل؛ هذه معلمتي؛ إسمها آنسة هالة؛ أحب صديقتي كثيراً؛ . They describe their roles as members of particular groups, and share their feelings and ways of behaving as they use Arabic at home and in the classroom, such as .أنا سعيد؛ أحب أن أتكلم مع أمي بالعربي لا أفهم العربي كثيرا؛ أنا في فريق كرة القدم؛ Students identify letters of the Arabic alphabet and join some letters to form simple words. They identify features of familiar texts. They distinguish between the language spoken by different Arabic speakers in different situations, such as at home with family or at school with the teacher, for example, من فضلك؛ هل يمكن أن...؛ هل أقدر أن...؛ لوسمحت.... Students name some of the many languages that are spoken in Australia, including Arabic, and provide examples of simple words in Arabic that have been borrowed from English and vice versa. They identify how the ways people use language reflect where and how they live and what is important to them.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners The transition to secondary schooling involves social and academic demands that coincide with a period of maturational and physical change. Learners are adjusting to a new school culture with sharper divisions between curriculum areas. Learners in this pathway have had little or no experience with Auslan, but are learning it with the expectation that it will be their primary language in the future. They have a range of experience with other signed or spoken languages, or a home gesture system, but may not be fluent in any standard language, and may have associated cognitive challenges. A multilevel and differentiated approach to teaching and task design responding to this diversity of prior experience is necessary, including using as much visual support as possible. Auslan is learnt in parallel with English literacy. Learners in this sequence and pathway have little experience of English and are learning English literacy simultaneously to Auslan. As they have no access to spoken English, this poses particular challenges. The learning of Auslan supports and enriches deaf students’ learning of English. Auslan learning and use Rich language input characterises the first stages of learning. Learners engage in a range of activities designed to immerse them in language scaffolded to their level of linguistic and cognitive development. They build vocabulary for thinking and talking about school and home, routines and social worlds. They interact in structured routines and activities with their peers, family members and as many fluent signing adults as possible. They are supported to use Auslan for different language functions, such as asking and responding to questions, expressing wishes, responding to directions, and taking turns in games and simple shared learning activities. Learners may initially need time to watch Auslan without pressure to respond, until they feel comfortable with the situation and context. When they produce Auslan, they use well-known phrases to participate in familiar routines and structured conversations. Over this band, they continue to develop confidence in communicating about the here and now, and gradually begin to talk about the past or future and non-present entities or events. Contexts of interaction Learners at this level are given as much opportunity as possible to interact with their peers, the teaching team and members of the Deaf community for additional enrichment and authentication of their language learning. Information and communication technology (ICT) resources provide extra access to Auslan and to the cultural experience of deafness. A key expectation in the L1 pathway is that students will have opportunities to interact with a variety of native or near-native signing models. The familiarity and routine dimension of the classroom context provide scaffolding and opportunities for language practice and experimentation. Language development and use are incorporated into structured collaborative and interactive learning experiences, games and activities. Texts and resources Learners engage with a variety of signed texts, live and recorded. They watch the teacher signing, share ideas and join in activities, stories and conversational exchanges. They become familiar with ways of recording Auslan, either through film, photos of signs, line drawings of signs or simple symbols. An important source of texts is the Deaf community and older members of it. Features of Auslan use Learners in Years 7–8 can identify the handshape movement and location of signs. Depending on their access to home-sign systems, they make use of varying levels of handling or SASS depicting signs, gradually learning the conventions of Auslan. They learn to use entity depicting signs to discuss movement and location, decreasing their signing space to the conventional area. Learners at this stage use simple clause structures, modifying some verbs for present referents, and begin to understand and ask basic questions. Level of support The early stage of language learning is supported by extensive use of concrete materials and resources, gestures and body language. If the student has existing idiosyncratic gestures or home signs the teacher can access, these are used to scaffold their learning of Auslan. Learning is also supported through the provision of experiences that are challenging but achievable with appropriate scaffolding and support. This involves modelling, monitoring and moderating by the teacher; provision of multiple and varied sources of input; opportunities for revisiting, recycling and reviewing; and continuous cueing, feedback, response and encouragement. Use of recounting and retelling assists in establishing early language skills based on real-life experiences. The teacher provides implicit and explicit modelling and scaffolding in relation to meaningful language use in a range of contexts. The role of English Auslan is the language of all classroom interactions, routines and activities. Because these students do not have any English, they cannot make comparisons between English and Auslan. Research work in English is not an option for these learners. The students’ learning is focused primarily on developing Auslan capabilities as intensively as possible with a view to progressing to a state of communicative competence as soon as possible.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise and use elements ofstructure, such as noun groups/phrases or verb groups/phrases and using conjunctions to shape structure

[Key concepts: sign class, nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, clause; Key processes: recognising, observing, distinguishing, understanding]

(ACLASFU104)

  • categorising noun signs into those for people, animals, places or things
  • learning that proper nouns can have a sign name or be fingerspelled
  • recognising different nouns in clauses, including those that are shown with a pointing sign, such as GIRL READ versus PRO3 READ, or VISIT FRIENDS versus VISIT PRO3
  • knowing that adjectives describe nouns in different ways, such as how they look (BIG or RED), feel (SOFT or HOT), smell (SMELLY) or sound (LOUD)
  • understanding that changes in mouth patterns and movement of signs can intensify adjectives, for example, RED-really, PLEASED-really, TALL-really
  • identifying verb signs (SIT, EAT, FEEL, WONDER, HAVE) and recognising that they are central to a clause
  • noticing that some signs modify the meaning of verbs, such as WORSE as in WORSE OLD and that these are called adverbs
  • contributing examples of signs that tell: when a verb happens (IN-2-WEEKS PRO1 HOLIDAY or WANT LUNCH NOW)where a verb happens (PRO3 RUN FAR or COME HERE)how a verb happens (FAST or SLOW or PRO2 QUICK FINISH)
  • understanding that a clause is one or more signs expressing a single idea and that a clause has at least one verb, but often one or more nouns as well, for example:CALL-himI called him.MAN THERE GO-TO POSS3 HOUSEThat man went to his house.BIG MONSTER SCREAMA big monster screamed.
  • distinguishing between clauses that are statements and those that are questions
  • distinguishing between yes/no questions, wh- questions and statements and their corresponding NMFs
  • knowing that signing involves either telling with signs or showing with DSs and periods of CA, for example,MAN WALK SLOWDS(point):man-walks-slowlyCA:man-swinging-arms-nonchalantly

Content description

Elaborations

Locate specific points of information from signed texts about familiar topics and use the information in new ways

[Key concepts: information, topics, directions; Key processes: identifying, responding, following directions]

(ACLASFC094)

  • responding to signed information such as class messages or short introductions, for example, by identifying names, numbers or times
  • identifying and applying specific information in signed texts using visual pictures and props to complete guided tasks such as craft activities
  • gathering information from peers about topics such as family members or favourite foods
  • identifying information in simple texts that relate to properties such as colour, size, shape or amount, for example when interacting with materials and concrete objects
  • following directions for simple activities involving visual cues such as a treasure hunt, for example:DS:turn-left DEAD-END DS:turn-rightGo left, then at the end turn right.
  • identifying and categorising signs appearing in simple texts according to handshape
  • watching short Auslan texts about topics such as hobbies or sports, recording key points of information using tables or graphic organisers

Content description

Elaborations

different types of bilingual texts to support their classroom learning

[Key concepts: bilingual, meaning, translation, equivalent; Key processes: translating, labelling, developing, creating, captioning]

(ACLASFC099)

  • using images of Auslan signs and equivalent words in English to name and label familiar objects, classroom items or school resources, using posters and digital glossaries with captions
  • developing a handshape dictionary using palm cards or digital means, including equivalent English terms
  • using photos of family members to create a family tree or chart, captioning and labelling in English each family member with corresponding images of Auslan signs
  • creating bilingual texts for younger children, such as a mini Auslan–English dictionary of school-specific signs
  • making their own bilingual dictionaries with English labels, Auslan sign images and simple descriptions of signs, identifying and categorising signs according to handshape

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students interact with the teaching team, class visitors and each other to share information about themselves, their families, friends, routines, pastimes and experiences. They refer to family members and classmates using fingerspelling or sign names as appropriate, and use lexical adjectives and some SASS depicting signs to describe people’s physical appearance and characteristics, for example POSS1 SISTER E-M-M-A, PRO3 SHORT RED HAIR . They use entity depicting signs to discuss movement and location. They recount shared and personal experiences, using simple clause structures, modifying some verbs for present referents or single absent referents for example PRO1 LIKE TV . They ask and respond to simple questions and distinguish between statements and questions using grammatical non-manual features (NMFs). They express likes, dislikes and feelings using lexical signs and affective NMFs, such as DON’T-LIKE DRAWING . They follow directions for class routines and instructions of two or more steps, using directional terms or depicting signs such as DS:turn-left DEAD END DS:turn-right . Students follow culturally appropriate protocols, such as responding to and using attention-gaining strategies such as flashing lights, waving or tapping a shoulder or table, using voice-off while signing and observing appropriate distance between signers. They identify specific points of information in signed texts, for example, colours, numbers, size or time. They present factual information about familiar topics, using modelled lexical signs and formulaic constructions. They demonstrate simple procedures using known signs, gestures, objects and list buoys. They recount and sequence events, using familiar signs and visual prompts and time markers such as 3-YEARS-AGO, IN-TWO-WEEKS or LAST NIGHT . They restrict signing to the standard signing space. They view short imaginative and expressive texts, such as poems and stories, demonstrating understanding through drawing, gesture and modelled signs. They create simple imaginative texts and retell wordless animations, using familiar signs, gestures, modelled language and visual supports, modifying NMFs and lexical signs to indicate manner. They translate high-frequency signs/words and expressions in simple texts. Students identify themselves as members of different groups and describe their relationships with deaf, hard of hearing students, family members and the larger Deaf community and also with the wider ‘hearing’ world. They consider how these different relationships contribute to their sense of identity. They identify places that are important to the Deaf community and describe how such places evoke a sense of belonging and pride. They recognise that one of the most unifying features of the Deaf community is the use of Auslan. Students know that Auslan is a language in its own right, different from mime and gestures used in spoken languages, and that eye contact is necessary for effective communication. They know that meaning is communicated visually through the use of signs, fingerspelling, NMFs and non-conventional gestures. They identify and describe the handshapes, movements and locations of signs. They identify some signs that link to visual images, for example HOUSE, DRINK , and demonstrate signs that are body anchored, such as HUNGRY or SLEEP , and non–body anchored, such as HAVE or GO-TO . They identify how signers use space to track participants through a text, for example by pointing back to an established location to refer to a noun referent; and they identify ways signers refer to the same referent in a text, for example, by using DSs, points or list buoys. They know that signs can be displaced in space for a range of purposes, such as to show locations or to indicate participants in a verb. They know that signing involves telling, depicting or enacting. Students recognise variation in the use of Auslan, such as regional dialects and differences in signing space. They understand different ways that English words are borrowed into Auslan and how these become lexicalised. They recognise variation in how Auslan is used, for example by recognising regional dialects and differences in signing space and explain the nature of transmission of Auslan. They identify different ways Deaf community members communicate with each other and with members of the wider hearing community; and describe how digital forms of communication, such as social media, SMS/texting and NRS, have improved accessibility for the Deaf community and contribute to the vitality of Auslan. They recognise the importance of facial expression, eye gaze and NMFs in a visual-gestural language and culture.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

The nature of the learners This stage of learning coincides with social, physical and cognitive changes associated with adolescence. Learners at this level are developing their cognitive and social capabilities and their communicative repertoire in the language, although it is likely they are still impacted by their late access to language and possibly by other challenges. As their language develops, so does their ability to conceptualise and reason, and their memory and focus improves. They are more independent and less egocentric, enjoying both competitive and cooperative activities. Learners at this level benefit from varied, activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other areas of learning. The curriculum ensures that learning experiences and activities are flexible enough to cater for learner variables, while being appropriate for learners' general cognitive and social levels. Auslan learning and use Learners in this band engage in a range of activities that involve watching and responding to a variety of signed texts. They build proficiency through the provision of rich language input from a range of sources where grammatical forms and language features are purposefully integrated. Learners build more elaborated conversational and interactional skills, including initiating and sustaining conversations, reflecting on and responding to others’ contributions, making appropriate responses and adjustments, and engaging in debate and discussion. The language they see and sign is authentic with some modification. They follow instructions, exchange simple information and express ideas and feelings related to their personal worlds. They negotiate interactions and activities and participate in shared tasks and games. Shared learning activities develop social, cognitive and language skills and provide a context for purposeful language experience and experimentation. Individual and group presentation and performance skills are developed through researching and organising information, structuring and resourcing presentation of content, and selecting appropriate language to engage a particular audience. Learners use ICT to support their learning in increasingly independent and intentional ways, exchanging resources and information with each other and with young people of the same age in other signing communities. They access a variety of media resources, maintain vlogs and other web pages, and participate in social networks. They view and create texts on topics relevant to their interests and enjoyment and continue to build vocabulary that relates to a wider range of domains, such as areas of the curriculum that involve some specialised language use. The language used in routine activities is re-used and reinforced from lesson to lesson in different situations, making connections between what has been learnt and what is to be learnt. Contexts of interaction Learners interact in Auslan with each other, their teaching team, members of their families who can sign and members of the Deaf community. They have access to Deaf visitors and cultural resources in wider contexts and communities through the use of ICT and through the media. Language development and use are incorporated into collaborative and interactive learning experiences, games and activities. Texts and resources Learners work with a broad range of live and digital signed texts designed for learning Auslan in school and for wider authentic use in the Deaf community. They also engage with resources prepared by their teacher, including games, performances, presentations and language exercises. They may have additional access to BANZSL resources created for the Australian, New Zealand or British Deaf communities, such as children’s television programs, websites, music or video clips. In addition, they work with texts from other signed languages that make extensive use of the ‘visual vernacular’. Learners may also have access to community facilities and functions. The Deaf community is the most important resource for learning as it is the origin of most of the texts and communicative situations that learners engage with. Features of Auslan use Learners at this level increasingly use conventional Auslan: lexical signs or depicting signs with conventional classifier handshapes, and rely less on their idiosyncratic systems. They learn to modify some indicating verbs for non-present referents and use constructed action to represent themselves or others in recounts. They use a range of NMFs to distinguish questions from statements or negatives, and use more cohesion when signing texts. A balance between language knowledge and language use is established by integrating focused attention to grammar, vocabulary building, and non-verbal and cultural dimensions of language use with communicative and purposeful learning activity. Learners are increasingly aware that various signed languages are used in Deaf communities across the world. As they engage consciously with differences between languages and cultures, they make comparisons and consider differences and possibilities in ways of communicating in different languages. They build metalanguage to talk about aspects of language such as nouns, verbs and constructed action. Level of support While learners work more independently at this level, ongoing support is incorporated into task activity and the process of learning is supported by systematic feedback and review. Form-focused activities build students’ grammatical knowledge and support the development of accuracy and control in Auslan. Opportunities to use this knowledge in meaningful activities build communicative skills, confidence and fluency. Tasks are carefully scaffolded: teachers provide models and examples; introduce language, concepts and resources needed to manage and complete learning activities; make time for experimentation and for polishing rehearsed texts; and provide support for self-monitoring and reflection. Discussion supports learning and develops students’ conceptual frame for talking about systems of language and culture. Learners are encouraged to engage more with resources such as websites, dictionaries, translating tools and other materials designed to enrich their receptive and productive language use. The role of English Auslan is the language of all classroom interactions, routines and activities. As these learners are in the unique position of not having acquired a first language until very late in life, time spent developing their Auslan must be maximised. While these learners are simultaneously developing English literacy skills, use of English is limited to the translating thread and to small amounts of research with source texts in simple English.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify, paraphrase or compare information obtained from a variety of signed texts or from their own data collection and present the information in different forms

[Key concepts: information, likes/dislikes, interests, preferences; Key processes: retelling, recording, organising, identifying, surveying, categorising]

(ACLASFC112)

  • retelling key points of multistep information used in classroom interactions, such as announcements or directions for a task
  • watching signed texts that show people expressing likes and dislikes and recording and organising their observations in table form
  • watching a presentation by a teacher or peer, identifying specific points of information, such as where they went for a holiday or what activities they did
  • surveying peers in relation to their interests and preferences, categorising and comparing findings in charts or graphs
  • following the steps of a signed demonstration of procedures, such as how to cook something or play a new game
  • learning new Auslan vocabulary and language structures through interacting with Deaf visitors, teachers and mentors, recording the new language in personal sign dictionaries
  • viewing live or recorded interviews or informal conversations between deaf people in different situations and contexts, identifying key points and topics covered
  • viewing different types of signed texts, such as instructional sports videos or science demonstrations, showing understanding by responding to questions

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students use Auslan to share information, experiences, interests, thoughts and feelings in relation to their personal and immediate worlds. They describe the appearance of people, objects and places using SASS depicting signs and spatial location, for example, HAVE DS: round-oval DS: located HERE NEXT-TO HAVE BUILDING BIG. THERE . There’s an oval there and next to it is a big building. It’s there. They participate in shared learning activities and experiences that involve planning, transacting and problem-solving, using simple signed statements and asking for repetition and clarification when required. They follow protocols when interacting with each other, with interpreters or Deaf visitors to the classroom, for example, waiting for eye contact or pauses to walk in-between signers engaged in conversation without interrupting them. Students increasingly use conventional Auslan signs or classifier handshapes in depictions and rely less on their idiosyncratic systems. They modify some indicating verbs for non-present referents and use constructed action to represent others in recounts. They make explicit which referent is associated with location, for example, BROTHER THERE HAVE OWN IPAD . They recall and retell specific points of information from texts such as class messages, directions, procedures, introductions and ‘visual vernacular’ descriptions. They create textual cohesion through the use of connectives such as lexical signs NEXT or G:WELL, or non-manual features (NMFs) and pausing. They create bilingual texts such as notices or digital displays and resources for the classroom. They reflect on how their own ways of communicating may be interpreted when interacting with hearing people, and on how they adapt their ways of communicating and behaving when interacting with them. They reflect on the experience of communicating in a visual world and on the challenges and advantages experienced by deaf people in a hearing world. Students describe how constructed action (CA) can be shown in different ways, including eye gaze, head orientation change or body shift. They identify where and how a signer establishes location in space, and they distinguish between real and abstract space. They build metalanguage to talk about aspects of Auslan, for example, using terms such as SASS, NMFs, CA, depicting signs; and they make connections with terms they use in learning English, such as verb, adjective, noun. They know that different languages and cultures influence and borrow from each other and identify connections between Auslan and other signed languages, for example, BSL, ISL and ASL. They make comparisons between Auslan and signed languages in other countries. Students know that Auslan plays an important role in the expression and maintenance of Deaf culture and in assuring the rights of every deaf person.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Most hearing children, or deaf children from signing families, enter the early years of schooling with established communication in one or more languages. Cognitive and social development at this stage is exploratory and egocentric; thus learning typically focuses on students’ immediate world of family, home, school and friends. Children at this age are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Auslan is learnt in parallel with English literacy and, for some children, spoken English. Some learners arrive at school with little experience of English and will learn it as a second language, while others may use spoken English with their hearing family members. The learning of Auslan supports and enriches deaf children’s learning of English and vice versa. Auslan learning and use Rich language input characterises the first stages of learning. Most children are familiar with the forms of signs and their fluency and accuracy is further developed through activities such as play, games and viewing texts. The curriculum builds on children’s interests and sense of enjoyment and curiosity, with an emphasis on active, experiential learning and confidence building. Creative play provides opportunities for using the language for purposeful interaction in less familiar contexts. Children build vocabulary for thinking and talking about school topics, routines and processes, and expand their knowledge and understanding by interacting with other deaf children and adults in new contexts and by participating in more structured routines and activities. They use Auslan for different language functions, such as asking and responding to questions, expressing wishes, responding to and giving directions, greeting, thanking, apologising, agreeing and disagreeing, and taking turns in games and simple shared learning activities. Contexts of interaction Across Foundation to Year 2, learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, with some access to members of the Deaf community for additional enrichment and authentication of students’ language learning. Information and communication technology (ICT) resources provide additional access to Auslan and to the cultural experience of deafness. A key expectation in the L1 pathway is that students will have opportunities to interact with a variety of native or near-native signing models. Texts and resources Children engage with a variety of signed texts, live and recorded. They watch the teacher signing, share ideas and join in activities and stories and various forms of play and conversational exchanges. Text types include descriptions of appearances, relationships between people, and stories and recounts, as well as texts that talk about self, such as comparing likes and dislikes with others. Students become familiar with ways of recording Auslan, either through film, photos of signs, line drawings of signs, or simple symbols. An important source of natural signed texts are members of the deaf community. The early stage of language learning is also supported by extensive use of concrete materials and resources. Play and imaginative activities, games, and familiar routines provide essential scaffolding and context for language development. Features of Auslan use Children in Foundation to Year 2 learn to produce all handshapes, movements and locations of single signs. They make use of handling and size and shape specifiers (SASS) depicting signs with increasing accuracy, and use entity depicting signs to talk about simple movement and locations. Children in this band level produce a range of clause structures with the correct sign order and non-manual features (NMFs), such as questions, negatives and topic-comment structures, as well as using a range of non-manual adverbs. They learn to modify indicating verbs to show participants involved in events and can sometimes maintain those locations across multiple clauses. They are learning to integrate multiple viewpoints, such as that of narrator and of one or two characters, through constructed action and marking manner in longer signed texts. As children learn to adjust their language to suit different purposes and situations, they begin to understand how culture shapes language use. They compare how they feel when they use different languages and how they view different languages and people who use them. This introduction to the meta dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to ‘decentre’, to consider different perspectives and ways of being, and to become aware of themselves as communicators and cultural participants. Metalinguistically, children learn to describe features of signs, such as handshapes, to identify whether they are iconic; to recognise the importance of space in Auslan; and to categorise signs as nouns, verbs and adjectives. Level of support Learning is supported through the provision of experiences that are challenging but achievable with appropriate scaffolding and support. This involves modelling, monitoring and moderating by the teacher; provision of multiple and varied sources of input; opportunities for revisiting, recycling and reviewing; and continuous cueing, feedback, response and encouragement. Use of recounting, experiencing and retelling assists in establishing early language skills based on real-life experiences. The role of English Auslan is the language of all classroom interactions, routines and activities. It is the principal medium of instruction in L1 pathway classrooms. English may play a complementary role, such as when comparing signs and words and looking at fingerspelling. English is necessarily discussed in the translating strand.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify specific points of information in simple Auslan texts and use the information to complete guided tasks

[Key concepts: information, family, games, hobbies; Key processes: collecting information, identifying, retelling, categorising, recording]

(ACLASFC004)

  • retelling and responding to key points of information in class messages, directions or introductions
  • gathering information from their peers about topics such as family members, favourite foods, toys or games to report back to the class
  • identifying information in simple Auslan texts that relates to properties such as colour, number, size or shape and responding through activities such as manipulating concrete materials and objects
  • identifying and categorising signs in simple Auslan texts according to handshape
  • following a signed text that involves several steps to progressively collect information needed to complete a task, such as an obstacle course
  • watching short Auslan texts about topics such as hobbies, animals or sports, recording key points of information using tables or graphic organisers
  • watching a presentation by a teacher, peer or visitor and recalling and retelling specific points of information
  • recording new language in personal sign dictionaries acquired from simple Auslan texts in different curriculum areas, for example, when learning about the weather or countries of the world

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise the main formational elements of handshape, movement and location in Auslan signs, and understand that a sign is the same as a spoken or written word even though it can be iconic

[Key concepts: handshape, movement, location, iconicity; Key processes: noticing, recognising, understanding]

(ACLASFU012)

  • noticing the handshape of individual signs, and identifying signs that are made with a particular handshape, for example, COCKATOO (hs:5) and SOCCER (hs:fist)
  • recognising that signs are categorised by the handshape at the start of the sign
  • understanding that signs can be organised by handshape, for example in Johnston’s Auslan dictionaries or localised handshape dictionaries in schools, and that this is useful if an English word for a sign is not known
  • noticing the path movement of a particular sign and identifying signs associated with the major types of path movements, for example, THROUGH (forwards) or FULL (down to up)
  • noticing the five major locations of signs on the body or in space, and identifying signs associated with each, such as SEE (head/face), SAY (mouth/chin), WHY (chest), TALK (hand) and ONE (signing space)
  • understanding that sounds in English words are like handshapes, movements and locations in Auslan in the sense that they are combined together to make signs
  • recognising that some signs are iconic, linking to the appearance of a referent, for example, HOUSE, TREE, DRINK, ELEPHANT and that some are not, such as SISTER, WHY, SIMPLE
  • recognising that unlike English, which can be spoken or written, signed languages are not usually written down but occur ‘through the air’
  • experimenting with different methods of capturing the signed language, such as: a class-invented script, drawing pictures, videoing, English glosses or ASL-phabet

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise that groups of words combine to make clauses and include nouns and pronouns (people, places, things), adjectives (qualities) and verbs (happenings, states); and distinguish between statements and questions based on non-manual features

[Key concepts: sign class, clauses, telling versus showing; Key processes: recognising, observing, distinguishing]

(ACLASFU014)

  • categorising noun signs into those for people, animals, places or things
  • understanding that proper nouns can have a sign name or be fingerspelled
  • knowing that adjectives describe nouns in different ways, such as how they look (BIG or RED), feel (SOFT or HOT), smell (SMELLY) or sound (LOUD)
  • identifying verb signs (SIT, EAT, FEEL, WONDER, HAVE) and recognising that they are central to a clause
  • recognising that there is no verb ‘to be’ in Auslan
  • understanding that a clause is one or more signs expressing a single idea and that a clause has at least one verb, but often one or more nouns as well, for example,CALL-himI called him.MAN THERE GO-TO POSS3 HOUSEThat man went to his house.BIG MONSTER SCREAMA big monster screamed.
  • recognising different nouns in clauses, including those that are shown with a pointing sign, such as GIRL READ versus PRO3 READ, or VISIT FRIEND versus VISIT PRO3
  • noticing that Auslan has more flexibility in word order than English
  • distinguishing between clauses that are statements and those that are questions
  • knowing that signing involves either telling with signs or showing with DSs and periods of constructed action (CA)MAN WALK SLOWDS(point):man-walks-slowlyCA:man-swinging-arms-nonchalantly

Content description

Elaborations

Present information about self, family, people, places and things using signed descriptions and visual prompts

[Key concepts: self, family, routines, home, community; Key processes: providing information, describing, presenting, demonstrating, labelling, reporting]

(ACLASFC005)

  • describing an object, animal or person using lexical adjectives, for example colours, or SASS depicting signs relating to size and shape
  • contributing to a digital class presentation such as a video by signing a description of their own photo or piece of work
  • demonstrating a simple procedure using list buoys and related sign vocabulary to demonstrate the different steps
  • labelling objects in the classroom and in learning resources such as books and wall charts with pictures of signs
  • recounting to the class details of a personal experience such as a holiday or weekend event
  • reporting aspects of their daily routines or family life, such as how they travel to school or what they eat for lunch
  • categorising and displaying pictures of signs, for example on a handshape wall
  • presenting specific information such as a weather report using visual prompts or a digital presentation
  • sharing information about their family, home or local community with their classmates, for example, through signed commentary to a display or digital presentation
  • reporting key elements obtained from predominantly visual infographics or diagrams related to different learning areas, for example, life cycle charts
  • providing information needed to complete an information-gap activity, for example, ‘20 Questions’ with yes/no answers, or ‘Guess Who?’

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with the teaching team, class visitors and each other to share information about themselves, their families, friends, routines, pastimes and experiences. They use fingerspelling or sign names as appropriate and lexical adjectives or size and shape specifiers (SASS) depicting signs (DS) to describe the appearance and characteristics of family members, friends or teachers, for example, POSS1 BROTHER OLD++ TALL SKINNY or POSS3 SISTER FRECKLES . Students recount shared and personal experiences and favourite activities, using plain or indicating verbs that are modified, such as PRO1 GO-TO- right , PLAY- continuous, RETURN- left, or LAST-WEEK PRO1- plural VISIT NANNA . They sequence events correctly using time markers such as YESTERDAY, LAST-YEAR, TWO-DAYS-AGO . They use everyday social exchanges such as greeting, thanking and apologising, and express feelings through the use of NMFs and lexical signs. They compare likes, dislikes and preferences, for example, PRO1 LIKE APPLE DON’T-LIKE ORANGE . They use appropriate NMFs to ask and respond to a range of wh - questions and yes/no questions. They indicate agreement/disagreement or understanding/lack of understanding by using other NMFs. They follow directions for class routines, for example, PLEASE DS:line-up-facing-front , and give and follow instructions of two or more steps, using directional terms or DSs such as DS:turn-left T-JUNCTION DS:turn-right . Students follow culturally appropriate protocols, such as responding to and using attention-gaining strategies such as flashing lights, waving or tapping a shoulder or table, using voice-off while signing, and observing appropriate distance between signers. They recall and retell specific points of information from texts such as class messages, directions, introductions and ‘visual vernacular’ descriptions, and they recognise familiar fingerspelled words. They follow procedural texts involving several steps and retell them using list buoys. They view short Auslan stories and respond by identifying and comparing favourite elements, characters and events. They use features of constructed action (CA) such as shifting eye gaze, or head or body–head orientation when creating imagined texts, and use NMFs to modify manner or intensify adjectives, such as REMEMBER PRO1 JUMP- really - far - and - high . They identify themselves as members of different groups and describe their relationships with deaf, hard of hearing and hearing children, family members, and the community. They identify similarities and differences between how people interact and share stories in Auslan and in spoken languages. Students know that Auslan is a language in its own right, different from mime and gestures used in spoken languages. They know that eye contact is necessary for effective communication and that meaning is communicated visually through the use of signs, fingerspelling, NMFs and non-conventional gestures. They recognise and describe the main elements of Auslan signs: handshape, movement and location; and identify and categorise signs according to these. They recognise that some signs link to visual images, for example DRINK, ELEPHANT . Students know that some words, such as proper nouns, are borrowed from English by fingerspelling and mouthing, and that locations or orientations of signs can be modified meaningfully, for example to show who is involved in an event. They recognise that signers can tell with lexical signs or show with DSs and CA, and that clauses include a verb and sometimes nouns. They recognise the importance of facial expression, eye gaze and NMFs in a visual-gestural language and culture.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

The nature of the learners Learners at this level are developing their cognitive and social capabilities and their communicative repertoire in the language, as well as becoming increasingly aware of their social worlds and their membership of various groups, including the Deaf community. They are more independent and less egocentric, enjoying both competitive and cooperative activities. Learners are able to conceptualise and reason, and have better memory and focus. They benefit from varied, activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other areas of learning. Auslan learning and use Learners in this band engage in a range of activities involving watching and responding to signed texts. They build proficiency through the provision of rich language input from a variety of sources where grammatical forms and language features are purposefully integrated. They develop more elaborate conversational and interactional skills, including initiating and sustaining conversations, reflecting on and responding to others’ contributions, making appropriate responses and adjustments, and engaging in debate and discussion. Learners at this stage express ideas and feelings related to their personal worlds, give and follow directions, negotiate with and persuade others, paraphrase content of texts, form factual questions to request information, check and clarify understanding and participate in play and shared tasks, including planning and rehearsing presentations or performances. They watch and create short texts on topics relevant to their interests and enjoyment, such as family, pets, favourite activities or food. They continue to build vocabulary that relates to a wider range of domains, such as areas of the curriculum that involve some specialised language use. The language used in routine activities is re-used and reinforced from lesson to lesson in different situations, making connections between what has been learnt and what is to be learnt. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team in the language classroom and the school environment, with some sharing of their learning at home. Additional enrichment and authentication of learning experience is provided through interactions with elders and other signers in the Deaf community. Access to wider communities of Auslan signers and resources also occurs through virtual and digital technology. Texts and resources Learners interact with a growing range of live and digital signed texts. They engage primarily with a variety of teacher-generated materials, stories and games, and with materials produced for young signers, such as storytelling apps. They have access to materials produced for signing children from the BANZSL family of languages as a means of broadening their cultural knowledge and awareness of the diversity of language experience. Features of Auslan use Learners recognise and apply elements of Auslan grammar, such as marking manner or aspect on verbs. They use increasingly sophisticated means of showing constructed action, and of using space to track a character or location through a text for purposes of cohesion. They develop metalanguage for talking about language, understanding and using terms such as fully- or partly-lexical signs, entity, handling or SASS depicting signs, constructed action, and adverbs and clauses. Learners talk about differences and similarities they notice between Auslan and English, and also between cultural behaviours and ways of communicating. A balance between language knowledge and language use is established by integrating focused attention to grammar, vocabulary building, and non-verbal and cultural dimensions of language use with communicative and purposeful learning activity. Learning Auslan in school contributes to the process of making sense of the learners’ worlds, which characterises this stage of development. Students are increasingly aware that various signed languages are used in Deaf communities across the world. As they engage consciously with differences between languages and cultures, they make comparisons and consider differences and possibilities in ways of communicating in different languages. This leads them to explore concepts of identity and difference, to think about cultural and linguistic diversity, and about what it means to speak more than one language in the contemporary world. Level of support While learners work more independently at this level, ongoing support is incorporated into tasks, and the process of learning is supported by systematic feedback and review. Form-focused activities, particularly those increasing metalinguistic awareness, build grammatical knowledge and support the development of accuracy and control in Auslan. Opportunities to use this knowledge in meaningful activities build communicative skills, confidence and fluency. Tasks are carefully scaffolded: teachers provide models and examples; introduce language, concepts and resources needed to manage and complete learning activities; make time for experimentation and polishing rehearsed texts; and provide support for self-monitoring and reflection. The language students see is authentic with some modification. Discussion supports learning and develops learners’ conceptual frame for talking about systems of language and culture. The role of English Auslan is the principal medium of instruction in L1 pathway classrooms. English plays a complementary role; for example, it is used when translating, creating bilingual/multilingual texts or comparing and contrasting languages. Discussion in Auslan supports learning, develops conceptual frames and builds metalanguage. The process of moving between languages consolidates the already established sense of what it means to be bilingual or multilingual and provides opportunities for reflection on the experience of living interculturally in intersecting language communities. Auslan is learnt in parallel with English literacy and, for some children, spoken English. The learning of Auslan supports and enriches deaf children’s learning of English, and vice versa.

Content description

Elaborations

bilingual versions of different types of texts, such as captioned recordings of Auslan phrases or classroom resources such as posters and digital displays

[Key concepts: bilingualism, meaning; Key processes: creating, identifying, categorising]

(ACLASFC027)

  • creating captions in English for basic recorded signed texts, for example, a ‘welcome to the school’ video
  • creating bilingual texts for the classroom or school community, such as posters including signed images or digital library displays, and discussing how to represent meaning in different languages for different audiences
  • creating cards for use by younger children that contain pictures, labels and signs, for example, cards relating to different forms of transport
  • making their own bilingual picture dictionaries with English labels, images and simple descriptions of signs, identifying and categorising signs according to handshape

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students communicate with each other, the teaching team and others about aspects of their personal worlds, daily routines, preferences and pastimes at school and in the Deaf community. They show aspectual marking on verbs to indicate frequency when communicating about daily routines, for example pro3 tap-shoulder-repeatedly, and use modifications to show manner when describing actions and activities. They initiate and maintain interaction by using discourse markers such as fillers, checking and clarifying their understanding. They contribute to class activities and shared learning tasks that involve transacting, planning and problem-solving, for example, by giving and following directions, LIBRARY IN DS: turn-right AUSLAN DICTIONARY DS: fat-book SHELF++ THAT. PLEASE BRING-me, expressing preferences, asking for clarification and using persuasive language PLEASE POPCORN GIVE-me++ BEG? They use appropriate cultural protocols in different situations, for example, to gain the attention of a group, such as flashing lights, waving, multiple tapping or foot stomping in some contexts, waiting for eye contact or pauses in signing and walking between signers without interrupting them. They paraphrase information from a variety of Auslan texts and sources used in school and in the Deaf community. They recall specific points of information and recount main points in correct sequence EVERY MONDAY POSS1 CLASS LIST-BUOY-1 READING LIST-BUOY-2 MATHS LIST-BUOY-3 SWIMMING . They plan, rehearse and deliver short presentations about topics such as cultural activities or events in the Deaf community, with the support of materials such as photos, props, timelines or maps. They take into account the purpose and intended audience of a text. They view imaginative texts such as stories, poems and theatre performances, identifying how signers represent their own or others’ actions through constructed action (CA). They create simple imaginative texts of their own, using CA to represent their own or other people’s actions, thoughts, feelings or attitudes. They create signed class translations, for example, of repeated lines in familiar children’s stories, and simple bilingual texts for the classroom or school community, such as posters or bilingual picture dictionaries. Students identify places that are important to the Deaf community and describe how such places evoke a sense of belonging and pride. They recognise that the single most unifying factor of the community is the use of Auslan; and they describe ways in which Auslan and associated communicative and cultural behaviours are similar to or different from wider community spoken languages and forms of cultural expression. Students demonstrate how the formational elements of handshapes and their orientation, movement, location and non-manual features can be arranged in signs, identifying, for example, whether a sign is body anchored or not, or is single, double or two-handed. They know the functions of different pointing signs, such as pronouns, determiners or locatives; and can identify examples of signers using a location to refer to a previous referent. They use metalanguage to talk about Auslan, using terms such as constructed action, depicting signs, indicating verbs, non-manual features, pointing signs and clauses . They recognise variation in how Auslan is used, for example by recognising regional dialects and differences in signing space. They identify different ways that Deaf community members communicate with each other and with members of the wider hearing community, for example, face to face, via technology, social media and interpreters. They know that culture is closely related to language and to identity and that it involves visible and invisible elements.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 5 and 6  

Years 5 and 6 Description

The nature of the learners This is a key transitional phase of learning. Learners communicate more confidently, are more self-directed, and self-reference in relation to wider contexts. Response to experience is more analytical and critical, allowing for a reflective dimension to language learning and to referencing cultural frameworks. The curriculum ensures that learning experiences and activities are flexible enough to cater for learner variables, while being appropriate for learners' general cognitive and social levels. Auslan learning and use At upper primary level, learners use Auslan for a widening range of purposes, such as paraphrasing or summarising key ideas; conversing with visitors in formal and informal contexts, contributing their own ideas, questions and opinions; discussing cause and effect; providing instructions for a group activity; planning and conducting an interview; and contributing to discussions by clarifying and critiquing ideas and developing supporting arguments. At this level, there is focused attention on language structures and systems, and comparisons are made between Auslan and English. Learners’ communicative capabilities are stronger and more elaborate. They draw on a wider range of grammatical and lexical resources to compose and comprehend more complex language. With support, they build increasing cohesion and complexity into their signing in both content and expression. They watch a range of varied input from different sources and build more elaborate conversational and interactional skills. This includes initiating and sustaining conversations, using turn-taking protocols, ‘reading’ language for cultural and contextual meaning, reflecting on and responding to others’ contributions, making appropriate responses and adjustments, and engaging in debate and discussion. Shared learning activities develop social, cognitive and language skills and provide a context for purposeful language experience and experimentation. Individual and group oral presentation and performance skills are developed through researching and organising information, structuring and resourcing presentation of content, and selecting appropriate language to engage a particular audience. Learners use ICT to support their learning in increasingly independent and intentional ways, exchanging resources and information with each other and with young people of the same age in other signing communities, accessing media resources, maintaining vlogs and other web pages, and participating in social networks. Contexts of interaction Learners interact in Auslan with each other and the teaching team and with members of their families who can sign, and the Deaf community. They have access to Deaf visitors and cultural resources in wider contexts and communities through the use of ICT and through the media. Language development and use are incorporated into collaborative and interactive learning experiences, games and activities. Texts and resources Learners engage with a growing range of signers and digital signed texts. They also engage with resources prepared by their teacher, including games, performances, presentations and language exercises. They may have additional access to BANZSL resources created for the Australian, New Zealand or British Deaf communities, such as children’s television programs, websites, music or video clips. They also make use of texts from other signed languages that make extensive use of the ‘visual vernacular’. Features of Auslan use Learners draw on grammatical and lexical resources to produce and understand more complex language. With support, they build increasing cohesion and complexity into their language production in both content and expression. Learners expand their understanding of Auslan grammatical forms and features, including mastering the range of grammatical NMFs and gaining full control of depicting signs. They increase their pragmatic skills, such as using eye gaze to gain, hold or finish a turn; making constructive comments to keep a conversation flowing; and sharing information and providing context to new participants to a conversation. They build metalanguage to talk about aspects of language such as grammar, for example, identifying types of verbs in Auslan in terms of how they use space to indicate referents, as well as recognising the types of depiction available in Auslan. They begin learning how signers put these forms of depiction and enacting together into composite utterances. Discussion, reflection and explanation ensure the continued development of learners’ knowledge base and metalinguistic and intercultural capabilities. Understanding of the relationship between language, culture and identity is developed through guided investigation of how language features and expressions carry specific cultural meaning; through critical analysis of cultural stereotypes, attitudes and perspectives; and through exploration of issues related to personal and community identities. Learners take account of the variability of language use and practice in relation to various factors. They reference themselves in relation to similar variables, reflecting on the relationship between language, culture, identity and intercultural experience through the lens of their own bicultural experiences. Level of support While learners are becoming more autonomous and independent at the upper primary years, ongoing support is still incorporated into task activity, including explicit instruction, structured modelling and scaffolding, and provision of appropriate stimulus materials. Additional systematic feedback and review support the interactive process of learning. Learning experiences incorporate implicit and explicit form-focused language learning activities and examples of texts and tasks. Learners are supported to use electronic and print reference resources, such as word banks, dictionaries and translating tools, and are encouraged to adopt a critical approach to resource selection. The role of English Auslan is the primary language for classroom routines, discussions, reflections, interactions and language learning tasks, and for explanation of content drawn from other learning areas. English is used for metalinguistic analyses and comparisons, and within the ‘Translation’ sub-strand. English may also be used for researching cultural issues where relevant sources or materials are not available in Auslan.

Content description

Elaborations

Collaborate with peers to plan and conduct shared events or activities such as performances, presentations, demonstrations or transactions

[Key concepts: negotiation, perspective, design; Key processes: planning, suggesting, organising, presenting]

(ACLASFC038)

  • working in teams to plan an event such as a performance for a younger audience or a presentation for school assembly
  • negotiating roles, responsibilities and priorities in activities such as cooking or science experiments, making suggestions such as:PRO2 THINK BEST THIS FIRST, FINISH, NEXT THATDo you think we should do this first and when that’s done, that next
  • and using conditional language such as:IF FINISH, CAN NEXT++, IF NOT-YET HEADSHAKEIf we finish this we can go on to the others; if we don’t, we can’t.
  • organising activities such as excursions, using questions such as:WE2 MEET WHERE?Where are we meeting?TIME MEET?What time should we get there?ARRIVE HOW?How are we getting there?
  • using digital technologies to prepare a humorous, dynamic perspective on a controversial proposition, such as ‘Homework should be banned’ to present to teachers or parents
  • playing games that involve working competitively within groups to categorise or classify information
  • problem-solving in teamwork activities, using language such as:HOW FIX SOLVE?How can we solve this?WHAT DO?What can we do next?
  • planning, rehearsing and producing a performance for school assembly or parent open night
  • working in a group to plan a visual story to present to a younger group at school or via video
  • planning and conducting an interview with a deaf visitor to class, using questions to elicit extra information
  • working on collaborative tasks that involve negotiation and shared decision-making about content and design, for example, designing a class garden, creating digital picture books for ‘buddy’ classes, or promoting a school event
  • conducting, recording and presenting observations and findings of collaborative science experiments

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 5 and 6 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 6, students use Auslan to interact with people for a range of different purposes. They use descriptive and expressive language to share and compare experiences, ideas and opinions, such as THEATRE GOOD, LONG - really , LONG- really . They participate in class discussions and show interest and respect for others, for example by using active watching behaviours, signing clearly, pausing for others to respond, asking pertinent questions, making constructive comments, rephrasing, repeating and linking their own contributions. Students use non-manual features (NMFs) such as eye gaze to gain, hold or finish a turn when communicating in pairs or groups. They provide context for a new participant joining a conversation, PRO1 TALK-OVER MATH TEACHER . They use action-oriented language to make shared arrangements, organise events and complete transactions, negotiating roles, responsibilities and priorities and taking into account the views of others. Students locate, summarise and compare information from a range of sources. They present information on selected issues to inform, alert or persuade people, for example, by creating announcements to inform about an emergency or about a clean-up the environment appeal, or instructions for a computer game. They use a range of connectives to create textual cohesion. They view and compare expressions of Deaf experience through different visual art forms, such as painting, photography or sculpture. They view and respond to different types of creative and imaginative texts, discussing ideas, characters and themes; and they identify how a signer has referred to the same referent in different ways, for example with a lexical noun then with a depicting sign (DS). They create and perform their own short imaginative texts based on a stimulus, concept or theme using space to track a character or location throughout a text. They translate a variety of familiar school and community texts from Auslan to English and vice versa, identifying which words/signs/phrases require interpretation or explanation. They create bilingual texts and resources for their own language learning and to support interactions with non-signing people. They describe their connections with the Deaf community and how these contribute to their sense of identity. They reflect on differences between how signed language and spoken language users may be perceived, for example in relation to different protocols when joining interactions, taking turns, using names, or passing between people who are communicating with each other. Students describe a sign’s form in terms of all the elements and how they are put together, including types of NMFs. They recognise when a signer has established a location in space in a text and describe how this was done, for example through the use of points, non-body-anchored signs or fingerspelled words. They distinguish between the three types of DSs and what they represent and how they are used in clauses. They identify and describe how constructed action (CA) can be shown in different ways, for example, through a change in eye gaze, body, or head orientation, and by matching facial expressions and reference to another character. They identify how signers use space to track a referent through a text, for example by pointing back to an established location to refer to a noun or by modifying indicating verbs. They understand different ways that English words are borrowed into Auslan and identify connections between Auslan and other signed languages, for example, BSL, ISL and ASL. They recognise the diversity of Auslan users in the community, including people who are deaf, hard of hearing and hearing people such as CODAs or interpreters. Students recognise how Auslan has been transmitted across generations and describe different ways it has been documented and recorded. Students reflect on the ways culture is differently interpreted by others, for example by identifying how stereotypes about deaf and hearing people influence perceptions.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners The transition to secondary schooling involves social and academic demands that coincide with a period of maturational and physical change. Learners are adjusting to a new school culture with sharper divisions between curriculum areas. There is a need for continuity through change in relation to their language learning. Learners at this level may find themselves in classes that include learners with a range of previous experience with Auslan. A multilevel and differentiated approach to teaching and task design responds to this diversity of prior experience. For bilingual learners at this level, such as deaf students who also use spoken English, the duality of living between languages and cultural frames impacts on the process of identity construction. Learners at this level bring a range of learning strategies to their language learning. They are increasingly aware of the world beyond their own and are engaging with broader issues related to youth and society, land and environment, education and identity, while establishing a balance between increasing personal independence and social responsibilities. They are considering their future pathways and choices, including how their own language could be part of these. Auslan learning and use Auslan is used for classroom interactions and transactions, for creating and maintaining classroom relationships, for explaining and practising language forms, and for developing cultural understanding. Learners use a range of grammatical structures and language features to convey more complex ideas and experiences. They use descriptive and expressive language to create particular effects and to engage interest, and expand their vocabulary to domains beyond their personal experience and interests. They use language to dramatise narratives, follow detailed directions, demonstrate and explain activities, evaluate events and ideas, debate and give presentations that take account of different perspectives. They are increasingly aware of the nature of the relationship between languages and cultures, making connections between texts and cultural contexts, identifying how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in language and noticing how language choices influence how people, issues and circumstances are represented. Additional opportunities for interaction in Auslan are provided by purposeful and integrated use of ICT. Learners work collaboratively and independently, exploring different modes and genres of communication with particular reference to their current social, cultural and communicative interests. They pool language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They create and present more complex and varied texts, for example, shared stories, poems, vlogs and reports; and plan, draft and present imaginative and informative texts, making cross-curricular connections. They use vocabulary and grammar with increasing accuracy and complexity, planning and polishing pre-prepared signed texts to improve structure and clarify meaning. Contexts of interaction While the primary context of interaction remains the Auslan classroom through interaction with peers and the teaching team, additional enrichment and authentication of the learning experience is provided through visiting members of the Deaf community, media and community events, and social media. Students may also have opportunities to participate in school excursions or camps. Texts and resources Learners work with a broad range of live and digital signed texts designed for learning Auslan in school and for authentic non-school purposes. Texts come from a range of domains and genres, such as oral histories, community announcements, vlogs and stories, and they serve a variety of purposes, such as informative, transactional, communicative, imaginative and expressive. Learners may also have access to community facilities and functions. The Deaf community is the most important resource for learning, as the origin of most of the texts and communicative situations engaged with by learners. Features of Auslan use Learners continue to expand their language use to additional domains beyond their personal experience and interests. They use a range of grammatical forms and language structures to convey more complex relationships between ideas and experiences, creating compound and complex sentences by using lexical conjunctions as well as NMFs. They become increasingly aware of the rich choices available to a signer in composite utterances, for example by shifting from depicting signs to constructed action to lexical items. They recognise that signers shift perspectives between character or observer space to show different viewpoints. Learners develop awareness of how language structures shape textual features. They use descriptive and expressive language, including iconicity and metaphor, to create particular effects and engage interest. They adopt a wider range of processing strategies and broader language knowledge when encountering unfamiliar signed texts, drawing increasingly on their understanding of text conventions and patterns. Learners make connections between texts and cultural contexts, identifying how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in language and how language choices determine how people, issues and circumstances are represented. They are increasingly aware of the nature of the relationship between languages and cultures, noticing, for example, how values such as family commitment and respect are expressed in cultural practices as well as embedded in Auslan grammatical and vocabulary systems. They reflect on the nature of bicultural and intercultural experience, on how languages change in response to social and cultural change, and on their individual identities as users of two or more languages in a multicultural social context. Level of support Particular support is required at this stage of learning to manage the transition to secondary schooling and to encourage continued engagement with language learning. Opportunities to review and consolidate prior learning are balanced against provision of engaging and relevant new experiences and tasks that are more challenging. While learners at this level are less reliant on teacher support during interactions, the teacher continues to provide implicit and explicit modelling and scaffolding in relation to meaningful language use in a range of contexts, and explicit instruction and explanation in relation to language structures, grammatical functions, vocabulary and abstract cultural concepts. Opportunities for learners to discuss, clarify, rehearse and apply their knowledge are critical in consolidating language capabilities and developing autonomy. Learners at this level are encouraged to self-monitor, for example, by keeping records of feedback and through peer support, and to self-review and adjust language in response to their experiences in different contexts. Students are encouraged to engage more critically with resources such as websites, dictionaries, translating tools and other language resources designed to enrich their receptive and productive language capabilities. The role of English Auslan is used for all classroom interaction, and English is used in the translating sub-strand or when required for research purposes where a source text is not available in Auslan. Students may have varying skills in English. Using Auslan to express ideas and feelings, exchange opinions and manage shared activities increasingly involves cultural as well as linguistic choices; personal and social elements as well as grammatical ones, such as making decisions about whether to use more or less English-like signing. At this stage, learners can move from the ‘what’ considerations to the ‘why’ and ‘how’ questions: from noticing that language and communication are culturally shaped to thinking about the values, experiences and perspectives which lie inside these cultural differences, and about how these impact on their own experience as they move between linguistic and cultural systems.

Content description

Elaborations

Distinguish between character and observer space, categorise different verb types and identifyin a text

[Key concepts: fully- or partly-lexical signs, character and observer space, depicting signs; Key processes: recognising, distinguishing, classifying, observing]

(ACLASFU067)

  • noticing that meaning is created in Auslan from fully-lexical signs, partly-lexical signs and non-lexical CA and gesture
  • recognising that signers can set up referents in the signing space as if they are part of that space (character space, for example, using a bC handshape (use of non-dominant hand) to indicate putting a glass on a table) or as if they are outside it (observer, for example, using 5claw in two locations to represent two houses)
  • recognising that in character space, signers can use locations for present referents, non-present referents, or abstract referents that do not exist in space
  • recognising that signers can give information about how a verb happens over time by changing the movement, for example, signing WATCH versus WATCH -for-a-long-time, or with lexical signs such as WATCH AGAIN++
  • recognising that nouns can be pluralised by locating them repeatedly regardless of their original location
  • categorising the type of depicting sign being used by a signer
  • distinguishing between directional and locational indicating verbs
  • observing examples of CA in an Auslan text and discussing how it was marked

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students interact to share ideas and interests and to offer opinions, using compound and complex sentences, for example by using lexical conjunctions as well as non-manual features (NMFs). They participate in discussions and debates, acknowledging others’ opinions and developing and supporting arguments. They collaborate in activities that involve planning, project design and problem-solving, for example, G:WELL RIGHT-YEAH , BUT I WANT ADD COMMENT . They use evaluative language to reflect on learning activities and to provide feedback to others. They follow protocols for interacting with sign language interpreters in various contexts. Students locate, collate, summarise and analyse ideas and information from a variety of sources, such as interviews, documentaries or speeches, and they use such information in new forms. They use primary or secondary signed sources in their research, for example, when exploring significant events in Deaf history. They use specialised language to create texts such as vlogs, advertisements or research-based factual reports designed to convince or persuade others. They analyse elements of different imaginative texts such as poetry, performances, signed stories, skits and sketches, and explain how sign choice, NMFs and the use of different stylistic techniques combine to convey ideas and emotions. They create imaginative and expressive texts that draw from their experience as Auslan users and members of the Deaf community, including metaphorical iconicity to create particular effects and to engage interest. Students translate and interpret unfamiliar texts in Auslan or English and compare their own translations to those of their classmates, considering why there might be differences between them. They create bilingual texts to use in the wider school community. They describe how the concept and the experience of Deafhood and visual ways of being apply to themselves and others. They reflect on how their own ways of communicating may be interpreted when interacting with hearing people, and on their use of different communication strategies and behaviours, such as their use of gesture, facial expression and body language. Students know that signs can be iconic in a number of ways, and identify iconic signs that represent a whole object or part of an object. They distinguish between character and observer space, classify verb types according to how they use space, and identify constructed action in a text. They explain the form and function of a range of clause types, including what NMFs are used, for example, questions, topicalisation, negation or conditionals. They identify all the ways a signer refers to the same referent throughout a text to create cohesion. They recognise that Auslan is constantly evolving and changing, for example, by identifying changes to Auslan that reflect changes in social relationships, community attitudes and changing technology. Students reflect on how all ways of language use are influenced by communities’ world views and identities, for example by comparing the cultural concept of Deaf identity with the medical model of deafness.

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

The nature of the learners This stage of learning coincides with social, physical and cognitive changes associated with adolescence. Increased cognitive maturity enables learners to work more deductively with language and culture systems, to apply more intentional learning strategies and to reflect productively on their learning. Motivation and engagement with language learning and use are influenced by peer-group dynamics, personal interests and values, and issues related to self-concept. This is particularly the case for bilingual learners, especially for deaf students who also use spoken English, for whom the duality of living between languages and cultural frames impacts continually on the process of identity construction. The role of language is central to this process and is reflected in the degree to which learners define themselves as members of language communities, how they position themselves in relation to peer groups, and choices they make in relation to linguistic and social practices. These processes are fluid and context-responsive and impact on learners’ engagement with both Auslan and English language learning. Learners at this level are increasingly aware of the world beyond their own and are engaging with youth, social and environmental issues. They are considering their future pathways and choices, including how Auslan could be part of these. Auslan learning and use This is a period of language exploration. Task characteristics and conditions at this level are more complex and challenging, involving collaborative as well as independent language planning and performance, and the development and strategic use of language and cultural resources. Elements of tasks involve interpreting, creating, evaluating and performing. Working with media resources, fictional and non-fictional texts, performances and research projects allows for the exploration of themes of personal and contemporary relevance, such as global and environmental issues, identity and relationship issues, questions of diversity and inclusivity. Learners use Auslan to debate, clarify and interrogate ideas and concepts; to appraise and summarise opinions and to engage in elaborated discussions, developing and supporting arguments and sharing and evaluating opinions. They communicate in a wide range of contexts, such as a whole-school forum, present sustained signed explanations of abstract topics, and participate in imaginative and creative experiences. Contexts of interaction Learners interact with peers, teachers and other Auslan signers in immediate and local contexts, and with wider Deaf communities as well as cultural resources via virtual and online environments. They may participate in community events such as film or cultural festivals or intercultural forums. Texts and resources Learners use an extensive range of texts and materials designed for in-class learning of Auslan, as well as authentic texts produced in broader contexts. They are encouraged to source extra materials to support their learning and to pursue personal interests and explore various aspects of Auslan or Deafhood. Features of Auslan use Learners extend their grammatical knowledge to a range of forms and functions that give them control of more complex elements of text construction and sign formation. They have a greater degree of self-correction and repair. This greater control of language structures and systems increases confidence and interest in communicating in a wider range of contexts. Learners design, interpret and analyse a wider range of texts and experiences. Textual knowledge and capability are strengthened through maintaining a balance between activities that focus on language forms and structures and communicative tasks and performance. Learners experiment with ways to refine a text, for example to strengthen it for entertainment, information or persuasion purposes. They understand that reordering clauses or parts of clauses can create subtle meaning differences. They use depicting signs to innovate where there are lexical gaps, and make richer use of the ‘visual vernacular’, producing complex narratives that combine and switch between methods of depiction (CA, DSs and lexical signs) and frames of spatial reference (character or observer). They demonstrate understanding of language variation and change, and of how intercultural experience, technology, media and globalisation influence language use and forms of communication. They investigate texts through more critical analysis, identifying how language choices reflect perspectives and shape meaning, and how they in turn are shaped by context and intention. Learners at this level understand the relationship between language, culture and identity. They explore in more depth and detail the processes involved in learning and using different languages, recognising them as cognitive, cultural and personal as well as linguistic resources. They identify how meaning-making and representation in different languages involve interpretation and personal response as well as literal translation and factual reporting. They explore the reciprocal nature of intercultural communication: how moving between different languages and cultural systems impacts on their ways of thinking and behaving; and how successful communication requires flexibility, awareness and openness to alternative ways. They develop a capacity to ‘decentre’ from normative ways of thinking and communicating, to consider their own cultural ways through the eyes of others, and to communicate in interculturally appropriate ways. Level of support While learners at this level are increasingly less reliant on the teaching team for support during communicative interactions, continued provision of rich language input and modelled language is needed to consolidate and sustain language development. The teaching team provides implicit and explicit modelling and scaffolding in relation to meaningful language use in a range of contexts, situations and learning experiences; and explicit instruction and explanation in relation to complex structures, grammatical functions and abstract concepts and vocabulary. Provision of opportunities to discuss, clarify, rehearse and apply their knowledge is critical in consolidating knowledge and skills and in developing autonomy. Learners are encouraged to self-monitor, for example by keeping records of feedback, through peer support and self-review or by creating and maintaining a video journal or folio which they use to reflect on their language learning and intercultural experiences. They are increasingly aware of and responsible for their own learning, working independently to address their needs, for example by accessing technologies and additional learning resources, such as Signbank, to assist their learning. They use graphic organisers, modelled texts, dictionaries and teacher feedback to interpret and create texts. The role of English Learners and the teaching team use Auslan as the primary medium of interaction in language-oriented and most content-oriented learning experiences. English is used for comparative analysis and for research when a source text in Auslan cannot be found. Learners are encouraged to reflect on the different roles English and Auslan play in their academic work and in their conceptual development.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand the perceptual andreasons for the structure of signs, and analyse howcan be used tometaphors in Auslan and critically evaluate videosoftware as a means of transcribing and analysing Auslan

[Key concepts: iconicity, metaphor, transcription; Key processes: analysing, applying, categorising, demonstrating, describing, evaluating]

(ACLASFU084)

  • understanding that the elements of a sign can be arbitrary (for example, the handshape or movement of the sign WHY), or meaningful, such as the movement and the handshape in the sign GIVE
  • exploring perceptual and articulatory reasons why some handshapes are more common than others
  • beginning to identify and describe metaphorical iconicity, for example, LOVE, AVOID/RESIST, and discussing how it relates to metaphors in English, for example the ‘time as space’ metaphor in both languages
  • applying knowledge of iconicity in signed languages, for example how the path movement of a verb can be a metaphor for the timing of an action, for example, PRO1 WAIT-for-a-long-time PRO2, observing that English can do the same with changes to the length of phonemes, for example, I screeeeeeaaaaaamed!
  • using annotation software such as ELAN as a tool to transcribe and analyse signed languages

Auslan - First Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students exchange information, ideas and opinions on a broad range of social, environmental, educational and community issues. They summarise and justify points of view and use reflective language to respond to others’ opinions and perspectives, for example, RIGHT-YEAH, PRO2 DIFFERENT PERSPECTIVE NEVER THOUGHT . They initiate, sustain, support and extend discussion, using strategies such as paraphrasing, inviting opinions and elaborating responses, for example PRO2 CONFUSE PRO1 WIND-BACK . They select appropriate vocabulary and use supporting evidence when clarifying and justifying statements. They use respectful language to negotiate, problem-solve and to manage different perspectives when engaging in collaborative tasks, for example, PRO1 FEEL PRO2 RIGHT TALK OVER…. BECAUSE…. Students research, analyse and evaluate information from a range of sources and perspectives, and create sustained signed texts designed to entertain, inform, persuade or inspire different audiences. They use non-manual prosodic features to create emphasis or other effects. Students analyse different types of creative and performative texts, considering how specific techniques and modalities are used to different effect, for example, using repetition of handshapes and movement paths of signs to create rhyme, or the use of visual metaphors to convey meaning. They compare responses to texts that present particular values or points of view, for example, Deaf poetry. They create their own imaginative texts such as narratives or poems, combining and switching between types of language, for example, telling with lexical signs or showing with constructed action (CA) or depicting signs (DSs) and frames of spatial reference to indicate character or observer point of view. Students translate and interpret a range of signed texts, comparing their translations and explaining factors that may have influenced their interpretation. They identify the relationship that exists between language, culture and identity and explore how individual and community identity are conveyed through cultural expression and language use. They reflect on the experience of communicating in a visual world and on associated challenges and advantages experienced as deaf people in a hearing world. Students identify and describe metaphorical iconicity, for example, love, avoid/resist, and compare this with the use of metaphors in English. They distinguish character or observer frame of reference in a text; between main and subordinate clauses; and demonstrate how the inclusion of CA and DSs impacts on clause structure. They analyse different types of text, such as expository texts, identifying characteristic language elements and features. They investigate variation in the use of Auslan, explaining influences such as geographical location, social groupings and history, educational experience, the age of learners, family background and degree of contact with Signed English or other languages. They make comparisons between the ecologies of Auslan and those of signed languages in other countries, taking into account issues such as language policies and language rights, advocacy, reform and language vitality. They identify factors that help to maintain and strengthen Auslan use, such as intergenerational contact and bilingual school programs. Students know that Auslan plays an important role in the expression and maintenance of Deaf culture and in assuring the rights of deaf people.

Auslan - Second Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Learners are beginning their study of Auslan and typically have had little prior exposure to the language or to the Deaf community. Many will have learnt an additional language in primary school, and some have proficiency in different home languages, and consequently bring existing language learning strategies and intercultural awareness to the new experience of learning Auslan. Skills in analysing, comparing and reflecting on language and culture in both English and Auslan are mutually supportive. The transition to secondary schooling involves social and academic demands that coincide with a period of maturational and physical change. Learners are adjusting to a new school culture with sharper divisions between curriculum areas. They may need encouragement to take risks in learning a new language at this stage of social development; and to consider how the experience impacts on the sense of ‘norms’ associated with their first language and culture. Auslan learning and use Learners are encouraged to watch and sign Auslan in a range of interactions with the teacher and with each other. They use the language for interactions and transactions, for practising language forms, for developing cultural knowledge and for intercultural exchange. Rich and varied language input characterises this first level of learning, supported by the use of gestures, vocal and facial expression and concrete materials. Learners respond with a mix of Auslan and conventional and unconventional gestures and fingerspelling, as they use all available resources to make meaning and to express themselves. Learners in this band engage in a range of activities in Auslan and share ideas about the language. They use well-known phrases in Auslan to participate in classroom routines, presentations and structured conversations with their teacher and their peers. They build vocabulary for thinking and talking about school and personal topics. Language used in routine activities is re-used and reinforced from lesson to lesson in different situations, making connections between what has been learnt and what is to be learnt. Learners follow instructions, watch stories and participate in creating short texts on topics relevant to their interests and enjoyment, such as family, friends, favourite activities or food. They recount experiences, interact with visitors, follow directions, negotiate roles in a group and retell important information. As they adjust language use to suit different purposes, contexts and situations, learners notice how culture shapes language. They work collaboratively and independently. They focus on the different systems that structure language use, such as sign modification, clause and text structure, and vocabulary, and reflect on their experience as Auslan learners and users. They gradually build a vocabulary and grammatical base that allows them to compose and present different kinds of simple texts. Contexts of interaction The Auslan classroom and interactions with deaf peers or adults in their school or local environment are the primary contexts for language and culture experiences. Learners also have some access to the wider Deaf community and to various resources through virtual and digital technology. The familiarity and routine dimension of the classroom context provide scaffolding and opportunities for language practice and experimentation. Language development and use are incorporated into structured collaborative and interactive learning experiences, games and activities. Texts and resources Learners work with a range of published texts designed for language learning, such as videos or websites, as well as teacher-generated materials. Authentic texts from different sources provide opportunities for discussion and analysis of the relationship between communication and culture. Learners become familiar with ways of recording Auslan, through either film, photos of signs, line drawings of signs or simple symbols. Features of Auslan use Learners in Years 7 and 8 are able to produce all handshapes, movements and locations of single signs. They can independently produce simple positive and negative statements with some time marking, and use plain verbs, indicating verbs modified for present referents and simple and familiar depicting verbs. They describe familiar objects, animals or people using lexical adjectives and some SASS depicting signs. They depict the movement of people, animals and means of transport, using an appropriate classifier handshape in a depicting sign. They explore the expression of emotions through NMFs, and begin to use NMFs for grammatical purposes in modelled language. They use simple constructed action and handling depicting signs to show the characteristics and actions of an animal or a person. They learn that verbs can be modified spatially to express relationships with participants, and that space is used meaningfully in Auslan. As learners learn to adjust their language to suit different purposes and situations, they begin to understand how culture shapes language use. They compare how they feel when they use different languages and how they view different languages and people who use them. This introduction to the meta dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to ‘decentre’, to consider different perspectives and ways of being and to become aware of themselves as communicators and cultural participants. Level of support Learning at this level is supported by rich and varied language input and by the provision of experiences that are challenging but achievable. Support includes scaffolding, modelling and monitoring; frequent revision; and explicit instruction, description, and comparison of Auslan and English. Teachers model language use and examples of texts, and provide feedback and review student work to support the interactive process of learning. Learning experiences incorporate implicit and explicit form-focused language learning activities and examples of texts and tasks. Learners are given support and opportunities to practise using dictionaries, especially Signbank, and to access word charts, vocabulary lists and examples when translating and creating texts. Support is also provided through visual and tactile materials, such as pictures, objects and charts, and through the use of conventional gestures. Learners rely on modelled language and scaffolded tasks to create their own texts, for example, choosing signs to complete sentences or using pictures to sequence a story that has been told to them. The role of English Learners are encouraged to use Auslan whenever possible, with the teacher providing rich and supported language input. Auslan is used for classroom routines and language learning tasks and may be used as the language of instruction for learning content of other learning areas. The language of response varies according to task demands, with Auslan used primarily for communicating in structured and supported tasks. English is used as a medium of instruction and for explanation and discussion, or in areas from the Understanding strand. This allows learners to talk about differences and similarities they notice between Auslan and their first language(s) and culture(s), to ask questions about language and culture, to consider how they feel when they see or use Auslan and how they view different languages and the people who speak them. This introduction to the meta dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to consider different perspectives and ways of being. English may also be used to research cultural issues where the source text is not available in Auslan.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise and use elements ofstructure, such as noun groups/phrases or verb groups/phrases and using conjunctions to join clauses

[Key concepts: sign class, noun and verb groups, conjunctions, clauses, sign order; Key processes: recognising, observing, distinguishing, understanding]

(ACLASFU230)

  • categorising noun signs into those for people, animals, places or things
  • learning that proper nouns can have a sign name or be fingerspelled
  • recognising different nouns in clauses, including those that are shown with a pointing sign, such as GIRL READ versus PRO3 READ, or VISIT FRIEND versus VISIT PRO3
  • knowing that adjectives describe nouns in different ways, such as how they look (BIG or RED), feel (SOFT or HOT), smell (SMELLY) or sound (LOUD)
  • recognising that a noun group is a group of signs that relate to a person, place or thing that can include elements such as adjectives or numbers
  • recognising that expanding a noun into a noun group enriches meaning
  • identifying verb signs (SIT, EAT, FEEL, WONDER, HAVE) and recognising that they are central to a clause
  • noticing there is no verb ‘to be’ in Auslan, which is a significant difference to English
  • exploring different semantic types of verbs in a text, for example by showing how: doing (WALK, WRITE) and saying (TELL, CALL-OUT, ANNOUNCE) verbs in narrative texts give information about a characters’ actionssensing (SEE, THINK) or possessing (THAT’S-TYPICAL-OF-THEM, OWN) verbs indicate what characters think, feel or own
  • relating verbs identify or describe a noun (for example, HAVE in PRO3 HAVE LONG-HAIR)
  • noticing that some signs modify the meaning of verbs, such as READ CAREFUL and that these are called adverbs
  • contributing examples of signs that tell: when a verb happens (IN-2-WEEKS PRO1 HOLIDAY or WANT LUNCH NOW)where a verb happens (PRO3 RUN FAR or COME HERE)how a verb happens (FAST or SLOW or PRO2 QUICK FINISH)
  • noticing that sometimes Auslan signers have information about how a verb happens through NMFs not separate signs (for example, WRITE-carelessly)
  • recognising that a verb group is a group of words built up around a verb that may include adverbs which modify the meaning of verbs and that adverbs and DSs can enrich a verb group
  • understanding that a clause is one or more signs expressing a single idea and that a clause has at least one verb, but often one or more nouns as well, for example:CALL-himI called him.MAN THERE GO-TO POSS3 HOUSEThat man went to his house.BIG MONSTER SCREAMA big monster screamed.
  • noticing that while word order in sentences is often important for meaning, there is flexibility in word order in Auslan and that because parts of a sentence can be signed simultaneously in Auslan, it is hard to establish word order
  • distinguishing between yes/no questions, wh- questions and statements and their corresponding NMFs

Auslan - Second Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use Auslan to share information, experiences, interests, thoughts and feelings about their personal and immediate worlds. They use modelled constructions, ask for repetition or clarification, such as please slow sign, and use strategies such as fingerspelling to replace unknown signs to support continued interaction. They use lexical signs, gestures and affective non-manual features (NMFs) to indicate understanding, interest or lack of interest, for example, AGREE YES or PRO1 AGREE or PRO1 KNOW WHAT MEAN, BUT…. They ask and respond to familiar questions and directions and distinguish between statements and questions using grammatical NMFs. Students use familiar language to collaboratively plan and conduct shared events or activities, such as presentations, demonstrations or transactions, for example, PRO2 TYPE PRO1 WRITE . They describe people, animals and objects using lexical adjectives and familiar SASS depicting signs and appropriate classifier handshapes, for example, POSS1 MATH TEACHER TALL DS:long-wavy-hair or SCHOOL UNIFORM HAVE DS:long-thin-tie . They compare routines, interests and leisure activities, using signs for timing and frequency, simple depicting verbs for showing location, and appropriate sequencing. They use culturally appropriate protocols when communicating, such as maintaining eye contact, responding to and gaining attention by waving or tapping a shoulder or table, flashing lights, back-channelling and voice-off. Students locate specific information in a range of signed texts, such as weather reports, public announcements and presentations by visitors, using visual and contextual clues to help make meaning. They summarise and retell key points of information in correct sequence using list buoys. They plan, rehearse and deliver short presentations, taking into account context, purpose and audience and using familiar signs and visual supports, such as photos and props, and cohesive and sequencing devices. Students view and respond to short imaginative and expressive texts, such as short stories, poems and Deaf performances, for example by identifying and discussing ideas, characters and events. They create their own simple imaginative texts and retell wordless animations using familiar signs, gestures, modelled clause structures, high-frequency signs, modifying NMFs and lexical signs to indicate manner. They translate and interpret short texts using Signbank, and give examples of how languages do not always translate directly. They create bilingual texts and resources for the classroom, for example, glossaries and captions for their own and each other’s short stories. They explain the importance of facial expression, eye gaze and other NMFs in a visual-gestural language and culture, and reflect on their own cultural identity and ways of communicating in light of their experience of learning Auslan. Students know that Auslan is a legitimate language, different from mime and gestures used in spoken languages, and that eye contact is necessary for effective communication. They know that meaning is communicated visually through the use of signs, NMFs and gestures and can be expressed through whole signs or fingerspelling. They identify and describe the handshapes, movements and locations of signs. They distinguish between entity, handling or SASS depicting signs by looking at what the handshape and movement represent in each type and know that spatial relationships are typically expressed with entity DSs. They know that signs can be displaced in space for a range of purposes, such as to show locations or show the participants in a verb. They know that signing involves telling, depicting or enacting. They identify iconic signs and discuss how these match their referent, such as HOUSE, TREE, DRINK . They know that the function of constructed action is to represent the words, thoughts or actions of themselves or others. They use metalanguage to talk about Auslan, for example using terms such as depicting signs, indicating verbs, non-manual features, handshapes, pointing signs and clauses. Students recognise variation in the use of Auslan, such as regional dialects and differences in signing space. They understand different ways that English words are borrowed into Auslan and how these become lexicalised. They explore the influence on Auslan of other signed languages, such as BSL, ISL and ASL, as well as English over different periods of time and in different domains of language use, and consider reasons for these influences. They identify different ways that Deaf community members communicate with each other and with members of the wider hearing community, describing how different forms of digital communication such as social media, SMS/texting and NRS have improved accessibility for the Deaf community and contribute to the vitality of the language. Students recognise that Auslan has been transmitted across generations and describe ways it has been documented and recorded. They reflect on ways that culture is differently interpreted by others, for example by identifying how stereotypes about deaf and hearing people influence perceptions; and they understand that the most unifying factor of the Deaf community is the use of Auslan.

Auslan - Second Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Children enter the early years of schooling with established communication in one or more languages and Auslan will be learnt as an additional language. Cognitive and social development at this stage is exploratory and egocentric; thus learning typically focuses on their immediate world of family, home, school and friends. Children at this level are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Auslan will be learnt in parallel with English literacy, and the learning of each language assists with the learning of the other. Auslan learning and use Rich language input characterises the first stages of learning. The curriculum builds on children’s interests and sense of enjoyment and curiosity, with an emphasis on active, experiential learning and confidence building. In these years there is an emphasis on developing language to enable learners to participate in class activities such as storytelling and games. Creative play provides opportunities for using the language for purposeful interaction in a relaxed and informal context. Children build vocabulary for thinking and talking about school topics, routines and processes. They build knowledge and understanding of Auslan by interacting with each other, the teacher and deaf children, and by participating in structured routines and activities. With support and modelling, they use Auslan for different functions such as greeting, thanking, apologising, asking and responding to questions, expressing wishes, likes or dislikes, following simple directions, and taking turns in games and simple shared learning activities. They learn to produce signed phrases independently using modelled language, for example by describing simple pictures. Contexts of interaction The primary context for interaction is the language classroom, with the Auslan teacher and classmates. Learners’ use of Auslan primarily relates to classroom routines and activities and to talking about their own life. Additional language enrichment may be gained through interactions with visitors from the Deaf community. Texts and resources Texts include filmed children’s stories and teacher-generated materials such as pictures or short descriptions. Learners watch live and filmed texts such as explanations. They respond to resources such as short video clips, or substitution or matching exercises, and produce texts such as conversations using formulaic language. Features of Auslan use Children in Foundation to Year 2 become familiar with all handshapes, movements and locations of single signs. They are learning to produce simple positive and negative statements with some time marking, and to use plain verbs or unmodified indicating verbs. They learn to describe familiar objects, animals or people using simple lexical adjectives and to depict the movement of people, animals and means of transport using an appropriate classifier handshape in an entity depicting sign. They are able to use simple handling and SASS depicting signs. They explore emotions through the use of NMFs, and begin to use NMFs for grammatical purposes in modelled language. They learn to use simple constructed action to represent the characteristics of a single animal or themselves or another. They learn the metalanguage of nouns, verbs and adjectives, and learn that signers can modify verbs to show the referents involved. As children learn to adjust their language to suit different purposes and situations, they begin to understand how culture shapes language use. They compare how they feel when they use different languages and how they view different languages and people who use them. This introduction to the meta dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to ‘decentre’, to consider different perspectives and ways of being, and to become aware of themselves as communicators and cultural participants. Level of support Support is provided through visual and tactile materials, such as pictures, objects and charts, and the use of gesture and modelling. The main source of support is the teacher’s talk, such as questions and statements, explanations, prompts, recycling of language, stories and feedback. Learners rely on modelled language and scaffolded tasks to create their own texts, for example, choosing signs to complete sentences or using pictures to sequence a story that has been told to them. The role of English Learners are encouraged to use Auslan whenever possible, with the teacher providing rich and supported language input. English is used as a medium of instruction and for explanation and discussion or in areas from the Understanding strand. This allows learners to talk about differences and similarities that they notice between Auslan and their first language(s) and culture(s), to ask questions about language and culture, to consider how they feel when they see or use Auslan.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify specific points of information in simple Auslan texts relating to people, places and things and use the information to complete guided tasks

[Key concepts: information, topics; Key processes: identifying, categorising responding, gathering]

(ACLASFC130)

  • responding to signed information such as class messages or short introductions, for example by identifying names, school locations, numbers or times
  • identifying and applying specific information in Auslan texts to complete guided tasks such as colouring-in and craft activities
  • gathering information from each other about topics such as family members, favourite foods, toys and games to report back to the class using familiar structures and modelled language, for example:SISTER-BROTHER HOW-MANY?How many brothers and sisters do you have?
  • identifying information in simple Auslan texts that relates to properties such as colour, number, size or shape, for example when interacting with materials and objects
  • identifying and categorising a select range of signs according to handshape
  • following an Auslan text to gain information needed to complete an action-based activity, such as an obstacle course

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise that groups of words are combined to make aand that Auslan has word classes such as nouns, adjectives or verbs, and distinguish between statements and questions

[Key concepts: sign class, clauses, statements, questions; Key processes: recognising, observing]

(ACLASFU140)

  • categorising noun signs into those for people, animals, places or things
  • learning that proper nouns can have a sign name or be fingerspelled
  • knowing that adjectives describe nouns in different ways, such as how they look (BIG or RED), feel (SOFT or HOT), smell (SMELLY) or sound (LOUD)
  • identifying verb signs (SIT, EAT, FEEL, WONDER, HAVE) and recognising that they are central to a clause
  • noticing there is no equivalent of the verb ‘to be’ in Auslan, which is a significant difference to English
  • understanding that a clause is one or more signs expressing a single idea and that a clause has at least one verb, but often one or more nouns as well, for example:CALL-himI called him.MAN THERE GO-TO POSS3 HOUSEThat man went to his house.BIG MONSTER SCREAMA big monster screamed.
  • recognising different nouns in clauses, including those that are shown with a pointing sign, such as GIRL READ versus PRO3 READ, or VISIT FRIEND versus VISIT PRO3
  • noticing that Auslan has more flexibility in word order than in English
  • distinguishing between clauses that are statements and those that are questions

Auslan - Second Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with teachers and each other to talk about themselves, their families, friends and immediate environment. They follow instructions to complete action-based activities such as signing games or transactional activities, using repeated constructions, gestures and affective non-manual features (NMFs). They interact in familiar classroom routines by responding to requests, such as DS:line-up PLEASE, LOOK-AT-me PRO1. Students ask and respond to simple questions and distinguish between statements and questions. They express likes, dislikes and feelings using lexical signs and affective NMFs. They recognise and produce fingerspelled names for roll call and games and produce modelled signs, phrases and sentence patterns in familiar contexts. They use culturally appropriate protocols, such as maintaining eye contact and responding to and gaining attention by waving or tapping a shoulder or table. They identify specific information in signed texts, such as the properties of colour, number, size or shape, and describe people and objects, for example, PRO3 5-YEARS-OLD, PRO1 HAVE 2 BROTHER , or THAT BALL BIG . Students demonstrate simple procedures using known signs, gestures, objects and list buoys. They recount and sequence shared events using familiar signs and visual prompts. They view short imaginative and expressive texts such as stories and nursery rhymes, demonstrating understanding through drawing, gesture, modelled signs or English. They use fixed handshapes in creative ways, for example to create amusing sequences of signs to enact movements, and portray characteristics through the use of constructed action. They identify similarities and differences in ways they interact when communicating in English and in Auslan. Students know that Auslan is a language in its own right, different from mime and gestures used in spoken languages. They know that eye contact is necessary for effective communication and that meaning is communicated visually through the use of whole signs, gestures or fingerspelling. They identify and categorise signs according to handshape and they recognise major types of path movements. They know that some signs link to the appearance of a referent, for example PEN, HOUSE , and that some words, such as proper nouns, are borrowed from English by fingerspelling and mouthing. They know that locations of signs can be modified to change meaning, for example when pointing to people. They recognise the importance of facial expression, eye gaze and other NMFs in a visual-gestural language and culture and know that sign order is flexible in Auslan.

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Students understand the ways in which they use more than one language in their daily lives. They understand the differences between the Chinese and English oral and written language systems and begin to extend their knowledge of language structures and texts. Chinese language learning and use Students are immersed in Chinese and begin to explore social issues, including environmental sustainability and family structure. Students explore the world of Chinese language with a focus on extending their contexts and purposes of use and refining their skills in using language that is appropriate to purpose and audience. Contexts of interaction Students interact using Chinese in the classroom and wider school environment, and with family and the local community, exploring the place of Chinese-speaking communities and the relevance of the experiences of past communities to the modern world. Text s and resources Students engage with language through visual media, poetry, drama, music, TV series and documentaries. They correspond with others by text message and email and through class-based social networking sites. Features of Chinese language use Written language use includes learning to read extracts from both Chinese and English literature to compare features of individual works. Students read nonfiction texts that are often glossed in Pinyin or supported with vocabulary lists. They learn to analyse new characters encountered in texts with a focus on mapping these character forms to their known spoken language. Oral language use includes participating in discussions and presentations on topics of interest and on life experiences in different contexts and cultures. Students participate in activities that focus on pronunciation, tone and rhythm, and learn to appreciate how their own language use compares to modern standard forms. L evel of support Correct Chinese language use is modelled by the teacher to support students’ Chinese oracy and literacy development. Vocabulary lists and model texts support literacy development. The r ole of English Classroom interaction is predominantly conducted in Chinese, with English being used to compare languages and explore complex ideas related to language, culture, learning and concepts from other learning areas.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify features of individualand the form and function of components in individualand in related(for example, 心,想,情,闷), and learn to relate components (部件) and sides (偏旁) to the meaning and sound of (ACLCHU204)

  • recognising subtle differences and the implications for sound and meaning when discriminating between characters of similar appearance, for example, 我 and 找
  • analysing the nature of components, and their arrangement and function in a range of characters, for example, fire (火/灬) and heart (心/忄) components
  • analysing common simple and compound characters and identifying the possible placement of specific radicals and components in a compound character, for example, the placement of 扌 on the left-hand side
  • recognising clues inherent in characters when attempting to map specific sounds and meanings onto correct character forms, for example, exploring the reliability of semantic and phonetic functions of components and sides regularly encountered in characters containing common elements such as 请、 精、 猜; 认、 忍、 任; 忍、 想、思
  • categorising words containing a common morpheme to better understand the relationship between morphemes and specific word meanings, for example, using dictionaries to explore the range of words created from a common character morpheme such as 情 and 性
  • discriminating between the functions of morphemes with related meanings, for example, 餐-饭; 玩-做; 做-作

Content description

Elaborations

Represent factual information related to other learning areas and on topics of interest in a range of texts and formats for different audiences

[Key concepts: information, data, significance, legacy; Key processes: locating, analysing]

(ACLCHC197)

  • preparing and creating a video clip to share with peers overseas introducing aspects of local culture, including interesting places, history, famous people, and lifestyle, for example, 墨尔本的电车
  • creating posters (for example, about a local city or popular site) to convey information to Chinese peers, using pictures, maps and data to support text
  • presenting information in alternative formats to suit the purpose and the needs of the reader, for example, creating graphs or tables to categorise information when contrasting 澳大利亚和中国的地理
  • selecting words from word lists to create informative texts such as signs, slogans and notices, and using electronic tools such as a digital dictionary to extend own expression
  • obtaining and representing information from texts that include both text and visual images to explain aspects of lifestyle or culture in different communities, for example, TV guide, brochures, advertisements or timetables
  • presenting information on topics of interest related to the natural world, human history and endeavour, geography, or the built environment, using visual supports such as tables, charts, calendars and maps
  • analysing what information is needed to research a topic, employing Chinese search engines to access diverse sources of information online and choosing the most suitable sources, for example, 这个网站看上去像正规网站吗? 这个网站是官网吗?

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use spoken and written Chinese to sustain interactions in their personal and social worlds (for example, 你叫什么名字?你多大了?你住在哪个城市?,不对,我是说… and 老师,我可以用电脑吗?), making appropriate language choices for different roles, relationships and situations, for example, 你的那个,那个 assignment 做完了吗? They access and analyse information (for example, 排版结构,表格,图标 )from a range of sources which include familiar characters and use this information for a range of purposes. Students interpret, translate and create a range of spoken, written and multimodal Chinese texts for imaginative, informative and persuasive purposes and for different audiences. Sentences generally contain two or more ideas connected by cohesive devices (for example, 如果…就… ), and use a range of time phrases (for example, 然后;就 )to sequence events and ideas. Students make comparisons ( 比;跟…一 ), and provide reasons to explain their opinions or actions, using conjunctions (因为、所以、因此). Students explain the diversity in speaking and writing systems across languages, including regional variations within Chinese, and how these differences impact on their own understanding and communicative practices. They identify familiar characters in their simplified and traditional forms, and explain the differences between standard Chinese and dialects that may be spoken in their family. Their written literacy is still developing and they produce longer and more complex texts through the use of digital resources than in handwriting. They describe how the distinctive features of Chinese grammar and texts can be used to achieve particular effects and purposes. They explain how ideas are mediated across languages and cultures in their local communities. They express their own understandings of the Chinese cultural values that influence their own communicative practices.

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Students will have some exposure to Chinese language and culture in the context of their family and community life. They are likely to have high oracy skills but low literacy skills in Chinese. In the school environment they begin to understand how they use more than one language in their daily lives. Chinese language learning and use For background language learners the focus is on making connections between their oracy and literacy. Students use Chinese for most class activities and group responses, participating in active listening and action-related talk, games and play. They will be immersed in the sounds and sights of Chinese. They read short texts, share ideas about daily life and adapt the language they know to different contexts. Classroom interactions are mediated by teacher questioning and interactive talk in Chinese. Contexts of interaction Students are exposed to Chinese in the classroom and in their home and local community environments. Classroom experiences are likely to be structured compared to other contexts. Students communicate with peers, teachers and known adults. They begin to engage with Chinese culture through participating in community- and school-based celebrations, song and dance. Contexts are focused mostly on the here and now. Texts and resources Background language learners are exposed to a range of texts, including traditional oral texts, picture books, stories, rhyming verse, songs, poetry, multimodal texts and dramatic performances. Learners engage with Chinese language and culture through participating in celebrations. Features of Chinese language use Students recognise tones as an important element of Chinese speech and learn how the sounds of Chinese can be encoded in Pinyin, using Roman letters that often convey different sounds than students are accustomed to in English. Students view samples of characters as captions to images and as text in storybooks often defined in Pinyin. They learn to recognise basic character forms that represent familiar objects and ideas and convey significant cultural meanings. Level of support Chinese language use is scaffolded, prompted and modelled by the teacher. The role of English English is used where appropriate to allow for explanation, reflection and substantive discussion.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise parts of speech and understand basic rules of word order in simple sentences (ACLCHU124)

  • learning about meta-terms for word types, for example, exploring what is considered a verb in English and in Chinese (for example, adjectival verbs in Chinese)
  • categorising words into word types common across languages, for example, 家人 as noun, 四 as number
  • understanding that as for English there are basic rules of word order in Chinese (subject-verb-object)

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students use spoken Chinese to initiate interactions in a range of familiar contexts. They obtain and convey information and experiences relating to their personal world in simple exchanges. They use learned vocabulary, sounds, characters and culturally specific actions and gestures to convey meaning. They exchange greetings, introduce themselves and each other, and express thanks and apologies, for example, 我的中文名字叫小强, 你叫什么? They interact with and create simple predictable imaginative and informative texts such as 我的狗很大,它的尾巴很长, using familiar characters and sounds. They use images, actions and gesture to show that they understand the meaning of words when speaking, listening, reading, viewing and writing. Students identify the four Chinese tones and their function. They know that there is a metalanguage to describe the distinct writing and speech systems in Chinese. They compare English and Chinese consonant and vowel sounds. They copy and trace characters and identify key components in familiar characters. They identify how their Chinese identity influences some of their language choices when interacting with familiar adults and peers.

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

The nature of the learners Learners explore how they use more than one language in their daily lives, and use Chinese in relation to their personal world, countries where Chinese is spoken and the world of imagination. Chinese language learning and use Students engage with Chinese language through speaking, listening, reading, viewing and writing. They understand more words than they can say or write, and use this knowledge to attempt to say and spell unfamiliar words. Learners use Chinese to participate in action-related talk and to complete tasks. The focus of these activities is still on connecting their background oracy with their literacy. Contexts of interaction At this level, students are likely to focus on both formal and informal exchanges in familiar situations with familiar audiences, such as in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments where they are able to identify a range of responses. Likely contexts for interaction are situated within everyday educational experiences as well as students’ personal, family and social environments. In these contexts they have opportunities to notice that there are similarities and differences in the ways people communicate both within and across cultural groups. Texts and resources Students are exposed to a wide range of voices and settings where Chinese is used, including some extended passages in written and oral form. Students are exposed to culturally valued texts, including traditional oral texts, fables, stories, songs and picture books. They encounter various types of print and digital texts, simple chapter books, rhyming verse, poetry, nonfiction, film, multimodal texts and dramatic performances. Features of Chinese language use Oral language use draws on topics and concepts encountered in other learning areas, building students’ capacity to describe and explore these in Chinese. Students use Chinese to share everyday experiences with each other. They develop literacy skills by beginning to read fables and legends and write stories and recounts. Pinyin is used as a tool to develop students’ pronunciation and to assist their understanding of the nature of the spoken language. Students begin to develop orthographic and morphological awareness by exploring the relationship between characters and morphemes. Level of support The teacher explores and enhances students’ understanding of the similarities and differences between Chinese and English and supports their development of Chinese literacy and oracy. Vocabulary lists and model texts support literacy development. The role of English English is used for discussion, reflection and explanation to assist the continued development of learners’ knowledge base and intercultural capability.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify the form, composition and spacing within characters, relating components and their positions to their meaning and sound (ACLCHU139)

  • developing fine motor skills appropriate to Chinese writing conventions (方块字), and learning about Chinese writing conventions, including direction of text and punctuation
  • applying rules of stroke direction and stroke order when writing characters, paying attention to details such as length of a stroke to discriminate similar forms, for example, 土 and 士
  • developing skills in identifying the structure and components of a compound character, for example, 学 has two components and they are of top-and-bottom structure
  • categorising characters with common components (such as 花、草、菜), and making connections between meanings and sounds of components and meanings and sounds of characters, for example, 目 (eye) in 看 (to look at)
  • recognising the use of traditional and simplified characters in the local community (for example, 《大洋时报》 uses traditional characters), exploring texts in both forms of characters and analysing differences in orthography, for example, 门 and 門
  • identifying personal connections with one or both forms of characters, for example, 我妈妈教我写简体字,因为妈妈是从北京来的
  • inferring meaning of unfamiliar words from known morphemes, for example, 学生、学校、小学
  • understanding that a character might have multiple meanings, for example, that 冷 means ‘cold’ in 冷水 and ‘quiet’ in 冷清

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students use spoken and written Chinese to initiate interactions and to participate in short exchanges, for example, 你晚饭吃什么?,我学汉语和英语,站起来, 大家听老师说. They organise and convey factual information and share experiences in formal and informal situations, making appropriate choices of characters, words and pronunciation. They use demonstratives such as 这、那、那些 with measure words and verbs to indicate agreement ( 对,好的 )and preferences ( 要、想、喜欢 ). They respond to and create short imaginative, informative and persuasive texts for familiar audiences and identified purposes. Students select from known speech patterns to meet routine, procedural and informal conversational needs. Students know that Pinyin represents spoken language, and map Pinyin against their own speech. They distinguish between the contexts in which tones are expressed and those in which they are not. They identify features of the Chinese writing system, including the range of strokes and their sequences in character writing; and the relationship between components and sound and meaning. Students identify ways of structuring ideas in sentences, including the role of correct sequencing of time and place. They describe features of Chinese language and culture, and compare how ideas are conveyed across languages and cultures.

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Students maintain their sense of belonging to both their home and their outside culture. They can alter their conduct to fit different contexts within the world of teenage experience. Chinese language learning and use Classroom interaction is primarily conducted in Chinese. Students extend their knowledge of language structures and text organisation through reading and viewing authentic material and discussing how to apply new learning to their own communication. They are immersed in Chinese language, exploring issues related to youth culture, environmental conservation, family structure and welfare, and the features of diverse Chinese personal and social environments. Contexts of interaction Students use Chinese at school and home, and through increased engagement with members of their local communities. The online environment is used to connect students with other Chinese language users globally. Texts and resources Students engage with a variety of text types and modes, including visual and digital media, music, TV series, documentaries, and bilingual versions of classic and contemporary literature and their film adaptations. Features of Chinese language use Students extend their writing skills to include more persuasive language and more formal genres, such as articles and reports. They participate in presentations on topics related to the history and geography of Chinese-speaking communities, and initiate discussion through enquiry. Students begin to compare their own pronunciation to modern standard spoken Chinese. They also explore the influence of English on their own communication in Chinese, in pronunciation and linguistic structures, and the role of code-switching in their daily language use. Students develop their skills in analysing characters and recognising word and clause boundaries in extended text. Level of support Correct Chinese language use continues to be modelled by the teacher to support students’ oracy and literacy development. Glossaries, vocabulary lists, dictionaries and translation tools are used to support comprehension. The role of English English is used when required for comparison or to explore complex ideas related to language, culture and concepts from other learning areas.

Content description

Elaborations

Use character and component knowledge to infer sound and meaning of newencountered in texts, and examine component form and function to associate the correct sound and meaning with individual (ACLCHU171)

  • using knowledge of components to select a character from options when inputting Chinese in a digital text
  • categorising words containing a common morpheme to better understand the relationship between morphemes and specific word meanings, for example, using Chinese dictionaries to explore the range of words created from common character morphemes such as 情 (情感、情趣、情形) and 性(性能、性别、性格)
  • discriminating between the functions of morphemes with related meanings, for example, 餐,饭; 做,作
  • exploring influences on word formation, for example, the school subject ‘Language’ is called 语文 in China not 汉语 or 中文

Content description

Elaborations

Explain how communicative practices are influenced by engagement with different languages and cultures (ACLCHU176)

  • exploring uses and meanings of word categories (such as colours, celebrations, animals) across languages and cultures, for example, the assumption in Australia that a cake with candles must be a birthday cake; the use of colours to reflect mood
  • analyse culture-specific values in Chinese (such as face, harmony, group identity), and explore how these are applied in own language use, for example expressing modesty and respect through the expression 多多指教
  • identifying words used with specific assumptions, for example, gender (英俊 is used to describe males), significance (会见 versus 见面), formality (光临 versus 来到)

Chinese - Background Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use spoken and written Chinese to maintain exchanges, to analyse and evaluate information, and to share opinions (for example, 电视节目,纪录片,教育片,微电影, 报纸,杂志, 网站,博客, 少年百科 ) and experiences, for example, 我们为什么要保护熊猫?中国和澳大利亚的一些差异, 我最喜欢的假期 . They select and discern tone patterns and atonality. Students respond to and create a range of texts (for example, 流行歌曲演唱;电视剧配音 ), for different audiences and purposes. They create sentences that contain two or more ideas connected by cohesive devices (for example, 不但…而且… ) and use a range of time phrases (for example, 先…然后; 以前;吃了饭,就 )to sequence events and ideas. Students make comparisons (for example, 比;跟…一样 ), and elaborate on and explain their opinions or actions using conjunctions, for example, 所以、要不然 . They use stylistic devices (including 比喻,排比,反问 ), and use 成语 to influence and persuade others. They move between English and Chinese to interpret and translate for different audiences. Students explain how changes in tone and tone combination impact on meaning. They describe culturally specific gestures and actions. They identify diversity within the Chinese spoken and written language and explain the differences in writing systems across languages. Students connect the distinctive features of Chinese grammar with the development of complex ideas, and explain how the structure of texts influences audience response. They explain how features of Chinese culture impact on communication practices and influence their own interactions with others across languages.

Chinese - Second Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Students are beginning their study of Chinese and typically have had little prior exposure to the language and associated cultures. Many will have learnt an additional language in primary school, some have proficiency in different home languages and bring existing language learning strategies and intercultural awareness to the new experience of learning Chinese. Students’ textual knowledge developed through English literacy learning supports their ability to access similar text types in Chinese. Skills in analysing, comparing and reflecting on language and culture in both languages are mutually supportive. Students may need encouragement to take risks in learning a new language at this stage of social development and to consider issues of how the experience impacts on their sense of ‘norms’ associated with their first language and culture. Chinese language learning and use The systems of spoken and written language in Chinese are distinct. They are also quite distinct from the English language system. Because of the role of character learning and its impact on reading and writing, learners’ spoken language use is more advanced than their written language use; therefore, students will be immersed in the sights and sounds of Chinese. They develop oral language through active listening, observing interactions between native speakers, and using the spoken language for purposes such as socialising, transacting and getting things done, sharing information and engaging in imaginative performance. They are likely to understand more words than they can say or write. They use Pinyin as a resource to support learning, prepare drafts of oral and written texts, and learn new oral vocabulary. Contexts of interaction Likely contexts for interaction are familiar classroom routines and structured and scaffolded settings. Students engage with resources and materials, and interact and exchange information and ideas with the teacher and peers. Texts and resources Students listen to, read, view and interact with a variety of short modified informative, imaginative and persuasive Chinese texts, including texts that are valued within Chinese culture and community. Texts written in characters may include a Pinyin glossary or character/vocabulary lists as appropriate. Features of Chinese language use Learning is conceptual and reflective as students develop their ability to share ideas about language and culture systems and develop their skills in mediating between languages and cultures. Learning and use focus on active exploration of the Chinese language system, which students draw upon to communicate their own ideas and engage in collaborative decision making and action. Level of support Correct language use is continuously modelled by the teacher. Students also utilise a range of resources, including online support materials, as well as dictionaries, character lists and glossaries. The role of English English is used when appropriate to allow for explanation and discussion and to reflect on students’ experiences in Chinese, comparing their everyday communication and experiences to those observed in Chinese language communities.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate factual information about life in other communities and about aspects of Australian life, including data from graphs and tables, and convey this information to known audiences

[Key concepts: fact, time, place, number, valued knowledge; Key processes: informing, obtaining, processing, stating]

(ACLCHC084)

  • locating and identifying key information in written texts such as timetables, calendars, brochures and advertisements, recognising familiar features of texts and organisation of content, and the word/phrase boundaries in sentences such as 我们学校/有/二百八十七/个/学生/
  • identifying the categories used to organise graphs and tables by considering common themes across examples listed, for example, deducing that the heading 国籍 means ‘nationality’ by determining the meanings of 中国,澳大利亚 in a table column
  • reading familiar text types such as shopping brochures, understanding particular phrases such as 八折, and working out the final price, with the support of online dictionaries and word lists
  • recognising markers of time (for example, 第二天) in a sequence of events to monitor information flow and assist reading for overall meaning
  • presenting information in alternative formats to suit different purposes and the needs of the reader, for example, creating graphs or tables to categorise information when contrasting 澳大利亚和中国的地理

Chinese - Second Language Learner Pathway Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use spoken and written Chinese to interact in a range of familiar contexts. They respond to instructions, questions and directions. They use known phrases to exchange personal information (for example, 我叫…; 我的爸爸是澳大利亚人 ), seek clarification (for example, 对不起,我听不懂,你说什么? ), and transact and make arrangements, for example, 你要来我家吗? They use the question particle 吗 and familiar question words ( 什么,谁,哪儿,几 ). Students approximate tone, intonation and rhythm but meaning remains clear. They use gesture and some formulaic expressions to support oral interaction. They employ learnt vocabulary to express personal insights and compare experiences on topics of personal interest and significance. They connect ideas using basic cohesive devices (for example, 和,可是,所以 ), express opinions using 喜欢 and 觉得 , and give reasons using 因为 . In writing, students organise their ideas using time expressions and phrases which mark sequence, for example, 第一,第二… They apply 不 and 没有 in familiar phrases. They respond to and create simple informative and imaginative texts for known audiences and purposes. They use a range of verbs, including verbs of identification and existence such as 是 , and a range of action verbs to describe interests and events, for example, 踢足球,打乒乓球,听音乐 . They access and organise information from a range of spoken, audiovisual and printed texts. Students use simple sentences and paragraphs, and produce simple descriptions using intensifiers such as 很,非常,最. They reflect on their interactions when using and learning languages. Students are aware of the key features of the Chinese writing system and its differences to the English writing system. They recognise the function of tone-syllables and Pinyin. They explain the word order of Chinese sentences and the layout and construction of simple familiar Chinese texts in comparison to their English equivalents. They recognise and describe diversity within the Chinese spoken and written language, and consider the influence of culture on everyday communication, for example, concepts such as respect, politeness and the importance of family. They are aware that literal translation between languages is not always possible, and that aspects of interpretation and translation are affected by context, culture, and intercultural experience.

Chinese - Second Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners These years represent a transition to secondary school and students in this pathway are continuing to study Chinese bringing with them a capability to communicate, with some assistance, about their immediate world and China. Chinese language learning and use The systems of writing and speaking in Chinese are distinct. Because of the role of character learning and its impact on reading and writing, learners can accomplish a higher active use of spoken language than written language. As a result, engagement with Chinese language is primarily through speaking and listening. Students use Chinese for self-expression, to access new information and to share their knowledge and experiences with others. Pinyin remains an important tool for learning the sound of new words, associating sounds with characters, and creating digital texts in characters. Contexts of interaction Students actively use Chinese in a range of everyday contexts for purposes such as socialising with peers, transacting and getting things done, sharing information and engaging in performance with a range of known participants, including native speakers and peers. Texts and resources Students explore a range of written texts, developing strategies to interpret meaning where not all characters are known. They read, respond to and create digital texts, including blogs, biographies and opinion pieces, using a variety of technologies and software. Features of Chinese language use Chinese is the language of instruction and interaction, and is used in more elaborate ways as students extend their knowledge of the grammatical system and its use through spoken and written communication. Students experiment with language, exploring how cultural meanings are expressed. They analyse how messages are conveyed across languages, and apply their skills in mediating between Chinese and English in different contexts and situations. Classroom discussions focus on exploring and extending their range of contexts and audiences as they develop their personal communication skills. Level of support Students are supported to develop increasing autonomy as language learners and users, to self-monitor, and to adjust language in response to their experience in diverse contexts. The role of English English is used as appropriate to allow for explanation and discussion on issues associated with analysis of language, reflection on experiences, and comparisons across languages and cultures.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate, classify and organise relevant information, including analysing data in simple diagrams, tables and graphs, and re-present this information for known audiences

[Key concepts: lifestyle, change, trends, place; Key processes: summarising, comparing, contrasting]

(ACLCHC052)

  • comparing travel brochures to identify places of interest, public transport information and activities
  • recognising the word/phrase boundaries in 我们学校/有/二百八十七个学生 and applying knowledge of Chinese information-sequencing rules, for example, using the knowledge that Chinese speakers organise information from most general to most specific in order to locate details in a Chinese address
  • identifying the common organising categories in tables or graphs, for example, deducing that 国籍 means ‘nationality’ by determining the meanings of 中国,澳大利亚 etc. in a table column

Chinese - Second Language Learner Pathway Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use spoken and written Chinese to sustain interactions in a range of social and personal contexts. They exchange ideas and opinions, for example, 你要去看电影吗?;我们可以六月份一起去. They summarise the main points of information about known content from a range of spoken and print sources (for example, 电视节目 ,podcast, 电话留言 , 广告 , 老师推荐的网站 , 书籍 , 图书馆目录 , 游记 ), and convey the relevant information in a range of texts. Students respond to and create simple imaginative and informative texts. Sentences generally contain two or more ideas connected by cohesive devices (for example, 不但…而且…; 因为… 所以… ), as well as time expressions (for example, 先…再… ), and tense markers such as 了、完 to sequence events and ideas. Students make comparisons (for example, 比; 跟…一样 ), and provide explanations or reasons for opinions or decisions, using phrases that order and link their ideas. They use reported speech to refer to the ideas of others, for example, 他们认为 . They speak with attention to pronunciation, tone and phrasing, using intonation and pitch to add emotion or emphasis to their message. They demonstrate intercultural understanding by varying their language use for different audiences and purposes. Students describe the distinctive spoken and written language systems of Chinese using metalanguage. They know that character components can contribute to both sound and meaning of words and they understand how they can be combined to make different words, for example, 中国, 城, 中国城 . They identify features of text types such as letters, emails, descriptions and narratives. Students identify how information is structured in Chinese texts, and understand the importance of cultural and contextual cues to correct interpretation of meaning. They explain how features of Chinese culture impact on communication practices, and reflect on their own interactions with Chinese-speaking people.

Civics and Citizenship Year 7  

Year 7 Description

The Year 7 curriculum provides a study of the key features of Australia’s system of government and explores how this system aims to protect all Australians. Students examine the Australian Constitution and how its features, principles and values shape Australia’s democracy. They look at how the rights of individuals are protected through the justice system. Students also explore how Australia’s secular system of government supports a diverse society with shared values. The civics and citizenship content at this year level involves two strands: civics and citizenship knowledge and understanding, and civics and citizenship skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ civics and citizenship knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the followingkey questions: How is Australia’s system of democratic government shaped by the Constitution? What principles of justice help to protect the individual’s rights to justice in Australia’s system of law? How is Australia a diverse society and what factors contribute to a cohesive society?
Catholic Perspectives in civics and citizenship may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify, gather and sort information and ideas from a range of sources (ACHCS055)

  • using a range of sources of information to show religious diversity in Australia, such as articles, graphs, charts and statistics
  • categorising information under headings that are the focus for research

Civics and Citizenship - Year 7 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 7, students explain features of Australia’s Constitution, including the process for constitutional change. They explain how Australia’s legal system is based on the principle of justice. Students explain the diverse nature of Australian society and identify the importance of shared values in promoting a cohesive society. When researching, students develop a range of questions and gather and analyse information from different sources to investigate Australia’s political and legal systems. They consider different points of view on civics and citizenship issues. When planning for action, students take into account multiple perspectives to develop solutions to an issue. Students develop and present arguments on civics and citizenship issues using appropriate texts, terms and concepts. They identify ways they can be active and informed citizens.

Civics and Citizenship Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The Year 9 curriculum builds students’ understanding of Australia’s political system and how it enables change. Students examine the ways political parties, interest groups, media and individuals influence government and decision making processes. They investigate the features and principles of Australia’s court system, including its role in applying and interpreting Australian law. Students also examine global connectedness and how this is shaping contemporary Australian society. The civics and citizenship content at this year level involves two strands: civics and citizenship knowledge and understanding, and civics and citizenship skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ civics and citizenship knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: What influences shape the operation of Australia's political system? How does Australia's court system work in support of a democratic and just society? How do citizens participate in an interconnected world?
Catholic Perspectives in civics and citizenship may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1).

Content description

Elaborations

Identify, gather and sort information and ideas from a range of sources and reference as appropriate (ACHCS083)

  • developing categories for sorting information from surveys about people’s views on political or legal issues
  • identifying why some information has greater accuracy and reliability than other information

Content description

Elaborations

The key features of Australia’s court system and how courts apply and interpret the law, resolve disputes and makethrough judgements (ACHCK077)

  • creating a visual representation of the court jurisdictions in Australia
  • categorising sample cases in relation to the courts in which they would be heard (for example, cases from criminal, consumer, family, human rights and environmental law)
  • describing the role of a particular court (for example, a supreme court, a magistrates court or the Family Court of Australia)
  • exploring how court judgements impact on the development of law (for example, the role of precedents)

Civics and Citizenship - Year 9 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 9, students evaluate features of Australia’s political system, and identify and analyse the influences on people’s political choices. They explain the key principles of Australia’s system of justice and analyse the role of Australia’s court system. They analyse a range of factors that influence identities and attitudes to diversity. They reflect on how groups participate and contribute to civic life. When researching, students analyse a range of questions to investigate Australia’s political and legal systems and critically analyse information gathered from different sources for relevance and reliability. They compare and account for different interpretations and points of view on civics and citizenship issues. When planning for action, students take into account multiple perspectives, use democratic processes, and negotiate solutions to an issue. Students develop and present evidence-based arguments on civics and citizenship issues using appropriate texts, subject-specific language and concepts. They analyse ways they can be active and informed citizens in different contexts.

Civics and Citizenship Year 10  

Year 10 Description

The Year 10 curriculum develops student understanding of Australia’s system of government through comparison with another system of government in the Asian region. Students examine Australia’s roles and responsibilities within the international context, such as its involvement with the United Nations. Students also study the purpose and work of the High Court. They investigate the values and practices that enable a democratic society to be sustained. The civics and citizenship content at this year level involves two strands: civics and citizenship knowledge and understanding, and civics and citizenship skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ civics and citizenship knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: How is Australia’s democracy defined and shaped by the global context? How are government policies shaped by Australia’s international legal obligations? What are the features of a resilient democracy?
Catholic Perspectives in civics and citizenship may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1).

Content description

Elaborations

The key features and values of Australia’s system of government compared with at least ONE other system of government in the Asia region (ACHCK090)

  • categorising the key features of Australia’s system of government (for example, democratic elections and the separation of powers) and comparing and contrasting these to the key features found in another country in the Asia region, such as Japan, India or Indonesia
  • interviewing people with connections to a country in the Asia region to compare the values they associate with the system of government in that country with those of Australia

Civics and Citizenship - Year 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students compare and evaluate the key features and values of systems of government, and analyse the Australian Government’s global roles and responsibilities. They analyse the role of the High Court and explain how Australia’s international legal obligations influence law and government policy. Students evaluate a range of factors that sustain democratic societies. When researching, students evaluate a range of questions to investigate Australia’s political and legal systems and critically analyse information gathered from different sources for relevance, reliability and omission. They account for and evaluate different interpretations and points of view on civics and citizenship issues. When planning for action, students take account of multiple perspectives and ambiguities, use democratic processes, and negotiate solutions to an issue. Students develop and present evidenced-based arguments incorporating different points of view on civics and citizenship issues. They use appropriate texts, subject-specific language and concepts. They evaluate ways they can be active and informed citizens in different contexts.

Dance Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

In Years 3 and 4, learning in The Arts builds on the experience of the previous band. It involves students making and responding to artworks independently and collaboratively with their classmates and teachers. As they experience The Arts, students draw on artworks from a range of cultures, times and locations. They explore the arts of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples and of the Asia region and learn that they are used for different purposes. While the arts in the local community should be the initial focus for learning, students are also aware of and interested in the arts from more distant locations and the curriculum provides opportunities to build on this curiosity. As they make and respond to artworks, students explore meaning and interpretation, elements and forms, and social and cultural contexts of the arts. They make personal evaluations of their own and others’ artworks, making connections between their own artistic intentions and those of other artists. Students continue to learn about safe practices in the arts and in their interactions with other artists. Their understanding of the role of the artist and the audience builds on their experience from the previous band. As an audience, students focus their attention on the artwork and respond to it. They consider why and how audiences respond to artworks. In Years 3 and 4, students’ awareness of themselves and others as audiences is extended beyond the classroom to the broader school context. In Dance, students: extend their awareness of the body as they incorporate actions using different body parts, body zones and bases explore and experiment with directions, time, dynamics and relationships using groupings, objects and props extend their fundamental movement skills by adding and combining more complex movements use technical skills including accuracy and awareness of body alignment explore meaning and interpretation, elements and forms including shapes and sequences of dances as they make and respond to dance use expressive skills including projection and focus when performing dance for themselves and others.
Students participate in Arts learning from a Catholic Perspective when they engage as both artist and audience with religious artworks from a range of cultures, times and locations including the local community.As students make and respond to the arts, they use viewpoints, including religious viewpoints, to explore meaning and interpretation.In Dance, students: • explore meaning and interpretation, elements and forms including shapes and sequences as they make and respond to dance including movement as a form to communicate faith, beliefs and religious story. 

Content description

Elaborations

Perform dances usingto communicate ideas, including telling cultural or community stories (ACADAM007)

  • using expressive skills of projection and focus to communicate dance ideas to an audience (school assembly, community festival, etc.); for example, looking out and up to the ceiling and extending movements outwards to express a feeling of joy
  • exploring the elements of dance to communicate ideas clearly, such as telling cultural stories in a dance with or without music; for example, travelling lightly using hands and feet to represent a bilby, or skipping vigorously and at a high level to express joy, or rolling softly on the floor using different body shapes to represent shells washed by the sea
  • Considering viewpoints – meanings and interpretations: For example – Is there a story in the dance? How are you using grouping or pathways to communicate ideas or intentions in your dance?
  • rehearsing and presenting an appropriate dance to celebrate and appreciate diversity of cultures, based on research into dance tradition, in the school or at a local community event
  • presenting their dance using internet-based technologies
  • respecting other students’ dancing when dancing and being an attentive audience member

Dance - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students describe and discuss similarities and differences between dances they make, perform and view. They discuss how they and others organise the elements of dance in dances depending on the purpose. Students structure movements into dance sequences and use the elements of dance and choreographic devices to represent a story or mood. They collaborate to make dances and perform with control, accuracy, projection and focus.

Design and Technologies Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

Learning in Design and Technologies builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in the Early Years Learning Framework, revisiting, strengthening and extending these as needed. By the end of Year 2 students will have had the opportunity to create designed solutions at least once in each of the following technologies contexts: Engineering principles and systems; Food and fibre production and Food specialisations; and Materials and technologies specialisations. Students should have opportunities to experience designing and producing products, services and environments. This may occur through integrated learning. In Foundation to Year 2 students explore and investigate technologies - materials, systems, components, tools and equipment - including their purpose and how they meet personal and social needs within local settings. Students develop an understanding of how society and environmental sustainability factors influence design and technologies decisions. Students evaluate designed solutions using questions such as ‘How does it work?’, ‘What purpose does it meet?’, ‘Who will use it?’, ‘What do I like about it?’ or ‘How can it be improved?’ They begin to consider the impact of their decisions and of technologies on others and the environment including in relation to preferred futures. They reflect on their participation in a design process. This involves students developing new perspectives, and engaging in different forms of evaluating and critiquing products, services and environments based on personal preferences. Using a range of technologies including a variety of graphical representation techniques to communicate, students draw, model and explain design ideas; label drawings; draw objects as two-dimensional images from different views; draw products and simple environments and verbalise design ideas. They plan (with teacher support) simple steps and follow directions to complete their own or group design ideas or projects, and manage their own role within team projects. Students are aware of others around them and the need to work safely and collaboratively when making designed solutions
A Catholic Perspective emphasizes the importance of, and the needs of families, places and the environment. Students consider the concept of stewardship of God's creation as they explore and investigate technologies that meet the needs of the Common Good with an early understanding of a preferred future for God's Creation.

Content description

Elaborations

Explore how plants and animals are grown for food, clothing and shelter and how food is selected and prepared for (ACTDEK003)

  • exploring which plants and animals can provide food or materials for clothing and shelter and what basic needs those plants and animals have
  • identifying products that can be designed and produced from plants and animals, for example food products, paper and wood products, fabrics and yarns, and fertilisers
  • considering the suitability of a range of tools when cultivating gardens, mulching and building garden structures and preparing and cooking food from recipes
  • identifying and categorising a wide range of foods, including Aboriginal bush foods, into food groups and describing tools and equipment needed to prepare these for healthy eating
  • exploring how people from different cultures including those of Asia design and produce different cuisines based on the plants and animals in their region and available tools and equipment
  • exploring the tools, equipment and techniques used to prepare food safely and hygienically for healthy eating

Design and Technologies - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students describe the purpose of familiar products, services and environments and how they meet the needs of users and affect others and environments. They identify the features and uses of technologies for each of the prescribed technologies contexts. With guidance, students create designed solutions for each of the prescribed technologies contexts. They describe given needs or opportunities. Students create and evaluate their ideas and designed solutions based on personal preferences. They communicate design ideas for their designed products, services and environments using modelling and simple drawings. Following sequenced steps, students demonstrate safe use of tools and equipment when producing designed solutions.

Digital Technologies Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in the Early Years Learning Framework. It focuses on developing foundational skills in computational thinking and an awareness of personal experiences using digital systems. By the end of Year 2, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions through guided play and integrated learning, such as using robotic toys to navigate a map or recording science data with software applications. In Foundation – Year 2, students begin to learn about common digital systems and patterns that exist within data they collect. Students organise, manipulate and present this data, including numerical, categorical, text, image, audio and video data, in creative ways to create meaning. Students use the concept of abstraction when defining problems, to identify the most important information, such as the significant steps involved in making a sandwich. They begin to develop their design skills by conceptualising algorithms as a sequence of steps for carrying out instructions, such as identifying steps in a process or controlling robotic devices. Students describe how information systems meet information, communication and/or recreational needs. Through discussion with teachers, students learn to apply safe and ethical practices to protect themselves and others as they interact online for learning and communicating.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Follow, describe and represent a sequence of steps and decisions (algorithms) needed to solve simple problems (ACTDIP004)

  • experimenting with very simple, step-by-step procedures to explore programmable devices, for example providing instructions to physical or virtual objects or robotic devices to move in an intended manner, such as following a path around the classroom
  • writing and entering a simple set of instructions jointly to sequence events and instructions, for example scanning personal photographs and collating and ordering significant personal events or milestones and describing the steps involved in the process
  • presenting a sequence of instructions or events in a series of slides or screens with text and pictures
  • recognising sequences of instructions or events that are commonly experienced such as the sequence of traffic lights or instructions for recording a TV show or how their lunch order is taken and delivered
  • following a series of instructions to use a piece of hardware or software, for example taking a photograph, editing and storing it to include in a slow motion

Content description

Elaborations

Collect, explore and sort data, and use digital systems to present thecreatively (ACTDIP003)

  • collecting, and sorting data through play, for example collecting data about favourite toys and sorting them into categories such as toys they like or dislike
  • locating and purposefully using visual or text data, for example searching through a digital photo library to select an image, taking into account cultural considerations such as awareness of appropriate use of images and audio recordings of deceased persons
  • exploring, imagining and comparing the usefulness of different data displays, for example jointly creating simple column graphs and picture graphs to represent different types of items
  • exploring and creating graphs to represent classroom data, for example collecting data on the country of birth of each student and presenting the results as a picture graph
  • using digital systems to organise data to improve meaning, for example using word processing software to create a list of tasks or visualisation software to create a mind map (diagram) showing relationships between characters in a story
  • using common software to present data creatively, for example as a slideshow, movie, sounds, image, chart, word art, poster or drawing

Digital Technologies - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students identify how common digital systems (hardware and software) are used to meet specific purposes. They use digital systems to represent simple patterns in data in different ways. Students design solutions to simple problems using a sequence of steps and decisions. They collect familiar data and display them to convey meaning. They create and organise ideas and information using information systems, and share information in safe online environments.

Digital Technologies Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking, such as categorising and outlining procedures; and developing an increasing awareness of how digital systems are used and could be used at home, in school and the local community. By the end of Year 4, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions, such as interactive adventures that involve user choice, modelling simplified real world systems and simple guessing games. In Year 3 and 4, students explore digital systems in terms of their components, and peripheral devices such as digital microscopes, cameras and interactive whiteboards. They collect, manipulate and interpret data, developing an understanding of the characteristics of data and their representation. Using the concept of abstraction, students define simple problems using techniques such as summarising facts to deduce conclusions. They record simple solutions to problems through text and diagrams and develop their designing skills from initially following prepared algorithms to describing their own that support branching (choice of options) and user input. Their solutions are implemented using appropriate software including visual programming languages that use graphical elements rather than text instructions. They explain, in general terms, how their solutions meet specific needs and consider how society may use digital systems to meet needs in environmentally sustainable ways. With teacher guidance, students identify and list the major steps needed to complete a task or project. When sharing ideas and communicating in online environments they develop an understanding of why it is important to consider the feelings of their audiences and apply safe practices and social protocols agreed by the class that demonstrate respectful behaviour.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Define simple problems, and describe and follow a sequence of steps and decisions (algorithms) needed to solve them (ACTDIP010)

  • explaining what the problem is and some features of the problem, such as what need is associated with the problem, who has the problem and why
  • describing, using drawings, pictures and text, the sequence of steps and decisions in a solution, for example to show the order of events in a game and the decisions that a player must make
  • experimenting with different ways of describing a set of instructions, for example writing two versions of the same simple set of instructions for a programmable robotic device
  • explaining to others how to follow technical instructions, for example how to capture and download images from a mobile device
  • defining and describing the sequence of steps needed to incorporate multiple types of data in a solution, for example sequencing the steps in selecting and downloading images and audio to create a book trailer

Content description

Elaborations

Implement simple digital solutions as visual programs with algorithms involving(decisions) and user (ACTDIP011)

  • designing and implementing a simple interactive digital solution using a visual programming language, for example preparing the content and design of a simple guessing game that provides options in English and an Asian language
  • using different design tools to record ways in which digital solutions will be developed, for example creating storyboards or flowcharts to record relationships or instructions about content or processes
  • exploring common elements of standard user interfaces that are familiar and appeal to users, for example navigation links on the left and top of web pages to help users interact with the site
  • implementing programs that make decisions on the basis of user input or choices such as through selecting a button, pushing a key or moving a mouse to ‘branch’ to a different segment of the solution
  • creating options for users to make choices in solutions, for example a user input and branching mechanism such as buttons in a slideshow

Content description

Elaborations

Collect, access and present different types ofusing simple software to create information and solve problems (ACTDIP009)

  • selecting appropriate formats or layout styles to present data as information depending on the type of data and the audience, for example lists, tables, graphs, animations, info graphics and presentations
  • using different techniques to present data as information, for example creating a column chart in a spreadsheet by colouring cells to represent different items
  • improving the appearance and usability of data, for example using colour, headings and labelling of images to organise and accurately identify data
  • using software to sort and calculate data when solving problems, for example sorting numerical and categorical data in ascending or descending order and automating simple arithmetic calculations using nearby cells and summing cell ranges in spreadsheet or database software
  • exploring different online sources to access data, for example using online query interfaces to select and retrieve data from an online database such as a library catalogue or weather records
  • recognising that all types of data are stored in digital systems and may be represented in different ways such as files and folders with names and icons

Digital Technologies - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students describe how a range of digital systems (hardware and software) and their peripheral devices can be used for different purposes. They explain how the same data sets can be represented in different ways. Students define simple problems, design and implement digital solutions using algorithms that involve decision-making and user input. They explain how the solutions meet their purposes. They collect and manipulate different data when creating information and digital solutions. They safely use and manage information systems for identified needs using agreed protocols and describe how information systems are used.

Digital Technologies Years 5 and 6  

Years 5 and 6 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking such as identifying similarities in different problems and describing smaller components of complex systems. It also focuses on the sustainability of information systems for current and future uses. By the end of Year 6, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions, such as games or quizzes and interactive stories and animations. In Year 5 and 6, students develop an understanding of the role individual components of digital systems play in the processing and representation of data. They acquire, validate, interpret, track and manage various types of data and are introduced to the concept of data states in digital systems and how data are transferred between systems. They learn to further develop abstractions by identifying common elements across similar problems and systems and develop an understanding of the relationship between models and the real-world systems they represent. When creating solutions, students define problems clearly by identifying appropriate data and requirements. When designing, they consider how users will interact with the solutions, and check and validate their designs to increase the likelihood of creating working solutions. Students increase the sophistication of their algorithms by identifying repetition and incorporate repeat instructions or structures when implementing their solutions through visual programming, such as reading user input until an answer is guessed correctly in a quiz. They evaluate their solutions and examine the sustainability of their own and existing information systems. Students progress from managing the creation of their own ideas and information for sharing to working collaboratively. In doing so, they learn to negotiate and develop plans to complete tasks. When engaging with others, they take personal and physical safety into account, applying social and ethical protocols that acknowledge factors such as social differences and privacy of personal information. They also develop their skills in applying technical protocols such as devising file naming conventions that are meaningful and determining safe storage locations to protect data and information.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Design, modify and follow simple algorithms involving sequences of steps, branching, and(repetition) (ACTDIP019)

  • following a diagram of a simple method of sorting numbers or words
  • following, modifying and describing the design of a game involving simple algorithms represented diagrammatically or in English, for example creating a flowchart with software that uses symbols to show decisions, processes and inputs and outputs
  • experimenting with different ways of representing an instruction to make a choice, for example branches in a tree diagram or using an ‘IF’ statement (a common statement used to branch) to indicate making a choice between two different circumstances using a spreadsheet or a visual program
  • experimenting with different ways of representing an instruction to make a repetition, for example loops in a flowchart diagram or using a ‘REPEAT’ statement
  • designing the instructions for a robot, for example a robot vacuum cleaner to clean a room
  • using different design tools to record ways in which digital solutions will be developed, for example creating storyboards or flowcharts to record relationships or instructions about content or processes

Digital Technologies - Years 5 and 6 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 6, students explain the fundamentals of digital system components (hardware, software and networks) and how digital systems are connected to form networks. They explain how digital systems use whole numbers as a basis for representing a variety of data types. Students define problems in terms of data and functional requirements and design solutions by developing algorithms to address the problems. They incorporate decision-making, repetition and user interface design into their designs and implement their digital solutions, including a visual program. They explain how information systems and their solutions meet needs and consider sustainability. Students manage the creation and communication of ideas and information in collaborative digital projects using validated data and agreed protocols.

Digital Technologies Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking such as decomposing problems and prototyping; and engaging students with a wider range of information systems as they broaden their experiences and involvement in national, regional and global activities. By the end of Year 8, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions, such as interactive web applications or programmable multimedia assets or simulations of relationships between objects in the real world. In Year 7 and 8, students analyse the properties of networked systems and their suitability and use for the transmission of data types. They acquire, analyse, validate and evaluate various types of data, and appreciate the complexities of storing and transmitting that data in digital systems. Students use structured data to model objects and events that shape the communities they actively engage with. They further develop their understanding of the vital role that data plays in their lives, and how the data and related systems define and are limited by technical, environmental, economic and social constraints. They further develop abstractions by identifying common elements while decomposing apparently different problems and systems to define requirements, and recognise that abstractions hide irrelevant details for particular purposes. When defining problems, students identify the key elements of the problems and the factors and constraints at play. They design increasingly complex algorithms that allow data to be manipulated automatically, and explore different ways of showing the relationship between data elements to help computation, such as using pivot tables, graphs and clearly defined mark-up or rules. They progress from designing the user interface to considering user experience factors such as user expertise, accessibility and usability requirements. They broaden their programming experiences to include general-purpose programming languages, and incorporate subprograms into their solutions. They predict and evaluate their developed and existing solutions, considering time, tasks, data and the safe and sustainable use of information systems, and anticipate any risks associated with the use or adoption of such systems. Students plan and manage individual and team projects with some autonomy. They consider ways of managing the exchange of ideas, tasks and files, and techniques for monitoring progress and feedback. When communicating and collaborating online, students develop an understanding of different social contexts, for example acknowledging cultural practices and meeting legal obligations.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Design algorithms represented diagrammatically and in English, and trace algorithms to predictfor a givenand to identify errors (ACTDIP029)

  • investigating and designing some common algorithms, such as to search, sequence, sort, merge, control data structures
  • checking the accuracy of an algorithm before it is implemented, for example desk checking it with test data to see if the instructions produce the expected results
  • using diagrams to describe key decisions, for example creating flowcharts using digital systems to describe a set of computational instructions
  • using structured English to express algorithmic instructions, for example using conventional statements such as ‘while’ and ‘endwhile’ in a ‘while loop’ when describing interactive instruction

Content description

Elaborations

Analyse and visualiseusing a range of software to create information, and use structuredtoobjects or events (ACTDIP026)

  • using features and functions of software to summarise data to create information, for example calculating a simple budget of income and payments and creating a summary table for analysis
  • visualising data to create information, for example identify trends and outlier data from spreadsheets using plots, or displaying geocoded data on a map
  • applying a set of conditions to a spreadsheet to organise and filter data, for example using conditional formatting to highlight the state of particular cells, and filtering and sorting categorical data using column filters
  • querying an existing database to extract data for analysis, for example devising multiple selection criteria or using simple structured query language (SQL) SELECT statements to select records and retrieve specified fields
  • describing the attributes of complex objects, for example defining the records, fields, formats and relationships of a simple dataset
  • modelling the attributes of real-world objects for a computer game

Content description

Elaborations

Implement and modify programs with user interfaces involving branching,and functions in a general-purpose programming language (ACTDIP030)

  • developing and modifying digital solutions by implementing instructions contained in algorithms through programs
  • developing a digital game that manipulates models of real-world objects
  • programming a robot to recognise particular objects and to treat them differently, for example choose objects based on colour
  • creating digital solutions that provide user navigation and prompts with controlled repetitions, for example an information kiosk that has layers of buttons and prompts the user three times before returning to the beginning

Digital Technologies - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students distinguish between different types of networks and defined purposes. They explain how text, image and audio data can be represented, secured and presented in digital systems. Students plan and manage digital projects to create interactive information. They define and decompose problems in terms of functional requirements and constraints. Students design user experiences and algorithms incorporating branching and iterations, and test, modify and implement digital solutions. They evaluate information systems and their solutions in terms of meeting needs, innovation and sustainability. They analyse and evaluate data from a range of sources to model and create solutions. They use appropriate protocols when communicating and collaborating online.

Digital Technologies Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking such as precisely and accurately describing problems and the use of modular approaches to solutions. It also focuses on engaging students with specialised learning in preparation for vocational training or learning in the senior secondary years. By the end of Year 10, students will have had opportunities to analyse problems and design, implement and evaluate a range of digital solutions, such as database-driven websites and artificial intelligence engines and simulations. In Year 9 and 10, students consider how human interaction with networked systems introduces complexities surrounding access to, and the security and privacy of, data of various types. They interrogate security practices and techniques used to compress data, and learn about the importance of separating content, presentation and behavioural elements for data integrity and maintenance purposes. Students explore how bias can impact the results and value of data collection methods and they use structured data to analyse, visualise, model and evaluate objects and events. They learn how to develop multilevel abstractions, identify standard elements such as searching and sorting in algorithms, and explore the trade-offs between the simplicity of a model and the faithfulness of its representation. When defining problems students consider the functional and non-functional requirements of a solution through interacting with clients and regularly reviewing processes. They consolidate their algorithmic design skills to incorporate testing and review, and further develop their understanding of the user experience to incorporate a wider variety of user needs. Students develop modular solutions to complex problems using an object-oriented programming language where appropriate, and evaluate their solutions and existing information systems based on a broad set of criteria including connections to existing policies and their enterprise potential. They consider the privacy and security implications of how data are used and controlled, and suggest how policies and practices can be improved to ensure the sustainability and safety of information systems. Students progressively become more skilled at identifying the steps involved in planning solutions and developing detailed plans that are mindful of risks and sustainability requirements. When creating solutions, both individually and collaboratively, students comply with legal obligations, particularly with respect to the ownership of information, and when creating interactive solutions for sharing in online environments.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Design algorithms represented diagrammatically and inand validate algorithms and programs through tracing and test cases (ACTDIP040)

  • designing algorithms to solve real-world problems and describing algorithms using flow charts and structured English, for example START, END, IF and UNTIL
  • recognising that different algorithms can solve a problem with different trade-offs
  • tracing algorithms to predict results and program state for a given input, for example desk checking or using an interactive debugging tool
  • using tracing techniques to test algorithms, for example desk checking an algorithm for a given input by stepping through the algorithm while keeping track of contents of the variables
  • developing test cases that correspond to the requirements of the specifications, for example validating program behaviour on a range of valid and invalid user input

Content description

Elaborations

Implement modular programs, applying selected algorithms andstructures including using an object-oriented programming language (ACTDIP041)

  • coding separate modules that perform discrete functions but collectively meet the needs of the solution
  • defining classes that represent the attributes and behaviour of objects in the real world or in a game
  • considering different algorithms and selecting the most appropriate based on the type of problem, for example choosing appropriate algorithms for particular problems
  • selecting different types of data structures such as an array, record and object to model structured data

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate the role of hardware and software in managing, controlling and securing the movement of and access toin networked digital systems (ACTDIK034)

  • explaining how an operating system manages the relationship between hardware, applications and system software
  • comparing the similarities and differences of two common operating systems
  • identifying how changes to the configuration of an operating system change the operation of hardware and software components in a networked digital system
  • explaining the role of hardware and software components in allowing people to interact with digital systems, for example using a mouse or touch pad or screen, speech, accelerometer
  • investigating the operation and use of robotic process control systems
  • explaining encryption of data as a means of protecting data, for example secret keys and ‘exclusive or’ (XOR) and hashing algorithms to digitally sign data

Digital Technologies - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students explain the control and management of networked digital systems and the security implications of the interaction between hardware, software and users. They explain simple data compression, and why content data are separated from presentation. Students plan and manage digital projects using an iterative approach. They define and decompose complex problems in terms of functional and non-functional requirements. Students design and evaluate user experiences and algorithms. They design and implement modular programs, including an object-oriented program, using algorithms and data structures involving modular functions that reflect the relationships of real-world data and data entities. They take account of privacy and security requirements when selecting and validating data. Students test and predict results and implement digital solutions. They evaluate information systems and their solutions in terms of risk, sustainability and potential for innovation and enterprise. They share and collaborate online, establishing protocols for the use, transmission and maintenance of data and projects.

Economics and Business Year 8  

Year 8 Description

The Year 8 curriculum gives students the opportunity to further develop their understanding of economics and business concepts by exploring the ways markets – including traditional Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander markets – work within Australia, the participants in the market system and the ways they may influence the market’s operation. The rights, responsibilities and opportunities that arise for businesses, consumers and governments are considered along with the influences on the ways individuals work now and into the future. The emphasis in Year 8 is on national and regional issues, with opportunities for the concepts to also be considered in relation to local community or global issues where appropriate. The economics and business content at this year level involves two strands: economics and business knowledge and understanding, and economics and business skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Students are expected to be taught the content through contemporary issues, events and/or case studies. Teachers will design programs that cover appropriate contexts and meet the needs of their students. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ economics and business knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: Why are markets needed, and why are governments involved? Why do consumers and businesses have both rights and responsibilities? What may affect the ways people work now and in the future? How do different businesses respond to opportunities in the market?
Catholic Perspectives in business and economics may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1), in particular economic justice, option for the poor and common good.

Content description

Elaborations

Gather relevant data and information from a range of digital, online and print sources (ACHES033)

  • organising and categorising data and/or information (for example, constructing a table showing the differences between types of businesses)
  • accessing reliable information (for example, from departments of fair trading) to access advice on the rights and responsibilities of consumers and businesses, or finding information on strategies to resolve consumer and business disputes

Economics and Business - Year 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students explain how markets operate and recognise why governments may influence the market’s operation. They explain the rights and responsibilities of consumers and businesses in terms of financial and economic decision-making. They explain why different types of businesses exist and describe the different ways businesses can respond to opportunities in the market. Students describe influences on the way people work and factors that may affect work in the future. When researching, students develop questions and gather relevant data and information from different sources to investigate an economic or business issue. They interpret data to identify trends and relationships. They propose a range of alternative responses to an issue and evaluate the costs and benefits of each alternative. They apply economics and business knowledge, skills and concepts to familiar and unfamiliar problems. Students develop and present evidence-based conclusions using appropriate texts, subject-specific language and concepts. They identify the effects of an economic or business decision and the potential consequences of alternative actions.

Economics and Business Year 10  

Year 10 Description

The Year 10 curriculum gives students the opportunity to further develop their understanding of economics and business concepts by considering Australia’s economic performance and standard of living. The ways governments manage economic performance to improve living standards is explored, along with the reasons why economic performance and living standards differ within and between economies. Students explore the nature of externalities and why the government intervenes to ensure that prices reflect the depletion of resources or costs to society. Students examine the consequences of decisions and the responses of business to changing economic conditions, including the way they manage their workforce. The economics and business content at this year level involves two strands: economics and business knowledge and understanding, and economics and business skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Students are expected to be taught the content through contemporary issues, events and/or case studies. Teachers will design programs that cover different contexts (personal, local, national, regional, global) and meet the needs of their students. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ economics and business knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: How is the performance of an economy measured? Why do variations in economic performance in different economies exist? What strategies do governments use to manage economic performance? How do governments, businesses and individuals respond to changing economic conditions?
Catholic Perspectives in business and economics may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1), in particular economic justice, option for the poor and common good.

Content description

Elaborations

Analyse data and information in different formats to explain cause-and-effect relationships, make predictions and illustrate alternative perspectives (ACHES057)

  • categorising and interpreting data and information collected into a form that shows multiple perspectives around an issue/event
  • interpreting a range of measures of economic performance and standards of living to identify differences within and between economies
  • explaining relationships identified in data (for example, the relationship between standards of living, infant mortality and access to health services)
  • analysing information to make informed choices (for example, when purchasing goods and services)

Economics and Business - Year 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students explain why and how governments manage economic performance to improve living standards. They give explanations for variations in economic performance and standards of living within and between economies. They analyse factors that influence major consumer and financial decisions and explain the short- and long-term effects of these decisions. They explain how businesses respond to changing economic conditions and improve productivity. Students evaluate the effect of organisational and workforce management on business performance. When researching, students develop questions and formulate hypotheses to frame an investigation of an economic or business issue or event. They gather and analyse reliable data and information from different sources to identify trends, explain relationships and make predictions. Students generate alternative responses to an issue, taking into account multiple perspectives. They use cost-benefit analysis and appropriate criteria to propose and justify a course of action. They apply economics and business knowledge, skills and concepts to familiar, unfamiliar and complex hypothetical problems. Students develop and present evidence-based conclusions and reasoned arguments incorporating different points of view. They use appropriate texts, subject-specific language, conventions and concepts. They analyse the intended and unintended effects of economic and business decisions and the potential consequences of alternative actions.

English Year 4  

Year 4 Description

The English curriculum is built around the three interrelated strands of language, literature and literacy. Teaching and learning programs should balance and integrate all three strands. Together, the strands focus on developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills in listening, reading, viewing, speaking, writing and creating. Learning in English builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in earlier years, and teachers will revisit and strengthen these as needed. In Years 3 and 4, students experience learning in familiar contexts and a range of contexts that relate to study in other areas of the curriculum. They interact with peers and teachers from other classes and schools in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments. Students engage with a variety of texts for enjoyment. They listen to, read, view and interpret spoken, written and multimodal texts in which the primary purpose is aesthetic, as well as texts designed to inform and persuade. These encompass traditional oral texts including Aboriginal stories, picture books, various types of print and digital texts, simple chapter books, rhyming verse, poetry, non-fiction, film, multimodal texts, dramatic performances and texts used by students as models for constructing their own work. The range of literary texts for Foundation to Year 10 comprises Australian literature, including the oral narrative traditions of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, as well as the contemporary literature of these two cultural groups, and classic and contemporary world literature, including texts from and about Asia. Literary texts that support and extend students in Years 3 and 4 as independent readers describe complex sequences of events that extend over several pages and involve unusual happenings within a framework of familiar experiences. Informative texts include content of increasing complexity and technicality about topics of interest and topics being studied in other areas of the curriculum. These texts use complex language features, including varied sentence structures, some unfamiliar vocabulary, a significant number of high-frequency sight words and words that need to be decoded phonically, and a variety of punctuation conventions, as well as illustrations and diagrams that support and extend the printed text. Students create a range of imaginative, informative and persuasive types of texts including narratives, procedures, performances, reports, reviews, poetry and expositions.
When planning for learning in Prep - Year 10 English Catholic perspectives include: Human dignityChoicesHumans are sacred and socialGenuine belongingSelecting literature in a Catholic, Christian schooling contextIt is through the study of English that individuals learn to analyse, understand, communicate and build relationships with others and with the world around them.Exploration of Catholic perspectives in the area of English identifies the value of each person created in the image and likeness of God. Respectful interactions are encouraged so that everyone is enabled to flourish.This would be explored as students communicate with a range of familiar and unfamiliar audiences in face to face and online environments.  Engagement with the traditions and contemporary perspectives of Aboriginal and Torres strait islander people, and Asian cultures should be interwoven with a Catholic perspective. How we respond to the objective dimensions of our identity arises from our relationships with God and the world; with others, institutions, and history. Catholic perspectives would be further explored through engaging with the English purposes of enriching the lives of students, developing a sense of English and its richness and power to evoke feelings, conveying information, forming ideas, facilitating interaction with others, entertaining, persuading and arguing. Thoughtful engagement with the selection of literature and resources should support critical analysis of contemporary culture and a synthesis of faith and life in the context of gospel values and Church teachings.  Literature and resources used should aim to challenge students to think, to feel, to value and to act in accordance with Gospel values and should not shy away from an ethical dimension and the promotion of a critical response to dilemmas.  

Content description

Elaborations

Make connections between the ways different authors may represent similar storylines, ideas and relationships (ACELT1602)

  • commenting on how authors have established setting and period in different cultures and times and the relevance of characters, actions and beliefs to their own time
  • comparing different authors’ treatment of similar themes and text patterns, for example comparing fables and allegories from different cultures and quest novels by different authors

English - Year 4 Achievement Standard

Receptive modes (listening, reading and viewing) By the end of Year 4, students understand that texts have different text structures depending on purpose and context. They explain how language features, images and vocabulary are used to engage the interest of audiences. They describe literal and implied meaning connecting ideas in different texts  They fluently read texts that include varied sentence structures, unfamiliar vocabulary including multisyllabic words. They express preferences for particular types of texts, and respond to others’ viewpoints. They listen for and share key points in discussions. Productive modes (speaking, writing and creating) Students use language features to create coherence and add detail to their texts. They understand how to express an opinion based on information in a text. They create texts that show understanding of how images and detail can be used to extend key ideas. Students create structured texts to explain ideas for different audiences. They make presentations and contribute actively to class and group discussions, varying language according to context. They demonstrate understanding of grammar, select vocabulary from a range of resources and use accurate spelling and punctuation, re-reading and editing their work to improve meaning.

English Year 5  

Year 5 Description

The English curriculum is built around the three interrelated strands of language, literature and literacy. Teaching and learning programs should balance and integrate all three strands. Together, the strands focus on developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills in listening, reading, viewing, speaking, writing and creating. Learning in English builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in earlier years, and teachers will revisit and strengthen these as needed. In Years 5 and 6, students communicate with peers and teachers from other classes and schools, community members, and individuals and groups, in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments. Students engage with a variety of texts for enjoyment. They listen to, read, view, interpret and evaluate spoken, written and multimodal texts in which the primary purpose is aesthetic, as well as texts designed to inform and persuade. These include various types of media texts including newspapers, film and digital texts, junior and early adolescent novels, poetry, non-fiction and dramatic performances. The range of literary texts for Foundation to Year 10 comprises Australian literature, including the oral narrative traditions of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, as well as the contemporary literature of these two cultural groups, and classic and contemporary world literature, including texts from and about Asia. Literary texts that support and extend students in Years 5 and 6 as independent readers describe complex sequences, a range of non-stereotypical characters and elaborated events including flashbacks and shifts in time. These texts explore themes of interpersonal relationships and ethical dilemmas within real-world and fantasy settings. Informative texts supply technical and content information about a wide range of topics of interest as well as topics being studied in other areas of the curriculum. Text structures include chapters, headings and subheadings, tables of contents, indexes and glossaries. Language features include complex sentences, unfamiliar technical vocabulary, figurative language, and information presented in various types of graphics. Students create a range of imaginative, informative and persuasive types of texts including narratives, procedures, performances, reports, reviews, explanations and discussions.
When planning for learning in Prep - Year 10 English Catholic perspectives include: Human dignityChoicesHumans are sacred and socialGenuine belongingSelecting literature in a Catholic, Christian schooling contextIt is through the study of English that individuals learn to analyse, understand, communicate and build relationships with others and with the world around them.Exploration of Catholic perspectives in the area of English identifies the value of each person created in the image and likeness of God. Respectful interactions are encouraged so that everyone is enabled to flourish.This would be explored as students communicate with a range of familiar and unfamiliar audiences in face to face and online environments.  Engagement with the traditions and contemporary perspectives of Aboriginal and Torres strait islander people, and Asian cultures should be interwoven with a Catholic perspective. How we respond to the objective dimensions of our identity arises from our relationships with God and the world; with others, institutions, and history. Catholic perspectives would be further explored through engaging with the English purposes of enriching the lives of students, developing a sense of English and its richness and power to evoke feelings, conveying information, forming ideas, facilitating interaction with others, entertaining, persuading and arguing. Thoughtful engagement with the selection of literature and resources should support critical analysis of contemporary culture and a synthesis of faith and life in the context of gospel values and Church teachings.  Literature and resources used should aim to challenge students to think, to feel, to value and to act in accordance with Gospel values and should not shy away from an ethical dimension and the promotion of a critical response to dilemmas.  

Content description

Elaborations

Understand how the grammatical category of possessives is signalled through apostrophes and how to use apostrophes with common and proper nouns (ACELA1506)

  • learning that in Standard Australian English regular plural nouns ending in ‘s’ form the possessive by adding just the apostrophe, for example ‘my parents' car’
  • learning that in Standard Australian English for proper nouns the regular possessive form is always possible but a variant form without the second ‘s’ is sometimes found, for example ‘James’s house’ or ‘James’ house’

English - Year 5 Achievement Standard

Receptive modes (listening, reading and viewing) By the end of Year 5, students explain how text structures assist in understanding the text. They understand how language features, images and vocabulary influence interpretations of characters, settings and events. When reading, they encounter and decode unfamiliar words using phonic, grammatical, semantic and contextual knowledge. They analyse and explain literal and implied information from a variety of texts. They describe how events, characters and settings in texts are depicted and explain their own responses to them. They listen and ask questions to clarify content. Productive modes (speaking, writing and creating) Students use language features to show how ideas can be extended. They develop and explain a point of view about a text, selecting information, ideas and images from a range of resources. Students create imaginative, informative and persuasive texts for different purposes and audiences. They make presentations which include multimodal elements for defined purposes. They contribute actively to class and group discussions, taking into account other perspectives. When writing, they demonstrate understanding of grammar using a variety of sentence types. They select specific vocabulary and use accurate spelling and punctuation. They edit their work for cohesive structure and meaning.

English Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The English curriculum is built around the three interrelated strands of language, literature and literacy. Teaching and learning programs should balance and integrate all three strands. Together, the strands focus on developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills in listening, reading, viewing, speaking, writing and creating. Learning in English builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in earlier years, and teachers will revisit and strengthen these as needed. In Years 9 and 10, students interact with peers, teachers, individuals, groups and community members in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments. They experience learning in familiar and unfamiliar contexts, including local community, vocational and global contexts. Students engage with a variety of texts for enjoyment. They interpret, create, evaluate, discuss and perform a wide range of literary texts in which the primary purpose is aesthetic, as well as texts designed to inform and persuade. These include various types of media texts, including newspapers, film and digital texts, fiction, non-fiction, poetry, dramatic performances and multimodal texts, with themes and issues involving levels of abstraction, higher order reasoning and intertextual references. Students develop a critical understanding of the contemporary media and the differences between media texts. The range of literary texts for Foundation to Year 10 comprises Australian literature, including the oral narrative traditions of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, as well as the contemporary literature of these two cultural groups, and classic and contemporary world literature, including texts from and about Asia. Literary texts that support and extend students in Years 9 and 10 as independent readers are drawn from a range of genres and involve complex, challenging and unpredictable plot sequences and hybrid structures that may serve multiple purposes. These texts explore themes of human experience and cultural significance, interpersonal relationships, and ethical and global dilemmas within real-world and fictional settings and represent a variety of perspectives. Informative texts represent a synthesis of technical and abstract information (from credible/verifiable sources) about a wide range of specialised topics. Text structures are more complex and include chapters, headings and subheadings, tables of contents, indexes and glossaries. Language features include successive complex sentences with embedded clauses, a high proportion of unfamiliar and technical vocabulary, figurative and rhetorical language, and dense information supported by various types of graphics presented in visual form. Students create a range of imaginative, informative and persuasive types of texts including narratives, procedures, performances, reports, discussions, literary analyses, transformations of texts and reviews.
When planning for learning in Prep - Year 10 English Catholic perspectives include: Human dignityChoicesHumans are sacred and socialGenuine belongingSelecting literature in a Catholic, Christian schooling contextIt is through the study of English that individuals learn to analyse, understand, communicate and build relationships with others and with the world around them.Exploration of Catholic perspectives in the area of English identifies the value of each person created in the image and likeness of God. Respectful interactions are encouraged so that everyone is enabled to flourish.This would be explored as students communicate with a range of familiar and unfamiliar audiences in face to face and online environments.  Engagement with the traditions and contemporary perspectives of Aboriginal and Torres strait islander people, and Asian cultures should be interwoven with a Catholic perspective. How we respond to the objective dimensions of our identity arises from our relationships with God and the world; with others, institutions, and history. Catholic perspectives would be further explored through engaging with the English purposes of enriching the lives of students, developing a sense of English and its richness and power to evoke feelings, conveying information, forming ideas, facilitating interaction with others, entertaining, persuading and arguing. Thoughtful engagement with the selection of literature and resources should support critical analysis of contemporary culture and a synthesis of faith and life in the context of gospel values and Church teachings.  Literature and resources used should aim to challenge students to think, to feel, to value and to act in accordance with Gospel values and should not shy away from an ethical dimension and the promotion of a critical response to dilemmas.  

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate and experiment with the use and effect of extended metaphor, metonymy, allegory, icons, myths and symbolism in texts, for example poetry, short films, graphic novels, and plays on similar themes (ACELT1637)

  • identifying examples of language devices in a range of poems, ballads or poetic extracts, and considering how their use adds to meaning and may also influence the emotional responses of listeners or readers, in varying ways
  • exploring how language devices look or sound in written or spoken texts, how they can be identified, purposes they serve and what effect they might have on how the audience responds
  • taking a particular area of study, a topic or theme and examining how different authors make use of devices like myth, icons and imagery in their work

Content description

Elaborations

Experiment with the ways that language features, image and sound can be adapted in literary texts, for example the effects of stereotypical characters and settings, the playfulness of humour andand the use of hyperlink (ACELT1638)

  • making language choices and choosing particular language devices to achieve intended effects, for example building in a surprise or twist in the ending of a short story or final scene of a film
  • taking an existing short story, poem, play or speech in print form and creating a short visual text which is accompanied by a sound track containing music and sound effects, and which is intended to amuse audiences who are familiar with the original text
  • creating written interpretations of traditional and contemporary literature which employs devices like metaphor, symbol, allegory and myth, and evaluating the contribution of these devices to the interpretation of the text
  • creating written interpretations of traditional and contemporary poetry (for example sonnets and contemporary song lyrics) focusing on their use of symbol, myth, icons and imagery

English - Year 9 Achievement Standard

Receptive modes (listening, reading and viewing) By the end of Year 9, students analyse the ways that text structures can be manipulated for effect. They analyse and explain how images, vocabulary choices and language features distinguish the work of individual authors. They evaluate and integrate ideas and information from texts to form their own interpretations. They select evidence from texts to analyse and explain how language choices and conventions are used to influence an audience. They listen for ways texts position an audience. Productive modes (speaking, writing and creating) Students understand how to use a variety of language features to create different levels of meaning. They understand how interpretations can vary by comparing their responses to texts to the responses of others. In creating texts, students demonstrate how manipulating language features and images can create innovative texts. Students create texts that respond to issues, interpreting and integrating ideas from other texts. They make presentations and contribute actively to class and group discussions, comparing and evaluating responses to ideas and issues. They edit for effect, selecting vocabulary and grammar that contribute to the precision and persuasiveness of texts and using accurate spelling and punctuation.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - First Language Learner Pathway (L1) Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language Languages studied in the First Language Learner Pathway (L1) are typically used in spoken form as the language of everyday communication by whole communities across all generations. Typically, but not exclusively, L1 programs will occur on Country/Place and will have constant involvement from a variety of speakers from the community. A key expectation in the L1 pathway is that of students having opportunities to interact with Elders and particular places on Country/Place. Learners are typically Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander children who have learnt the language from their families as a first language and continue to use it naturally at home and play. Students may have varying skills in other languages, including varieties of English. The curriculum content and achievement standards in the First Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learnt as a first language. The curriculum content and achievement standards will need to be adapted when developing language-specific curricula, and will need to be modified for programs occuring off-Country. Students enter the early years of schooling with well-established skills in spoken forms of the language along with a growing knowledge of local community and culture. In addition they may have varying skills in other languages, including varieties of English. School is often the first place these children encounter written language as a systematic means of communication. Language learning and use As well as continuing to develop oracy, a key feature of the First Language Learner Pathway is the development of literacy and extending language use in additional domains, particularly relating to the school context. Children build a vocabulary for thinking and talking about school topics, routines and processes, and expand their knowledge and understanding by exploring Country/Place with Elders and community members and by engaging with stories and other texts in the language. Children learn about the concepts of kin, social groupings and how these are connected to the natural environment. They learn about their own songs, stories, dances and designs and their own place in the kinship system. From Foundation to Year 2 children are learning how to interact with people in new contexts, share with others, and participate in more structured routines and activities. They learn about school, teacher and community expectations in terms of ‘right’ behaviour and ‘right’ ways of talking. The curriculum builds on children’s interests and sense of enjoyment and curiosity, with an emphasis on active and experiential learning and confidence building. Creative play provides opportunities for using the language for purposeful interaction in some less familiar contexts. Imaginative activities, games, music and songs, movement and familiar routines provide essential scaffolding and relevant contexts for language development. Students are supported to use the language for different language functions and in different domains, such as asking and responding to questions on a range of topics, expressing feelings, following instructions, working together for a common purpose, and taking turns in games and simple shared learning experiences. They learn to recognise how the sounds of the language and its intonation are encoded in writing. They begin to understand how the language works, comparing and contrasting it with other known languages and learning how it fits into the diversity of regional and national languages. The transition from spoken to written language is scaffolded through shared exploration of simple texts and language features. Children progress from supported comprehension and use of a small number of high-frequency and personally significant sight words to more elaborated texts that take account of context, purpose and audience. They use grammatical, cultural and contextual cues to comprehend texts and engage in communicative interactions. They progress from writing by tracing and copying, to independently forming legible letters. Writing skills progress from the ability to label images and copy high-frequency words to co-construct simple texts using familiar vocabulary, language features and structures. Children begin to develop familiarity with different types of texts in different genres. Contexts of interaction Across Foundation to Year 2, learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, with access to Elders and other speakers living in the same community for additional enrichment and authentication of the learning experience. Interacting with Country/Place to explore the environment with Elders and other community members is essential to learning at all stages, but particularly in the early years, when learning is grounded in the familiar, and understanding of the role of language as lived experience is important. Texts and resources Country/Place and the community are the most important resources for learning and are the origin of most of the texts and communicative situations offered to learners. Children engage with a variety of spoken, visual, written and digital texts. They listen and respond to teacher talk, share ideas, and join in with song, dance, story, rap, as well as with various forms of play, performance, conversational exchanges and activities mediated by language. Printed and digital texts include stories, shared Big Books, wall charts and teacher-generated materials such as games, flashcards and items from the community and local environment. They engage with visual texts such as designs on body, bark and sand, and etchings and carvings on wood and rock. Level of support Learning is supported through the provision of experiences that are challenging but achievable with appropriate scaffolding and support. This involves modelling, monitoring and moderating by the teacher; provision of multiple and varied sources of input; opportunities for revisiting, recycling and reviewing; and continuous cueing, feedback, response and encouragement. Use of recount, experiencing and retelling in oral and written formats assists in establishing early literacy. The role of languages The language of study is the principal medium of instruction in First Language Learner Pathway classrooms, while other known languages play a complementary role, such as for translating and creating bilingual/multilingual texts.

Content description

Elaborations

Learn about and understand the concepts of kin, social groupings and relationships, and how these are connected to the natural environment

[Key concepts: identity, relationship, kinship, family terms; Key processes: identifying, categorising, representing, explaining, creating]

(ACLFWC010)

  • creating poster/kinship chart/tree depicting own family and labelling with appropriate kinship terms for immediate and extended family members
  • using sign language for kinship terms and immediate families (if appropriate)
  • identifying self as belonging to part of a family and/or social group, such as a footy group, representing relationships through drawing pictures, adding captions to photos or creating digital presentations
  • identifying skin names of self and immediate family members
  • recognising their own clans and other sub-groupings and the symbolic representation of these, for example, totems and personal relationships with plant/ animal species and Country/Place
  • talking about family names, given name/s, skin names and moiety as appropriate, for example, maternal versus paternal grandparents, presence or absence of birth order names, and other ways of referring to people
  • categorising names of students in the class into clans, moieties and other sub-groupings, and where appropriate their affiliations with the natural environment, for example, salt versus fresh water, north versus south wind
  • learning from Elders appropriate ways of interacting with others and behaving according to kin and other social groupings
  • identifying elements of their behaviours or relationships that mark their individual or community identity
  • inviting grandparents from different family groups to come and talk about family
  • identifying relationships and connections between themselves and other students in the group, considering the nature of groups and sub-groups within the school and larger community
  • creating family history/life stories, identifying values and practices that keep families strong, such as working together

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise that different words andforms are used to address and communicate with people according to relationship and situation

[Key concepts: kinship, context; Key processes: noticing, recognising, comparing]

(ACLFWU017)

  • noticing that different forms of address and kinship terms are used depending on the relationship between participants
  • recognising that the way a person is related to another affects how he or she speaks and behaves with that person, as in the case of mother-in-law talk or avoidance relationships, such as poison cousins
  • recognising that ways of speaking vary according to context and situation, for example, language used when interacting with peers during playground games is different to that used with the teaching team in school
  • recognising that language used in particular interactions can vary between cultural contexts, for example, the different use of kin categories in the language
  • learning to use a different tone and style of language with different people
  • recognising that there may be different languages spoken in the community which can be distinguished by listening carefully

Content description

Elaborations

Locate/ discover/identify key information about Country/Place and community by exploring Country/Place and listening to stories from Elders and community members

[Key concepts: Country/Place, natural environment, Indigenous knowledge, the past, community life, health and well-being; Key processes: listening, reading, mapping, reading Country/Place, exploring, observing, recording, describing, classifying]

(ACLFWC004)

  • listening and responding to Elders and community members telling stories about aspects of the past, for example, bush toys and children’s games, hunting, fishing and gathering food, how food was prepared and cooked, implements used, animals that were eaten, ways of travelling from place to place, kinds of dwellings, how water was found
  • describing and recording different weather and seasons of their Country/Place in a picture diary or a series of paintings, annotating them with changes that occur throughout a year, including the seasonal behaviour of animals and what plants grow in particular seasons
  • learning to read Country/Place with Elders’ guidance, for example, by looking for tell-tale signs such as animal tracks and fruit fall, migratory birds, turtle tracks, animal behaviour, fresh diggings around a lair
  • recognising and drawing and labelling different animal tracks
  • investigating/exploring Country/Place with Elders/community members or park rangers, for example, by identifying different trees, plants, animals and insects, making leaf and bark rubbings, observing how different bush foods grow and are used, observing different animal behaviour, such as hiding by camouflaging, taking photos or drawing and writing captions and comments to make a class book
  • observing and describing different plants, for example, parts of the plant, plant size and shape of leaves and seeds, where/how they grow
  • observing and describing animals/living creatures, how they move, where they live (for example, in burrows and nests), what they eat, naming body parts, how they reproduce
  • classifying animals, plants and natural objects from the environment, using appropriate cultural categories, for example, edible/non-edible, meat/non meat, salt water/fresh water, day/night animals, wood/rock, rough/smooth, hard/soft, things that live in trees, in water, plants that grow together/alone
  • identifying, naming, and labelling key places and topographical features such as creeks, springs, rocky outcrops, water sources, estuaries, reefs, desert landforms, using some location and directional terms such as up, down, near, north, south, east, west
  • describing the direction and location of familiar places (near and far, above and below, beside and opposite)
  • identifying and labelling some important places in the built environment, for example, dwellings, settlements, community store, health clinic, art centre, ranger station, school, places to play, roads and tracks, describing and explaining their purpose and role and who works there
  • naming and discussing key ceremonies and social and cultural events, the times of year at which they occur and associated activities in the community
  • viewing local photos, videos, books, IndigiTUBE, to find information about cultural practices such as musical instruments used, performance paraphernalia
  • recording how frequently/ for what purposes they visit particular places, representing information on a graph or table with teacher guidance
  • identifying, talking about and describing artefacts, describing how they are used, how they are made and maintained, what materials they are made from
  • labelling, drawing and matching inside and outside body parts
  • learning and using vocabulary and expressions related to healthy living and eating, personal hygiene and fitness

Content description

Elaborations

Participate in shared tasks and activities that involve following instructions, making things and cooperating with peers

[Key concepts: family, cooperation, play; Key processes: participating, active listening, following instructions, making, turn-taking]

(ACLFWC002)

  • listening to, remembering and following instructions from an Elder/community member, for example, how to make traditional tools or prepare traditional foods
  • collaborating with others in art and craft activities, for example, gathering and using traditional materials such as ochre, nuts, twigs, bark, seeds, shells, feathers; decorating musical instruments/artefacts; making bush toys
  • participating in traditional and contemporary games, tasks and activities that involve turn-taking, guessing, matching and choosing objects, bush tucker collecting, sand story telling
  • working collaboratively with peers and the teaching team, for example, to adapt and perform action songs, make a class Big Book, design posters with a health or behavioural message, create a display, create and perform an item for school assembly
  • practising personal skills such as active listening and showing self-discipline and respect for others in interactive group situations
  • using appropriate phrases and expressions for turn-taking in games and activities
  • grouping and sorting bush food such as meat, food grubs, artefacts, leaves and tools into appropriate cultural categories
  • giving directions, for example, to guide others to locations or through an obstacle course

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - First Language Learner Pathway (L1) Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages First Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of languages that may be learnt as an L1 in the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. By the end of Year 2, students interact with the teaching team, Elders, community members and each other to share information about family, friends, community activities and events. They use appropriate ways of talking, including terms of respect, forms of address and sign language. They participate in routine classroom exchanges and collaborative activities, such as pair, group and class discussions, asking and responding to questions and taking turns. They make relevant suggestions during class writing activities when the teacher is acting as a scribe. They identify key information about Country/Place under the guidance of Elders and community members and demonstrate this understanding by describing habitats, plants, animals and seasonal changes, by classifying plants, animals and natural objects into categories, and by naming and describing key social and cultural events. They respond to texts such as stories, songlines, dance and visual art through singing, dancing, drawing, action and movement, demonstrating understanding by identifying and describing characters, sequencing events, and retelling parts of the story. Students use familiar words and expressions to create and present shared stories, songs and performances, drawing on their own experiences and knowledge and providing details about characters or events. They make short presentations consisting of a few connected sentences on familiar and learned topics. They read aloud short shared texts with familiar vocabulary, high-frequency sight words and supportive images. They use knowledge of sounds and letters, high-frequency words, sentence boundary punctuation and directionality to help them make meaning when reading. Students use family terms and skin names for immediate family members as appropriate and demonstrate appropriate ways of interacting and behaving according to kinship structures and social groupings. They demonstrate understanding of connections between Country/Place and individuals and groups by identifying and naming features of Country/Place that belong to their own family and kinship groups. They identify their own links/cultural affiliations, for example, to stories, totems, dances and designs. Students link most sounds of the language to written symbols and conventions. They use knowledge of sound‒symbol relationships to read and recognise high-frequency words and use simple metalanguage to describe basic elements of language forms and structures. They recognise that messages in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages can be communicated in a number of ways, such as Elders’ story-telling or through song, dance, visual design and signing. Students know that different words and language forms are used to address and communicate with people according to relationship and situation. They recognise that there are many different languages spoken in their class, community and region. They describe how the language has been passed down from one generation to the next, and recognise that language use reflects where and how they live and what is important to them.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - First Language Learner Pathway (L1) Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 to 6  

Years 3 to 6 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language Languages studied in the First Language Learner Pathway (L1) are typically used in spoken form as the language of everyday communication by whole communities across all generations. Typically, but not exclusively, L1 programs will occur on Country/Place and will have constant involvement from a variety of speakers from the community. A key expectation in the L1 pathway is that of students having opportunities to interact with Elders and particular places on Country/Place. Learners are typically Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander children who have learnt the language from their families as a first language and continue to use it naturally at home and play. Students may have varying skills in other languages, including varieties of English. The curriculum content and achievement standards in the First Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learnt as a first language. The curriculum content and achievement standards will need to be adapted when developing language-specific curricula, and will need to be modified for programs occuring off-Country. Learners at this level are expanding their social networks, experiences and communicative repertoire in the language. They benefit from varied, activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other areas of learning. The curriculum ensures that learning experiences and activities are flexible enough to cater for learner variables while being appropriate for learners' general cognitive and social levels. Language learning and use Students interact with peers, the teaching team, Elders and community members in a variety of learning experiences and activities. They continue to build vocabulary that relates to a wider range of domains, such as curriculum areas that involve some specialised language use. Students engage in a range of listening activities and build oral proficiency through responding to rich language input and opportunities to engage in meaningful communicative activities. They follow instructions, exchange information and express ideas and feelings related to their immediate environment and personal worlds. They participate in shared tasks, performance and play. Students’ development of written literacy progresses from supported comprehension and use of high-frequency and personally significant sight words to more elaborated simple texts which take account of context, purpose and audience. The development of reading skills and textual knowledge is supported through interaction with a range of spoken, written, visual and multimodal texts, including sign language as appropriate. At upper primary level, learners use the language for a widening range of purposes: collaborating, creating, performing and responding to resources and experiences. They have greater control of vocabulary and grammatical resources and use an increasingly sophisticated range of non-verbal strategies to support communication. Shared learning activities develop social, cognitive and language skills and provide a context for purposeful language experience and experimentation. Oracy development includes listening to a range of varied language input from different sources and building more elaborated conversational and interactional skills. These include initiating and sustaining conversations, reflecting on and responding to others’ contributions, making appropriate responses and adjustments, and engaging in debate and discussion. Individual and group oral presentation and performance skills are developed through researching and organising information, structuring and resourcing presentation of content, and selecting appropriate language to engage a particular audience. At this level, there is focused attention on language structures and systems. Learners draw on more established grammatical and lexical resources to compose and comprehend more complex language. With support they build increasing cohesion and complexity into their writing in terms of both content and expression. They use ICT to support their learning in more independent and intentional ways and make comparisons between the language they are learning and other languages they speak or are learning, including English. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team. Additional enrichment and authentication of learning experience is provided through interactions with Elders and other speakers living in the community. Interacting with Country/Place and exploring the environment with Elders and other community members is essential to learning at all stages. Students may also have access to community facilities and functions, such as the health clinic, art centre, coast patrol, local interpretative centre, and the office of the park ranger or land council. Elders and community members may teach about cultural elements of language and communication, such as gender-differentiated roles, working separately with male and female students when appropriate. Students may have some access to speakers of the language or related languages in other communities and regions through digital technologies. Texts and resources Country/Place and the community are the most important resources for learning the language. They are the origin of most of the texts and communicative situations students engage with. Learners interact with a growing range of spoken, visual, written and digital texts, including photographs, maps, oral histories, community texts such as posters from health clinics, community notices, land-care programs, songs, raps, dances, stories, painting and visual design, music, video clips and films. Level of support While learners work more independently at this level, ongoing support is incorporated into task activity and the process of learning is supported by systematic feedback and review. Form-focused activities build student’s grammatical knowledge and support the development of accuracy and control in written language. Opportunities to use this knowledge in meaningful activities build communicative skills, confidence and fluency. Tasks are carefully scaffolded: teachers provide models and examples; introduce language, concepts and resources needed to manage and complete learning activities; make time for experimentation, drafting and redrafting; and provide support for self-monitoring and reflection. Discussion supports learning and develops children’s conceptual frame for talking about systems of language and culture. While learners are becoming more autonomous and independent at the upper primary years, ongoing support is still needed, including explicit instruction, structured modelling and scaffolding, and provision of appropriate stimulus materials and timely feedback. Learning experiences incorporate implicit form-focused language learning activities and examples of texts and tasks. The role of languages The language of study is the principal medium of instruction in First Language Learner Pathway classrooms. Other known languages play a complementary role, for example, used when translating, creating bilingual/multilingual texts or comparing and contrasting writing systems, language structures and language features and use.

Content description

Elaborations

Describe kinship relations as a system and explain its role in determining social behaviour

[Key concepts: identity, relationship, kinship, family terms, social groupings/sub-groupings, story, behaviour, ways of talking; Key processes: investigating, explaining, describing, categorising]

(ACLFWC032)

  • working with Elders to map community–wide links between families according to traditional kinship systems, for example, skin, clan, moieties, other social groupings
  • explaining how moieties, skin groups or other social groupings form patterns through the generations
  • investigating and explaining appropriate behaviours for different relationships, such as friends, boyfriends/girlfriends, right skin marriage partners and in-laws
  • identifying and categorising personal and family names, for example, names affiliated with the land, sea/water or sky, names belonging to a moiety or other social groupings
  • investigating and discussing the meanings of personal and family names and of other ways of referring to people
  • designing visual representations, such as concept maps, posters, slide presentations with captions, to identify and explain group memberships, for example, friendship, family, sporting, interest and community groups, discussing what such memberships mean to their sense of identity
  • using appropriate behaviours and ways of talking in specific kinship relationships, for example, using avoidance language, name substitution, respecting name/word taboos, averting gaze
  • talking about ways their community expresses elements of identity, for example, behaviours associated with sporting teams, coastal versus inland communities, community events
  • considering the role identity plays in contributing to individual, peer group and community health and well-being
  • identifying markers of identity that may be important across other cultures, for example, elements of language or behaviours associated with family, community, location, age or gender

Content description

Elaborations

Reflect on how a community’s ways of usingare shaped by values and beliefs

[Key concepts: Country/Place, cultural expression, transmission, value, belief, spirituality; Key processes: observing, making connections, discussing, investigating]

(ACLFWU043)

  • showing awareness that languages carry cultural ides and values, for example, through culture-specific words, styles of addressing people, use of silence, speech prohibitions, respect, land-language associations, and non-verbal communicative behaviours
  • identifying terms of address or expressions that reflect community values and traditions, for example, at ceremonies, during sorry business, when visiting other Countries, or when visiting significant sites on Country/Place
  • recognising/noticing how family and community values and behaviours, such as familiarity, mutual obligation, reciprocity, deference or respect and caring for Country/Place are conveyed in the language
  • recognising that the language has various social, spiritual and cultural functions in their community
  • recognising that in each culture there are general rules about what to say and do, when, where, with whom, and that these rules differ from culture to culture
  • comparing elements of communication, such as the role of silence or eye contact, in different cultural contexts and exchanges
  • understanding that people ‘read’ intercultural experiences in different ways depending on their own cultural perspectives, recognising the validity of different perspectives and questioning notions of ‘right’ or wrong’ ideas
  • investigating how their community expresses its relationship with the natural environment through language, for example, with seasons, stars, reef, rivers, waterholes, plants and animals
  • understanding that Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages are storehouses of cultural, environmental and social knowledge
  • recognising that song and song language play a central role as keeping-places of knowledge
  • understanding that the language has a rich oral literature, which recounts the important journeys and events associated with totemic ancestors/important Elders, and understanding that these stories also map the land and the values of the culture
  • understanding and discussing the importance of story and the role of storytelling in transmitting language and culture
  • discussing the fact that concepts may be culture-specific, for example, referencing how relationships are structured, how time and quantity are expressed, how elements such as land, sea/water and sky are viewed, spatial awareness
  • identifying how the language categorises things differently from English, for example, in relation to generic and specific words for plants and animals, such as ‘tree’ or ‘kangaroo’ and, considering reasons for such differences

Content description

Elaborations

Gather, organise and compare information from a range of sources relating to Country/Place, community and past and present ways of living

[Key concepts: past and present, natural environment, caring for Country/Place, social and cultural events, health and well-being; Key processes: enquiring, investigating, comparing, describing, tracking, mapping, measuring, charting, explaining, analysing]

(ACLFWC026)

  • listening to stories of the past from Elders and community members, for example, accounts of where they grew up, what they did, their way of life, where they visited, how they communicated, practices such as the use of smoke in healing and purification, funeral practices, what values were important, how knowledge was transmitted; making comparisons with their own experience and contemporary life and discussing how daily lives have changed
  • comparing traditional and contemporary roles in the community, for example, those of store keeper, nurse, teacher, park ranger, traditional healer and people responsible for Law, song and dance
  • examining and analysing a range of sources, such as photographs, maps and oral histories, to collect information about people, places and events in their community’s past and present to develop an annotated timeline or other visual representation of significant changes to community life, for example, contact history, modifications to water supply, establishment of the community store, clinic and school, introduction of currency, changing community and school policies with respect to language learning
  • comparing photographs that reflect changes from the past to the present in a specific environment or location, identifying elements of both change and continuity
  • creating charts, pictorial stories, maps, digital and oral presentations to represent and to explain elements of past times
  • describing the seasons, identifying and recording indicators of seasonal and weather changes, for example, behaviour of animals, reptiles, birds, insects, plants; changes in wind direction, charting different forms of plants during the seasons, such as flowering, fruiting, shedding of bark, night sky and star formations; developing their own (class) seasonal calendar
  • measuring daily meteorological data, for example, temperature, humidity build up, rainfall, wind direction, sun intensity, times of tides, and constructing charts, column and picture graphs to record gathered information
  • investigating and describing how seasons and weather and availability of natural water sources affect people’s lives and practices
  • researching information about practices that care for Country/Place, for example, waterhole management and protection, fire management, species management
  • observing and reading signs of Country/Place, such as the presence of bees, changing colours of bark, different tracks, tides, seaweed dumps, burnt ground, regeneration of vegetation, special (warning) calls of birds, ripening of fruit, changes in the night sky
  • using appropriate cultural categories to classify different types of plants and parts of plants and their uses, for example, what different parts of plants are used for, which parts/plants are poisonous, presenting findings in chart, poster, table, graphic or digital form
  • undertaking plant and animal surveys, for example, by recording details of plants that grow at school, in the community, on the side of the road, in the bush, of animals found in communities, on the roads, in the uplands, and of their habitats
  • observing and presenting information through photos, captions and commentary on how different bush foods grow in different ways, for example, underground, on a vine or on a bush
  • investigating with Elders some common bush medicines, talking about how they are used for different purposes, recording details through photos, pictures, diagrams, captions, descriptions and commentary
  • making and recording observations of how living things such as insects, frogs or plants develop through their life cycles, recognising the effect on these cycles of different environmental factors
  • mapping Country/Place in various forms, for example, on paper, in sand or mud, labelling key topographical features and infrastructure, key community facilities, indicating distances and describing Country/Place from a birds-eye view
  • creating a calendar of key social and cultural events and activities in the community, for example, important celebrations, football matches, dog vaccinations, cattle mustering, annual school dances
  • visiting the arts centre and learning how to make and decorate artefacts and make paint
  • investigating the languages used and roles played by people in different community contexts, such as the store manager, administrator, arts coordinator, health worker, ranger, traditional healer, tour guide, mechanic, interpreter, Law person, cattle ringer
  • surveying peers and community members on various topics, for example, favourite television programs, football teams, sports or bands, after school activities/time spent in those activities, languages spoken; presenting results in chart, graph or digital format
  • conducting face-to-face or online interviews or surveys with peers, family members or community contacts to compare accounts of similar experiences
  • naming and explaining inside and outside body parts, for example, stomach, blood, bone
  • reading/viewing/ listening and obtaining information from community texts such as posters from health clinics, school magazines or community notices
  • comparing and surveying healthy ways of eating, identifying what is available from the community store and which healthy foods they like to eat
  • extracting key points from a range of spoken, written or digital texts such as posters, charts or brochures on topics such as health, well-being and cultural safety, and discussing key messages
  • keeping a diary of food consumption over a week, classifying types of food consumed, analysing how much bush food is in their daily diet
  • visiting the health clinic to gather information about services the clinic provides and general health issues

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - First Language Learner Pathway (L1) Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 to 6 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages First Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of languages that may be learnt as an L1 in the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. By the end of Year 6, students use spoken and written language to share and compare experiences, personal perspectives and points of view on topics related to their immediate environment and personal, cultural and social worlds. They use appropriate ways of talking when interacting in different social situations and with different social groups, and apply principles and protocols of cultural safety when engaging with cultural property. Students participate in class discussion, asking questions to clarify content and to offer opinions and ideas and taking into account other perspectives. They locate, classify and compare information from a range of sources relating to Country/Place, community, culture, environment and past and present ways of living. They interact with Country/Place under the guidance of Elders and older family members, making and recording observations in different formats, reading signs, classifying natural objects according to Indigenous cultural categories and mapping key topographical features. They respond to stories, songs, dances and artistic expression by describing how events, characters and settings are depicted through sound, image and performance, by interpreting messages conveyed through these forms and by sharing opinions, responses and reactions. They understand that ownership of songs, stories, dances and designs is determined by traditional kinship and other social groupings, as well as by place, History and story. Students create, with the support of models, a variety of spoken, written and multimodal texts for different purposes and audiences. They use descriptive and expressive language to write narratives and expressive and imaginative texts, and to recount experiences. They use specialised language to present information on specific topics, for example by presenting research-based factual reports. They use procedural language, for example to explain how to prepare and cook food, how to make tools, decorate artefacts or play a game. They apply their grammatical and vocabulary knowledge and their understanding of spelling and punctuation conventions in a range of sentence and text types. They translate familiar texts, identifying and explaining culture-specific concepts and expressions. They create bilingual/multilingual texts for the school community on a range of topics. They explain the family basis of the kin and skin systems and their role in determining social behaviour. They elaborate their own positions and identities within these systems, explaining their roles and responsibilities with respect to caring for family, land/sea/water. They explain links between ceremonies, people, stories and ancestral areas of Country/Place. They identify places which have special significance to particular sub-groups in the community and which represent special bonds between people, place and story. Students know that the language has its own rules for pronunciation, spelling and grammar and they apply this knowledge to predict the sound, spelling and meaning of new words and to create their own texts. They read aloud with developing fluency and intonation. Students use metalanguage to explain language features and elements, using appropriate grammatical terms and making comparisons with English and other known languages. They explain how language use is adjusted to suit different contexts, situations and relationships, for example, registers of deference and respect, avoidance language, speaking to the side, indirect references, generational differences and the use of silence. They provide examples of how languages change over time by identifying words borrowed from English and other languages, including words that are similar to or borrowed from neighbouring Indigenous languages. Students understand that Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages are in various states of maintenance, development and revival and can explain some historical reasons for this. They recognise the importance of maintaining and strengthening Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages for their community and for the broader Australian community and describe ways that language and culture have been maintained and strengthened in their community. They reflect on their own ways of communicating, discussing how these might be interpreted by others.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - First Language Learner Pathway (L1) Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 to 10  

Years 7 to 10 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language Languages studied in the First Language Learner Pathway (L1) are typically used in spoken form as the language of everyday communication by whole communities across all generations. Typically, but not exclusively, L1 programs will occur on Country/Place and will have constant involvement from a variety of speakers from the community. A key expectation in the L1 pathway is that of students having opportunities to interact with Elders and particular places on Country/Place. Learners are typically Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander children who have learnt the language from their families as a first language and continue to use it naturally at home and in social situations. Students may have varying skills in other languages, including varieties of English. The curriculum content and achievement standards in the First Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learnt as a first language. They will need to be adapted when developing language-specific curricula, and will need to be modified for programs occuring off-Country. At this level, students bring a range of learning strategies to their language learning. They are increasingly aware of the world beyond their own and are engaging with broader issues of youth and society, land and environment, education and identity, while establishing a balance between increasing personal independence and social responsibilities. They are considering their future pathways and choices, including how their own language could be part of these. Language learning and use Learners work collaboratively and independently, exploring different modes and genres of communication, with particular reference to their current social, cultural and communicative interests. They pool language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They create and present more complex and varied texts, for example, shared stories, songs/raps, blogs, reports and journal entries, and plan, draft and present imaginative and informative texts. They use vocabulary and grammar with increasing accuracy and complexity, drafting and editing written work to improve structure and to clarify meaning. Learners continue to expand their vocabulary to domains beyond their personal experience and interests. They use a range of grammatical structures and language features to convey more complex ideas and experiences. They use descriptive and expressive language to create particular effects and to engage interest. They make connections between texts and cultural contexts, identifying how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in language and how language choices influence how people, issues and circumstances are represented. They are increasingly aware of the nature of the relationship between languages and cultures, noticing how family, community values and behaviours, such as familiarity, mutual obligation, reciprocity, respect, caring for Country/Place, are conveyed in the language. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, while additional enrichment and authentication of the learning experience is provided through access to Elders and other speakers living in the community. Interacting with Country/Place to explore the environment and learn about Country/Place with Elders and other community members is essential to the learning of students at all stages. Elders and community members may teach about gender-differentiated roles as encapsulated in language, working separately with male and female students as appropriate. Students may also have some access to speakers in other regions through digital technologies and may have opportunities to participate in school excursions or camps. Texts and resources Country/Place and the community are the most important resources for learning. They are the origin of most of the texts and communicative situations that learners engage with. Learners interact with a broad range of spoken, visual, written and digital texts, such as photographs, maps, oral histories, community texts such as posters from health clinics, community notices, songs, raps, dances, stories, painting and visual design, music, video clips and films. They may also have access to community facilities and functions, such as the health clinic, art centre, coast patrol, local interpretative centre, community interpreters, and the office of the park ranger or land council. Level of support While learners at this level are less reliant on teacher support during interactions, continued provision of rich language input and modelled language are needed to consolidate and sustain their learning of the language in its extended spoken and written forms. The teacher provides both implicit and explicit modelling and scaffolding in relation to meaningful language use in a range of contexts, and explicit instruction and explanation in relation to language structures, grammatical functions, vocabulary and abstract cultural concepts. Opportunities for learners to discuss, clarify, rehearse and apply their knowledge are critical in consolidating language capabilities and in developing autonomy. Learners are encouraged to self-monitor, for example, by keeping records of feedback and through peer support, and to self-review and adjust language in response to their experiences in different contexts. The role of languages The language of study is the medium of instruction in First Language Learner Pathway classrooms. Other known languages play a complementary role, for example, when translating and creating bilingual/multilingual texts, and when comparing and contrasting writing systems, language structures, and language features and usage.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and explain sound patterns in the spoken language, representing these patterns with an expanding repertoire of written symbols and conventions

[Key concepts: sound system, writing system, intonation, rhythm, punctuation, conventions; Key processes: listening, recognising, analysing, comparing, reading aloud, transcribing]

(ACLFWU058)

  • reading aloud extended text to show flow of ideas
  • understanding the conventions adopted when citing others in language written for wide readership, and different ways of referencing these
  • editing their own texts for word-choice, spelling, grammar and punctuation
  • recognising how quotation marks may be used to mark parts of text as having special status, for example, quoted (direct) speech, and experimenting with the use of this device in own writing
  • comparing speech-sound constraints in different languages, for example, sets of vowel and consonant phonemes, allowable combinations of sounds, rules for word stress
  • describing the articulatory basis of speech sounds in their language(s)
  • developing a metalanguage to describe and talk about sounds and phonology, for example, place and manner of articulation, intonation, and word and sentence stress
  • understanding the major place of articulation categories in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages, for example, peripheral, laminal, apical, and their realisation across different languages and regions in Australia
  • recognising phonological affinity in related languages that use differing spelling systems
  • using their expanding knowledge of alphabetic conventions to transcribe speech sounds, syllables and words from a wide range of languages
  • comparing published phonology charts for a variety of different languages, noting the associated writing systems
  • transcribing complete texts of spoken language, using a range of alphabetic and punctuation conventions, supported by their grammatical and vocabulary knowledge of the language
  • comparing and explaining the internal consistency of spelling systems for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages and English

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - First Language Learner Pathway (L1) Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 to 10 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages First Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learned as an L1 in the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. By the end of Year 10, students use written and spoken language to communicate with the teaching team, peers, Elders, community members and others in a range of settings and for a range of purposes. They use language to access and discuss information on a broad range of social, environmental, educational, cultural and community issues. They summarise and justify points of view, and respond appropriately to the opinions and perspectives of others using reflective language. They use strategies to initiate, sustain and extend discussion by inviting opinions, elaborating responses, clarifying and justifying statements with supporting evidence. When interacting in different social situations and with different social groups, students use appropriate ways of talking, for example, using appropriate speech styles with respected kin or authority figures and in situations involving seniority and status, and more informal styles with friends and close family members. They use respectful language to negotiate, problem-solve and to manage different opinions and perspectives and to reach shared decisions in collaborative tasks. Students investigate, analyse and evaluate information from a range of sources and perspectives on topics and issues related to their Country/Place and community; they present their findings using different modes of presentation to suit different audiences and contexts. They employ effective presentation strategies, including degrees of directness and length of utterance appropriate to the situation, and an appropriate restatement in accordance with spoken norms or developing written styles. They summarise main ideas and include varying amounts of supporting detail. They apply appropriate cultural norms and protocols when learning, using, recording and researching Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages, and when engaging with cultural property. Students respond to stories, songs, dances and forms of artistic expression by describing main ideas, key themes and sequences of events and explaining how these relate to land and water, sky and weather, plants and animals, and social and ecological relationships. Students create a range of informative, persuasive, and procedural texts, as well as texts based on real and imagined experiences, in written, spoken and multimodal forms, such as reviews, reports, stories songs, conversations, brochures, blogs, and procedures for traditional activities. They use appropriate vocabulary and grammatical forms to link and sequence ideas to form meaningful texts, for example, serialisation, connectives, embedding; and apply typological conventions such as headings, paragraphs, fonts, formatting. Students apply culturally appropriate protocols and ethical behaviour to create, transcribe, translate and interpret texts, providing alternative expressions when equivalence is not possible and explaining elements such as language choice and variation due to dialect or register. They analyse and compare translations and interpretations of texts, explaining factors that may have influenced the translation/interpretation. They understand their role as contemporary documenters and users of the language, for example, by interviewing Elders and transcribing stories and placing them in safe-keeping places. Students explain how the kinship system maintains and regulates social relationships, and provide examples of how connections between Law, Lore, story, ceremony, visual design, people, and Country/Place are reflected in individual and community behaviour. They describe how individuals and groups affirm connections to areas of land and water and to individual places. They explain the rights and obligations associated with these connections and how these contribute to individual and social identity and a patterning of community roles. Students identify the relationship between language, culture and identity, describing how personal and community identity are expressed through cultural expression and language use. They reflect on their own ways of communicating, discussing how these might be interpreted by others. Students use metalanguage to describe isolated speech sounds and the phonology of languages as a whole, and to analyse a range of grammatical structures in the language. They edit their own work and use appropriate conventions to cite others and to reference external information. They explain variations in language use that reflect social and cultural contexts, purposes and relationships, different registers of use (for example, mother-in-law language), intergenerational differences, and constraints that guide social interactions, such as word avoidance and substitution. They provide examples of how languages and cultures change continuously due to contact with one another and in response to new needs and ideas, popular culture, media and new technologies. Students make comparisons between the ecologies of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages and indigenous languages in other countries, in areas such as language policy, language rights, language loss, advocacy and reform, language revival and multilingualism. Students identify factors that serve to maintain and strengthen language use such as intergenerational collaboration and transmission, programs and initiatives in school and community, and explain associated challenges. They demonstrate their role as contemporary documenters of the language, for example, by interviewing Elders and transcribing stories, reminiscences, advice, ways of doing things, rules for living, and by placing documents in safe keeping places.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language The Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) provides opportunities for students to study Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages being revived by their owners or custodians and which are in various stages of revitalisation, renewal and reclamation. LR covers a much broader range of language types and ecologies than either L1 or L2, and the vast majority of Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages are included in the LR category. Schools offering the Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) will most likely be located broadly within the geographical region of the language and culture, sometimes in towns and cities, other times in rural and remote regions. Classes will likely include students who relate closely to the language and culture, as well as students with varying degrees of affiliation with the language and culture, and some students who have no connections with either the language or culture. A key expectation in the LR pathway is that of students having opportunities to interact with Elders and particular places on Country/Place. The Language Revival Learner Pathway draws on the Australian Indigenous Languages Framework (AILF) and takes into account key variables such as: how much is known about and documented for the language; the extent to which it is languages used or remembered, ranging from languages no longer spoken (owners often use the term ‘sleeping’) to those spoken fluently by members of the older generations; and the extent to which it has been reintroduced into the community of owners and custodians. These variables give rise to the following broad categories of language revival: Language Revitalisation : where there are fluent L1 speakers (typically members of the older generation) but where the intergenerational transmission of the language has been interrupted. Younger generations may understand some of the language and may use some words and phrases but do not speak it as their first language. Examples of revitalisation languages include Walmajarri in the Kimberley, Yindjibarndi in the Pilbara, Meriam in the Torres Strait, Dyirbal in north-eastern Queensland, Wubuy (Nunggubuyu) in Arnhem Land, and Adnyamathanha (Yura Ngawarla) in the Flinders Ranges. Language Renewal : where there are a number of adult speakers who use the language to varying degrees in the community, but not ‘right through’, and where there are other language resources to draw upon. Examples of languages being renewed include Noongar in south-west Western Australia, Gumbaynggirr on the north coast of New South Wales, Ngarrindjeri on the Lower Murray Lakes in South Australia, Djabugay in the Atherton Tablelands in northern Queensland, and Yugambeh in southern Queensland. Language Reclamation : where language revival, by necessity, relies primarily on historical documentation of the language in the absence of active community knowledge of it. Examples of reclamation languages include Kaurna from Adelaide, Narungga from the Yorke Peninsula, Dharuk or Eora (Iyora) from Sydney, Yuwibara from central Queensland, Wemba-Wemba and Woiwurrung from Victoria, and Awabakal from the Newcastle area in New South Wales. A number of factors and variables will need to be considered when planning for a language revival curriculum or program, and further information on these is presented in the context statement for this pathway and in the section Using the Framework. Children enter the early years of schooling with established communication skills in one or more languages and varying degrees of acquisition of early literacy. Learning typically focuses on learners’ immediate world of family, home, school, friends and local environment. They are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Language learning and use The language is learnt in parallel with English language and literacy. Learning in the two areas progresses at very different levels, but each supports and enriches the other. As the program is likely to be on Country/Place, links can be made to local places of significance, local families, and local histories. The language is used as much as possible in classroom interactions, routines and activities, supported by the use of visual and concrete materials, gestures and body language. At this stage, there is a focus on play and imaginative activities, games, music, movement and familiar routines, which provide scaffolding and context for language development. Oral language is developed through listening to the sounds, shapes and patterns of the language, through activities such as rhymes, songs, clapping and action games, and through imitating and repeating sounds in aural texts and as modelled by the teaching team, visiting Elders and community speakers. Learners experiment with simple formulaic expressions, single-idea phrases and with one- or two-word responses to prompts and cues. As they progress to using language for interactions such as greetings, asking for help, talking about self, friends and family, or asking and answering questions, they notice that language behaves differently in different situations. Creative play provides opportunities for exploring these differences and for using language for purposeful interaction. Students learn about Country/Place and community by interacting with Elders and community members, by exploring Country/Place, and by engaging with stories, songs and other texts such as videos, maps, and pictures. They learn about the concepts of kin and social groupings. Students learn to use appropriate respect terms and to demonstrate respectful and appropriate behaviour when interacting with Elders, community speakers and community texts. Learners for whom the language is their heritage language develop a stronger sense of their own group and individual identity through the study of the language and culture. Students learn to recognise letters that represent the sounds of the language. They write by tracing and copying, forming letters legibly. They learn to read and write words and sentences independently, using modelled language, for example, matching pictures with single words, labels and captions. The use of repetition and recycling in instruction helps children to identify high-frequency words and simple phrases and to recognise the purpose and intention of simple texts. Students begin to understand how the language works, and compare it with English and other known languages. They understand its place in the context of broader regional and national language diversity. They learn about their role in developing resources for the language, for example by working with the community language team to create new games and songs in language, understanding how such efforts support the language to grow. Contexts of interaction Across Foundation to Year 2, learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, supplemented by some access to Elders and others affiliated with the language for additional enrichment and authentication of the learning experience. Interacting with Country/Place and exploring the environment with Elders and other community members is essential to language learning at all stages, but is particularly important during this early establishment phase, when learning is grounded in the familiar and understanding of language as lived experience is so important. Texts and resources Country/Place and its associated community are the most important resources for learning. They are the origin of most of the texts children engage with. Texts include a variety of spoken, visual, written and digital resources, which are short, clearly structured, and supported by visuals and paralinguistic elements such as tone of voice, facial expression, body gesture. They include repetition and recycling of structures and vocabulary. Children listen and respond to teacher talk, share ideas and join in with songs, stories and different forms of play, performance, conversations and other language-mediated activities. Print and digital texts include word lists, place names, stories, shared Big Books, songs, photos, videos, environmental maps and wall charts. Teacher-generated materials include games and items from the community and local environment. Some texts involve English or another community language in a complementary role, filling in for items or expressions that have not yet been reconstituted in the language. Other texts will be bilingual, with no mixing of languages. Level of support Learning is supported via the provision of experiences that are challenging but achievable with appropriate scaffolding and support. This involves modelling, monitoring and moderating by the teacher; provision of multiple and varied sources of input; opportunities for revisiting, recycling and reviewing learned language; and continuous cueing, feedback, response and encouragement. The role of languages Learners are encouraged to use the language whenever possible in class interactions and daily routines with the teaching team, Elders and community members. Maximal use of the language will increase learners’ language proficiency and enhance the language revival process. English and other known languages are used for explanation and discussion, allowing learners to talk about differences and similarities they notice between the language and their first language(s) and culture(s), to ask questions about language and culture, to consider how they feel when they hear or use the language, and to talk about how they view different languages and the people who speak them. This introduction to the ‘meta’ dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to consider different perspectives and ways of being as mediated by language. For revival languages that are at the ‘beginning’ end of the revival spectrum, English or another community language might be used in a complementary fashion, for example, to fill in for missing words or expressions. Alternatively, language owners and the community in general may decide to side-step these gaps altogether, thus avoiding the need to use other languages for these purposes.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise that different words andforms are used to address and communicate with people according to relationship and context

[Key concepts: kinship, context; Key processes: noticing, recognising]

(ACLFWU145)

  • noticing that different forms of address and kinship terms are used depending on the relationship between participants
  • recognising that the way someone is related to others affects how he or she speaks to them
  • recognising that ways of speaking vary according to context and situation, for example, language used when interacting with peers during playground games is different to that used with the teaching team and with visiting Elders/community members
  • recognising that language used in particular interactions can vary between cultural contexts, for example, the use of titles in English compared to kin categories in the language

Content description

Elaborations

Discover key information about Country/Place by exploring Country/Place and listening to stories from Elders and community members

[Key concepts: natural and built environment, community life, Indigenous knowledge; Key processes: listening, observing, identifying, sorting, matching, labelling]

(ACLFWC133)

  • discovering places in the local area that have Indigenous names, such as streets, suburbs, parks, rivers, public institutions
  • visiting Country/Place to identify and name key topographical features, for example, creeks, springs, rocky outcrops, estuaries, reefs, desert landforms, taking photos and labelling them to create a class book
  • listening to Elders/community members sharing knowledge about Country/Place, identifying and recording key words and vocabulary
  • identifying, naming and labelling salient features of the built environment, for example, dwellings, public buildings, school, places to play, ports and roads
  • recording the weather and seasons of the Country/Place throughout the year in a picture diary or through a series of captioned paintings, including the seasonal behaviour of animals and what plants grow in particular seasons
  • naming, labelling and sorting into culturally appropriate categories elements from the environment such as bush foods, animals, plants and natural objects, classifying in terms of distinctions such as, edible/non-edible, meat/non meat, salt water/fresh water, day/night animals, rough/smooth, hard/ soft,
  • learning to read Country/Place with Elders’ guidance by looking for signs such as animal tracks and fruit fall, migratory birds, turtle tracks, animal behaviour, fresh diggings around a lair, appearance of whales
  • locating specific words and familiar phrases in texts such as charts, lists, photos, maps, and using the information to complete guided oral and written tasks
  • naming, labelling, drawing and matching outside body parts
  • learning and using vocabulary and expressions related to healthy living and eating

Content description

Elaborations

Participate in guided group activities, such as games, songs and simple tasks, using movement and gestures to support understanding and to convey meaning

[Key concepts: cooperation, play; Key processes: turn-taking, matching, choosing, cooperating, following instructions]

(ACLFWC131)

  • participating in games, tasks and activities that involve turn taking, guessing, matching and choosing objects using modelled questions and responses
  • participating in action games and songs by matching actions to words
  • following instructions by moving around or locating objects in the classroom
  • accompanying Elders to gather traditional materials, such as nuts, twigs, bark, seeds, shells for use in craft related language activities
  • working collaboratively on a class performance or activity
  • working collaboratively to adapt and perform action songs, for example, by changing lyrics, substituting words and phrases based on modelled patterns, rehearsing and performing songs with appropriate gestures and actions
  • grouping and sorting natural objects from Country/Place, for example, leaves, stones, shells according to culturally appropriate categories

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages LR pathway are generalised in order to cater for the wide range of languages which may be learnt as an LR within the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Languages. The Achievement Standards in the Language Revival Learner Pathway will be shaped by the current progress of language revival for a particular language, and by the amount of vocabulary and variety of language structures available for teaching and learning. By the end of Year 2, students interact with the teaching team, Elders and community members to talk about themselves and family, using familiar modelled language and gestures. They use appropriate protocols when interacting with Elders and community speakers, such as appropriate forms of address, terms of respect and behaviour. They use movement, gestures and modelled questions and responses to participate in guided group activities, for example, collaborating to adapt and perform action songs. They interact in familiar classroom exchanges, using routine classroom language, movement, gesture and action, for example when requesting objects, responding to simple questions, following instructions. They identify key information about Country/Place, under the guidance of Elders and community members. They use simple statements, gestures and written captions to demonstrate their understanding of Country/Place, for example, by naming bush foods, animals, plants and natural objects, and by classifying and labelling these into culturally appropriate categories. They identify places in the local area which have names in the language. They respond to texts such as stories, songs, dance and visual art through singing, miming, play-acting, drawing, action and movement. They demonstrate their understanding by identifying key animals, birds and other characters or by retelling/describing elements of images, performances or stories. Students use familiar words, patterns and support materials to create and present shared stories, songs and performances. They translate and explain the meaning of symbols, words, simple phrases and gestures used in everyday contexts and situations. They create simple bilingual texts for the classroom environment. They identify markers of their own identity, such as family, school/class membership and language/s spoken, and compare these to the importance of Place, family and relationships in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities. Students identify similarities and differences in the ways people communicate and behave in different languages and cultures Students are familiar with most sounds in the target language and can link these to written symbols and writing conventions. They use metalanguage to describe basic structures of the language, recognising that some elements may have fallen into disuse and be unknown today. They understand that messages in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages can be communicated in a number of ways, such as Elders’ story-telling, or through song, dance and visual design. Students identify elements of the kinship system when appropriate, and recognise that Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples have their own personal relationships with Place, natural species and phenomena. They identify which stories belong to which natural features, including animals and plants. They know that different words are used to address and communicate with different people, depending on relationship and situation. They identify words in the language that have been borrowed from other languages. They recognise that many different languages are spoken at their school, in their local community, and in other parts of Australia. They identify how language use reflects where and how they live and what is important to them. Students identify the importance of learning Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages, including the benefits to communities of language revival. They recognise that new words can be formed from within the language itself and work with the community language team to build resources for the language, such as new games and songs.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 to 6  

Years 3 to 6 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language The Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) provides opportunities for students to study Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages being revived by their owners or custodians and which are in various stages of revitalisation, renewal and reclamation. LR covers a much broader range of language types and ecologies than either L1 or L2, and the vast majority of Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages are included in the LR category. Schools teaching the Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) will most likely be located broadly within the geographical region of the language and culture, sometimes in towns and cities, at other times in rural and remote regions. Classes will likely include students who relate closely to the language and culture, students with varying degrees of affiliation with the language and culture, and students who have no connections to either the language or culture. A key expectation in the LR pathway is that of students having opportunities to interact with Elders and particular places on Country/Place. The Language Revival Learner Pathway draws on the Australian Indigenous Languages Framework (AILF) and takes into account key variables such as: how much is known about and documented for the language; the extent to which it is used or remembered, ranging from no longer being spoken (owners often use the term ‘sleeping’) to being spoken fluently by members of the older generations; and the extent to which the language has been reintroduced into the community of owners and custodians. These variables give rise to the following broad categories of language revival: Language Revitalisation: where there are fluent L1 speakers (typically members of the older generation) but the intergenerational transmission of the language has been interrupted. Younger generations may understand some of the language and may use some words and phrases but do not speak it as their first language. Examples of revitalisation languages include Walmajarri in the Kimberley, Yindjibarndi in the Pilbara, Meriam in the Torres Strait, Dyirbal in north-eastern Queensland, Wubuy (Nunggubuyu) in Arnhem Land, and Adnyamathanha (Yura Ngawarla) in the Flinders Ranges. Language Renewal: where there are a number of adult speakers who use the language to varying degrees in the community, but not ‘right through’, and where other language resources are drawn upon. Examples of languages being renewed include Noongar in south-west Western Australia, Gumbaynggirr on the north coast of New South Wales, Ngarrindjeri on the Lower Murray Lakes in South Australia, Djabugay in the Atherton Tablelands in northern Queensland, and Yugambeh in southern Queensland. Language Reclamation: where language revival, by necessity, relies primarily on historical documentation of the language in the absence of active community knowledge of it. Examples of reclamation languages include Kaurna from Adelaide, Narungga from the Yorke Peninsula, Dharuk or Eora (Iyora) from Sydney, Yuwibara from central Queensland, Wemba-Wemba and Woiwurrung from Victoria, and Awabakal from the Newcastle area in New South Wales. A number of factors and variables will need to be considered when planning for a language revival curriculum or program, and further information on these is presented in the context statement for this pathway and in the section Using the Framework. At this level children are developing awareness of their social worlds and of their membership of various groups. They are widening their social networks, experiences, and communicative repertoires, and gaining greater awareness of the world around them. They benefit from varied activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other learning areas. Language learning and use Learners interact with peers, the teaching team, Elders and community members in a variety of learning experiences and activities, using as much language as possible and incorporating sign language as appropriate. Learners use formulaic phrases to participate in classroom routines, presentations and structured conversations. They respond to teacher-generated questions about texts, participate in games, and follow instructions and procedures. They focus on aspects of their personal worlds and are introduced to content related to the Country/Place and language community. The development of oral proficiency relies on rich language input. Learners engage in a lot of listening, developing active-listening and comprehension skills by using contextual, grammatical, phonic and non-verbal cues. They extend their oral fluency by focusing on sentence-level intonation and stress, including elements of sign language as appropriate. Learners participate in shared and guided reading and learn to apply their knowledge of key words and textual features to predict the meaning of unfamiliar language. They use modelled language to create new texts. They require opportunities to extend their language use, for example, by connecting sentences and expanding vocabulary, to the extent made possible by the resources available in the revival language. Learners are expanding their knowledge of vocabulary and sentence construction. They develop metalanguage for describing additional aspects of the target language and exploring how it works. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, with additional enrichment and authentication of the learning experience provided through access to Elders and other speakers living in the same community. Interacting with Country/Place to explore the environment and learn about Country/Place with Elders and other community members is essential to learning the language. Students may also have access to community centres, such as interpretative museums or art and language centres. Texts and resources Country/Place and the community are the most important resources for learning and are the origin of most of the texts children engage with. Learners interact with a growing range of spoken, visual, written and digital texts that use as much language as possible. These include historical documents, photographs, maps, songs, raps, performance, stories, local environmental and social programs, painting and visual design. Additional teacher-generated materials include games and items from the community and local environment. Some texts will include the use of English or another community language in a complementary role, for example by filling in for items or expressions that have not yet been reconstituted in the language. Other texts will be bilingual, without mixing languages. Level of support The primary source of support for learners is the teaching team, who provide instruction, explanation, examples, modelled language use, repetition, reinforcement, and feedback on student work. Tasks and activities are carefully scaffolded and resourced, with sufficient time allowed for experimentation, drafting and redrafting. Learners are provided with opportunities for practice and with guidance in using dictionaries, word charts, vocabulary lists and historical documents. The role of languages Learners are encouraged to use the language whenever and to the extent possible in class interactions and daily routines with the teaching team, Elders and community members. Maximal use of the language will increase learners’ development of language proficiency and enhance the process of language revival. English and other known languages are used for explanation and discussion, allowing learners to talk about differences and similarities they notice between the language and their first language(s) and culture(s), to ask questions about language and culture, to consider how they feel when they hear or use the language, and to talk about how they view different languages and the people who speak them. This introduction to the ‘meta’ dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to consider different perspectives and ways of being as mediated by language. For those revival languages that are at the ‘beginning’ end of the revival spectrum, English or another community language might be used in a complementary fashion, for example, to fill in for missing words or expressions. Alternatively, language owners and the community in general may decide to side-step these gaps altogether, thus avoiding the need to use other languages.

Content description

Elaborations

Gather, record and classify information from a range of sources from Country/Place, historical documents and contemporary resources

[Key concepts: community life, leisure, environment, Indigenous knowledge, health, well-being; Key processes: identifying researching, compiling, presenting, tabulating, categorising, giving directions]

(ACLFWC155)

  • finding out the origins of Indigenous names, for example, of streets, city parks, rivers, public institutions, social programs in their area
  • labelling, ordering and classifying natural objects from the environment according to Indigenous taxonomies
  • obtaining information from a variety of sources about the natural environment, for example, by listening to visiting Elder/community members, reading, viewing, consulting historical resources and photos, and presenting findings in chart, poster, table, graphic or digital form
  • reading, viewing or listening to simple texts such as posters, signs, historical documents, word lists, answering questions by selecting from options and filling in gaps
  • viewing a demonstration, for example, of cooking bush tucker, cooking in an earth oven, and recording key words/phrases related to processes associated with the collection and preparation of food
  • surveying peers and community members on different topics, for example, favourite television programs, video games, foods, football teams, sports or bands, after school activities/time spent in those activities, languages spoken; and presenting results in chart, graph or digital formats
  • labelling, drawing and matching inside and outside body parts
  • observing and reading signs of Country/Place with the guidance of Elders/community speakers, for example, the presence of bees, dragonflies, changing colours of bark, different tracks, tides, seaweed dumps, regeneration of vegetation, special (warning) calls of birds, turtle mating, ripening of fruit, changes in the night sky; and recording these details through photos, pictures, diagrams, captions, simple descriptions and commentaries
  • classifying different types of plants/parts of plants and their uses, for example, what different parts are used for or which are poisonous, presenting findings in chart, poster, table, graphic or digital form
  • mapping Country/Place in various forms, for example, on paper, in sand or mud, labelling key topographical features and infrastructure and making simple statements about their locations in relation to other places, for example, east, west, near, far, other side of…
  • investigating and discussing where appropriate the meaning of personal and family names of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander origin
  • surveying and comparing healthy ways of eating, for example, by identifying what is available from the school canteen and listing which healthy foods they like to eat, recording and presenting results in chart, graph or digital format or by giving an oral presentation

Content description

Elaborations

Identify available resources and protocols to be followed when building language

[Key concept:revival,building,resources, keeping places, protocols; Key processes: identifying, locating, discussing]

(ACLFWU172)

  • identifying and locating available language resources suitable for language building, for example, living speakers and rememberers, visual, aural and written documents, archival material
  • identifying the existence and location of keeping places for texts and resources as language is rebuilt, for example, in the community, national archives, purpose-built interpretative centres
  • understanding that there are protocols to be followed when building language, such as consulting and involving language owners who may want to determine how the language expands into new domains of use
  • discussing potential limits and constraints of school language programs in relation to building language
  • learning about language building efforts in their community and the role of particular groups in this process, for example, by visiting the local language centre, history museum or by inviting people involved in the process to talk to the class
  • identifying language revival programs in other regions and reporting on processes used and resources developed
  • finding examples of language revival in the categories of language revitalisation, language renewal and language reclamation, and consider what these examples contribute to the processes of language building
  • understanding how language revival serves to enrich Australia’s linguistic and cultural resources

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 to 6 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages LR pathway are generalised in order to cater for the wide range of languages which may be learnt as an LR within the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. The Achievement Standards in the Language Revival Learner Pathway will be shaped by the current progress of language revival for a particular language and the amount of vocabulary and variety of language structures available for teaching and learning. By the end of Year 6, students use familiar language and modelled sentence patterns to share information about aspects of their personal worlds, such as their family and friends, interests, everyday routines and activities. They interact appropriately with Elders and community speakers and apply principles and protocols of cultural safety when interacting with Country/Place and engaging with cultural material such as artefacts, works of art, texts and performances. Students ask and respond to simple questions, request help, repetition or clarification, and respond to questions and requests using rehearsed phrases and sentences. Whenever possible they use the language to interact and collaborate in games and other activities, including the use of hand signs as appropriate. They interact with Country/Place to gather information and knowledge and demonstrate their understanding of Country/Place, for example, by explaining the origins and meanings of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander names of streets, parks, public institutions and social programs. They label, order and classify natural objects, animals and plants, by making simple statements about key features. They identify features of landforms, infrastructure and built environment, identifying places which have special significance to community. Students listen to, read and view a range of resources in the language, such as historical documents, stories, photos, images and art works, and demonstrate understanding of content by locating, recording and interpreting key words and phrases, and locating key points of information. They present information they have obtained that relates to language, culture, environment and community personalities, using short sentence structures, familiar vocabulary, photos and concrete materials. They demonstrate understanding of stories, songs, visual design and performance, for example by mapping sites, landforms and features through which a travelling story or songline passes, or by selecting and writing simple modelled statements to describe main characters and events. They create their own texts and works of art to tell a story, incorporating illustrations and visual props, significant symbols and techniques appropriate to Country/Place. Students use simple, formulaic language to retell excerpts from stories and to create new songs and stories, understanding their role in helping to build a community of learner-speakers who use the language. They apply their knowledge of grammar and vocabulary to translate short texts, such as word lists, labels, songs and historical texts, explaining culture-specific concepts and expressions that do not translate easily into English. They create bilingual texts for the classroom and school community that explain words and associated cultural ideas. Students identify markers of identity across cultures, and recognise the importance of language, Country/Place and culture to the identity of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples. They reflect on their own cultural identity in light of their experience of learning the language, considering how their ideas and ways of communicating are influenced by their own cultural backgrounds. Students know that the language has its own pronunciation, spelling and grammar. They apply this knowledge to predict the sound, spelling and meaning of new words. They use metalanguage for language explanation, for making comparisons with English forms and other known languages, for reflecting on the experience of learning the language and culture, and for explaining the purpose and techniques of language building. They describe different ways of communicating in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages, for example, through story, song, sign language and artistic expression. Students know that language use varies according to age, relationships and situation, and they identify and explain kin terms in particular Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages where it is appropriate. They provide examples of how languages change over time. They recognise that Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages are in various states of maintenance, development and revival and can give some historical reasons for this. They explain the current situation of the language they are learning, including details about what is known about it, its current usage, generational differences and revival plans. They explain the importance of maintaining, strengthening and reviving Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages for specific communities and for the broader Australian community. They demonstrate their understanding of the link between language, culture, Country and Place by working with the community language groups to develop a short ‘Welcome to Country/Place’ and/or ‘Acknowledgement of Country/Place’ to present at formal school functions or community events. Students describe language building efforts in their community. They explain protocols for language building, such as consulting and involving language owners. They identify contemporary and historical language materials that may assist communities with language building efforts and the challenges involved in using these. They understand their own role in helping to build a community of language-learner speakers and in the development of new language resources. They explain how the language was recorded in the past, by whom and for what purpose, and can give reasons for some different spellings of words within the language. Students know that the language is primarily oral and explain the importance of story and story-telling in transmitting language and culture. They recognise that ownership of songs, stories, dances and designs is determined by traditional kinship and other social groupings, place, History and Journey. They know that language in its various forms carries Indigenous knowledge in the context of Country/Place.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 to 10  

Years 7 to 10 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language The Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) provides opportunities for students to study Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages being revived by their owners or custodians and which are in various stages of revitalisation, renewal and reclamation. LR covers a much broader range of language types and ecologies than either L1 or L2, and the vast majority of Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages are included in the LR category. Schools teaching the Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) will most likely be located broadly within the geographical region of the language and culture, sometimes in towns and cities and other times in rural and remote regions. Classes will likely include students who relate closely to the language and culture, students with varying degrees of affiliation with the language and culture, and students who have no connections to the language and culture. A key expectation in the LR pathway is that of students having opportunities to interact with Elders and particular places on Country/Place. The Language Revival Learner Pathway draws on the Australian Indigenous Languages Framework (AILF) and takes into account key variables such as: how much is known about and documented for the language; the extent to which it is used or remembered, ranging from no longer being spoken (owners often use the term ‘sleeping’) to being spoken fluently by members of the older generations; and the extent to which it has been reintroduced into the community of owners and custodians. These variables give rise to the following broad categories of language revival: Language Revitalisation: where there are fluent L1 speakers (typically members of the older generation) but where the intergenerational transmission of the language has been interrupted. Younger generations may understand some of the language and may use some words and phrases, but do not speak it as their first language. Examples of revitalisation languages include Walmajarri in the Kimberley, Yindjibarndi in the Pilbara, Meriam in the Torres Strait, Dyirbal in north-eastern Queensland, Wubuy (Nunggubuyu) in Arnhem Land, and Adnyamathanha (Yura Ngawarla) in the Flinders Ranges. Language Renewal: where there are a number of adult speakers who use the language to varying degrees in the community, but not ‘right through’, and where other language resources are drawn upon. Examples of renewal languages include Noongar in south-west Western Australia, Gumbaynggirr on the north coast of New South Wales, Ngarrindjeri on the Lower Murray Lakes in South Australia, Djabugay in the Atherton Tablelands in northern Queensland, and Yugambeh in southern Queensland. Language Reclamation: where language revival, by necessity, relies primarily on historical documentation of the language in the absence of active community knowledge of it. Examples of reclamation languages include Kaurna from Adelaide, Narungga from the Yorke Peninsula, Dharuk or Eora (Iyora) from Sydney, Yuwibara from central Queensland, Wemba-Wemba and Woiwurrung from Victoria, and Awabakal from the Newcastle area in New South Wales. A number of factors and variables will need to be considered when planning for a language revival curriculum or program, and further information on these is presented in the context statement for this pathway and in the section Using the Framework. At this level, students bring to their learning a range of language learning strategies. They are increasingly aware of the world beyond their own, and are engaging with the broader issues of youth and society, land and environment, education and identity, while establishing a balance between increasing personal independence and social responsibilities. They are considering their future pathways and choices, including how the language they are learning could be part of these. Language learning and use Learners interact using the language whenever possible in classroom routines and communicative tasks with peers, the teaching team, Elders and community members. They give presentations and participate in conversations, with some preparation and support, such as the use of cue cards. They acquire skills in accessing and analysing historical documents and recordings. Learners extend the range and quality of their writing through drawing on increased vocabulary and grammar knowledge, to the extent that this is possible in the revived language; and by drafting and editing their own work and that of their peers. They use models to create a range of texts, including descriptions, recounts and reflections. Students learn about the techniques used to build language, such as analysing historical sources, interviewing/recording existing speakers, and they discuss the contemporary orthographic and grammatical choices of the community. Students act as contemporary documenters of the language, for example, by listening and transcribing spoken texts, and preserving language resources developed at school for future access and use. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, while additional enrichment and authentication of the learning experience is provided through access to Elders and other speakers living in the same community. Interacting with Country/Place to explore the environment and learn about Country/Place with Elders and other community members is essential to their continued learning. Students may also have access to community centres, such as interpretative museums or art and language centres. They may have opportunities to work with local Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities in language-related projects, contributing to the development and maintenance of local language records and resources through structured and research-based projects. Texts and resources Country/Place and the community are the most important resources for learning and are the origin of most of the texts learners work with. Learners engage with and help to shape a range of spoken, visual, written and digital texts that use as much language as possible. These include historical documents, photographs, maps, songs, raps, performance, stories, local environmental and social programs, painting and visual design, as well as teacher-generated materials such as games and items from the community and local environment. Some texts will incorporate English or another community language in a complementary role, filling in for items or expressions that have not yet been reconstituted in the language; other texts will be bilingual, with no mixing of languages. Level of support Learners are increasingly aware of and responsible for their own learning. They continue to access support resources such as word lists, modelled texts, dictionaries, grammars, and they seek teacher feedback to support their receptive and productive language use. They require explicit instruction in the grammatical system of the language, which includes comparison with English and other known languages and opportunities to discuss, practise and apply their knowledge. They keep records of their learning, for example, through journals, folios or a blogs. They use these resources to reflect on their language learning and intercultural experiences. The role of languages The language is used whenever and to the extent possible in the revived language for classroom interaction, language learning tasks and experiences. Maximal use of the language increases learners’ language proficiency and enhances language revival. English and other known languages provide a basis for linguistic and cultural comparison and for a developing metalinguistic understanding of intercultural learning that supports the ability for consider different perspectives and ways of being meditated by language. For revival languages that are at the ‘beginning’ end of the revival spectrum, English or another community language might be used in a complementary fashion, for example, to fill in for missing words or expressions. Alternatively, language owners and the community in general may decide to side-step these gaps altogether, thus avoiding the need to use other languages.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and explain the sound patterns in spokenand use developing phonemic awareness to represent these patterns in written form

[Key concepts: metalanguage, patterns, phonetic articulation, syllable; Key processes: reading, investigating, comparing]

(ACLFWU185)

  • reading aloud for meaning to demonstrate comprehension of sound–symbol correspondences
  • developing metalanguage to describe and talk about sounds and phonology, for example, place and manner of articulation, uncertain or missing sounds
  • investigating sound patterns, for example, consonant and vowel sequences, and word-level patterns, for example, allowable word-final sounds, allowable consonant clusters, word stress
  • understanding the major categories of place of articulation in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages, for example, peripheral, laminal, apical, and their realisation across different languages and regions in Australia
  • establishing similarities in the sound systems of related languages otherwise masked by differing spelling systems
  • using their knowledge of alphabetic conventions for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages to transcribe spoken texts from a range of languages, for example, those related to the target language or those from neighbouring regions
  • comparing and explaining the relative consistency of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages and English in spelling words
  • understanding the phonemic basis of alphabetic spelling systems and the fact that different sounds can be covered within a single phoneme or letter
  • exploring different writing systems that are based on different principles, for example, syllabic or ideographic

Content description

Elaborations

Expand vocabulary and understand and use a range of vocabulary sets and grammatical structures that are available in the language

[Key concepts: system, grammatical case, transitivity; Key processes: explaining, discussing]

(ACLFWU186)

  • understanding case and case marking on nouns, pronouns and adjectives
  • explaining how verbs can be derived from nouns and vice versa, comparing with similar processes in English and other known languages
  • composing and varying messages according to the available resources of the language, such as: suffixes, including ‘having’, ‘for want of’, ‘similar to’, ‘like’ verbless sentences, for example, equative, descriptive, possessive verb categories, including intransitive, transitive, causative, inchoative, reflexive–reciprocal verb aspect, including continuous, transitory, perfective, imperfective verb-stem morphology, including compound verbs, reduplicated verbs, habitual/characteristic, derivation (nouns into verbs)
  • expressing time, manner, attitude and place, according to the available language resources, such as: elaborations of past tense temporal expressions, for example, ‘beforehand’, ‘afterwards’, ‘too late’, ‘originally’ expressions of frequency, immediacy and duration, for example, ‘persistently’, ‘at once’, ‘a few times’, ‘for a while’ attitudinal words, particles and interjections, for example, terms expressing endearment, embarrassment, shame or pity locational cases as used in locative phrases, and extensions of these, for example, expressing origin or causation
  • structuring and linking clauses, focusing on issues of agreement with transitive and intransitive verbs, using verb-linking devices, for example, serialisation and embedding
  • discussing lexical and grammatical relationships between the language and other languages of the region, for example, common words and structures
  • discussing grammatical and lexical contrasts between the language and English/ other known languages, for example, the figurative use of language, vocabulary associated with specialised domains

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate and summarise factual information obtained from a range of sources on a variety of topics and issues related to the Country/Place

[Key concepts: Indigenous knowledge, social and environmental issues, lifestyles - past and present community initiatives and projects; ; Key processes: summarising, synthesising, referencing]

(ACLFWC177)

  • investigating the origins of Aboriginal/Torres Strait Islander names in their local area, regional area and state and territory, recording meanings where known, and identifying different source languages
  • interviewing an Elder/community member to gain an historical perspective about their use of particular words and language constructions, observing correct respect protocols and presenting findings in formats such as digital presentations, posters, wall charts or oral summaries
  • researching and creating a profile of a prominent member of the language community, for example, an artist, sportsperson or leader
  • developing a photographic record/portfolio of different animal and plant species found in Country/Place, with commentary/annotations
  • seeking information from Elders to assist in classifying living things according to culturally appropriate categories, comparing these classification systems with those used in western approaches to the study of living systems
  • identifying and describing the role of various Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander organisations that provide services to their community
  • researching different aspects of a selected Indigenous business operating in the community, for example, an enterprise associated with arts, bush medicine, bush food, tourism, transportation or animal husbandry, and presenting findings in digital formats or oral presentation mode
  • analysing a range of historical documents recorded in the language, classifying content according to categories such as date, text genre (wordlist, letter), topic (Indigenous knowledge, environment, traditions, fishing/navigation, rules), purpose of the text and intention of the writer (to inform, prescribe, describe, assert authority); and presenting findings in chart or table form or by giving a presentation
  • interviewing local community members about their experiences of living on the land, their relationship with language and culture and their recollections from the past, recording and presenting key findings
  • researching Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander words used in English, using resources such as the Australian National Dictionary, and identifying and explaining words that come from the local language

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Language Revival Learner Pathway (LR) Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 to 10 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages LR pathway are generalised in order to cater for the wide range of languages which may be learnt as an LR within the school context. They will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. They will be shaped by the current progress of language revival for a particular language and the amount of vocabulary and variety of language structures available for teaching and learning. By the end of Year 10, students use the language to initiate, sustain and extend interactions, and to exchange information about interests, experiences and aspirations. They use spontaneous language wherever possible to participate in activities that involve taking action, collaborating, planning, organising and negotiating. They use culturally appropriate norms and skills, and respect protocols when engaging with and learning from visiting Elders and community members. When interacting in the classroom, they make suggestions, seek clarification, praise or compliment each another. Students use language where possible to locate, analyse and summarise factual information from a range of sources such as historical documents, Elders and community members. They demonstrate their understanding of Country/Place, for example, by explaining the origin, meaning and significance of local place names and features, or by presenting texts and stories about the Country/Place and associated social and cultural events, using language as much as possible and different modes of presentation. Students view, listen to, and share personal responses to a range of texts, such as songs, stories, films and other modes of artistic expression, and demonstrate understanding by identifying and explaining main ideas, key themes and sequences of events. They explain how artistic expression relates to land, water, sea, sky, people, animals, plants and social and ecological relationships. They use expressive language, gestures, and supporting materials to create a range of spoken, written and multimodal texts, for example, art work to convey messages using symbols and techniques appropriate to Country/Place, or narrations of real or imagined journeys involving a variety of characters, places and events. Students apply culturally appropriate and ethical behaviour and lexical and grammatical resources to interpret and translate texts to and from the language; and they explain culture-specific concepts, practices and expressions that do not easily translate. They co-create bilingual texts to inform the wider community about aspects of the language and culture. They reflect on how their own biography shapes their sense of identity and ways of communicating, and discuss the role that language and culture play in the identity and well-being of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples. They explain how particular policies and practices have impacted on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples’ sense of identity, for example, through language loss and separation from Country/Place, family and community. Students explain and use the sound system of the language, and a range of available vocabulary sets and grammatical structures when speaking and writing. They use metalanguage to explain sound and writing systems and grammatical structures in the language. They analyse the purpose and role of a range of spoken, written and visual texts, for example, declaring identity, acknowledging ancestors and traditional belief systems, and passing on knowledge and information. Students explain the importance of the kinship system in regulating relationships and behaviour in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities. They explain how and why language use is adjusted to suit different social and cultural contexts, purposes and relationships, for example, expressions used with respected kin. They explain how languages change over time and influence one another, for example, by describing the history and impact of contact languages, including creoles, pidgins and Aboriginal Englishes. Students make comparisons between the ecologies of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages and indigenous languages in other countries, in areas such as language policy and rights, language loss, advocacy and reform, and language revival. They identify the role of language in passing on knowledge, and explain how communities’ ways of thinking, behaving and shaping worldviews influence how language is used. They investigate language revival efforts in their own community and neighbouring regions, and identify resources and processes that are available to build language, for example, lexical and grammatical resources. Students explain protocols for filling language gaps and extending semantic domains, including those required for borrowing from other languages, creating words by analogy and drawing from within existing resources of the language. They explain various techniques that can be used to build language, such as analysing historical sources or interviewing existing speakers, and identify associated challenges. Students reflect on their role as contemporary documenters of language, and recognise the importance of intergenerational collaboration in reviving and maintaining languages.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language Languages studied in the Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) are typically languages used in spoken form as the language of everyday communication by whole communities across all generations. The second language learner pathway has been written on the assumption that learning will occur off-Country involving students who are typically not from the language community and have little or no experience of the language and culture. They are introduced to learning the language at school as an additional, new language. The language chosen for curriculum development should have a sizeable set of resources in a variety of media, such as local documentaries, bilingual narrative and descriptive texts, and educational materials in print and digital form. Learning is enriched and authenticated by interaction with visiting Elders and community speakers, and where possible visits to Country/Place. Information and communications technologies provide additional resources to support a range of language and culture experiences. The curriculum content and achievement standards in the Second Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learnt as a second language. The content descriptions, content elaborations and achievement standards for the Second Language Learner pathway will need to be adapted for use with the particular language being taught and will need to be modified if the program occurs on-Country or if the learners are from the language community. Children enter the early years of schooling with established communication skills in one or more languages and varying degrees of early literacy acquisition. For young students at this level, learning typically focuses on the immediate world of their family, home, school, friends and local environment. They are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Language learning and use The language is learnt in parallel with English language and literacy development. Learning in the two languages progresses at very different levels but each supports and enriches the other. The language is used in classroom interactions, routines and activities and is supported by the use of visual and concrete materials, gestures and body language. At this stage, there is a focus on play and imaginative activities, games, music, movement and familiar routines, which provide scaffolding and context for language development. Oral language is developed through listening to the sounds, shapes and patterns of the language, through activities such as rhymes, songs, clapping and action games and through imitating and repeating sounds in aural texts as modelled by the teaching team, visiting Elders and community speakers. Learners experiment with simple formulaic expressions and with one- or two-word responses and single-idea phrases to prompts and cues. As they progress to using language for interactions such as greetings, asking for help, talking about self, friends and family, or asking and answering questions, they notice that the language behaves differently in different situations and that speakers communicate in some ways that are different from their own. Creative play provides opportunities for exploring these differences and for using language for purposeful interaction. Students learn about Country/Place and community by interacting with visiting Elders and community speakers when possible, and by engaging with stories and songs and other texts such as videos, maps and pictures. They learn about the concepts of kin and social groupings, and how these are symbolised in the natural environment. Students learn to use appropriate respect terms and to demonstrate respectful and appropriate behaviour when interacting with Elders, community speakers and community texts. Learners will recognise the same alphabet they are learning for writing English. They write by tracing and copying, forming letters legibly. They learn to read and write words and sentences independently using modelled language, for example, matching pictures with single words, labels and captions. The use of repetition and recycling in instruction helps children to identify high-frequency words and simple phrases and to recognise the purpose and intention of simple texts. They begin to understand how the language works, to compare it with English and to understand its place in relation to regional and national language diversity. Contexts of interaction Across Foundation to Year 2, learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team, supplemented by some access to visiting Elders and community speakers. Information and communications technologies (ICT) resources provide additional access to language and culture experience. Texts and resources Children engage with a variety of spoken, visual, written and digital texts, which are short, clearly structured and supported by visuals and paralinguistic devices, for example, tone of voice, facial expression, gesture, with much repetition and recycling of structures and vocabulary. They listen and respond to teacher talk, share ideas and join in with song, dance, story and rap, and various forms of play, performance, conversational exchanges and activities mediated by language. Print and digital texts include stories, shared Big Books, songs, visual designs, photos, videos, environmental maps and wall charts and teacher-generated materials such as games, flashcards and items from both the local community and the target language community. Level of support Learning is supported through the provision of experiences that are challenging but achievable with appropriate scaffolding and support. This involves modelling, monitoring and moderating by the teacher; provision of multiple and varied sources of input; opportunities for revisiting, recycling and reviewing learned language, and continuous cueing, feedback, response and encouragement. The role of languages Learners are encouraged to use the language being learnt whenever possible in class interactions and daily routines with the teaching team, visiting Elders and community speakers. Using English for explanation and discussion allows learners to talk about differences and similarities they notice between the language and their first language(s) and culture(s), to ask questions about language and culture, to consider how they feel when they hear or use the language and to talk about how they view different languages and the people who speak them. This introduction to the ‘meta’ dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to consider different perspectives and ways of being as mediated by language.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise that different words andforms are used to address and communicate with people according to relationship and context

[Key concepts: kinship, context, relationship; Key processes: noticing, recognising]

(ACLFWU082)

  • noticing that different forms of address and kinship terms are used depending on the relationship between participants
  • recognising that the way someone is related to others affects how he or she speaks to them
  • recognising that ways of speaking vary according to context and situation, for example, language used when interacting with peers during playground games is different to that used with the teaching team and with visiting Elders/community speakers
  • recognising that language used in particular interactions can vary between cultural contexts, for example, the use of titles in English compared to kin categories in the target language

Content description

Elaborations

Locate specific words and familiar phrases in texts such as charts, lists, photos, maps, and use information to complete guided oral and written tasks

[Key concepts: natural and built environment, community life, Indigenous knowledge; Key processes: identifying, selecting, sorting, matching, labelling, mapping Country/Place]

(ACLFWC070)

  • identifying, naming, and labelling key topographical features of the target language region, for example, creeks, springs, rocky outcrops, estuaries, reefs, desert landforms, by viewing environmental maps, photos, videos and objects
  • listening to an Elder/community speaker sharing knowledge about Country/Place and recording key information
  • identifying and labelling significant features of the built environment, for example, dwellings, settlements, community store, health clinic, school, places to play, roads and tracks
  • locating key information about the target language region, for example, weather, seasons, daily and seasonal behaviour of animals, using resources such as charts, photos, videos, films, visual prompts and by listening to visiting Elders/community language speakers
  • naming, labelling and sorting bush foods, animals, plants and natural objects from the environment into culturally appropriate categories, such as, edible/non-edible, meat/non meat, salt water/fresh water, day/night animals, rough/smooth, hard/soft
  • describing aspects of shared knowledge about the target language region, for example, by pointing to places on a map or at pictures of food sources, plants and animals
  • identifying and labelling animal tracks in the sand, dirt or mud
  • labelling, drawing and matching body parts

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages Second Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of languages that may be learnt as an L2 in the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. By the end of Year 2, students interact with the teaching team, visiting Elders and community members to talk about themselves, family, friends and immediate environment using familiar language supported by gestures. When interacting with Elders and community speakers, they use appropriate forms of address and terms of respect. They use movement, gestures and rehearsed language to participate in guided group activities, such as adapting and performing action songs. They interact in familiar classroom routines by responding to requests, following instructions and using routine classroom language, for example, to request classroom objects. Students listen to, read, view and comprehend texts that are short, clearly structured and supported by visuals and paralinguistic elements, for example, tone of voice, facial expression, gesture and repetition and recycling of structures and vocabulary. They demonstrate their understanding of the target language region, for example, by making simple statements and giving descriptions of animals, food and artefacts, labelling and sorting these into categories, or by pointing to key topographical features on a map or at pictures of food sources, plants and animals in response to questions. They respond to texts such as stories, songs, dance and visual art through singing, miming, play-acting, drawing, action and movement. They demonstrate understanding by naming key characters, significant places, landscapes or topographical features and by identifying key messages. Students use familiar words, patterns and support materials to create and present shared stories, songs and performances. They translate and explain in English the meaning of target language words, simple phrases and gestures used in everyday contexts and situations. They create simple bilingual texts for the classroom environment, such as captions, labels and wall charts. They identify markers of their own identity, such as family, school/class and language/s, and compare these to the importance of language, place and family in the formation of identity in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities. Students identify similarities and differences in the ways they interact when communicating in English and the target language. Students distinguish between the sounds of the target language and English and link sounds to written symbols and conventions. They use simple metalanguage to describe elemental structures of the target language, such as word order and word types. They identify how messages in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages can be communicated in a number of ways, such as Elders’ story-telling or through song, dance and visual design. Students identify kinship terms used for immediate family members and recognise that Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples have their own personal relationships with place, natural species and phenomena. They identify which stories belong to which natural features, including animals and natural species. They know that different forms of address and kinship terms are used and depend on relationship and context. They identify some words in the language that have been borrowed from other languages. They identify regions, places and communities where the target language is spoken and recognise that there are many different languages spoken in their class, their local community and in Australia. They recognise that language speakers are the most important primary source of language knowledge and that language use reflects where and how people live and what is important to them.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 to 6  

Years 3 to 6 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language Languages studied in the Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) are typically languages used in spoken form as the language of everyday communication by whole communities across all generations. The second language learner pathway has been written on the assumption that learning will occur off-Country involving students who are typically not from the language community and have little or no experience of the language and culture. They are introduced to learning the language at school as an additional, new language. The language chosen for curriculum development should have a sizeable set of resources in a variety of media, such as local documentaries, bilingual narrative and descriptive texts, and educational materials in print and digital form. Learning is enriched and authenticated by interaction with visiting Elders and community speakers, and where possible visits to Country/Place. Information and communications technologies provide additional resources to support a range of language and culture experiences. The curriculum content and achievement standards in the Second Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learnt as a second language. The content descriptions, content elaborations and achievement standards for the Second Language Learner pathway will need to be adapted for use with the particular language being taught and will need to be modified if the program occurs on-Country or if the learners are from the language community. At this level, children are developing awareness of their social worlds and of their membership of various groups. They are widening their social networks, experiences and communicative repertoires. They are gaining greater awareness of the world around them. They benefit from various forms of activity-based learning that build on their interests and capabilities, and make connections with other learning areas. Language learning and use Learners use formulaic phrases in the target language to participate in classroom routines, presentations and structured conversations with the teaching team, peers, visiting Elders and community speakers. They respond to teacher-generated questions about texts, participate in games, and follow instructions and procedures. They focus on aspects of their personal worlds and are introduced to content related to the target language Country/Place and the communities where it is spoken. The development of oral proficiency relies on rich language input. Learners engage in different types of listening and develop active-listening and comprehension skills using contextual, grammatical, phonic and non-verbal cues. They extend their oral fluency by focusing on sentence-level intonation and stress. They participate in shared and guided reading and learn to apply their knowledge of key words and textual features to predict the meaning of unfamiliar language. Learners use modelled language to create new texts and to extend their language use through expanding and connecting sentences to express more complex ideas and situations. To support their developing knowledge of vocabulary and sentence construction, learners continue to build metalanguage for describing aspects of the target language and how it works. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team. Learners may have some access to visiting Elders and community speakers, opportunities to communicate with peers in the target language region using technology, perhaps visit the target language region themselves, or view touring performances or art displays from there. Texts and resources Learners engage with a growing range of visual, spoken, written and digital texts, such as photographs, maps, bush calendars, seasonal charts, posters, songs, raps, dances, stories, paintings and visual design accompanying performance, video clips and films. Level of support The primary support for learners is the teaching team, which provides instruction, explanation, examples of modelled language use, repetition, reinforcement and feedback on student work. Learning experiences and activities are carefully scaffolded and resourced, with sufficient time allowed for experimentation, drafting and redrafting. Learners need practice and guidance in using resources such as dictionaries, word charts, vocabulary lists and exemplars when translating and creating texts. The role of languages Learners use the target language for classroom routines and language learning tasks, for listening to, reading and viewing texts and in interactions with the teaching team, visiting Elders and other community speakers. The language of response varies according to the nature and demands of the learning experience, with the target language used primarily for communicating in structured and supported tasks and English and other known languages used for open-ended, comparative tasks that develop learners’ understanding of language and culture.

Content description

Elaborations

Gather, classify and compare information from a range of sources associated with the targetCountry/Place, community and daily life

[Key concepts: community life, leisure, environment, Indigenous knowledge, health and well-being; Key processes: identifying, researching, compiling, presenting, tabulating, categorising, giving directions]

(ACLFWC091)

  • labelling, ordering and classifying natural objects from the environment using, Indigenous categories
  • obtaining information from a variety of sources about characteristic elements of the target language region, such as habitats and life cycles of different animals/birds or insects; bush plants, water supply, night sky and stars, for example, by listening to visiting Elder/community speakers and presenting findings in chart, poster, table, graphic or digital form
  • viewing, reading and interpreting texts such as bush calendars and seasonal charts, identifying features of seasons, weather patterns, plant cycles, animal behaviour and associated activities and comparing these with other seasonal calendars
  • reading, viewing or listening to simple community texts such as posters from health clinics, school magazines, community notices, answering questions by selecting from options and filling in gaps
  • viewing a demonstration, for example, cooking bush tucker, cooking in an earth oven, recording key words and phrases related to the processes of collecting and preparing
  • extracting key points from a range of spoken, written or digital texts such as posters, charts or brochures on topics such as health, well-being and cultural safety, discussing key messages and relating to them to issues in their own situations
  • giving and following directions, for example, how to get to key community facilities such as the store, football ground or school, using maps or images of the relevant area
  • locating information about social and cultural events in the target language community, such as the time of year they occur and associated activities, presenting findings in chart, poster or digital form
  • obtaining and compiling information from children in the target language community about aspects of their daily lives, using face-to-face or digital modes of communication, and presenting findings to others
  • surveying peers and community members on different topics, presenting results in chart, graph or digital format, for example, favourite television programs, video games, foods, football teams, sports or bands, after school activities/ hours spent in those activities, languages spoken in their homes and communities

Content description

Elaborations

Explore connections betweenand cultural values and beliefs and the expression of these connections in an Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander language

[Key concepts: Country/Place, cultural expression and transmission, values, beliefs, spirituality; Key processes: observing, making connections, discussing, investigating]

(ACLFWU107)

  • understanding the role of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages and cultures in caring for Country/Place and the environment
  • investigating how Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples express their relationship with the natural environment through language, for example, in relation to seasons, stars, reef, rivers, waterholes, plants and animals
  • understanding the importance and significance of Welcome to Country/Place, for example, through discussions with Elders
  • understanding that Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages are storehouses of cultural, environmental and social knowledge
  • recognising that song and song language play a central role as storehouses of knowledge
  • understanding that Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages have a rich oral literature, which recounts the epic journeys and events associated with totemic ancestors/cultural heroes, and understanding that these stories map the land and embody the values and mores of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander cultures
  • understanding and discussing the importance of story and the role of storytelling in transmitting language and culture
  • recognising ways cultural values are expressed in language, for example, through forms of address, speech prohibitions and styles, respect, land–language associations and non-verbal communicative behaviours
  • observing that concepts may be culture-specific, for example, capturing how relationships are structured; how time and quantity are expressed; how land, water, sea and sky are viewed, spatial awareness
  • recognising that Aboriginal languages and Torres Strait Islander languages have various social, spiritual and cultural functions in communities
  • identifying how the target language categorises things differently from English, for example, generic words and specific words for animals and plants, such as ‘kangaroo’ and ‘tree’, and consider reasons for this

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 to 6 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages Second Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of languages that may be learnt as an L2 in the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. By the end of Year 6, students share information about aspects of their personal worlds, such as their family and friends, interests, everyday routines and experiences, using familiar language and modelled sentence patterns. They interact appropriately with Elders and community speakers, and apply principles and protocols of cultural safety when engaging with cultural material such as artefacts, works of art, texts and performances. When interacting in the classroom, they ask and respond to questions, request help, repetition or clarification, and respond to requests and instructions. Students locate key points of information and messages in a range of spoken, written, visual and multi-modal sources associated with the target language region, community and culture. They demonstrate their understanding of the language region, community and culture, for example, by labelling, organising and classifying natural objects, plants and animals from the environment, identifying and describing key features and landforms, seasonal characteristics, and aspects of traditional and contemporary ways of life. Students view, read and listen to stories, songs, dances and artistic traditions, and demonstrate understanding, for example, by describing characters and events, creating timelines, explaining iconographies and identifying key messages, comparing these to messages conveyed by stories in their own cultures. They recognise that ownership of songs, stories, dances and designs is determined by kinship and other social groupings. They know that song and story carry Indigenous knowledge in the context of Country/Place and family. Students use simple and formulaic language, with the support of structured models, to create short informative and imaginative connected texts in various modes and formats. They translate a range of community texts, such as signs, notices, health charts, posters, relying on key words, and they identify and describe culture-specific concepts and expressions. They create bilingual texts for the classroom and school community that explain target language words and related cultural ideas. They identify markers of identity across cultures and recognise the importance of language, Country/Place and culture to the identity and future aspirations of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples. Students reflect on their own cultural identity in light of their experience of learning the language, explaining how their ideas and ways of communicating are influenced by their own cultural backgrounds. Students know that the target language has its own pronunciation, spelling and grammar, and they apply this knowledge to predict the sound, spelling and meaning of new words and expressions. They use metalanguage for language explanation, for making comparisons with English forms, and for reflecting on the experience of learning the target language and culture. They identify the distinct purpose, language features and conventions of texts such as stories, paintings, songs and dances. Students demonstrate understanding of core elements of the kinship system and its role in social behaviour, by identifying and explaining kin terms, recognising that everyone belongs to certain types of sub-groups and recognising that interactions are patterned by these structures. Students know that language use must be adjusted to suit different contexts, situations and relationships. They provide examples of how languages change over time by identifying words and phrases borrowed from English and other languages, including words that are similar to or borrowed from neighbouring Indigenous languages. Students recognise that Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages are in various states of maintenance, development and revival and can give some historical reasons for this. They identify connections between identity and cultural values and beliefs, and explain the importance of maintaining and strengthening Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages for the particular community involved and for the broader Australian community. They make connections with their own experience when talking about languages and cultures.

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 to 10  

Years 7 to 10 Description

The nature of the learner, the pathway and particular language Languages studied in the Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) are typically languages used in spoken form as the language of everyday communication by whole communities across all generations. The second language learner pathway has been written on the assumption that learning will occur off-Country involving students who are typically not from the language community and have little or no experience of the language and culture. They are introduced to learning the language at school as an additional, new language. The language chosen for curriculum development should have a sizeable set of resources in a variety of media, such as local documentaries, bilingual narrative and descriptive texts, and educational materials in print and digital form. Learning is enriched and authenticated by interaction with visiting Elders and community speakers, and where possible visits to Country/Place. Information and communications technologies provide additional resources to support a range of language and culture experiences. The curriculum content and achievement standards in the Second Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander languages that may be learnt as a second language. The content descriptions, content elaborations and achievement standards for the Second Language Learner pathway will need to be adapted for use with the particular language being taught and will need to be modified if the program occurs on-Country or if the learners are from the language community. At this level, students bring a range of language learning strategies to their learning. They are increasingly aware of the world beyond their own and are engaging with issues of youth, society and environment. They are increasingly independent and capable of analysis and reflection. They are considering their future pathways and choices, including how the language could be part of these. Language learning and use Learners interact using the target language in classroom routines and communicative tasks. They give presentations and participate in conversations, with some preparation and support, such as cue cards. They use the language more fluently, with a greater degree of self-correction and revision. They acquire skills in analysing and translating increasingly complex texts. Learners are extending the range and quality of their writing through increased vocabulary and grammar knowledge, and by drafting and editing their own work and that of their peers. They use models to create a range of texts, including descriptions, recounts and reflections. They are increasingly aware of connections between language and culture, noticing, for example, different language use according to kin relationships. They are learning to reflect on their own language and culture, and how identity impacts on intercultural experiences. Contexts of interaction Learning occurs largely through interaction with peers and the teaching team. Students may have some access to visiting Elders and community speakers, and may use technology to communicate with peers in the target language region, such as through a sister-school partnership. Some students may have opportunities to visit the target language region themselves or to view touring performances and art displays. Texts and resources Learners engage with a range of visual, spoken, written and digital texts, such as photographs, maps, bush calendars, seasonal charts, posters, songs, raps, dances, stories, paintings and visual design, video clips, and films. Level of support Learners are increasingly aware of and responsible for their own learning. They continue to access and use resources such as word lists, modelled texts and dictionaries. Teacher feedback continues to support their receptive and productive language use. Learners require explicit instruction in the grammatical system of the target language, supported by comparisons with English and other known languages. They also require opportunities to discuss, practise and use their knowledge. They monitor their learning progress, for example by keeping records of their learning, such as journals, folios or blogs, and use these resources to reflect on their language learning and intercultural experiences. The role of languages The target language is used for classroom interaction, language learning activities and experiences, and reflection on learning. English is used to support analysis, comparison and reflection; it is also the medium for expressing personal views at a level beyond learners’ range in the target language, such as justifying a position on a social issue or exploring and comparing linguistic and cultural practices and learning experiences.

Content description

Elaborations

Produce sounds, stress,patterns of the target language, using a developing phonemic awareness linked to the writing system

[Key concepts; metalanguage, patterns, phonetic articulation, syllable; Key processes: identifying, reading, investigating]

(ACLFWU120)

  • reading aloud to show comprehension of sound–symbol correspondences and flow of ideas
  • developing metalanguage to describe and talk about elements of sounds and phonology, for example, place and manner of articulation
  • investigating patterns such as consonant and vowel sequences and word level patterns, for example, allowable word final sounds, allowable consonant clusters
  • understanding the major categories of place of articulation in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages, for example, peripheral, laminal, apical and their realisation across different languages and regions in Australia
  • exploring writing systems based on principles such as syllabic or ideographic

Content description

Elaborations

Expand vocabulary and understand and use a range of grammatical structures in the target language, including inflectional and derivational processes

[Key concepts: system, grammatical case, affixation, voice, transitivity, particles, Key processes: explaining, constructing, compounding]

(ACLFWU121)

  • understanding case and case marking, for example, of nouns, pronouns and adjectives, noting the sharing of several case functions by single markers, the use of different markers for the same function
  • explaining how verbs can be derived from nouns and vice versa, and comparing with similar processes in English and other known languages
  • understanding how to construct concepts referring to people, places, things and events in building and varying the message, using: suffixes, including ‘having’, ‘for want of’, ‘similar to’, ‘like’ verbless sentences, for example, equative, descriptive, possessive verb categories, including intransitive, transitive, causative, inchoative, reflexive–reciprocal verb aspect, including continuous, transitory, perfective, imperfective verb-stem morphology, including compound verbs, reduplicated verbs, habitual/characteristic, derivation (for example, nouns into verbs).
  • expressing time, manner, attitude and place, using: elaborations of past tense temporal expressions, for example, ‘beforehand’, ‘afterwards’, ‘too late’, ‘originally’ expressions of frequency, immediacy and duration, for example, ‘persistently’, ‘at once’, ‘a few times’, ‘for a while’ attitudinal words, particles and interjections, for example, ‘ought to’; ‘I wish’; terms expressing endearment, embarrassment, ‘shame’, pity, including ‘Don’t know!’, ‘Really!’, ‘That’s all!’ locational cases as used in locative phrases, and extensions of these, for example, expressing origin, causation
  • structuring and linking clauses, focusing on issues of agreement with transitive and intransitive verbs and using verb-linking devices such as serialisation
  • discussing relationships between the target language and other languages of the region, for example, shared words and structures

Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages - Second Language Learner Pathway (L2) Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 to 10 Achievement Standard

The achievement standards for the Framework for Aboriginal Languages and Torres Strait Islander Languages Second Language Learner Pathway are generalised in order to cater for the range of languages that may be learnt as an L2 in the school context. The achievement standards will need to be adapted for use for specific Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages. By the end of Year 10, students use the target language to initiate, sustain and extend interactions and to express feelings and opinions. They share interests, experiences and aspirations and exchange information about teenage life. They use spontaneous language to participate in activities that involve taking action, collaborating, planning, organising and negotiating. They use culturally appropriate norms, skills and protocols when engaging with and learning from Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples and communities. When interacting in the classroom, they make requests, make suggestions and seek clarification. They locate, analyse and summarise factual information from a range of sources on topics and issues related to the target language region. They demonstrate understanding of the target language region, community, culture, way of life and History by presenting information on social and environmental issues, past and present community initiatives, projects and lifestyles. Students listen to, view and share personal responses to a range of texts such as stories, songs, visual and creative arts, films and procedural texts. They demonstrate understanding by identifying and explaining main ideas, key themes, sequences of events, and by comparing the role and representation of animals, people and landscapes. They link and sequence ideas and use expressive language, gestures, artistic and iconographic elements and conventions to create spoken, written and multimodal texts that involve real or imagined contexts and characters. They apply culturally appropriate and ethical behaviour to translate and interpret a range of texts from the target language to English and vice versa, and explain culture-specific concepts, practices and expressions. They create bilingual texts to inform the wider community about aspects of the target language region and culture. Students share experiences and ways of expressing identity, and they reflect on how the target language links the local, regional and national identity of its speakers with the land. They describe how they feel and behave when interacting with target language speakers and resources, and they reflect on how their reactions may reflect their own languages, cultures and perspectives. Students know the sounds, stress, intonation patterns, writing systems and grammatical elements of the target language and apply this knowledge to construct extended spoken, written and multimodal texts. They use metalanguage to explain sound, writing and grammatical systems, including inflectional and derivational processes. They analyse the form and structure of a range of spoken, written and visual texts and explain their function, form and relationship to social processes, such as declaring identity, acknowledging ancestors and traditional belief systems, and passing on knowledge and information. Students demonstrate their understanding of kinship as a system by explaining its importance in maintaining and regulating social relationships in Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander communities and links with Country/Place. They explain how and why language use is adjusted to suit different social and cultural contexts, purposes and relationships. They explain the dynamic nature of language and cultures, and identify factors that influence change, such as contact with other languages or response to new ideas and technologies. Students make comparisons between the ecologies of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander languages and indigenous languages in other countries, in areas such as language policy and rights, language loss, advocacy and reform, and language revival. They identify the role of language in passing on knowledge, and explain how communities’ worldviews and ways of thinking and behaving shape how language is used. They identify factors that serve to maintain and strengthen language use, such as intergenerational collaboration and transmission, programs and initiatives, and explain challenges associated with such practices and initiatives.

Framework for Classical Languages - Classical Greek Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

The nature of the learners Students have prior experience of learning Classical Greek and bring a range of capabilities, strategies and knowledge that can be applied to new learning. They are expanding the range and nature of their learning experiences; from synthetic reading material, they may progress to some authentic Classical Greek texts, encountering selections from famous works of poetry and prose. Through their reading, analysis and translation of texts, students of Classical Greek further develop their literacy in English, through close attention to detail, precision, accuracy, memory, logic and critical reasoning. They have a growing awareness of the wider world, including the diversity of languages and cultures that have continued to be an integral feature of society since ancient times. They are considering future pathways and prospects, including how further study of Classical Greek may feature in these. Classical Greek language learning and use Learners gain direct access to life in the ancient Greek world through reading, analysing and interpreting Classical Greek texts that reveal the language use and social and cultural practices of the ancient Greeks. They use vocabulary, grammar and textual cues to analyse and interpret language use and cultural references in Classical Greek texts, such as historiography, drama or philosophy, and convey their interpretations of information and ideas about ancient Greek society and culture, in oral, written or digital forms, using Classical Greek as appropriate. They respond to Classical Greek texts by analysing themes, values and literary features, such as plot development and characterisation, and sharing and justifying opinions. They read aloud, recite or perform Classical Greek texts, such as oratory, history, drama or poetry, to entertain an audience, using phrasing and voice inflection to convey meaning and emotion. They translate a range of texts that incorporate complex sentence structures and extensive vocabulary into Standard English, reproducing the style and purpose of the texts. They evaluate the effectiveness of different English translations and interpretations of a text, and develop strategies for successful translations. Learners apply the principles of pronunciation for the reading of Classical Greek texts, and apply an extended knowledge of vocabulary, accidence and syntax to analysing how Classical Greek is used in complex sentences. They analyse the structure and organisation of different text types in Classical Greek, exploring how they relate to context, purpose and audience. Learners identify ancient Greek values, attitudes and beliefs implicit in Classical Greek texts, reflecting respectfully on the interdependence of language and culture. They investigate the enduring linguistic and cultural legacy of the ancient Greek world in the modern world. They question and explain their own and others’ reactions to and assumptions about the language, culture and values of ancient Greek society, discussing how these relate to their own. They reflect on the power of language, and the impact of learning Classical Greek on their own style of communicating, and ways of thinking and viewing the world. Contexts of interaction Task characteristics and literary styles at this level are complex and challenging, providing opportunities for independent as well as collaborative language interpretation and performance, and development and strategic use of language and cultural resources. The language class remains the principal context for learning Classical Greek. Learners may participate in wider experiences relating to language and culture, such as competitions in recitation, art and essay writing; weekend camps; quiz nights; study seminars; summer schools; drama productions; and visits to museums and galleries. These experiences give learners a sense of connectedness and purpose, and allow them to make use of and extend their understanding of the ancient Greek world and their language capability beyond the school context. Texts and resources Learners engage with a range of texts designed for language learning, such as textbooks, audio recordings, teacher-generated materials and online resources. A variety of texts gives opportunities for discussion and analysis of the relationship between language and culture. Research tasks allow for exploration of themes, cultural references and historical events. Features of Classical Greek language use Learners apply the principles of pronunciation for the reading of Classical Greek texts, for example, using accentuation, crasis and elision to maintain speech flow. They apply an extended knowledge of accidence and syntax, including parts of speech, case, gender, number, person, declension, for example, τῆς γυναικὸς ὀργιζομένης ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέδραμε, and conjugation, for example, contract verbs in –οω and –μι, agreement, tense, mood, voice, participles and infinitives, to the analysis and translation of texts that incorporate complex sentence structures. They analyse texts more critically, identifying the structure and features of different text types, and explaining their relationship with context, purpose and audience. They recognise the ongoing influence of Classical Greek on English, through the transfer of specialist vocabulary and abstract concepts, for example, sympathy, theorem, chaos, and the coining of vocabulary for new technology and new discoveries, such as in science and medicine, for example, phenotype, glycolysis and neurosis. They analyse implicit values, concepts and assumptions embedded in texts, explaining the interrelationship between language and culture. Level of support This stage of learning involves consolidation and progression. Learners need opportunities for new challenges and more independent learning experiences. Continued scaffolding, modelling and monitoring are required to support these challenges. A range of resources is provided and processes are modelled for the development of more autonomous self-monitoring and reflecting strategies, such as online collaborating for translation, video documenting and discussion forums. Continued focused attention on grammatical and literary features supports learners in the reading, analysis and translation of texts. The role of English Classical Greek is the language of texts studied, such as narratives, drama, poetry, history or oratory. Classical Greek is also used for reading aloud, reciting or performing texts. English is used for translation, analysis, explanation, discussion, evaluation and reflection.

Content description

Elaborations

Read, analyse and interpret Classical Greek texts, using vocabulary, grammar and textual cues, to engage with the ancient Greek world

[Key concepts: language, culture, meaning, experience; Key processes: reading, analysing, connecting]

(ACLCLE016)

  • predicting the context and content of Classical Greek texts through initial holistic reading, by identifying key words and phrases, for example, οἱ βάρβαροι μάλα φοβούμενοι
  • inferring meaning using knowledge of the text type and the author’s purpose and technique, for example, νῦν οὖν ἀτεχνῶς ἥκω παρασκευασμένος/βοᾶν, ὑποκρούειν, λοιδορεῖν τοὺς ῥήτορας/ἐάν τις ἄλλο πλὴν περὶ εἰρήνης λέγῃ. (Aristophanes’ Acharnians)
  • investigating and explaining the effect of word order in Classical Greek in producing emphasis and tone, for example, indignation, anger, suspense
  • examining and interpreting complex sentence structures, such as the use of the optative mood in indirect statements, for example, ὁ στρατηγὸς εἶπεν ὅτι οἱ σύμμαχοι δ’ ὁλίγου νικήσοιεν
  • reflecting on the particular use of tenses in Classical Greek and making comparisons with English, such as use of aspect, vivid use of the present in indirect speech, or use of the aorist in gnomic statements, for example, παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω
  • explaining how the coherence of complex texts relies on devices that signal text structure and guide readers, for example, οὖν, γάρ. μέντοι, δήπου
  • discussing conventions of Classical Greek texts, such as the inclusion of speeches in historiography
  • investigating how different conjunctions are used in complex sentences to extend, elaborate and explain ideas, for example, εἴχομεν ἡμεῖς Πύδναν καὶ Μεθώνην καὶ πάντα τὸν τόπον τοῦτον
  • explaining allusions to historical or mythological characters who exemplify Greek virtues, such as Achilles, Hector, Theseus, Solon, Socrates
  • recognising positive and negative connotations implicit in Classical Greek words, for example, τύραννος, δαίμων
  • examining cultural assumptions that influence ways in which meanings are expressed or interpreted, for example, the use of pompous or tragic language for comic effect in Aristophanes’ plays
  • discussing the function and power of cultural representations such as symbols, for example, the gorgon/aegis, the omphalos, Asclepius’ wand, the owl
  • justifying interpretations of texts, using examples or quotations from or references to the text, such as line numbers or a paraphrase of a longer section of text
  • constructing, editing and presenting interpretations of and responses to literary Classical Greek, using ICT collaboratively

Content description

Elaborations

Discuss how the ancient Greek world has influenced the modern world, in its social, political and legal structures; philosophy; literature; arts; and medical and scientific practices

[Key concepts: ancient/modern, aesthetics, time (the past in the present); Key processes: analysing, connecting, conceptualising]

(ACLCLU027)

  • discussing the ancient origins of modern political and legal structures and concepts, such as jury service, elections, trials
  • exploring modern social issues, such as class, the role of women and civil rights, and making comparisons with the Classical Greek period
  • researching the influence of leading Greek intellectuals, such as Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, on modern Western philosophy
  • discussing influences of Classical Greek literature on modern novels, poetry, drama and film, such as World War I poetry, David Malouf’s Ransom, Anouilh’s Antigone, A Dream of Passion (Medea)
  • recognising the importance of literary genres such as epic, tragedy, comedy, epigram, ode, history, myth
  • viewing artworks to investigate the incorporation of classical techniques and themes by later artists, for example, Botticelli, Michelangelo, Bernini
  • investigating ancient practices in medicine and science still relevant in the modern world, such as the theories of Hippocrates, Democritus, Pythagoras, Archimedes, Eratosthenes, Aristarchus

Content description

Elaborations

Convey interpretations of information and ideas about ancient Greek society and culture, in oral, written and digital forms, using Classical Greek as appropriate

[Key concepts: information, culture; Key processes: interpreting, explaining, presenting]

(ACLCLE017)

  • discussing how cultural attitudes are conveyed in Classical Greek texts, such as attitudes to slaves or women, cleanliness, food, for example, conducting a role-play, forum on salient issues, ‘Q & A’ session
  • investigating legal rights and obligations of citizens, social classes or property rights, for example, building a digital representation of social strata
  • researching ancient Greek urban planning and architecture through the study of an archaeological site, and presenting findings, for example, by creating a virtual tour of the Agora or the Acropolis of Athens, with written or oral text in English or simple sentences in Classical Greek
  • examining architectural remains of ancient Greece, such as places of entertainment and worship, and discussing what they reveal about the values and attitudes of ancient Greeks
  • gathering and collating information about ancient Greek art, including sculpture, jewellery and painting, for example, producing and presenting an online exhibition catalogue
  • researching references in Classical Greek texts to historical or mythological characters, such as Themistocles or Achilles
  • exploring Classical Greek inscriptions to elicit and present information about ancient Greek society, for example, vases, funerary stelae, ostraka, and creating own examples in English or Classical Greek

Framework for Classical Languages - Classical Greek Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students analyse a range of Classical Greek texts to obtain information and ideas about ancient Greek society and culture. They use vocabulary, grammar and textual cues to analyse and interpret language use and cultural references in Classical Greek texts, such as poetry, plays or narratives, for example, by deducing the meaning of complex sentence structures, such as those with subordinate clauses or indirect speech, for example, ὁ ἄγγελος λέγει ὅτι οἱ πολέμιοι προσέρχονται , and explaining the impact of word order on emphasis and tone, for example, ὁ δὲ ἀνεξέταστος βίος οὐ βιωτὸς ἀνθρώπῳ, ἓν οἶδα ὃτι οὐδὲν οἶδα, πρῶτον μὲν γάρ , and implicit values, concepts and assumptions embedded in language use, for example, ἀριστεία, μίασμα . They convey their interpretations of information and ideas about ancient Greek society and culture, in oral, written or digital forms, such as role-plays or debates in English about how cultural attitudes are conveyed in Classical Greek texts, or a digital presentation of an archaeological site, using simple sentences in Classical Greek, for example, τὸ μαντεῖον τῶν Δελφῶν . They share their responses to Classical Greek texts, such as narratives, dialogues, plays, poems or letters, by describing themes, values and literary features, such as plot development and characterisation, and expressing and justifying their opinions with support from the text. They read aloud, recite or perform Classical Greek texts, such as oratory, history, drama or poetry, to entertain different audiences, conveying meaning and emotion effectively by using appropriate phrasing and voice inflection. Students translate a range of texts that incorporate complex sentence structures and extensive vocabulary, from Classical Greek into Standard English that represents the style and purpose of the texts, applying their knowledge of roots, cognates and derivatives to infer the meaning of unfamiliar vocabulary, and using dictionaries to select the appropriate meaning of words. They analyse how the language is used in grammatically complex sentences, including subordinate clauses, non-finite verb forms, pronoun forms, mood and voice, such as case usage of nouns, pronouns and adjectives, for example, τούτων τῶν ἀνθρώπων, τὰ μείζονα κακά , perfect and pluperfect conjugations, for example, λέλοιπα/ἐλελοίπη , subjunctive and optative moods, for example, μὴ κρύψῃς τὴν μάστιγα ὦ δοῦλε , ὁ δεσπότης ἠρώτησε τὶς λύσειε τοὺς βοῦς , and passive voice, for example, ὁ ἳππος ἐλύθη, τῷ οἰστῷ βληθείς . They evaluate the effectiveness of different translations of the same Classical Greek text, and identify strategies for successful translations. Students apply the principles of pronunciation for the reading of Classical Greek texts. They identify the structure and organisation of different text types in Classical Greek, such as prose and verse, and explain how they relate to context, purpose and audience. They explain the role of Classical Greek in facilitating the spread of Greek civilisation and culture across the Mediterranean world, and the contribution of Classical Greek to the enrichment of English through the transfer of specialist vocabulary, for example, antithesis, ellipsis, euphemism, hyperbole , abstract concepts, for example, enthusiasm, patriotism, democracy, idiosyncrasy , and the coining of vocabulary for new technology and new discoveries, for example, thermodynamics, epigenomics . Students describe ancient Greek values, attitudes and beliefs that are embedded in particular language use, such as μέτρον and κλέος . They explain how the ancient Greek world has influenced social, political and legal structures, philosophy, literature, the arts, and medical and scientific practices in the modern world. They share reactions to and assumptions about the language, culture and values of ancient Greek society, explaining how these relate to their own language and culture. They compare ways of communicating and living in the ancient world with those of the modern world, and explain how learning Classical Greek influences their own ways of thinking and viewing the world.

French - French Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners These years represent a transition to secondary school. Students in this pathway are continuing to study French, bringing with them an established capability to interact in different situations, to engage with a variety of texts and to communicate with some assistance about their immediate world and that of France and other French-speaking communities. They have experience in analysing the major features of the language system and in reflecting on the nature of intercultural exchanges in which they are involved. French language learning and use French is used for classroom interactions and transactions, for explaining and practising language forms and for developing cultural understanding. Additional opportunities for interaction in the target language are provided by purposeful and integrated use of ICT. Learners work both collaboratively and independently, exploring different modes and genres of communication, with particular reference to their own current interests. They pool language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They use modelled and rehearsed language in familiar and unfamiliar contexts and increasingly generate original and personal language. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural perspectives and experience. Contexts of interaction The primary context for learning remains the French language class; however, there may be increasing opportunities for interaction with peers in France and other French-speaking communities through technology, partner-school arrangements or community connections. Learners have access to additional French resources through websites, social media and radio streaming. Features of French language use Learners expand their range of vocabulary beyond their immediate world. They make clearer distinctions between sounds and intonation patterns. They develop more detailed grammatical knowledge, using additional tenses (le passé composé, le futur proche), some reflexive verb forms and additional irregular verbs. They become more familiar with features of different types of text (for example, informative, transactional, expressive), using this understanding to guide their own text production. They create and present more varied texts (such as poems, web pages and brochures), plan events and join in competitions and debates. They use French with increasing accuracy and fluency, drafting and editing texts to improve structure and effect. They make connections more confidently between texts and cultural contexts. Texts and resources Learners work with a range of texts specifically designed for learning French in schools, such as textbooks, videos, readers and online resources. They also access materials created for French-speaking communities, such as films (with subtitles), websites, advertisements and magazines. Authentic French-community resources provide access to additional cultural expression and experience. Level of support This is a period of review and consolidation and of engaging with new and challenging learning experiences. Continued scaffolding, modelling and material support are required to manage this transitional phase. Learners require modelled language use, particularly at the paragraph and whole text level for written language and for developing fluency and accuracy in spoken French. Focused attention on grammatical and textual features supports learners’ development as text producers. Learners are encouraged to become more autonomous, to self-monitor and to reflect on their learning. The role of English French is increasingly used at this level for classroom interactions and routines, for task participation and structured discussions. English continues to be used for more complex elements of instruction, and more substantive discussion, analysis and reflection in relation to abstract concepts. Learners continue to develop a metalanguage for thinking and talking about language, culture, identity and the experience of learning and using French.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and control additional elements of French grammar such as compound tenses, irregular and reflexiveforms,moods and modalities

[Key concepts: tenses, parts of speech, moods, modalities, metalanguage; Key processes: analysing, categorising, distinguishing]

(ACLFRU067)

  • increasing control of the conjugation of regular verbs in le présent and le passé composé and of high-frequency irregular verbs such as avoir, être, faire, devoir, vouloir, savoir
  • recognising and using idiomatic expressions such as those using avoir, for example, avoir soif, avoir sommeil, avoir peur
  • understanding the form and function of reflexive verbs, for example, il se lève très tard, nous nous promenons chaque soir, je veux m’asseoir à côté de toi
  • extending knowledge of negative constructions such as ne…plus, ne…rien, ne…jamais, ne…que..
  • using le passé composé and le futur proche
  • understanding how to use modal verb forms to express possibility, obligation and ability (for example, je peux m’imaginer…, il doit partir demain), and impersonal expressions such as il faut… and on…
  • learning to use direct object pronouns in conjunction with the present tense, for example, je t’écoute, elle les mange tous les jours!
  • continuing to build a metalanguage to describe grammatical concepts and to organise learning resources, for example, verb charts, vocabulary lists and groups of pronouns, adverbs and adjectives

Content description

Elaborations

Organise and present information and ideas on different topics, issues or events, comparing perspectives and experiences

[Key concepts: perspective, engagement, action, debate; Key processes: managing information, shaping text, engaging]

(ACLFRC059)

  • organising and presenting information to raise awareness or invite action in relation to social or community issues, using multimodal forms of presentation such as sound and visual images or websites with hyperlinks
  • classifying information obtained from different print and electronic resources in a shared database of categories, themes and genres, showing relationships between ideas, topics and key language
  • presenting findings related to the investigation of a social or cultural issue (for example, la mode et les codes vestimentaires: l’influence des marques), summarising opinions and attitudes collected from surveys, interviews or media sources
  • conveying information and ideas by matching language features and text types to topics and themes, for example, using emotive images and captions to highlight issues such as la faim or l’égalité des sexes, or rap rhythms and punchlines to engage with controversial ideas or provoke reactions
  • combining modes of presentation such as displays, videos or music to explore social and cultural themes, for example, l’Australie et les régions asiatiques, or le multiculturalisme

French - French Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use written and spoken French to interact with teachers, peers and others and to exchange experiences, opinions and views. They use descriptive and expressive language to talk and write about immediate environments, personal interests and feelings and technical language to discuss issues of wider interest (for example, les nouvelles téchnologies, les rapports entre les générations, le travail, la musique ). They ask, give and follow directions and instructions, using phrases such as prenez la deuxième rue à gauche ..., suivez le boulevard jusqu’à ... and choisissez la photo . They locate and analyse information from different sources presenting it in modes and formats suitable for the intended audience. They use strategies such as emphasis, repetition and summary to support fluency and expression in shared reading, performances, discussions and debate. They plan, draft and present imaginative, informative and persuasive texts, using simple and compound sentences to structure arguments and to explain or justify a position. Students use regular verbs in the passé composé form independently as well as high-frequency irregular verbs such as faire, être and avoir . They use declarative, imperative and interrogative verbs in affirmative and negative forms. They interpret and translate language which has colloquial or cultural associations in either French or Australian English, providing alternative expressions when equivalence is not possible (for example, à tout à l’heure, good on ya!). They make appropriate language choices when communicating in French in different contexts and situations. Students use metalanguage to explain language features and elements, using appropriate grammatical terms (such as tenses, genres, agreement). They identify how language features such as vocabulary, tenor and register serve different purposes in different modes. They make connections between texts and contexts, comparing expression and representation in similar texts from different cultural contexts (for example, invitations to celebrations or ceremonies, postcards or letters between friends). Students identify the relationship between language and culture, understanding that personal and community identity are expressed through cultural expression and language use. They reflect on their own ways of communicating, discussing how these might be interpreted by others.

German - German Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners These years represent a transition to secondary school. Students in this sequence bring with them an established capability to interact in different situations, to engage with a variety of texts and to communicate with some assistance about their immediate world and that of German-speaking communities. They have experience in analysing the major features of the language system and in reflecting on the nature of intercultural exchanges in which they are involved. German language learning and use German is used for a range of classroom interactions and transactions, and for creating and maintaining a new class dynamic, explaining and practising language forms, reflecting on ways of thinking and learning, and developing cultural understanding. Learners are encouraged to socialise and interact with users of German beyond the classroom. Additional opportunities for interaction in the target language are provided by purposeful and integrated use of digital technologies, including social media and a range of applications. Learners work collaboratively and independently in the target language, exploring different modes and genres of communication with particular reference to their current social, cultural and communicative interests and needs. They pool information, language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They use and adapt modelled and rehearsed language in familiar and unfamiliar contexts, increasingly generating original language. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural experiences and perspectives, such as the notion of a shared understanding. Contexts of interaction While the primary context for learning is usually the German language classroom, there may be opportunities for interacting with peers in German-speaking contexts and with other learners of German, such as through the use of technology or relationships with partner schools. Learners may also have some contact with German speakers and cultural events in the local community. Texts and resources Learners listen to, read, view and interact with a widening range of texts for a variety of purposes (informative, transactional, imaginative, expressive). They apply learnt processing strategies and language knowledge, drawing on their grammatical and vocabulary knowledge and their understanding of text conventions and patterns to obtain meaning from texts. They make connections between texts and cultural frames, and reflect on aspects of the variability of language, identifying how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in language and how language choices determine how people, issues and circumstances are represented. They plan, create and present more complex and varied imaginative, informative and persuasive texts (shared stories, poetry, songs/raps, blogs, advertisements, reports, journal entries), applying appropriate conventions of text types. They design interactive events and collaborative tasks, and participate in discussions, games and competitions. Features of German language use Learners gain more control of grammatical and textual elements such as the case system, prepositions and tenses, using the present perfect (Perfekt) tense of verbs conjugated with haben and sein and the simple past (Imperfekt) tenses. They use German with increasing accuracy and fluency, drafting and editing texts to improve structure and effect and to clarify meaning. Learners build on their cumulative experience of learning languages to analyse the relationship between language and culture more critically. They identify cultural references in texts and consider how language frames and communicates perspectives and values. They make comparisons between their own language(s) and German, and reflect on the complexities involved in moving between languages and cultural systems. They monitor and reflect on their own intercultural experience and capability as second language learners, and identify their own personal and community practices and identities that reflect cultural influence. Level of support Particular support is required at this stage of second language learning to manage the transition to post-primary schooling and to encourage continued engagement. Opportunities to review and consolidate prior learning are balanced with provision of engaging and relevant new experiences and connections. Students are supported to develop increasing autonomy as language learners and users, to self-monitor, and to reflect on and adjust language in response to their experience in diverse contexts. The role of English While German is used in more extended and elaborated ways at this level, English is used when appropriate to allow for explanation, analysis and reflection in relation to abstract concepts.

Content description

Elaborations

bilingual resources such as games, vocabulary cards, glossaries, word lists and labelled posters forlearning and the wider community

[Key concepts: representation, organisation; Key processes: selecting, categorising, evaluating, translating]

(ACLGEC162)

  • creating English captions, commentaries or subtitles for German multimodal texts, or vice versa
  • discussing problems associated with online translators by comparing different versions of translations and suggesting causes for differences and mistranslations, considering the need to go beyond literal meaning
  • creating vocabulary lists and annotated cultural explanations for German-speaking visitors to events such as Australian sports days, swimming carnivals or family events, explaining culture-specific elements

Content description

Elaborations

Convey information and ideas on different topics, issues and events, describing and comparing views, perspectives and experiences, and using modes of presentation to suit different audiences

[Key concepts: representations, perspectives; Key processes: comparing, classifying, organising]

(ACLGEC158)

  • presenting information and ideas using language appropriate to text type and topics or themes, such as using reflective language in diary and journal entries, persuasive language in advertisements, emotive images and captions to highlight issues such as Kinderrechte, or rap rhythms and punchlines to engage with controversial ideas or provoke reactions
  • contrasting aspects of everyday life past and present, for example, Heute haben wir Twitter und Facebook. Damals gab es nur die Post.
  • organising and presenting information to raise awareness or invite action in relation to social or community issues, using multimodal forms of presentation such as sound and visual images or websites with hyperlinks
  • classifying information obtained from different print and electronic resources in a shared database of categories, themes and genres, showing relationships between ideas, topics and key vocabulary
  • combining modes of presentation such as displays, videos or music to compare social and cultural themes, for example, Australien und Asien/Deutschland und Europa im 21. Jahrhundert

German - German Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use written and spoken German to interact with teachers, peers and others; to make decisions, solve problems and negotiate transactions; and to exchange and justify ideas, opinions and views. When interacting, they use both rehearsed and spontaneous language to ask and respond to open-ended questions and express, compare and justify opinions, for example, Sie glaubt, dass … Ich bin dafür, weil … They apply rules of pronunciation, rhythm, stress and intonation to a range of sentence types and words, including loan words from English. They obtain, summarise and evaluate information from a range of sources. They express opinions and feelings in response to imaginative texts, and make connections with their own experiences and other texts. They plan, draft and present original imaginative and informative texts, following models to link and sequence events and ideas using both adverbs such as danach, dann, früher, vorher and common subordinating conjunctions, for example, als, wenn, weil, dass . They use some modal verbs and imperative forms, for example, Was soll ich machen? Du kannst … Kauf die neue App! They refer to a person, object or place using definite and indefinite articles, personal pronouns, and some demonstrative and interrogative adjectives such as dieser, jeder and welcher . They produce original present tense sentences and use familiar examples of the Perfekt and Imperfekt tenses. They use a range of everyday and topic-based prepositions, adverbs and adverbial phrases, for example, nach der Schule, zu Hause, in der Stadt, gegen die Wand , links, hier, oben, im Süden . They interpret and/or translate terms associated with the culture of German-speaking communities or their own culture, and explain specific values and traditions reflected in the language. They create a range of bilingual resources for the wide community and to assist their own and others’ language learning. They explain the importance of shared understanding, discussing adjustments made as a result of reactions and responses to intercultural experience. Students explain how language changes over time and identify reasons for change. They identify and apply the German case system (nominative, accusative and dative) and name some grammatical terms and their functions. They describe the similarities and differences between German and English punctuation, including capitalisation, numbers (ordinals, decimals) and quotation marks. They explain reasons for differences in a range of text types, for example, personal, informative and persuasive texts, including differences in text structure and language features. They give examples of how language use varies according to audience, context and purpose. They identify different aspects of the cultural dimension of learning and using German, and explain how language use reflects cultural ideas, assumptions and perspectives.

Health and Physical Education Foundation Year  

Foundation Year Description

The Foundation Year curriculum provides the basis for developing knowledge, understanding and skills for students to lead healthy, safe and active lives. The content gives students opportunities to learn about their strengths and simple actions they can take to keep themselves and their classmates healthy and safe. The content explores the people who are important to students and develops students’ capacity to initiate and maintain respectful relationships in different contexts, including at school, at home, in the classroom and when participating in physical activities. The Foundation curriculum provides opportunities for students to learn through movement. The content enables students to develop and practise fundamental movement skills through active play and structured movement activities. This improves competence and confidence in their movement abilities. The content also provides opportunities for students to learn about movement as they participate in physical activity in a range of different settings. Focus areas to be addressed in Foundation include: safe use of medicines (AD) food and nutrition (FN) health benefits of physical activity (HBPA) mental health and wellbeing (MH) relationships (RS) safety (S) active play and minor games (AP) fundamental movement skills (FMS) rhythmic and expressive movement activities (RE).
Students learn that humans are made in the image of God and that each person is to be respected, cared for and kept safe.   Students learn that, as whole people, boys and girls are equal and have both strengths and limitations. They understand that their body is a good and precious gift from God and they are supported to use the anatomical names of private body parts when learning about body ownership, privacy, respect, and responsibility.Students learn about respectful relationships, love and forgiveness.  They learn about God’s plan for people to help each other to be happy, healthy and safe. Students identify people who are important to them and can help to keep them safe. They are guided to use clues to recognise safe and unsafe situations and identify possible actions. Students learn strategies including persistence, to react to and report unsafe situations. 

Content description

Elaborations

Identify actions that promote health,and (ACPPS006)

  • identifying household substances that can be dangerous and suggesting examples of how they can be stored safely in the home
  • grouping foods into categories such as food groups and ‘always’ and ‘sometimes’ foods
  • recognising and following safety symbols and procedures at home and in water and road environments
  • understanding the importance of personal hygiene practices, including hand washing, face washing, nose blowing and toilet routines
  • recognising that being kind, fair and respectful to others can support class health and wellbeing
  • looking at different ways the community keeps them safe, for example devices like lights, procedures like safe swimming or safe food handling and safety volunteers

Health and Physical Education - Foundation Year Achievement Standard

By the end of Foundation Year, students recognise how they are growing and changing. They identify and describe the different emotions people experience. They identify actions that help them be healthy, safe and physically active. They identify different settings where they can be active and demonstrate how to move and play safely. They describe how their body responds to movement. Students use personal and social skills when working with others in a range of activities. They demonstrate, with guidance, practices and protective behaviours to keep themselves safe and healthy in different activities. They perform fundamental movement skills and solve movement challenges.

Hindi - Hindi Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

The nature of the learners This stage of learning coincides with social, physical and cognitive changes associated with adolescence. Increased cognitive maturity enables learners to work more deductively with language and culture systems, to apply more intentional learning strategies and to reflect productively on their learning. Motivation and engagement with language learning are influenced by peer–group dynamics, personal interests and values, and issues related to self-concept. This is particularly the case for bilingual learners for whom the duality of living between languages and cultural communities continuously impacts on the process of identity construction. The role of language is central to this process and is reflected in the degree to which learners self-define as members of language communities, how they position themselves in relation to peer groups, and the choices they make in relation to linguistic and social practices. These processes are fluid and context-responsive and impact on learners’ engagement with both Hindi and English language learning and use. Hindi language learning and use This is a stage of language exploration and of vocabulary expansion. Learners experiment with different modes of communication, such as digital and hypermedia, performance and discussion. Greater control of language structures and systems increases confidence and interest in communicating in wider contexts. Learners use Hindi to communicate and interact; to access and exchange information; to express feelings and opinions; to participate in imaginative and creative experiences; and to design, interpret and analyse a wide range of texts and experiences. They use language in different contexts more fluently, with a developing degree of self-correction and repair. They reference the accuracy of their written language use against a stronger frame of grammatical and systems knowledge. They demonstrate understanding of language variation and change, and of how intercultural experience, technology, media and globalisation influence language use and forms of communication. Contexts of interaction The language classroom is the main context of interaction for learning Hindi, involving interactions with peers, teachers and a wide range of texts and resources. Learners continue to interact with peers, family members and other Hindi speakers in immediate and local contexts, and with wider Hindi-speaking communities and cultural resources via virtual and online environments. They also encounter Hindi in wider contexts such as media, cultural or film festivals, community events or in-country travel. Texts and resources Learners engage with a range of language-learning texts and resources, such as textbooks, videos, media texts and online resources, including those developed for computer-supported collaborative learning. They engage with abridged versions of classic and contemporary Hindi literature and their film and TV adaptations. Learners may also access authentic materials designed for or generated by young Hindi speakers in a range of contexts, such as blogs, video clips, discussion forums, television programs or newspaper articles. Learners are encouraged to source additional materials to support their learning and to share with others, and to pursue personal interests in aspects of Hindi language and associated cultures. Features of Hindi language use Learners consolidate their understanding of the conventions of written script, applying these to their own language production in increasingly complex ways. They recognise the role of prefixes and suffixes and how these change the meaning of words, जीव, सजीव, जीवंत, and they understand the impact on written script and vocabulary of tatsam words and tadbhav words. They increasingly control both regular and irregular elements of spoken and written Hindi, such as the influence of accents and expression on pronunciation and their impact on spelling, for example, the use of वो in spoken Hindi in place of वह in written script. Learners use more complex elements of Hindi grammar, such as the passive voice, compound words and variations in register. They understand the function and use of case, for example, ने, को, से, के लिए, में, पर,and use a range of tenses in complex sentences to describe events and personal experiences, for example, पिछले वर्ष जैसे हमने होली का त्योहार मनाया था, उसी प्रकार इस वर्ष भी हम होली का त्योहार धूमधाम से मनाएंगे।. Vocabulary knowledge expands to include more abstract words and specialised vocabulary drawn from other learning areas or areas of wider personal interest. Textual knowledge and capability are strengthened through maintaining a balance between activities which focus on language forms and structures and communicative tasks and performance. Learners recognise, analyse and construct different types of texts for different purposes and audiences. Task characteristics and conditions become more complex and challenging, involving collaborative as well as independent language planning and performance. Elements of learning experiences involve interpreting, creating, evaluating and performing. Genres such as media resources, fiction and non-fiction texts, performances and research projects allow for exploration of themes of personal and contemporary relevance (for example, global and environmental issues, identity and relationship issues, questions of diversity and inclusivity). Learners investigate texts through more critical analysis, identifying how language choices reflect perspectives and shape meaning, and how they are shaped in turn by context and intention. Learners at this level understand the relationship between language, culture and identity. They explore in more depth and detail the processes involved in learning and using different languages, recognising them as involving cognitive, cultural and personal as well as linguistic resources. They identify how meaning-making and representation in different languages involve interpretation and personal response as well as literal translation and factual reporting. They explore the reciprocal nature of intercultural communication: how moving between different languages and cultural systems impacts on ways of thinking and behaving; how successful communication requires flexibility, awareness and openness to alternative ways. They develop the capacity to ‘decentre’ from normative ways of thinking and communicating, to consider their own cultural ways through the eyes of others, and to communicate in inter-culturally appropriate ways. Level of support At this level learners become less reliant on the teacher for support during communicative interactions and learning experiences, but provision of rich language input and modelled language are needed to continue to support and sustain language learning. The teacher provides both implicit and explicit modelling and scaffolding in relation to meaningful language use in context, and explicit instruction and explanation in relation to language structures, grammatical functions, abstract concepts and vocabulary knowledge. Provision of opportunities to discuss, clarify, rehearse and apply their knowledge is critical in consolidating knowledge and skills and in developing autonomy. Learners are encouraged to self-monitor, for example, by keeping records of feedback and contributing to peer support and self-review. The role of English Learners and teachers use Hindi as the primary medium of interaction in language-oriented and content-oriented learning experiences. English is used if appropriate for discussion, explanation or analysis that involves comparison between Hindi and English or concepts which may be better responded to in English. Learners are supported to reflect on the different roles English and Hindi play in their academic work and in their personal and community lives.

Content description

Elaborations

Organise information from different sources and in different modes of presentation for re-presentation in formats suitable for specific audiences and purposes

[Key concepts: information, perspective, representation, media; Key processes: researching, processing, evaluating, analysing]

(ACLHIC112)

  • identifying different perspectives on selected issues presented in different media outlets, such as news sites or specialty magazines such as प्रदूषण, जनसँख्या, भेदभाव, and using the material as stimulus for in-class or online debates or opinion pieces
  • listening to interviews with celebrities from fields such as sport, the arts, entertainment or politics, identifying and classifying words, expressions or cultural references that convey information about culture or context
  • presenting information collected from print and digital sources on a topic such as regional food specialities, for example, by creating a glossary of terms by categories, for example, herbs and spices मसाले, हल्दी, धनिया, फल, सब्जियाँ, सूखे
  • evaluating information retrieved from online discussion forums and social media outlets on issues relevant to their peer group, for example, family relationships, youth identity or generational change, selecting and editing content to include in a summary statement or report
  • analysing coverage of issues relating to Hindi-speaking communities from a range of news media, classifying and recording in a shared data base the most commonly addressed issues or perspectives
  • researching aspects of a selected activity or business operating in their community, for example, restaurants, boutiques, youth centres, presenting their findings in the form of digital displays or posters for a community information evening

Content description

Elaborations

Respond to a range of traditional and contemporary creative and literary texts, describing settings, identifying key themes, values and concepts, discussing representation ofand events and the stylistic effects of different genres

[Key concepts: expression, themes, values, creativity; Key processes: comparing, analysing, responding; Keytypes: stories, films, poetry, myths, cartoons]

(ACLHIC114)

  • comparing themes and values represented in contemporary texts such as cartoons or video games with those conveyed in traditional fables, epic poems and legends, for example, एकलव्य की गुरुदक्षिणा
  • discussing the enduring influence of classical fables and legends in passing on cultural values through allegory and storying, for example, by identifying classical references to describe personal traits or qualities, as in सत्यवादी हरिश्चन्द्र, श्रवण कुमार
  • identifying the use of English words and expressions by contemporary poets or songwriters writing in Hindi, considering possible reasons for this
  • analysing how the use of rhythm, rhyme, imagery and metaphor by poets such as कबीर, रवीन्द्रनाथ टैगोर; हरिवंश राय बच्चन; नीरज, गुलज़ार, महादेवी वर्मा and writers such as भीष्म साहनी; जयशंकर प्रसाद; मुँशी प्रेमचंद, मन्नू भंडारी create emotional, dramatic or humorous effects that reflect cultural traditions and literary genres
  • identifying characteristic elements of traditional forms of Hindi literature, such as verse celebrating bravery/warriors, for example, वीर गाथाएँ और गीत, जैसे पुष्प की अभिलाषा, devotional verse such as मीराबाई और सूरदास के भक्ति गीत, or children’s poems that celebrate nature, such as आया बसन्त
  • comparing the style, themes and language associated with different musical genres, for example, patriotic music such as राष्ट्रीय गान and सारे जहाँ से अच्छा, film songs or advertising jingles
  • exploring the playfulness, creativity and competitiveness of riddles, comparing their function as traditional entertainment in village communities with that of language play among young children today

Hindi - Hindi Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students use written and spoken Hindi in familiar and unfamiliar contexts to discuss and compare experiences and to express views on local and global issues, for example, पारिवारिक सम्बन्ध या सामाजिक मीडिया का उपयोग – डिजिटल दुनिया, मेरा समुदाय, श्रमिक दिवस, स्वतंत्रता दिवस, बैसाखी, भारत का शास्त्रीय संगीत, बॉलीवुड फिल्मों का इतिहास, ऑस्ट्रेलिया के दर्शनीय स्थल. They use action-related and spontaneous language to engage in shared activities that involve brainstorming, transacting, negotiation and problem-solving, for example, म्रत्यु-दण्ड या इच्छा-म्रत्यु के बारे में विचार विनिमय, बाज़ार में खरीददारी, शरणार्थियों की समस्या पर परिचर्चा. They interact in classroom exchanges by asking and responding respectfully to questions. When participating in discussions and shared learning activities, students use elaborated sentences and interactional cues to support debate, provide clarification and maintain cohesion and focus of discussion, for example, तो, उदाहरण के लिए, तदनुसार, आम तौर पर, दूसरे शब्दों में, विशेष रूप से, इस प्रकार, इसलिये, आप इस विषय में क्या सोचते हैं? क्या आप इसे विस्तार में समझाने की कृपा करेँगे? तुम समझ रहे हो न मैं क्या कह रहा हूँ l मेरी राय में…… मेरे कहने का अर्थ है... आपको नहीं लगता कि… मेरा सुझाव तो यही है कि .... They respond respectfully to different views, for example, मेरे विचार में…..ऐसा लगता है कि…; … हमें ध्यान रखना चाहिए… यह विवादास्पद है , लेकिन वास्तव में , मेरा विश्वास है…, मै आश्वस्त हूँ … and express agreement and disagreement in culturally appropriate ways. They apply appropriate pronunciation and intonation to spoken Hindi, identifying regularities and irregularities. They locate, process and analyse information obtained from different sources. They convey ideas and viewpoints from a range of perspectives using different text types and modes of presentation suited to context. They share their responses to different imaginative texts by identifying settings, themes and values, and discussing stylistic devices and the representation of characters and events. They produce imaginative texts using expressive, descriptive and evocative language in a range of modes and formats. When creating texts, students use complex features and patterns of the Hindi grammatical system such as passive voice, for example, रंगोली बनवायी जा रही है, छुट्टी करवाई जा रही है , compound words and phrases, and a variety of verb tenses, for example, पिछले वर्ष जैसे हमने होली का त्योहार मनाया था, उसी प्रकार इस वर्ष भी हम होली का त्योहार धूमधाम से मनाएँगे . They use vocabulary and expressions related to personal, social, environmental and global worlds, and apply appropriate writing conventions to increase text cohesion and enhance expression. Students translate and interpret familiar texts from Hindi into English and vice versa, explaining how cultural elements affect meaning. Students create bilingual texts that reflect the experience of being bilingual and bicultural. They explain their language choices and communicative behaviours in different intercultural interactions, and identify the adjustments they make according to context. They explain how language, culture and identity shape and reflect ways of communicating and thinking. Students identify regular and irregular elements of spoken and written Hindi, and apply their understanding of the Hindi writing system to express complex information and ideas and enhance meaning. They analyse the relationship between language choices, cultural elements and textual features, and the audience, purpose and context of different spoken, written and multimodal texts. Students explain how spoken and written forms of Hindi vary according to social roles, contexts and modes of expression, and compare these variations to those in other languages. They explain the dynamic nature of language and give examples of how languages change over time and contexts. They identify key features of multilingual experience, with reference to their own and community language practices. They explain how languages and cultures shape and are shaped by each and how cultural experience, values and identities are reflected in language.

Hindi - Hindi Years F–10 Sequence Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

The nature of the learners This stage of learning coincides with social, physical and cognitive changes associated with adolescence. Increased cognitive maturity enables learners to work more deductively with language and culture systems, to apply more intentional learning strategies and to reflect productively on their learning. Motivation and engagement with language learning and use are influenced by peer group dynamics, personal interests and values and issues related to self-concept. This is particularly the case for bilingual learners for whom the duality of living between languages and cultural frames impacts continually on the process of identity construction. The role of language is central to this process and is reflected in the degree to which learners define themselves as members of language communities, how they position themselves in relation to peer groups, the choices they make in relation to linguistic and social practices. These processes are fluid and context-responsive and impact on learners’ engagement with both Hindi and English language learning. Hindi language learning and use This is a period of language exploration, vocabulary expansion and experimentation with different modes of communication (for example, digital and hypermedia, collaborative performance and group discussions). Greater control of language structures and systems increases confidence and interest in communicating in a wider range of contexts. Learners use Hindi to communicate and interact; to access and exchange information; to express feelings and opinions; to participate in imaginative and creative experiences; and to design, interpret and analyse a wider range of texts and experiences. They use language in different contexts more fluently, with a greater degree of self-correction and repair. They reference the accuracy of their written language against a stronger frame of grammatical and systems knowledge. They demonstrate understanding of language variation and change, and of how intercultural experience, technology, media and globalisation influence language use and forms of communication. Contexts of interaction Learners interact with peers, teachers and other Hindi speakers in immediate and local contexts, and with wider Hindi-speaking communities and cultural resources via virtual and online environments. They may participate in community events such as film or cultural festivals, intercultural forums or exchange travel opportunities. Texts and resources Learners use an extensive range of texts and materials designed for in-class learning of Hindi, such as textbooks, literary texts, teacher-generated materials and online resources. Learning is enriched by exposure to authentic materials designed for or generated by young Hindi speakers, such as blogs, video clips, discussion forums, television programs or newspaper features. Learners are encouraged to source additional materials to support their own learning and to pursue personal interests in aspects of Hindi language and associated cultures. Features of Hindi language use Learners extend and consolidate grammatical knowledge, including the use of compound sentences by using postpositions मैं पहले दिल्ली जाऊँगा और अपना काम पूरा करने के बाद कोलकता पहुँचूँगा। and of a range of tenses to describe events and personal experiences, पिछले वर्ष जैसे हमने होली का त्योहार मनाया था उसी प्रकार इस वर्ष भी हम होली का त्योहार धूमधाम से मनाएंगे।. They make passive and active voice distinctions, राम उर्दू लिख रहा ह, उर्दू लिखी जा रही है, understand the appropriate use of participles and the function and use of case, ने, को, से, के लिए, में, पर. Their vocabulary knowledge expands to include more abstract words and specialised vocabulary drawn from other learning areas or areas of wider personal interest. Textual knowledge and capability are strengthened through maintaining a balance between activities that focus on language forms and structures and communicative tasks and performance. Learners recognise, analyse and construct different types of texts for different purposes and audiences. Task characteristics and conditions at this level are more complex and challenging, involving collaborative as well as independent language planning and performance, and development and strategic use of language and cultural resources. Elements of tasks involve interpreting, creating, evaluating and performing. Working with media resources, fiction and non-fiction texts, performances and research projects allows for exploration of themes of personal and contemporary relevance (for example, global and environmental issues, identity and relationship issues, questions of diversity and inclusivity). Learners investigate texts through more critical analysis, identifying how language choices reflect perspectives and shape meaning, and how they in turn are shaped by context and intention. Learners at this level understand the relationship between language, culture and identity. They explore in more depth and detail the processes involved in learning and using different languages, recognising the role of cognitive, cultural and personal as well as linguistic resources. They identify how meaning-making and representation in different languages involve interpretation and personal response as well as literal translation and factual reporting. They explore the reciprocal nature of intercultural communication: how moving between different languages and cultural systems impacts on their ways of thinking and behaving; and how successful communication requires flexibility, awareness and openness to alternative ways. They develop the capacity to ‘decentre’ from normative ways of thinking and communicating, to consider their own cultural ways through the eyes of others, and to communicate in interculturally appropriate ways. Level of support While learners are increasingly less reliant on the teacher for support during communicative interactions, continued support, provision of rich language input and modelled language is needed to consolidate and sustain the learning of Hindi. The teacher provides both implicit and explicit modelling and scaffolding in relation to meaningful language use in a range of contexts, situations and learning experiences, and explicit instruction and explanation in relation to complex structures, grammatical functions and abstract concepts and vocabulary. Provision of opportunities to discuss, clarify, rehearse and apply their knowledge is critical in consolidating knowledge and skills and developing autonomy. Learners are encouraged to self-monitor, for example, by keeping records of feedback and through peer support and self-review. The role of English Learners and teachers use Hindi as the primary medium of interaction in language-oriented and most content-oriented learning experiences. English is used for comparative analysis and for elements of discussion or conceptual analysis which may be better responded to in English than in Hindi. Learners are supported to reflect on the different roles English and Hindi play in their academic work.

Content description

Elaborations

Categorise observed changes to Hindi in domains of use such as education, media, popularand intercultural communication

[Key concepts: influence, exchange,contact; Key processes: investigating, demonstrating, identifying]

(ACLHIU088)

  • identifying changes in Hindi language forms and communicative styles in domains of use such as IT, diplomacy and commerce
  • classifying words and expressions from other languages that they use in different curriculum areas such as science, visual arts, economics, social studies
  • creating glossaries of terms that originated in other languages that they use in different areas of their own lives, for example, Persian सरकार, Arabic अदालत, Turkish क़ुली and Japanese रिक्शा
  • talking with older members of their families or communities about changes to Hindi across their lifetime, such as the blending of English and Hindi in language used in entertainment, news and sports commentary or advertising
  • analysing the language of the internet in terms of inter-language influences, for example, by identifying examples of Hindi words that have been adapted to accommodate concepts expressed in other languages

Content description

Elaborations

Research,and evaluate information presented from different perspectives in relation to youth-related interests, identifying howandaffect how information is presented

[Key concepts: perspective, context, culture; Key processes: comparing, analysing, explaining]

(ACLHIC076)

  • identifying different perspectives on selected social issues featured on television, radio or online forums, using the material as stimulus for debates or presentations, for example, जनसँख्या; भेदभाव; बेरोज़गारी, वैश्वीकरण, मानव अधिकार
  • comparing information published in different media on topical issues or well-known personalities in order to demonstrate the relationship between texts and cultural contexts, for example, by analysing language used in commentaries on क्रिकेट or reflections on Bhagat Singh, Subhash Chandra Bose, Rabindranath Tagore
  • conducting face-to-face or online interviews or surveys with peers, family or community members to compare experiences such as migration to Australia, living ‘across’ cultures or relationships with technology
  • critically analysing texts such as blogs, letters or newspaper announcements, distinguishing between facts and opinions, and identifying author intent, for example, by reading and discussing letters by Jawahar Lal Nehru, पिता के पत्र पुत्री के नाम
  • comparing representations in texts such as advertisements for mobile phones, beauty products or fast food in Hindi and English, considering why particular language or images have been selected
  • listening to interviews with celebrities from fields such as entertainment, sport or politics, identifying expressions or cultural references that convey a sense of culture or context

Hindi - Hindi Years F–10 Sequence - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students initiate, sustain and extend a range of spoken and written formal and informal interactions about young people’s interests, behaviours and values, for example, आप कब वापस आये?, आप के जीवन में सुखी जीवन को व्यतीत करने के क्या उपाय हैं?तुम्हारे विचार में संयुक्त और एकल परिवार में से कौन सी पारिवारिक सरंचना आज के युग में ज़्यादा उपयुक्त है? आप के विचार में आज की युवा पीढ़ी पर किस का प्रभाव पड़ रहा है? तुम अपने दोस्तों के बारे में कुछ बताओ. They participate in activities that involve interactions, transactions, negotiations and managing different opinions and social/cultural behaviours, for example, यह ठीक है, हम सब मिल कर करेंगे, हमें इस में कुछ चित्र भी सम्मिलित करने चाहिये?, क्यों न हम सब ..., यही उचित रहेगा। आपको इसमें से एक चुनना है. When interacting, they use culturally appropriate expressions and protocols, for example, धन्यवाद, आप का बहुत बधाई हो ।अपनी पुत्री के शुभ विवाह पर मैं आपको आमंत्रित करना चाहता हूँ । मैं नेहा बेटी को आशीर्वाद देने ज़रूर आऊँगा। यह मेरा सौभाग्य है कि आप ने मुझे इतने महत्त्वपूर्ण अवसर में सम्मिलित होने का अवसर दिया, किन्तु मैं किसी कारणवश नहीं आ पाऊँगा।. They extend discussions and justify their views by asking open-ended questions and providing elaborated responses, for example, इस विषय पर आपके क्या विचार हैं, आप क्या सोचते हैं?, इसका क्या प्रभाव पड़ेगा मुझे विस्तार से बताओ। मेरे कहने का तात्पर्य है कि …, तुम यह कहना चाहते हो कि…, मुझे लगता है कि …. When speaking, they apply pronunciation rules and rhythm, including social and regional variations, to complex sentences. They research, interpret and evaluate information and perspectives on social issues or issues of interest to young people, and identify how culture and context influence the way information is presented. They convey information and perspectives using different text types and modes of presentation. They respond to different expressive and imaginative texts by analysing techniques and cultural influences used for aesthetic, humorous or emotional effects. Students create imaginative texts to express ideas, attitudes and emotions through characters, events and settings relating to bilingual and bicultural experiences. When creating texts, they use a variety of grammatical elements, such as joining rules, for example, आ+ओ=औ, क्+अ+ल= कल, कारक ; case, for example, ने, को, से, के लिए, में, पर; and a range of tenses and participles, for example, आ, ई, ऐ, जाना, वाला, रहा, सकना, पहुँचना, दिल्ली जाने वाले लोग, साइकिल पर लड़की चल रही है to produce complex sentences such as मैं पहले दिल्ली जाऊँगा फिर वहाँ से बम्बई जाऊँगा; कल मैं काम खत्म कर के आपने साथियो के साथ खेलने जाऊँगा. Students compare translations and interpretations of literary, community and social media texts, including those that use both Hindi and English. They create a range of bilingual texts that reflect the nature of their own and each other’s intercultural experience. They describe their experience of being bilingual or multilingual and explain the relationship between language, culture and identity. Students apply their understanding of complex pronunciation rules and writing conventions, such as variations between spoken and written Hindi and between Sanskrit and Perso-Arabic script. They explain how elements of grammar and word formation allow for the expression of ideas and meaning. They analyse and construct a range of texts for different purpose and audiences and identify cultural, textual and contextual features. They explain how and why variations in Hindi language use relate to roles, relationships and contexts of interaction. Students identify and categorise changes to Hindi and to other languages in different domains of use such as education and popular culture. They explain how being bilingual or multilingual affects the ways they and their peers think, behave and communicate.

History Year 7  

Year 7 Description

The ancient world The Year 7 curriculum provides a study of history from the time of the earliest human communities to the end of the ancient period, approximately 60 000 BC (BCE) – c.650 AD (CE). It was a period defined by the development of cultural practices and organised societies. The study of the ancient world includes the discoveries (the remains of the past and what we know) and the mysteries (what we do not know) about this period of history, in a range of societies in places including Australia, Egypt, Greece, Rome, India and China. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 7 are: How do we know about the ancient past? Why and where did the earliest societies develop? What emerged as the defining characteristics of ancient societies? What have been the legacies of ancient societies?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 7 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate, compare, select and use information from a range of sources as (ACHHS210)

  • creating categories (that is, concepts) with which to organise information obtained from sources
  • identifying a range of archaeological sources (for example, the physical remains of the Colosseum, gladiatorial equipment such as helmets, mosaics showing gladiatorial combat, written accounts of what happened in the Colosseum)

History - Year 7 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 7, students suggest reasons for change and continuity over time. They describe the effects of change on societies, individuals and groups. They describe events and developments from the perspective of different people who lived at the time. Students explain the role of groups and the significance of particular individuals in society. They identify past events and developments that have been interpreted in different ways. Students sequence events and developments within a chronological framework, using dating conventions to represent and measure time. When researching, students develop questions to frame a historical inquiry. They identify and select a range of sources and locate, compare and use information to answer inquiry questions. They examine sources to explain points of view. When interpreting sources, they identify their origin and purpose. Students develop texts, particularly descriptions and explanations. In developing these texts and organising and presenting their findings, they use historical terms and concepts, incorporate relevant sources, and acknowledge their sources of information.

History Year 8  

Year 8 Description

The ancient to the modern world The Year 8 curriculum provides a study of history from the end of the ancient period to the beginning of the modern period, c.650– 1750 AD (CE). This was when major civilisations around the world came into contact with each other. Social, economic, religious and political beliefs were often challenged and significantly changed. It was the period when the modern world began to take shape. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 8 are: How did societies change from the end of the ancient period to the beginning of the modern age? What key beliefs and values emerged and how did they influence societies? What were the causes and effects of contact between societies in this period? Which significant people, groups and ideas from this period have influenced the world today?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 8 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate, compare, select and use information from a range of sources as (ACHHS153)

  • creating categories to organise the information obtained from sources
  • designing a table to list sources and the aspects of the past about which they provide information (for example, social structure, economy, governance)

Content description

Elaborations

Significant developments and/or cultural achievements, such as changing relations between Islam and the West (including the Crusades), architecture,manuscripts and music (ACDSEH050)

  • describing the features of castles and churches of the period (for example, Warwick Castle in England and Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris) as examples of the Church’s power in terms of its control of wealth and labour
  • researching inventions and developments in the Islamic world and their subsequent adoption in the Western world
  • recognising that the medieval manuscripts of monastic scribes contributed to the survival of many ancient Greek and Roman literary texts
  • examining the religious nature of illuminated manuscripts and how they were the product of a complex and frequently costly process
  • listening to the Gregorian chants of Western Christianity and exploring how they reflect the nature and power of the Church in this period

Content description

Elaborations

The immediate- and long-term effects of the Black Death on Asian, European and African populations, and conflicting theories about the impact of the plague  (ACDSEH071)

  • using studies of church records from the period to identify the effect of the Black Death on human populations and to consider the reliability of these statistics
  • investigating the effects of the Black Death on society (for example, labour shortages, peasant uprisings, the weakening of feudal structures and increased social mobility)
  • categorising the effects of the Black Death as either short term or long term and drawing conclusions about the severity of the Black Death

History - Year 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students recognise and explain patterns of change and continuity over time. They explain the causes and effects of events and developments. They identify the motives and actions of people at the time. Students explain the significance of individuals and groups and how they were influenced by the beliefs and values of their society. They describe different interpretations of the past. Students sequence events and developments within a chronological framework with reference to periods of time. When researching, students develop questions to frame a historical inquiry. They analyse, select and organise information from primary and secondary sources and use it as evidence to answer inquiry questions. Students identify and explain different points of view in sources. When interpreting sources, they identify their origin and purpose, and distinguish between fact and opinion. Students develop texts, particularly descriptions and explanations, incorporating analysis. In developing these texts, and organising and presenting their findings, they use historical terms and concepts, evidence identified in sources, and acknowledge their sources of information.

History Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The making of the modern world The Year 9 curriculum provides a study of the history of the making of the modern world from 1750 to 1918. It was a period of industrialisation and rapid change in the ways people lived, worked and thought. It was an era of nationalism and imperialism, and the colonisation of Australia was part of the expansion of European power. The period culminated in World War I, 1914–1918, the ‘war to end all wars’. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 9 are: What were the changing features of the movements of people from 1750 to 1918? How did new ideas and technological developments contribute to change in this period? What was the origin, development, significance and long-term impact of imperialism in this period? What was the significance of World War I?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 9 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

The extension of settlement, including the effects of contact (intended and unintended) between European settlers in Australia and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples (ACDSEH020)

  • explaining the effects of contact (for example, the massacres of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people; their killing of sheep; the spread of European diseases) and categorising these effects as either intended or unintended
  • investigating the forcible removal of children from Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander families in the late nineteenth century/early twentieth century (leading to the Stolen Generations), such as the motivations for the removal of children, the practices and laws that were in place, and experiences of separation.

History - Year 9 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 9, students refer to key events and the actions of individuals and groups to explain patterns of change and continuity over time. They analyse the causes and effects of events and developments and make judgments about their importance. They explain the motives and actions of people at the time. Students explain the significance of these events and developments over the short and long term. They explain different interpretations of the past. Students sequence events and developments within a chronological framework, with reference to periods of time and their duration. When researching, students develop different kinds of questions to frame a historical inquiry. They interpret, process, analyse and organise information from a range of primary and secondary sources and use it as evidence to answer inquiry questions. Students examine sources to compare different points of view. When evaluating these sources, they analyse origin and purpose, and draw conclusions about their usefulness. They develop their own interpretations about the past. Students develop texts, particularly explanations and discussions, incorporating historical interpretations. In developing these texts and organising and presenting their conclusions, they use historical terms and concepts, evidence identified in sources, and they reference these sources.

History Year 10  

Year 10 Description

The modern world and Australia The Year 10 curriculum provides a study of the history of the modern world and Australia from 1918 to the present, with an emphasis on Australia in its global context. The twentieth century became a critical period in Australia’s social, cultural, economic and political development. The transformation of the modern world during a time of political turmoil, global conflict and international cooperation provides a necessary context for understanding Australia’s development, its place within the Asia-Pacific region and its global standing. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 10 are: How did the nature of global conflict change during the twentieth century? What were the consequences of World War II? How did these consequences shape the modern world? How was Australian society affected by other significant global events and changes in this period?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 10 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Significant events and campaigns that contributed to popular awareness of environmental issues, such as the campaign to prevent the damming of Australia’s Gordon River, the nuclear accident at Chernobyl and the Jabiluka mine controversy in 1998 (ACDSEH127)

  • investigating a range of environmental impacts (for example, the flooding of Lake Pedder in Tasmania, deforestation in Indonesia, the decline of the Aral Sea, the Exxon Valdez oil spill, the whaling industry)
  • explaining the struggle over French nuclear weapon testing in the Pacific 1966–1996 (for example, the sinking of the ship, the Rainbow Warrior, in 1985)

Content description

Elaborations

Develop texts, particularly descriptions and discussions that usefrom a range of sources that are referenced (ACHHS192)

  • developing a historical argument that identifies different possibilities in interpretation and argues a particular point of view, with consistent and specific reference to the evidence available
  • explaining the significance of the fall of Singapore (1942) in the changes in Australia’s military alliances and use of troops during World War II, using a range of sources (for example, accounts of prisoners of war, commanders such as General Gordon Bennett, politicians such as Prime Minister John Curtin, and Japanese and British sources)

History - Year 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students refer to key events, the actions of individuals and groups, and beliefs and values to explain patterns of change and continuity over time. They analyse the causes and effects of events and developments and explain their relative importance. They explain the context for people’s actions in the past. Students explain the significance of events and developments from a range of perspectives. They explain different interpretations of the past and recognise the evidence used to support these interpretations. Students sequence events and developments within a chronological framework, and identify relationships between events across different places and periods of time. When researching, students develop, evaluate and modify questions to frame a historical inquiry. They process, analyse and synthesise information from a range of primary and secondary sources and use it as evidence to answer inquiry questions. Students analyse sources to identify motivations, values and attitudes. When evaluating these sources, they analyse and draw conclusions about their usefulness, taking into account their origin, purpose and context. They develop and justify their own interpretations about the past. Students develop texts, particularly explanations and discussions, incorporating historical argument. In developing these texts and organising and presenting their arguments, they use historical terms and concepts, evidence identified in sources, and they reference these sources.

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 1  

Year 1 Description

How my world is different from the past and can change in the future The Year 1 curriculum provides a study of the recent past, the present and the near future within the context of the student’s own world. Students are given opportunities to explore how changes occur over time in relation to themselves, their own families, and the places they and others belong to. They examine their daily family life and how it is the same as and different to previous generations. They investigate their place and other places, their natural, managed and constructed features, and the activities located in them. They explore daily and seasonal weather patterns and how different groups describe them. They anticipate near future events such as personal milestones and seasons. The idea of active citizenship is introduced as students explore family roles and responsibilities and ways people care for places. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; place and space; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from two sub-strands: history and geography. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How has family life and the place we live in changed over time? What events, activities and places do I care about? Why?
When planning for learning in Year 1 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: Students would consider the concept of stewardship of God's creation as they explore the features of their place and how their place can be cared for. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Sort and record information and data, including location, in tables and on plans and labelled maps (ACHASSI020)

  • creating and sharing concept maps to show personal understanding of their world (for example, a web of family relationships and connections, or a mental map of their place and its important features or spaces)
  • making artefact and photo displays to show the features of a place (for example, collections of natural and constructed things from the environment) or to show the passing of time (for example, collections of things used when growing older, toys used by different generations) and labelling the display with simple captions
  • recording data about the location of places and their features on maps and/or plans (for example, labelling the location of their home and daily route to school on a map of the local area, drawing a plan of their classroom and labelling its activity spaces)
  • developing a pictorial table to categorise information (for example, matching clothes with seasons, activities with the weather, features and places, places with the work done)

Content description

Elaborations

Compare objects from the past with those from the present and consider how places have changed over time (ACHASSI023)

  • identifying similarities and differences between activities over time by comparing objects of the past with those currently used (for example, comparing toys, games, clothes, phones, cooking utensils, tools, homework books)
  • using comparative language when describing family life over time and/or comparing features of places, such as ‘smaller than’, ‘bigger than’, ‘closer’, ‘further’, ‘not as big as’, ‘younger/older than’, ‘more rainy days’, ‘fewer/less’, ‘hottest/coldest’, ‘sunnier’, ‘windier than’
  • exploring Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander stories, traditional and contemporary, about places and the past and how places have changed
  • categorising objects, drawings or images by their features and explaining their reasoning, for example, categorising the features of a local place into natural (native forest), constructed (street of houses) and managed (windbreak of trees)

Humanities and Social Sciences - Year 1 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 1, students identify and describe important dates and changes in their own lives. They explain how some aspects of daily life have changed over recent time while others have remained the same. They identify and describe the features of places and their location at a local scale and identify changes to the features of places. They recognise that people describe the features of places differently and describe how places can be cared for. Students respond to questions about the recent past and familiar and unfamiliar places by collecting and interpreting information and data from observations and from sources provided. They sequence personal and family events in order and represent the location of different places and their features on labelled maps. They reflect on their learning to suggest ways they can care for places. They share stories about the past, and present observations and findings using everyday terms to denote the passing of time and to describe direction and location.

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 3  

Year 3 Description

Diverse communities and places and the contribution people make The Year 3 curriculum focuses on the diversity of people and places in their local community and beyond, and how people participate in their communities. Students study how places are represented geographically and how communities express themselves culturally and through civic participation. Opportunities are provided to learn about diversity within their community, including the Country/Place of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, and about other communities in Australia and neighbouring countries. Students compare the climates, settlement patterns and population characteristics of places, and how these affect communities, past and present. Students examine how individuals and groups celebrate and contribute to communities in the past and present, through establishing and following rules, decision-making, participation and commemoration. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from three sub-strands: history, geography and civics and citizenship. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How do symbols, events, individuals and places in my community make it unique? How do people contribute to their communities, past and present? What events do different people and groups celebrate and commemorate and what does this tell us about our communities?
When planning for learning in Year 3 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: Within the Christian tradition people live in relationship with God and others. They are called to contribute to the fullness of life and live peacefully and safely with each other. Many communities consist of diverse people, cultures and religions.  All are dignified, respected and included. Individuals within the community are encouraged to contribute to the life of wider society and to remember and commemorate the traditions and accomplishments of those who have come before. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

The similarities and differences between places in terms of their type of settlement, demographic characteristics and the lives of the people who live there, and people’s perceptions of these places (ACHASSK069)

  • exploring people’s feelings for place and the factors that influence people’s attachment to place, through reading and viewing poems, songs, paintings and stories
  • discussing why it is important to protect places that have special significance for people (for example, a wetland, a sacred site, a national park or a World Heritage site)
  • exploring different types of settlement, and classifying them into hierarchical categories (for example, isolated dwellings, outstations, villages, towns, regional centres and large cities)
  • investigating the diversity of people who live in their place (for example, surveying the school community about age, birthplace and ancestry) and comparing them with a school in another place in Australia or neighbouring country
  • examining the similarities and differences between their daily lives and those of people in another place in Australia or neighbouring country, and inferring what it would be like to live in these places

Humanities and Social Sciences - Year 3 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 3, students identify individuals, events and aspects of the past that have significance in the present. They identify and describe aspects of their community that have changed and remained the same over time. They describe the diverse characteristics of different places at the local scale and identify and describe similarities and differences between the characteristics of these places. They identify connections between people and the characteristics of places. Students explain the role of rules in their community and the importance of making decisions democratically. They identify the importance of different celebrations and commemorations for different groups. They explain how and why people participate in and contribute to their communities. Students pose questions and locate and collect information from sources, including observations, to answer these questions. They examine information to identify a point of view and interpret data to identify and describe simple distributions. They draw simple conclusions and share their views on an issue. They sequence information about events and the lives of individuals in chronological order. They record and represent data in different formats, including labelled maps using basic cartographic conventions. They reflect on their learning to suggest individual action in response to an issue or challenge. Students communicate their ideas, findings and conclusions in oral, visual and written forms using simple discipline-specific terms.

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 5  

Year 5 Description

Australian communities – their past, present and possible futures The Year 5 curriculum focuses on colonial Australia in the 1800s and the social, economic, political and environmental causes and effects of Australia’s development, and on the relationship between humans and their environment. Students’ geographical knowledge of Australia and the the world is expanded as they explore the continents of Europe and North America, and study Australia’s colonisation, migration and democracy in the 1800s. Students investigate how the characteristics of environments are influenced by humans in different times and places, as they seek resources, settle in new places and manage the spaces within them. They also investigate how environments influence the characteristics of places where humans live and human activity in those places. Students explore how communities, past and present, have worked together based on shared beliefs and values. The curriculum introduces studies about Australia’s democratic values, its electoral system and law enforcement. In studying human desire and need for resources, students make connections to economics and business concepts around decisions and choices, gaining opportunities to consider their own and others’ financial, economic, environmental and social responsibilities and decision-making, past, present and future. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from four sub-strands: history, geography, civics and citizenship and economics and business. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How have individuals and groups in the past and present contributed to the development of Australia? What is the relationship between environments and my roles as a consumer and citizen? How have people enacted their values and perceptions about their community, other people and places, past and present?
When planning for learning in Year 5 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: The environment is God's gift to everyone and in our use of it we have a responsibility to the poor, future generations and humanity as a whole. Choices have consequences and students should consider who benefits and who might be harmed. As human beings we are fundamentally good but sometimes we make inappropriate choices. When we make choices and decisions we should try to choose the good. Our flourishing is intimately tied up with the flourishing of others. When we use our freedom in this way, we respect not only the dignity of all human beings, but come closer to realizing the kind of just, peaceful, and joyful community that God wants for humanity that is truly good. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Why regulations and laws are enforced and the personnel involved (ACHASSK117)

  • categorising the different types of laws and regulations in their community and who enforces them (road laws – police; health laws – public health department; pollution laws – environmental protection officer)
  • identifying and researching the role of different people associated with law enforcement (for example, quarantine and customs officials, police) and the legal system (for example, judges and lawyers)

Content description

Elaborations

Types of(natural, human, capital) and the ways societies use them to satisfy theandof present and future generations (ACHASSK120)

  • categorising resources as natural (water, coal, wheat), human (workers, business owners, designing, making, thinking) and capital (tools, machines, technologies)
  • brainstorming resources that a local community might use
  • identifying and categorising the factors of production used in the production of goods and services that satisfy the needs and wants of a local community
  • listing the needs and wants of a local community and exploring the ways resources are currently used to meet these needs and wants and how resources might be used more sustainably to meet these needs and wants into the future
  • exploring how Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples' traditional and contemporary use of resources reflects their spiritual connections to the land, sea, sky and waterways

Content description

Elaborations

Influences onchoices and methods that can be used to help make informed personaland financial choices (ACHASSK121)

  • identifying goods they have purchased and categorising and explaining factors that influence consumer purchasing decisions (for example, personal preferences, social trends, economic factors such as budgets and the amount of money available to spend; psychological factors such as advertising and peer pressure; cultural, environmental, legal and ethical factors)
  • comparing the influence of a variety of selling and advertising strategies used by businesses on consumer choices (for example, the influence of television and internet advertising compared to email promotions)
  • recognising that financial transactions can include the use of notes, coins, credit and debit cards, and barter items; explaining the advantages and disadvantages of the different transaction types; and considering how these may influence the way people purchase items
  • exploring the strategies that can be used when making consumer and financial decisions (for example, finding more information, comparing prices, keeping a record of money spent, saving for the future)

Content description

Elaborations

Organise and representin a range of formats including tables, graphs and large- and small-scale maps, using discipline-appropriate (ACHASSI096)

  • categorising information using digital and non-digital graphic organisers (for example, flowcharts, consequence wheels, futures timelines, Venn diagrams, scattergrams, decision-making matrixes and bibliography templates)
  • constructing maps, tables and graphs using appropriate digital applications and conventions (such as border, source, scale, legend, title and north point) to display data and information (for example, information about the movement of peoples over time in colonial Australia; the different climates of Europe and North America; population growth of Australian colonies; cultural and religious groups in Australia at different times; influences on consumer purchasing decisions)
  • deciding which recording methods and tools (for example, graphs, tables, field sketches, questionnaires, scattergrams, audio-recorders, video recorders, cameras, water or air quality testing kits, binoculars, clinometers, calculators) suit the data or information to be collected
  • mapping geographical data using spatial technologies (for example, the location of recent bushfires in Australia, or information they have collected through fieldwork)

Humanities and Social Sciences - Year 5 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 5, students describe the significance of people and events/developments in bringing about change. They identify the causes and effects of change on particular communities and describe aspects of the past that have remained the same. They describe the experiences of different people in the past. Students explain the characteristics of places in different locations at local to national scales. They identify and describe the interconnections between people and the human and environmental characteristics of places, and between components of environments. They identify the effects of these interconnections on the characteristics of places and environments. Students identify the importance of values and processes to Australia’s democracy and describe the roles of different people in Australia’s legal system. They recognise that choices need to be made when allocating resources. They describe factors that influence their choices as consumers and identify strategies that can be used to inform these choices. They describe different views on how to respond to an issue or challenge. Students develop questions for an investigation. They locate and collect data and information from a range of sources to answer inquiry questions. They examine sources to determine their purpose and to identify different viewpoints. They interpret data to identify and describe distributions, simple patterns and trends, and to infer relationships, and suggest conclusions based on evidence. Students sequence information about events, the lives of individuals and selected phenomena in chronological order using timelines. They sort, record and represent data in different formats, including large-scale and small-scale maps, using basic conventions. They work with others to generate alternative responses to an issue or challenge and reflect on their learning to independently propose action, describing the possible effects of their proposed action. They present their ideas, findings and conclusions in a range of communication forms using discipline-specific terms and appropriate conventions.

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 6  

Year 6 Description

Australia in the past and present and its connections with a diverse world The Year 6 curriculum focuses on the social, economic and political development of Australia as a nation, particularly after 1900, and Australia’s role within a diverse and interconnected world today. Students explore the events and developments that shaped Australia as a democratic nation and stable economy, and the experiences of the diverse groups who have contributed to and are/were affected by these events and developments, past and present. Students investigate the importance of rights and responsibilities and informed decision-making, at the personal level of consumption and civic participation, and at the national level through studies of economic, ecological and government processes and systems. In particular, students examine Asia’s natural, demographic and cultural diversity, with opportunities to understand their connections to Asian environments. These studies enable students to understand how they are interconnected with diverse people and places across the globe. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from four sub-strands: history, geography, civics and citizenship and economics and business. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How have key figures, events and values shaped Australian society, its system of government and citizenship? How have experiences of democracy and citizenship differed between groups over time and place, including those from and in Asia? How has Australia developed as a society with global connections, and what is my role as a global citizen?
When planning for learning in Year 6 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: Global solidarity binds the rich to the poor. It is action on behalf of the human family to overcome divisions in our world. It requires the gaining of knowledge and respect of diverse cultures and beliefs.  It drives the comfortable and secure to support those inflicted by tyranny and war. It opens homes and hearts to those in need. Solidarity is a recognition that we are 'all in this together and is a commitment to strengthen community and promote a just society.  The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Organise and representin a range of formats including tables, graphs and large- and small-scale maps, using discipline-appropriate (ACHASSI124)

  • categorising information using digital and non-digital graphic organisers (for example, flowcharts, consequence wheels, futures timelines, mapping software, decision-making matrixes, digital scattergrams, spreadsheets, and bibliography templates)
  • constructing tables and graphs with digital applications as appropriate to display or categorise data and information for analysis (for example, a table to show the similarities and differences in official languages and religions across a number of countries)
  • creating maps using spatial technologies and cartographic conventions as appropriate (including border, source, scale, legend, title and north point) to show information and data, including location (for example, a large-scale map to show the location of places and their features in Australia and countries of Asia; a flow map or small-scale map to show the connections Australia has with Asian countries such as shipping or migration)
  • explaining spatial representations (for example, describing how the representation of the spherical globe on flat paper produces distortions in maps)

Humanities and Social Sciences - Year 6 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 6, students explain the significance of an event/development, an individual and/or group. They identify and describe continuities and changes for different groups in the past and present. They describe the causes and effects of change on society. They compare the experiences of different people in the past. Students describe, compare and explain the diverse characteristics of different places in different locations from local to global scales. They describe how people, places, communities and environments are diverse and globally interconnected and identify the effects of these interconnections over time. Students explain the importance of people, institutions and processes to Australia’s democracy and legal system. They describe the rights and responsibilities of Australian citizens and the obligations they may have as global citizens. Students recognise why choices about the allocation of resources involve trade-offs. They explain why it is important to be informed when making consumer and financial decisions. They identify the purpose of business and recognise the different ways that businesses choose to provide goods and services. They explain different views on how to respond to an issue or challenge. Students develop appropriate questions to frame an investigation. They locate and collect useful data and information from primary and secondary sources. They examine sources to determine their origin and purpose and to identify different perspectives in the past and present. They interpret data to identify, describe and compare distributions, patterns and trends, and to infer relationships, and evaluate evidence to draw conclusions. Students sequence information about events, the lives of individuals and selected phenomena in chronological order and represent time by creating timelines. They organise and represent data in a range of formats, including large- and small-scale maps, using appropriate conventions. They collaboratively generate alternative responses to an issue, use criteria to make decisions and identify the advantages and disadvantages of preferring one decision over others. They reflect on their learning to propose action in response to an issue or challenge and describe the probable effects of their proposal. They present ideas, findings, viewpoints and conclusions in a range of communication forms that incorporate source materials, mapping, graphing, communication conventions and discipline-specific terms.

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 7  

Year 7 Description

Sustainable pasts, present, futures The Year 7 curriculum deepens discipline-specific knowledge, understandings and skills with opportunities for integration across the sub-strands. Students study ancient societies of the East and West, how they are investigated, and what investigations show of their contribution to modern social, political and economic systems. Students investigate the nature of water as a natural resource in different global places and times, and the effects, issues and solutions of its use, management and value by different people, past and present. They also explore the liveability of places in relation to diverse people and places, familiar and global, past and present. Students examine work, consumers, producers and markets and their role in economic sustainability, across time and place. They investigate Australia’s commercial, social, legal and political institutions, processes and values and their role in enabling a stable, secular, multi-faith society, whereby organisations and individuals may operate effectively and individuals and groups may express their diverse identities. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from four sub-strands: history, geography, civics and citizenship and economics and business. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How is the ancient world investigated and why are investigations of ancient key people, events, ideas and developments significant in the modern world? How has the use, management and value of finite natural resources affected how people have lived and societies have evolved in the past and present, and what does this mean for future planning? What principles and processes underpin Australia’s cohesive society and stable economy and what is the role of political, economic and social institutions in developing and maintaining this?

Content description

Elaborations

Organise, categorise and representin a range of appropriate formats using discipline-specific conventions, including different types of graphs, tables, field sketches and annotated diagrams, and maps at different scales (ACHASSI154)

  • deciding which formats best suit the presentation of gathered information after consideration of a range of digital and non-digital media
  • representing categorised data information using digital and non-digital graphic organisers (for example, tables, flowcharts, SWOT [strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats] analysis, cost-benefit analysis, futures timelines, spreadsheets, databases)
  • constructing tables, graphs and annotated diagrams with the help of digital technologies to represent collected data (for example, diagrams showing how water flows through the environment and connects places; graphs quantifying the influence of environmental quality on aspects of the liveability of places; graphs showing the religious composition of past and contemporary Australian society)
  • creating maps using computer mapping software or satellite images to show distributions and patterns (for example, to show the spatial distribution and patterns of liveability or the areas affected by a hydrological hazard in Australia and other parts of the world)

Humanities and Social Sciences - Year 7 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 7, students explain the role of groups and the significance of particular individuals in past societies. They suggest reasons for continuity and change over time. They describe the effects of change on societies, individuals and groups and describe events and developments from the perspective of people who lived at the time. They identify past events and developments that have been interpreted in different ways. Students describe geographical processes that influence the characteristics of places. They explain interconnections between people and places and people and environments, describing how these interconnections change places and environments. Students identify the ideas, values and principles that underpin the institutions and processes in Australia’s political and legal systems. They explain the diverse nature of Australian society, and identify the importance of shared values in contemporary Australian society. Students describe the interdependence of consumers and producers in the market and identify factors and strategies that contribute to the financial success of businesses and individuals. They identify why individuals choose to work and the various sources of income that exist. Students recognise that people have different perceptions of places, events and issues and explain how this and other factors influence views on how to respond to an issue or challenge. Students formulate significant questions and propositions to guide investigations. They locate and collect useful data, information and evidence from a range of primary and secondary sources. They examine sources to determine their origin, purpose and reliability and to identify past and present values and perspectives. They interpret and analyse data to propose simple explanations for distributions, patterns, trends and relationships, and evaluate and synthesise evidence to draw conclusions. Students sequence events and developments within a chronological framework, using dating conventions to represent and measure time. They organise, categorise and represent data in a range of appropriate formats using discipline-specific conventions. They make informed decisions by collaborating with others to generate alternatives, comparing the potential costs and benefits of each and developing and using criteria to make a reasoned judgement. Students reflect on their learning to propose individual and collective action in response to an issue or challenge, taking account of different factors and multiple perspectives, and predict the probable effects of their proposal. They present ideas, findings, viewpoints, explanations and conclusions in a range of communication forms that incorporate source materials, citations, discipline-specific terms, conventions and concepts.

Indonesian - Indonesian Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Children enter the early years of schooling with established oracy skills in one or more languages and varying degrees of early literacy capability. For young students, learning typically focuses on their immediate world of family, home, school, friends and neighbourhood. They are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Typically they have little to no experience of Indonesian language and culture. Indonesian language learning and use In these years there is an emphasis on developing learners’ oral language to enable them to participate in class activities such as shared reading, chants, rhymes, songs and games. They repeat sounds, particularly of vowels, the letter c (ch) and r (trilled), as modelled by the teacher and aural texts. Learners use formulaic language and single-idea phrases. They will recognise the same alphabet as they are learning for writing English and need to observe that some letters have different sounds (for example, c = ch). Learners write by tracing and copying, forming letters legibly. They learn to write words and sentences independently using modelled language, for example, matching pictures with single words, labels and captions. Contexts of interaction The primary context for interaction is the language classroom, with the teacher of Indonesian, and peers or buddy classmates. Learners’ use of Indonesian primarily relates to classroom routines and activities, drawing on their curiosity about the world around them and their interest in play, movement and games. Texts and resources Written texts include children’s stories and big books, and teacher-generated materials such as pictures with labels and descriptions. Learners listen to, read and view texts, including digital forms such as videos, songs and children’s programs. They respond to teacher generated resources such as cloze, substitution or matching exercises, and produce texts such as captions and recounts using formulaic language, for example, Pada hari…, saya… Features of Indonesian language use Students are learning the sounds and written form of Indonesian. They are noticing similarities and differences between Indonesian and English, such as similar vocabulary and word order and differences in the position of adjectives and possessive pronouns Learners ask questions in English about Indonesia and Indonesians. With teacher support, they discuss language and culture in terms of what is the same or different and compare with ‘what is said and done’ in their own language and culture. Level of support Support is provided through visual and tactile materials, such as pictures, realia, objects and charts, and the use of gesture and movement. The main source of support is the teacher’s talk, such as questions and statements, explanations, prompts, recycling of language, stories and feedback. Learners rely on modelled language and scaffolded tasks to create their own texts, for example, choosing words to complete sentences or using pictures to sequence captions. The role of English Indonesian is used in class interactions and daily routines such as opening and closing of lessons. Indonesian is used by the teacher to model new language, process texts and guide interaction, for example, Ini siapa?, Di mana Hasan? English is used when describing aspects of language and culture such as word order and cultural practices.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate specific words and familiar phrases in texts such as charts, lists and songs, and use information to complete guided oral and written tasks

[Key concepts: literacy, numeracy; Key processes: selecting, sorting, matching]

(ACLINC004)

  • demonstrating early literacy skills by labelling, matching, clicking and dragging, drawing, miming and using actions
  • locating and using information to describe, name, draw and trace
  • classifying and categorising information gained from others, such as about family members and favourite foods, toys and games, for example, Suzi suka apel, tiga murid main computer, saya ada dua blok
  • using contextual and visual cues while reading with the teacher, for example, using illustrations and printed/audio narrations when reading big books or digital books
  • expressing factual information about qualities such as colour, number, size and shape (for example, tiga pensil, meja putih, buku besar) through interactive play with objects, such as water play, colour mixing and play dough
  • expressing sensory responses, for example, melihat, merasa, mendengar, mencium meraba…

Indonesian - Indonesian Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with teachers and peers through play- and action-related language. They use greetings such as Selamat pagi/siang and respond to instructions such as Berdirilah, Masuklah through actions. Students pronounce the vowel sounds, and c (ch). They respond to questions (for example Apa? Siapa? Berapa? ) with responses that include ya/tidak , verbs such as ada/mau/suka/bisa/boleh , and/or names and numbers (up to ten). They identify specific words or items in oral and written texts such as names of objects and people, and respond by using actions or drawing or labelling a picture. They present factual information at word and simple sentence level, such as lists, labels, descriptions and sharing/news reports, relying on formulaic language and modelled examples. They show comprehension and create simple texts such as a description, story or comic by matching pictures and captions. They use vocabulary related to their class and home environments. Students use simple verbs such as lari, main, makan and use the pronouns saya, kamu and Pak/Bu to address others. Students comment on similarities and differences in meanings of words, noticing that some cannot be readily translated, for example, takraw. They comment on aspects of using Indonesian and express feelings about learning Indonesian. Students know that Indonesian is written using the same alphabet as English but that some sounds are different. They know that they communicate in English (and possibly other languages) and that Indonesian is spoken in a country called Indonesia. They identify Indonesian words that are similar to English, for example, buku, komputer and es krim . Students identify some distinctive Indonesian words such as komodo, durian and kancil. They know that language and culture are related.

Indonesian - Indonesian Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

The nature of the learners At this level, children are developing awareness of their social world and memberships of various groups, including of the Indonesian class. They have developed initial literacy in English, and this assists to some degree in learning Indonesian, such as writing in the Roman alphabet. They benefit from varied, activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other areas of learning. Indonesian language learning and use Learners participate orally in classroom routines and tasks, and share ideas about how Indonesian works. They respond to teacher-generated questions about texts, participate in games and give brief presentations about topics such as family, pets, or a favourite game or object. Learners follow instructions, read stories and captions, and use computer games for word building and language exercises. They participate in shared reading and create texts such as descriptions, captions and simple reports using modelled language. Contexts of interaction The context in which learners use Indonesian is primarily the language classroom and the school environment, with some sharing of their language learning at home. They may also have some access to Indonesian speakers and resources through audiovisual and digital technologies. Texts and resources Learners typically interact with teacher-generated materials, games and songs, and materials produced for learning Indonesian, such as computer games, cards and readers. They may be exposed to texts developed for children in Indonesia, such as television programs, advertisements or web pages, as a way of developing their cultural awareness. Features of Indonesian language use Learners are increasingly aware that Indonesian is used by millions of speakers who do not have English as their first language. They notice and question aspects of Indonesian language and culture such as sounds, gestures and word order. They are developing a wide range of vocabulary and simple conjunctions to generate their own ideas in structured tasks. They explore cultural traditions and practices and the language associated with these. Level of support The primary support for learners is the teacher of Indonesian, who provides instruction, explanation, examples, repetition, reinforcement and feedback. Learners create their own texts based on modelled language and teacher guidance. Supports also include word lists, pictures, body language, realia and multimedia equipment. The role of English Learners use Indonesian for classroom routines and structured learning tasks, and listening to and viewing Indonesian texts. They are supported by the teacher to notice and discuss aspects of Indonesian language and culture, and compare Indonesian to other known languages and cultures. English is used for class discussions when noticing, comparing and reflecting on both English and Indonesian languages and cultures.

Content description

Elaborations

Obtain and share information from peers and texts related to family, home, routines and interests

[Key concepts: routine, pastimes; Key processes: selecting, tabulating, categorising]

(ACLINC021)

  • gathering information about activities of others, such as surveying peers about time spent on activities, for example, Berapa jam menonton televisi/membaca buku/bermain komputer/bermain olahraga/makan/belajar/tidur?
  • compiling information and reporting it to others, for example, making a shared class graph showing popular leisure activities during the year
  • comparing information about activities and practices across cultures, for example, reading, viewing or listening to texts related to aspects of school life such as timetables, canteen menus, extracurricular activities and sports
  • working in groups to obtain and use factual information from texts related to other learning areas, for example, completing a simple science experiment, naming countries and significant land features, or recording distances using geography skills

Indonesian - Indonesian Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students interact in classroom routines and structured interactions with teachers and peers. They reproduce the sounds of au (for example, mau) and g (for example, gemuk ) and the final sound k (for example, tidak ). Students follow instructions (such as Duduklah or Bukalah bukumu ), make requests and respond with actions. They respond to questions such as Di mana? Kapan? Apakah? , by using simple phrases. They engage with texts, relying on graphics, key words and examples to support understanding, and respond using formulaic language. Students present factual information in texts through, for example, describing, listing and using tables. They work with modelled language to create their own texts, such as sequencing pictures and statements to create a comic and using word lists to complete a paragraph or simple story. Students use vocabulary related to school (such as buku, pensil, kursi ), home (such as rumah, kamar, mobil ) and some interests (such as suka main komputer, berenang, naik sepeda ) to create simple informative and descriptive texts. They describe amounts using cardinal numbers with belas and puluh, and create plurals by doubling nouns. Students state preferences using Saya [tidak] suka…, and use adjectives, including adjectives of size and colour (for example, besar, merah, tinggi, lucu), following the noun. They create subject-focus sentences, and use simple possessive word order such as teman saya or rumahnya, the prepositions di and ke, and the conjunction dan. Students translate texts using word lists and dictionaries, identifying words and expressions that do not have word-to-word equivalence, such as ‘footy’ or becak. They observe how language use, including their own, is influenced by culture and notice how it can influence intercultural experiences. Students differentiate statements from questions according to intonation. They state that possessive word order in Indonesian differs from English. Students know that language use varies according to who is using it and with whom such as kamu for friends and Bu/Pak for teachers, and that some terms have specific cultural meanings, such as pronouns derived from family terms (for example, Bapak/Pak, Ibu/Bu). They make comparisons between Indonesian and English, particularly identifying similarities and differences in cultural practices related to daily routines and special occasions.

Italian - Italian Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Students are beginning their study of Italian and typically have had little prior exposure to the language and associated cultures. Many will have learnt an additional language in primary school, some have proficiency in different home languages and bring existing language learning strategies and intercultural awareness to the new experience of learning Italian. Students’ textual knowledge developed through English literacy learning supports the development of literacy in Italian. Skills in analysing, comparing and reflecting on language and culture in both languages are mutually supportive. Students may need encouragement to take risks in learning a new language at this stage of social development and to consider issues of how the experience impacts on their sense of ‘norms’ associated with their first language and culture. Italian language learning and use Students work with different modes of communication and with different text genres, with reference to their own social, cultural and communicative interests. They learn to use modelled and rehearsed language in familiar contexts and begin to use the language to create and communicate their own meanings. They work with others collaboratively to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect on aspects of their learning. They learn how to make observations about the relationship between language and culture, particularly through comparing what they learn in Italian to their own language(s) and culture(s). They identify cultural references in texts and consider how language reflects practices, perspectives and values. They reflect on the process of moving between languages and cultures and developing their capability as learners of Italian. Contexts of interaction Opportunities for interaction in Italian are provided through working with the teacher and peers in class, and using resources and materials, including online resources as appropriate; there is also some interaction beyond the classroom with members of Italian communities. Italian is used by the teacher in classroom routines, structured interaction and learning tasks. Texts and resources Students listen to, read, view and interact with a range of texts for a variety of purposes, such as personal, social, informational, transactional, imaginative and expressive. They develop skills in planning, drafting and presenting descriptive and informative texts and participate in collaborative tasks, games and discussions. They compose and present simple texts such as stories, poems, songs/raps, blogs, advertisements, reports and journal entries. They develop metalanguage for referring to Italian language and learning, and use processing strategies, such as comparing and categorising, that draw on their developing understanding of text conventions and patterns. They learn to identify how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in texts and become aware that language choices determine how people and circumstances are represented. Features of Italian language use Students become familiar with the pronunciation and sound system of Italian, noting similarities and differences with English. They build a vocabulary relating to people and objects in their immediate worlds. They learn how to use definite and indefinite articles. They learn how to form singular and plural nouns, to recognise patterns of noun categories and to understand the general rule of gender and agreement. Students learn simple sentence construction (subject–verb–object), which is enriched by the use of adjectives. They create their own texts mainly using the present tense of regular and common irregular verbs. They gradually build more extended texts, using cohesive devices. Students develop language for interacting with the teacher and each other. They learn to distinguish between formal and informal register. They develop a metalanguage to describe and discuss features of Italian. Level of support Students require support to build on existing language-learning strategies and knowledge, such as using mnemonic devices and developing a metalanguage to talk about language and culture and about language learning. Scaffolding is continuously provided by the teacher and by support materials such as word banks, focused language activities, and interactive models of language use and analysis. The role of English English serves two main functions in the Italian class: it represents a point of reference for Italian learning by enabling students to compare structures, features, and cultural meanings in both languages; and it is used when appropriate for explanation, reflection and discussion.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and use key features and patterns of the Italian grammatical system, including definite and indefinite articles, gender and agreement, present tense of regular and common irregular verbs, and simple sentence construction (ACLITU109)

  • learning how to use:nouns to identify people and objects — singular and plural regular forms, gender, some exceptions; developing awareness of various categories of nouns with common endings such as -ista, -zione, -tore and -trice (for example, il/la dentista, la stazione, il vincitore/la vincitrice) and comparing them to their English equivalentsdefinite and indefinite articles — use and omissionadjectives to describe things (including agreement and exceptions); and possessive adjectives, for example, Il mio librodemonstratives, for example, Questo è il librointerrogatives, for example, Chi, che, cosa, quale, come?subject pronouns, for example, io, tu, lui, leinumerals — cardinal, ordinal, dates, timeprepositions of time and place to describe when and wherearticulated prepositions with a, da, in, di, su (for recognition only)commonly used adverbs to qualify verbs and adjectivesverbs describing state (essere), possession (avere) and regular verbs describing actions in the present tense (for example parlare, cantare)sentence structure to construct simple sentences in Italian ([subject]–verb–object); making statements, asking questions and giving/receiving instructions (verb + object), for example, Chiudi il libro!negation to form negative statements and questions, for example, Non ti piace il gelato

Italian - Italian Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students engage in social interaction to exchange greetings and to share ideas and information related to their personal, social and school worlds. They use known phrases to exchange ideas and opinions, for example, Non mi piace la pallacanestro. They use language to interact and to respond to classroom instructions, questions and directions. They approximate Italian sound patterns such as consonant combinations, clear vowel sounds and unaspirated consonants. They use gesture and some formulaic expressions to support oral interaction. Students use well-rehearsed language related to their personal experiences (for example, stating preferences in sports, leisure activities and entertainment), in both spoken and written forms, and predominantly in the present tense. They demonstrate understanding of information from a range of factual and creative texts. They use learnt structures to create texts such as, captions, descriptions, conversations and correspondence, providing information about themselves, their personal worlds and immediate needs, interests and preferences. They produce simple descriptions with appropriate use of definite and indefinite articles, adjectives and adverbs. They connect ideas using conjunctions such as e, ma, però, anche, perché- and invece to create simple texts using known vocabulary and structures. Students identify similarities between Italian and English and understand that they are related languages which borrow from each other. They know that that literal translation between languages is not always possible. They reflect on how culture is evident in experiences, images and texts. They understand and use metalanguage to explain aspects of language and culture, and use simple statements to identify features of different text types. They know that language reflects contexts of situation and culture, and identify differences between standard, dialectal and regional forms of Italian. They analyse the impact of technology and media on communication and language forms, the influence of Italian and English on one another, and the interrelationship of language and culture. They reflect on how they interpret and respond to aspects of Italian language and culture, and to intercultural experience, and identify how their response may be shaped by their own language(s) and culture(s).

Italian - Italian Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

The nature of the learners At this level, children are developing awareness of their social worlds and of their memberships of various groups including the Italian class. They are developing literacy capabilities in English, such as writing in the Roman alphabet, which assists to some degree in learning Italian. They benefit from varied, activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other areas of learning. Italian language learning and use The development of oral proficiency requires rich language input in different modes and from different sources. Children develop active listening skills and respond through action-related talk. They strengthen their comprehension skills, using contextual and grammatical cues as well as phonic and non-verbal cues. The language they encounter is authentic, with modification when necessary, involving familiar vocabulary and simple structures. Children are supported to use the language themselves in familiar contexts and situations, such as exchanging simple ideas and information, negotiating predictable activities and interactions, and participating in shared tasks, performance and play. They continue to build vocabulary which can be adapted for different purposes, and to control simple grammatical forms to communicate in familiar contexts. Contexts of interaction The contexts in which learners interact in using and learning Italian are primarily local: the classroom, school, home and community, with some access to wider communities of Italian speakers and resources through virtual and digital technologies. Texts and resources Children develop literacy skills and textual knowledge through supported interaction with a range of spoken, written, visual and multimodal texts. Imaginative and interactive texts (such as picture books, stories, puppet plays, songs and games) engage the expressive and cultural dimensions of language. Procedural, informational and descriptive texts (such as negotiated classroom rules, planned activities, and family and class profiles) encourage students to use language to ‘get things done’. Features of Italian language use Students experiment with pronunciation and intonation in Italian, noticing similarities and differences with other familiar languages. They focus on structures and grammatical rules such as those relating to the use of possessive pronouns, prepositions and negation. They extend their knowledge of definite and indefinite articles, and of gender and singular/plural forms. As they encounter Italian language and culture they make comparisons with their own language(s) and culture(s) and consider their own ways of communicating. This leads to exploring concepts of commonality and difference, and of identity, and to thinking about what it means to speak more than one language. Level of support Children’s grammatical knowledge and accuracy in spoken and written Italian are developed both through form-focused activities and through opportunities to apply this knowledge in meaningful task activity, as they build their communicative skills, confidence and fluency. Teachers provide models and examples; introduce language, concepts and resources needed to manage and complete tasks; make time for experimentation and drafting; and provide support for self-monitoring and reflection. The role of English The use of English, when appropriate, provides support opportunities for discussion and exploration of ideas which help children to build a conceptual frame and metalanguage for talking about language and culture, and about their experiences as learners moving between languages and cultures.

Content description

Elaborations

Obtain and process factual information about people, routines, responsibilities and interests

[Key concepts: routine, events, time; Key processes: identifying, recording, categorising, selecting]

(ACLITC024)

  • surveying classmates or responding to questionnaires about likes, interests, routines and activities (for example, Ti piace ...? Mi piace/non mi piace. Qual è il tuo libro preferito? Qual è il tuo programma televisivo preferito?), tabulating the results, and presenting information in various forms, such as class profiles, birthday charts or summaries of findings, for example, Dieci bambini giocano a tennis e tre a basket
  • generating questions such as Quanti … A che ora? Dov’ è la festa?
  • reading profiles and other information about children in different cultural contexts, in print and digital form
  • ordering and categorising information, for example, cibi sani e cibi poco sani
  • asking and responding to questions that address information such as participants, characteristics of a person, and dates, times and locations of events of interest to the class, for example, la domenica; il dieci giugno; ha trentasette anni; è alto e forte; è grandissima; ha due ali; abita a Milano

Italian - Italian Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students comprehend a range of spoken, written, and multimodal texts on familiar topics, including home life, friends and classroom activities. They use Italian to communicate and to interact, for example, to exchange greetings and to address people, using appropriate language and pronunciation, and often formulaic expressions. They ask and respond to simple questions, by selecting between alternatives provided, by using short spoken responses which may consist of incomplete or partial Italian phrases and structures, or by using a key word to convey a whole idea. They talk about self, family, people, places, routine, school life and their own interests and preferences, for example, Com’è la tua casa? La mia casa è grande, Ci sono due camere da letto e due bagni. Mi piace la mia camera da letto. They use short sentences, reorganising known language to fit personal responses, for example, Giochi domani?Sì/no/Forse. Students understand short written texts, using visual cues, prediction and questioning to decipher meaning. They recall key ideas and events, recognise meanings, and respond meaningfully. Students create written texts of a few sentences using familiar language and structures. Students demonstrate an understanding of the fact that language is used differently in different situations and contexts. They know the importance of using appropriate language when interacting in Italian, including informal/formal language, and the use of titles and gestures. They vary their responses and statements by choosing adjectives and adverbs, and by combining sentences. They demonstrate understanding of basic Italian grammatical rules, such as the fact that nouns have masculine or feminine gender and singular and plural forms, and that nouns, adjectives and articles need to agree. They identify similarities and differences in the patterns of Italian language compared to English and other familiar languages. They create texts that show understanding of how ideas are connected and how images support the meaning of texts. They make connections to personal experience when describing characters, events or cultural practices and behaviours encountered in texts. They identify cultural differences in ways of communicating and describe similarities and differences between their own and other cultures.

Japanese - Japanese Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners These years represent a transition to secondary school. Students in this sequence are continuing to study Japanese, bringing with them an established capability to interact in different situations, to engage with a variety of texts and to communicate with some assistance about their immediate world and that of Japanese speakers. They have experience in analysing the major features of the language system and in reflecting on the nature of intercultural exchanges in which they are involved. Japanese language learning and use Japanese is used for classroom interactions and transactions, for creating and maintaining a class dynamic, and for explaining and practising language forms. Learners work both collaboratively and independently in Japanese, exploring a variety of texts, including songs/raps and role-plays, with particular reference to their social, cultural and communicative interests. They share language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They use modelled and rehearsed language in familiar and unfamiliar contexts and increasingly generate original language. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural perspectives and experiences. They plan, draft and present imaginative and informative texts and participate in collaborative tasks and games. They use vocabulary and grammar with increasing accuracy, drafting and re-drafting to improve and clarify meaning. Students learn to use katakana and develop their understanding of the relationship between hiragana, katakana and kanji in texts. They read, view and interact with a growing range of texts for a variety of informative, transactional and communicative purposes. They are developing a broader range of vocabulary and expression and creating more complex sentences using structures such as まい日(にち)、友(とも)だちとバスでがっこうに行(い)きます。. Contexts of interaction The primary context for learning and using Japanese remains the language classroom; however, there may be increasing opportunities for interaction with peers in a range of Japanese-speaking communities through the use of technologies, partner-school arrangements and community connections. Learners have access to additional Japanese language resources through websites, video clips and other multimodal texts. Features of Japanese language use Learners expand their range of vocabulary to subjects beyond their immediate world and familiar experiences. They develop broader grammatical knowledge, using verbs and い/な adjectives, negative conjugations, various particles, counters, superlatives and conjunctions, to describe and sequence events. With support they create a range of texts and participate in information sharing and performances. They recognise and apply Japanese punctuation conventions and the characteristic features of text types such as self-introductions and letters. They analyse more critically and imaginatively the relationship between language and culture, identifying cultural references in texts and considering how language reflects and influences perspectives and values, for example, the use of the prefixes ご/お to show respect. They make comparisons between their own language(s) and Japanese, and reflect on the experience of moving between languages and cultural systems. They monitor and reflect on their intercultural experience and capability as language learners, and identify their personal and community practices that reflect cultural influences. Texts and resources Learners work with a variety of texts specifically designed for learning Japanese in schools, including video clips and online resources. They also access materials created for Japanese-speaking communities, such as films (subtitled), websites and advertisements that provide opportunities to make connections between texts and cultural contexts, perspectives and experiences. Level of support Opportunities to review and consolidate prior learning are balanced against provision of engaging and relevant new experiences and connections. Students are supported to develop increasing autonomy as language learners and users, to self-monitor and peer-monitor, and to adjust language in response to their experiences in different contexts. The role of English While Japanese is used in more extended and elaborated ways for classroom interactions and routines, task participation and structured discussion, English is used for more complex elements of instruction and discussion, analysis and reflection. Learners continue to develop metalanguage for thinking and talking about language, culture and identity and the experience of learning and using Japanese.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand how to control elements of the Japanese grammatical system to express a range of ideas and experiences in written and spoken forms, and recognise the systematic nature ofconjugation

[Key concepts: metalanguage,conjugation, sentence structure, register; Key processes: describing, categorising, analysing]

(ACLJAU176)

  • further developing metalanguage to describe and increase control of grammatical concepts and language elements, such as noun modifiers or speech styles
  • creating learning resources such as verb and adjective charts and lists of vocabulary and sentence structures
  • understanding the different functions of a range of particles, such as: が (topic marker) を (object marker)に (time, date, place, destination, for)と (and, with)で (location, action, means)へ (direction, destination)~から ~まで (from,~as far as, distances)
  • describing daily routines and schedules for a week, using a range of particles to form sentences, for example, 六時(ろくじ)に うちで 兄(あに)と ごはんを 食(た)べます。
  • using い and な adjectives in the present tense, for example, おいしい、たのしい、しずかな、 and negative forms, for example, 高(たか)くない
  • using adverbs as formulaic expressions, for example, 早(はや)く、おそく
  • understanding that the exact word order of noun phrases is not important as long as they appear before the verb and are accompanied by correct particles
  • understanding the role of sentence-ending particles in conversation, such as ね for confirming or expecting a response and よ for emphasis
  • using both affirmative and negative forms of particular grammatical elements in different tenses
  • creating cohesion and flow by using conjunctions, for example, だから、それで、それに
  • understanding how to indicate politeness using ご and お prefixes, for example, お名(な)前(まえ)、先生の ごかぞく
  • using counter classifiers: ~時、~分、~つ、~まい、~本
  • using superlatives, for example, 一ばん 好きです

Japanese - Japanese Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use Japanese to interact with peers, the teacher and others to exchange information, recount experiences and express opinions. They use verb ましょう for planning and making arrangements and offering suggestions. They ask and respond to a range of questions, for example, だれと、 何 ( なん ) で、いつ、どこで、 using both rehearsed and some spontaneous language, giving opinions and making comparisons, for example, でも or が、わたしは フットボールが 好きです。でも、母は フットボールが 好きじゃないです。 . Students apply rules of pronunciation, rhythm, stress and intonation to a range of sentence types and vocabulary, including double consonant and long vowel sounds and borrowed words. Students read and write hiragana, read katakana, and write familiar katakana words, including elongated vowels, double consonants and contractions. They read and write high-frequency kanji for verbs (for example, 行きます、見ます、来きます ), nouns (for example, 先生、父、母、月よう日 ), adjectives (for example, 早い ), and the pronoun 私 . They read some compound words such as 日本語 . They locate, analyse and summarise information from a range of spoken, written and multimodal texts, such as video clips, letters, posters, notices and advertisements. They plan, draft and present informative and imaginative texts with the support of modelled resources. They use counter classifiers in response to questions, for example, いくつ、何まい、何本、何分 . They build cohesion in their texts and elaborate on meaning through the use of grammatical elements such as conjunctions (for example, だから ), and adverbs of frequency (for example, いつも ), time (for example, 時、半、分、 前 ( まえ ) ) and direction, for example, みぎ、ひだり、前、うしろ . They use a variety of verb tenses to express ideas and experiences, and a range of particles, such as が、へ、から、まで、 including for example に to indicate timeframes. Students translate and interpret short texts from Japanese into English and vice versa, providing alternative expressions when equivalence is not possible. They share their reactions to intercultural experiences, describing and explaining why some elements fit easily with their sense of their own identity while others do not. Students understand that the pronunciation of katakana is the same as that of hiragana, and that the pronunciation of borrowed words is influenced by the Japanese sound system. They apply appropriate word order in their spoken and written language, varying the order of noun phrases without altering the meaning. They understand and use い and な adjectives when appropriate, and apply the rules of phonetic change to counter classifiers, such as ひとつ、さんぼん、じゅっぷん . They identify and reproduce features of familiar text types such as emails, descriptions and dialogues. They identify words (for example, お母さん and 母 ), phrases (for example, どうぞよろしく。 ), prefixes (for example, お and ご ), suffixes (for example, ~さん and ~さま ) and titles (for example, ~先生 ) that indicate different levels of formality. They recognise values that are important in Japanese society, such as maintaining harmony and a sense of collective well-being, and how these are reflected through language and behaviours, such as indirect forms of refusal or disagreement, for example, もうすこしがんばりましょう。 . They explain how cultural values and ideas are embedded in all languages and how their own communicative behaviour might be interpreted from other cultural perspectives.

Korean - Korean Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

The nature of the learners Students have prior experience of learning Korean and bring a range of capabilities, strategies and knowledge that can be applied to new learning. They are expanding the range and nature of their learning experiences and of the contexts within which they communicate with others. They have a growing awareness of the wider world, including the diversity of languages, cultures and forms of intercultural communication. They are considering future pathways and prospects, including how Korean may feature in these. Korean language learning and use Learners use Korean with increasing confidence to communicate and interact, within familiar and some unfamiliar contexts. They access and exchange information, express feelings and opinions, participate in imaginative and creative experiences and basic transactions relating to everyday life, and compose, interpret and analyse texts in different formats and modes, drawing on their prior knowledge, personal experience and other curriculum areas. They write texts in Hangeul for different audiences and purposes, using modelled and rehearsed language, gradually gaining independence. They perform tasks that involve spoken and written Korean independently and in collaboration with peers, and access and interact with the virtual community of Korean speakers and learners worldwide. They are increasingly aware of the nature of language learning as a cultural, social and linguistic process, understand that language varies and changes, and engage in and reflect on intercultural experiences. They develop a metalanguage for comparing and contrasting aspects of language and culture. They reflect on their own linguistic and cultural practices from intercultural perspectives. Contexts of interaction The language classroom is the main context of interaction for learning and using Korean, involving interactions with teacher, peers, a wide range of texts and resources. Learners may interact with some additional people such as teacher assistants, exchange students, visitors to school or members of the wider community or peers in Korea encountered via communication technologies including some computer-mediated communication tools. They may also have opportunities to encounter Korean in wider contexts such as media, cultural or film festivals, community events or in-country travel. Texts and resources Learners engage with a range of language-learning texts and support materials such as textbooks, videos, media texts and online resources including those developed for computer-supported collaborative learning. They have increasing exposure to authentic texts produced for Korean-speaking communities such as films, stories, songs, poems, newspaper articles, video clips, blogs and social media texts. Features of Korean language use Learners have an increasing control over Korean pronunciation, writing in Hangeul and using vocabulary, forms and structures, and textual features. They approximate the pronunciation at syllable boundaries applying relevant Korean pronunciation rules, and write polysyllabic words that include 받침 using correct spelling. Their vocabulary expands to some abstract and expressive words and those drawn from other learning areas. They use various grammatical forms and structures, including a range of particles and basic conjunctive suffixes, with suitable vocabulary, to suit their communicative needs, such as expressing and exchanging opinions, making transactions, or collaborating with others in different tasks. They recognise a range of more complex grammatical forms and structures used in texts and understand more complex relationships between ideas and events, using some of them as set phrases. They develop understanding of how language structures and features build up textural features in Korean texts. They become increasingly familiar with the use of honorific elements in Korean and other cultural practices accompanying language use, developing awareness of the interconnectedness of language and culture. They understand language varies according to the context, audience and purposes, recognising the importance of age and social relationship in language choice in Korean. They reflect on how language changes with social cultural changes, and on their own language use. They have increasing awareness of their identity as users of two or more languages and reflect on how their own sense of identity has developed and changed through intercultural experiences encountered while learning Korean language and culture. Level of support Learners need opportunities for more autonomy and responsibility in their own learning such as monitoring their own language performance, learning needs and progress. Continued support from the teacher is needed for their learning of Korean with these challenges. The teacher gives explicit instruction and explanations on complex grammar structures and culture-specific or abstract vocabulary. Scaffolding, implicit and sometimes explicit modelling and feedback are provided during interactions in task-based activities designed from form-focused approach. Learners continue to access online and print resources and dictionaries, and use online journaling, video documenting, and discussion forums for self-monitoring and reflecting. The role of English Learners use Korean for daily interaction, discussion and exchanges with the teacher and peers. English is used as the medium of some instruction, discussion, comparison, analysis and reflection on complex and abstract ideas. While Korean is encouraged to be increasingly used wherever possible in these domains, English is used as the medium where in-depth and detailed delivery appropriate to learners’ age and the level of cognitive demand are beyond their linguistic scope in Korean.

Content description

Elaborations

Extract information from a range of short spoken, written, digital or multimodal texts in Korean, analysing and organising the information for particular audiences

[Key concepts: perspective, representation, concepts from other learning areas; Key processes: extracting, analysing, summarising, using computer-mediatedtools]

(ACLKOC023)

  • recording and synthesisinginformation from media texts, including television programs, reports, interviews, video clips, documentaries and socialnetworks
  • organising and categorising information, selecting modes of presentation such as tables,concept maps, web postings and charts to inform particular audiences
  • summarising information from various texts that reflect different aspects of Korean culture, art,history and geography relating to social or environmental issues, for example, 태풍은 한국에 보통 여름에 와요. 그렇지만 가을에도 가끔 와요
  • reporting information inprint and digital forms, for example, Korean cultural elements represented in sites such as web pages
  • deducing from context and explaining to others the meaning and culturalreferences of unfamiliar words or expressions such as words used in idioms or old sayings encountered in different typesof text, such as 그림의 떡

Korean - Korean Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 9 and 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students use written and spoken Korean to interact with peers, teachers and other Korean speakers in face-to-face, local and virtual communications. They exchange information and opinions about personal and immediate interests and experiences and about broader topics of interest to young people such as environmental issues, globalisation or technology. They approximate pronunciation of polysyllabic words, making mostly appropriate changes in sounds on syllable boundaries (for example, pronouncing such words as 한국어, 같이, 감사합니다, 먹고 and 어떻게 as 항구거, 가치, 감사함니다, 먹꼬 and 어떠케).They write Hangeul following writing conventions. Students initiate conversations (for example, 지금 뭐 해요? 어디 가요?), and sustain interactions by asking and responding to each other and building on each other’s responses (for example, 주말에 시간 있어요? 네, 토요일 오후에 시간 있어요. 토요일 아침에 뭐 해요? 아홉 시부터 열 두 시까지 운동해요, …). They use appropriate facial expressions and gestures. They express understanding (for example, 알겠어요; 모르겠어요), request clarification (for example, 무슨 뜻이에요? 다시 설명해 주세요), ask for opinions (for example, 어떻게 생각해요?) and provide their own opinions using reflective language as set phrases (for example, 글쎄요, 아마 ..., 제 생각에는 …, …–(으)ㄴ/는 것 같아요). They ask for and make suggestions (for example, 무엇을 할까요? 해 보세요). Students analyse and extract information from different print, digital and multimodal sources, drawing on the context to help comprehension and using their knowledge of vocabulary, grammatical forms and structures relating to time, location, cases, honorifics, basic sentence types and text formats. They create and present informative and imaginative texts in different formats and in different modes, expressing experiences and views for different purposes and audiences. They use a range of particles for various functions and modify a noun using an adjectival form of a descriptive verb suffixed by –(으)ㄴ (for example, 예쁜 꽃). They use some irregular verbs (such as 들어요, 추워요) and verb phrases in complex structures as set phrases to express provision (for example,읽어 주세요), prohibition (for example, 쓰지 마세요), trial (for example, 입어 보세요) and ideas or events relating to the future (for example, 갈 거예요, 할까요?). They express two ideas or events in different relationships using conjuinctors such as –어/아서, –고, –(으)면 or –지만 as appropriate to connect clauses. Students make comparisons using –보다 더 … (for example, 오늘이 어제보다 더 추워요) and express time duration using … 때/동안 (for example, 방학 때, 일 년 동안). They express the relative frequency of events using adverbs such as 가끔, 보통, 자주, 언제나 and the relative locations of objects/people using location words (such as 앞, 뒤, 위, 아래, 옆) in a formula: a noun + a location word + 에 (for example, 식탁 위에). They refer to self using either 나 or 저 appropriately according to the context. They use some basic conjunctive adverbs such as 그래서, 그런데, 그렇지만 and 하지만 to establish cohesion in texts. Students translate and create simple bilingual texts across Korean and English, comparing different versions, identifying reasons for different interpretations and ways to retain and convey original meanings in translated texts. They recount their reactions to intercultural experiences and exemplify how their personal experiences and assumptions influence their language use and perspectives. Students explain how language use is adjusted to different purposes and audiences in different contexts and situations by providing examples from differing spoken and written forms of Korean. They compare situations where it is or is not appropriate to use 반말 and other features of language such as text messaging or colloquial forms of expression in Korean, English or other known languages. They describe how languages change over time and through contact with other languages and cultures by identifying possible examples of such change in Korean and other languages. They relate grammatical elements in Korean such as case markers, particles, suffixes, and verb endings to their grammatical functions by explaining them using metalanguage (case, politeness, honorification, 반말, 높임말 , native Korean/Sino-Korean). Students explain how cultural values and ideas are embedded in language use, including their own, and identify how language reflects ways of thinking, views of the world and everyday cultural routines, drawing on examples from Korean, English and other languages.

Korean - Korean Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Children enter the early years of schooling with established oracy skills in one or more languages and varying degrees of early literacy capability. For young students, learning typically focuses on their immediate world of family, home, school, friends and neighbourhood. They are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Typically, they have little to no experience of Korean language and culture. Korean language learning and use Korean language learning at this stage is focused on developing learners’ oral language and familiarising learners with the language through interaction involving enjoyment, imagination and action. Through classroom routines and action-related activities such as playing games, dancing, singing and chanting, students learn and use Korean to socialise with others and explore the primary world around them. Non-verbal expressions such as miming, movement and gestures are an important part of students’ learning. Children begin to hear single words, phrases and short simple texts in Korean, relating them to concrete objects and people seen and known in their immediate environment, to what they feel and do, and to topics about self, home, family, and classroom activities. They listen to, use and experiment with simple formulaic language for routines such as greetings, introductions and classroom language, and become familiar with meaningful sounds in Korean. With the introduction of Hangeul, children become further aware of the relationships between sounds and letters, and between syllables and syllable blocks in Korean speech and script. As their phonological awareness increases, they begin to develop literacy in Korean, identifying simple Korean words in short texts through activities such as shared/supported reading or sight word games. They start to write Hangeul by copying or tracing words, and later co-construct longer texts such as chants and rhymes. Through the repeated use of simple patterns where basic key particles, verb endings and honorific elements are used, children notice that some Korean grammatical elements and rules are different from those of English. As students use simple language patterns with culturally appropriate gestures or body language, they recognise elements of Korean culture such as politeness embedded in the Korean language and its use, and become aware that there are different ways to communicate using languages other than their own. Contexts of interaction The primary context for students’ interaction is the language classroom, with the teacher of Korean language and peers. Students may have some access to Korean-speaking peers in wider school or community settings. Their use of Korean primarily relates to classroom routines and activities, drawing on their interest in play, movement and games and on their curiosity about the world around them. Texts and resources Learners have exposure to a variety of spoken, visual and written/digital texts. They listen and respond to teacher talk, and take part in songs, play, stories and simple conversations. Written and digital texts include picture books, wall charts, Big Books and teacher-generated materials such as games, labels, captions and flashcards. Writing development is supported through tracing and copying simple words as sight words and short modelled sentences in texts such as greeting cards or captions, and through co-creating shared resources such as word walls or storyboards. Features of Korean language use Students become familiar with the sound system of the Korean language, recognising Korean pronunciation as being different from that of their own language/s. They learn to pronounce syllable blocks as part of sight words, recognising the association between simple vowel and consonant sounds with their corresponding letters. They recognise, use and distinguish simple Korean intonation patterns for statements and questions. They become familiar with and use the pattern of simple basic sentences such as those with –요 at the end, and notice similarities and differences between Korean and English. They begin to develop curiosity about Korea and Korean people and about different ways of making meaning using Korean. Level of support Children need rich language input and their learning is supported with the ample provision of scaffolding and language modelling. They need opportunities to build and test hypotheses about the Korean language and culture, to review, recycle and revise them, and to adjust their use of the Korean language and understanding of Korean culture. Attention to diversity in students’ learning needs and backgrounds, and to the provision of continuous encouragement, cues, feedback and opportunities for learners to reflect, support these hypothesis building and testing processes. As the main source of target language input, the teacher provides ample models and examples of the Korean language and culture with the support of visual cues and resources such as pictures, realia, objects and charts. The role of English While the teacher and learners are encouraged to use Korean wherever possible, English is used for discussion, reflection, questions and explanations relating to complex ideas or aspects of languages or cultures, and in tasks which involve moving between the two languages, such as bilingually naming objects or images.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise the sounds of the Koreanand the forms of Hangeul syllableblocks, and understand that the syllable block is the basic unit of writing in Korean, associating individual syllableblocks with their pronunciations

[Key concepts: phonic awareness, meaningfulness, unit of writing; Key processes:recognising, discriminating, mimicking]

(ACLKOU126)

  • differentiating Korean and English sounds, for example, by comparing names in Korean and English (for example, 로버트versus ‘Robert’)
  • categorising namesaccording to their first consonant, for example, 마크, 매튜, 마이클
  • discriminating between simple vowel and consonant letters in a syllable block
  • recognising the order of strokes in writing syllable blocks

Content description

Elaborations

Locate specific words and expressions in simple texts such as signs, titles and captions, and use information tocomplete guided oral and written tasks

[Key concepts: text, meaning; Key processes: locating, noticing,matching]

(ACLKOC118)

  • using a variety of skills such as labelling,matching, clicking and dragging, drawing, miming and actions to locate and use information
  • locating and using information to describe, name, draw and trace, for example, 머리, 손. 발
  • classifying and categorising information gained from others, such as aboutfavourite foods, for example, 미셸은 피자를 좋아해요
  • using contextual and visual cues whilereading with the teacher, for example, using illustrations and printed/audio narrations when reading Big Books ordigital books

Korean - Korean Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with peers and teachers through play- and action-related talk, exchanging greetings and introducing themselves (for example, 안녕하세요?; 안녕?; 저는 ...이에요/예요 used as a set phrase) with gestures. They respond to question cues (such as 뭐예요? ) by naming objects with single words (for example, 눈! 코! 입! 고양이! ) or using short, simple sentences as set phrases (for example, 눈이에요, 고양이예요 ). They respond to teacher instructions such as 따라 하세요, 일어나세요 by imitating the teacher’s actions or speech, and to the teacher’s simple closed-ended questions by giving short answers such as 있어요/없어요 or 네/아니요 . They make simple requests using … 주세요 and thank each other or the teacher using 고맙습니다 with appropriate gestures. They mimic and approximate Korean pronunciation of simple words, and locate and read specific words such as names of people or objects provided in familiar types of short texts. Students present simple information relating to themselves, their friends or everyday objects, using simple words and set phrases. They create and perform their own simple texts using modelled examples and formulaic language. Students use vocabulary related to their class and home environments. They use the personal pronoun 저 , basic particles –은/는 , –이/가 and –을/를 as part of formulaic chunks ending with –어/아요 or –이에요/예요 (for example, 저는 고양이가 없어요 ). They match simple Korean and English texts written in Hangeul and English such as 로버트 and Robert , and identify familiar objects in both languages. Students explain aspects of Korean language and culture in everyday language use, such as ways of greeting and thanking, identify differences or similarities to their own language/s and culture/s, and discuss the experience of learning and using the Korean language. Students discriminate Korean sounds and script from those of English and other languages. They identify the syllable block as the unit of writing and associate individual syllable blocks with their pronunciations. They identify their own names written in Korean using syllable blocks (for example, 로버트, 마크 ) and pronounce them using Korean sounds. Students identify –요 at the end of a sentence as indicating some polite meaning. They identify 저 as referring to self and 저는 as an equivalent to ‘I’ in a sentence. They choose between –이에요 and –예요 when they construct a sentence using a copula (for example, 재키예요; 마이클이에요 ). They identify Korean language as the language of Korea and as one of the many languages used in Australia and in the world. Students identify some loan words from other languages and Korean words used in Australia and other countries. Students identify differences and similarities between their own and others’ languages and cultures.

Korean - Korean Years F–10 Sequence Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

The nature of the learners At this level, children are developing awareness of their social world and membership of various groups, including of the Korean class. They have developed initial literacy in English and this helps to some degree in learning Korean. They benefit from varied, activity-based learning that builds on their interests and capabilities and makes connections with other areas of learning. Korean language learning and use Learners interact with peers and the teacher in classroom routines and a variety of classroom activities. They build oral proficiency with provision of rich language input and ample opportunities to rehearse modelled language in communicative activities where grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation are purposefully integrated. They develop understanding of the alphabetic nature of Hangeul and read words that consist of syllable blocks with 받침. They exchange simple information, feelings and ideas related to their personal worlds, finding commonalities and acknowledging differences between each other. The language they use and hear is in simple structures and with familiar vocabulary. They follow instructions, respond to questions and read and create short texts on topics relevant to their interests and enjoyment such as family, pets or favourite sports or food, and those drawn from other learning areas. They explore ideas and values important to Korean culture through shared tasks such as shared reading of Korean folktales. The language used in routine activities is re-used from lesson to lesson in different situations, making connections between what has been learnt and what is to be learnt. Contexts of interaction The primary context of interaction in Korean is the classroom, where Korean is used as much as possible. Learners have access to resources and authentic texts in Korean via virtual and digital technology and are encouraged to share their learning at home where possible. They experience authentic Korean language and culture through community activities, for example, with Korean-speaking neighbours or at Korean festivals. Texts and resources Learners engage primarily with a variety of teacher-generated materials, stories, games and songs, and with materials produced for young learners of Korean such as interactive computer language games, cards and readers. They may also have access to materials developed for children in Korea, such as television programs, advertisements or web pages, as a means of developing cultural awareness and language experience. Features of Korean language use Learners are increasingly aware that the Korean language is used not only in Korea and in the Korean community in Australia, but also in many other places around the world. They make connections and comparisons, and look for differences and similarities between Korean and English. They begin to make connections between speech and writing in Korean and understand that Korean is a system that works differently from English. They differentiate sounds of Hangeul syllable blocks, and their literacy in Hangeul develops with a growing phonological awareness and understanding of Hangeul as an alphabetic system. They notice features of key grammatical forms and structures that they use as part of formulaic or set phrases, and understand that such phrases are required elements in Korean sentences in order to make sense. They are increasingly aware that a verb comes at the end of a Korean sentence and use basic common action and descriptive verbs with the informal polite ending –어/아요 and its honorific form –(으)세요 as appropriate. They create short texts using familiar words relating to their expanding interests and basic grammatical forms and structures. They develop understanding that the same word may be used in different meanings according to the context. Through continuous use of Korean with culturally appropriate gestures and body language, they become increasingly aware of the interdependency of language and culture, and begin to establish their identity as a learner of Korean, mediating between Korean language and culture and the familiar world of their own, exploring and comparing cultural norms embedded in everyday interactions in Korean and in their own language/s. Level of support The primary support for learners is the teacher of Korean, who gives instruction, explanation, examples, models, reinforcement, encouragement and feedback. Form-focused instructions are integrated into task-based activities for grammar and vocabulary learning. Support also includes material resources such as word lists, pictures, Hangeul charts, realia and multimedia resources. The role of English Learners use Korean for classroom routines, familiar interactions, and structured learning tasks and for listening to and viewing Korean texts. English is used where appropriate for instruction, explanation and discussion, while learners may move between Korean and English, for example, when they discuss or compare aspects of Korean and English language and culture, or when they create bilingual texts.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify topics and key points of factual information in short spoken, written, digital and multimodal texts related to familiar contexts, routines and interests

[Key concepts: routines, pastimes; Key processes: selecting, categorising, recording]

(ACLKOC137)

  • gathering information about other people’s activities, for example by surveying peers about weekend or dailyactivities, for example, 주말에 뭐 해요? 수영해요; 오늘 뭐 해요? 학교에 가요
  • compiling information and reporting it to others, forexample, by making a shared class graph showing popular leisure activities
  • listening to short spoken texts with some unfamiliar language, identifying points of information, for example, the name and number on a recorded phone message, the age of a child interviewed
  • obtaining and using factual information from print, digital or multimodal texts related to other learning areas, for example, completing a simple science experiment, naming countries and significant land features, or recording distances using geography skills

Korean - Korean Years F–10 Sequence - Years 3 and 4 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 4, students use Korean to interact in classroom routines, action-related talk and play with teachers and peers. They exchange personal information relating to aspects such as age or interests, using simple questions and short statements as set phrases (for example, 몇 살이에요? 아홉 살이에요; ...이/가 좋아요? 네, 좋아요). They use formulaic language to express rapport with others (for example, 아, 그래요? 나도 좋아요). Students respond to instructions for familiar classroom routines and activities taking required actions (for example, 해 보세요, 들으세요, 읽으세요 ) and to simple questions (for example, 이게 뭐예요? 누구예요? 몇이에요? 오늘 뭐 해요? ) with set phrases ending in –이에요/예요 or -어/아요 (for example, 책상이에요; 벤이에요; 구예요; 학교에 가요 ). They ask for repetition (for example, 다시 해 주세요 ) and for a turn to ask a question (for example, 질문 있어요 ) and negotiate requests using simple language (for example, … 있어요?; 네, 있어요/아니요, 없어요; 빌려 주세요; 여기 있어요 ). Students identify key words or topics from simple oral, visual and written texts, using cues such as context, graphics, familiar vocabulary and language features to support understanding. They present simple information in texts in different formats and create and perform their own texts with the support of modelled language and other resources. Students approximate the sounds, rhythms and intonations of spoken Korean and write familiar words in Hangeul with some accuracy. They create simple sentences in their speech and writing, using basic case markers (such as –은/는, –이/가, –을/를, –에 ) and a particle –도 as an inseparable part of a formulaic structure: a noun/pronoun + a case marker/particle (for example, 저는 …, 집에 …, 나도 … ). They use common action verbs and descriptive verbs (such as 가다, 일어나다, 듣다, 좋다 ) as part of formulaic expressions ending in –어/아요 or its honorific form –(으)세요 , varying intonation contours for statements, questions (with or without a question word), requests or commands. They ask simple questions about people, objects or numbers, using question words such as 누구/누가, 무엇/뭐 and 몇 . They use contractions of demonstrative pronouns and –이 (for example, 이게 , 저게 and 그게 ), as formulaic chunks, and vocabulary related to school (such as 학교, 책, 지우개 ), home (such as 집, 엄마, 아빠 ) and sports and leisure activities (such as 방학, 수영, 크리켓 ). They use vocabulary for major colours (such as 빨간색, 파란색, … ) and number expressions, choosing between native Korean and Sino-Korean number systems up to 10 as appropriate, using counters to describe ages (for example, 아홉 살 ), school years (for example, 사 학년 ) and numbers of objects (for example, 한 개 ), animals (for example, 두 마리 ) or people (for example, 세 명 ). Students match known Korean words or expressions with their English equivalents and create simple bilingual texts of familiar objects with support. They understand that meaning may change through translation across languages and exemplify words that could be translated differently according to context (such as 집 : house/home; … 있어요 : I have …/there is (are) …). They identify different social networks they belong to such as clubs or language-speaking communities and compare their past and current intercultural capability with reference to the experience of learning Korean. Students discriminate between meaningful sounds in Korean which are not distinguished in English or other languages such as /ㄱ/ versus /ㅋ/ versus /ㄲ/ or /ㅐ/ versus /ㅔ/, and associate the pronunciation of simple words with their script. Students differentiate statements from questions according to intonation. They identify simple consonant and vowel letters in Hangeul and combine them to construct a syllable block. They create short texts using syllable blocks combined together to form a word. They apply their understanding of Korean and English having different grammatical systems by using appropriate word order (subject-object-verb) and case–marked formulaic chuncks (for example, 저는, 사과를 ) in simple Korean sentences. They identify differences between Korean and English in some aspects of language use such as naming conventions or ways of addressing people. They apply their understanding of the importance of politeness in using Korean and select the appropriate form of language to acknowledge age and social relationships when greeting (for example, 안녕? versus 안녕하세요?; 안녕히 가세요/안녕히 계세요 versus 잘 가/잘 있어 ). They identify aspects of language use in both Korean and English that people from other cultures might or might not regard as appropriate, such as ways of greeting or (not) making eye contact during interactions.

Korean - Korean Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners These years represent a transition to secondary school and students in this pathway are continuing to study Korean, bringing with them a capability to communicate with some assistance about their immediate world and Korea. They have experience in analysing the major features of the language system and in considering intercultural exchanges and their role in these. Korean language learning and use Learners use Korean for classroom interactions and transactions in a variety of tasks in different modes that involve spoken and written Korean. They have extra opportunities to use Korean by a purposeful integration of the use of virtual communication. They present, explain, and compare information, opinions or ideas, on their current interests or topics drawn from other learning areas, practising language forms and developing cultural understanding, working both independently and collaboratively. They use primarily modelled and rehearsed language for planning, problem-solving, decision-making and reflecting, with increasing personal and original use of vocabulary, and experiment with known grammatical forms and structures to use them with increasing independence in familiar and unfamiliar contexts. They explore and reflect on their own and others’ intercultural perspectives and practices. Contexts of interaction The primary context for interaction remains the Korean language class; however, there may be opportunities for interacting with peers in Korea and with other learners of Korean, for example, through technology or sister-school relationships. Learners may have extra access to Korean speakers through media and community events and resources. Texts and resources Learners work with a broad range of texts and resources specifically designed for learning Korean in school contexts, such as textbooks, readers, videos and online materials including those developed for computer-supported collaborative learning. They may also access authentic materials created in Korean for general audience within Korea as well as in international contexts, with subtitles as necessary, such as songs, stories, films, websites, advertisements and magazines. Features of Korean language use Learners expand their range of vocabulary to domains beyond their personal interests. They use a range of grammatical forms and structures to convey more complex relationships between ideas and events, developing awareness of how language structures and features build up textural features. They use descriptive and expressive language including onomatopoeic and mimetic words to create expressive effects and interests. They pronounce sounds at syllable boundaries with increasing accuracy, applying relevant Korean pronunciation rules. They are increasingly aware of connections between language and culture, noticing, for example, politeness expressed in cultural practices as well as embedded in Korean grammar and vocabulary systems, and the choices of polite language determined by age and social relationships. They reflect on how language changes with social cultural changes and on their own language and culture. They have increasing awareness of their identity as users of two or more languages and reflect on the impact of intercultural experiences on identity-shaping. Level of support Learners need continued scaffolding, modelling and material support particularly at the paragraph and entire text level for written language and for developing fluency and accuracy in spoken language. Explicit instruction of grammatical features and modelling will be effective for their development of metalanguage use and expansion of metalinguistic knowledge of Korean. Learners are encouraged to be autonomous and to self-monitor in task-based activities integrated with implicit form-focused learning approach. Learners continue to use dictionaries with teacher support with increasing independence and to access word lists, charts and examples to enrich their receptive and productive language use. The role of English Korean is increasingly used at this level for classroom interactions and routines, for task participation and structured discussions, and encouraged to be used for learning new content drawn from other learning areas as long as its conceptual demand and complexity is within students’ linguistic scope in Korean. English continues to be used for more complex elements of instruction and explanations, and for more substantive discussion, analysis and reflection in relation to abstract concepts. Learners continue to develop a metalanguage for thinking and talking about language, culture and identity and the experience of learning Korean.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and use grammatical forms and structures such as suffixes for tense, honorifics and polite style marking, and auxiliary verbs and particles, using appropriateto identify or explain forms, structures and parts of speech

[Key concepts: parts of speech, grammatical structures, syntactic relationship, honorifics; Key processes: applying rules, categorising, explaining]

(ACLKOU184)

  • extending the use of case markers and particles to express thegenitive case (소라의 생일이에요), a time frame (아침부터 저녁까지 서핑했어요), the instrumental case (색연필로 그림을 그려요) and the directional case(왼쪽으로 가세요), and to use a nominal connective –와/과 (불고기와 김치를 먹어요)
  • learning how to modify a nounby using an adjectival form of the premodifying descriptive verb suffixed by –(으)ㄴ, for example, 좋은 생각, 착한 사람
  • expressing future plans using –(으)ㄹ 거예요,for example, 한국에 갈 거예요
  • expressing intention or conjecture using –겠–, for example, 파티에 참석하겠어요, 비가 오겠어요
  • asking for or offering suggestions using –(으)ㄹ까요? for example, 무엇을 살까요? 이 책을 읽을까요?
  • connecting clausesusing conjunctive suffixes (clausal connectives) such as –어/아서, –지만, –(으)면 to express events or ideas in differentrelationships
  • identifying time references expressed by forms andstructures of verbs such as –었/았– and –(으)ㄹ 거예요 and learning how to use them in two-clause sentences, for example, 김치가맛있었지만 조금 짰어요; 학교에 가서 공부할 거예요
  • using basic complex-verb structuressuch as –어/아 주다, –고 있다, –(으)ㄹ 줄 알다, –(으)ㄹ수 있다 and –어/아 보다 as set phrases in their –어/아요 form to express complex ideas,for example, 보여 주세요, 자고 있어요, 할 줄 알아요, 먹을 수 있어요, 읽어 보세요
  • learning how to construct noun phrases out of verbsusing a suffix –기 and using it with case markers or particles, for example, 한국어를 배우기가 쉬워요
  • extending the use ofpolite language to honorific particles and humble/honorific words, for example, 할머니께 선물을 드렸어요; 할아버지, 진지 드세요
  • understanding and developing metalanguage for parts of speech relating to grammatical functions suchas naming (학교, 연필), referring to people or objects (나/저, 이것/저것/그것), qualifying things (예쁜 꽃) and expressing actions,states or qualities (먹어요, 좋아요)
  • comparing how the case of a noun or pronoun is identified in Korean and Englishsentences, for example, 저는 사과를 먹어요 versus ‘I eat apples’

Korean - Korean Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use written and spoken Korean to interact with teachers, peers and others, and to exchange ideas, experiences and interests. They pronounce polysyllabic words that involve syllable-final consonants (받침) such as 먹고, 어떻게 and 축하합니다 as 먹꼬, 어떠케 and 추카함니다, applying relevant pronunciation rules with some accuracy. When interacting, they initiate conversations (for example, 지금 뭐 해요? 어디 가요?), and ask and respond to questions (for example, 왜 한국어를 배워요? 방학 때 뭐 할 거예요? ). Students clarify answers or instructions (for example, 무슨 뜻이에요? 다시 말해 주세요 ) and ask for and give opinions (for example, 어떻게 생각해요?; 제 생각에는…; …인 것 같아요 ). They describe plans (for example, 한국에 갈 거예요 ) and ask for suggestions (for example, 무엇을 할까요? ). They locate and evaluate factual information in texts and create informative and imaginative texts in a range of modes using multimodal or conventional formats. Students explain reasons for actions and show contrasts between feelings or facts, using conjunctive suffixes (clausal connectives) such as –어/아서 and –지만 (for example, 소라가 좋아서 한국어를 배웠어요; 모자가 예쁘지만 너무 작아요 ). They use humble/honorific words or honorific particles such as 진지 , 드리다 and –께 appropriately, and use some basic onomatopoeic and mimetic words such as 똑똑 and 콜콜 to create expressive effects and engage the interest of the audience. Students use cohesive devices, for example, conjunctions (such as 그리고, 그래서, 그러나, 그런데, –고, –어/아서, –지만 ), adverbs of frequency (such as 가끔, 보통, 자주, 언제나 ), time (such as 벌써, 아직 ) and direction (such as 쭉, 곧장 ) and the agreement among honorific elements, at sentence level (for example, 할머니께 꽃을 드려요 ) and throughout the text by using the informal polite style ending –어/아요 . They use a range of case markers and particles such as –의 , – (으)로 , 와/과 , –부터 and –까지 (for example, 소라의 생일, 색연필로, 왼쪽으로, 불고기와 김치, 아침부터 저녁까지 ) and location nouns attached by –에 to indicate relative locations (for example, 책상 위에 …, 상자 안에 … ). Students use some complex structures in verb phrases such as –어/아 주다 , –고 있다 , –(으)ㄹ 줄 알다 , –(으)ㄹ 수 있다 and –어/아 보다 as set phrases. They form questions using a range of question words such as 언제 , 어디 , 어떻게 , 어느 and 무슨 , and modify nouns using an adjectival form of a descriptive verb suffixed by –(으)ㄴ (for example, 착한 사람 ). Students write loan words from English in Hangeul and compare their original pronunciation and how they are pronounced as loan words in Korean (for example, 테니스, 포크). They translate across languages, paraphrasing or annotating words or expressions where equivalence is not possible, such as 정들었어요, 세배 or ‘mufti day’. They recount their reactions to intercultural experiences, describing and reflecting on aspects that do or do not fit with their own sense of identity. Students identify grammatical elements such as case markers, particles, suffixes and verb endings from simple Korean sentences, and compare how grammatical functions of nouns and verbs are determined in Korean and English sentences. They provide examples of the Korean honorific system that works at grammar and word levels (for example, 진지 드세요 ) and illustrate how politeness and respect are important aspects of Korean language and culture. Students differentiate between oral and written forms of words, and apply spelling conventions and spacing rules in their writing. Students explain how word order in Korean differs from English and use a metalanguage to identify common features such as nouns, verbs, cases and subject–object–verb/subject–verb–object constructions. Students identify and reproduce characteristic grammatical features in familiar texts. They vary their language use and make choices of linguistic features, such as the use of polite forms, according to the context. They provide examples showing that Korean is a language for local, international and virtual communication and that it continuously changes as society and culture change, impacted by globalisation and new technologies. Students explain how cultural values and ideas are embedded in language and communicative behaviours. They give examples from their own language/s and cultural behaviour/s which may be interpreted differently from other cultural perspectives and give such possible interpretations.

Mathematics Year 1  

Year 1 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes connecting names, numerals and quantities, and partitioning numbers in various ways fluency includes readily counting number in sequences forwards and backwards, locating numbers on a line and naming the days of the week problem-solving includes using materials to model authentic problems, giving and receiving directions to unfamiliar places, using familiar counting sequences to solve unfamiliar problems and discussing the reasonableness of the answer reasoning includes explaining direct and indirect comparisons of length using uniform informal units, justifying representations of data and explaining patterns that have been created.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Representwith objects and drawings where one object or drawing represents onevalue. Describe the displays (ACMSP263)

  • understanding one-to-one correspondence
  • describing displays by identifying categories with the greatest or least number of objects

Mathematics - Year 1 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 1, students describe number sequences resulting from skip counting by 2s, 5s and 10s. They identify representations of one half. They recognise Australian coins according to their value. Students explain time durations. They describe two-dimensional shapes and three-dimensional objects. Students describe data displays. Students count to and from 100 and locate numbers on a number line. They carry out simple additions and subtractions using counting strategies. They partition numbers using place value. They continue simple patterns involving numbers and objects. Students order objects based on lengths and capacities using informal units. They tell time to the half-hour. They use the language of direction to move from place to place. Students classify outcomes of simple familiar events. They collect data by asking questions, draw simple data displays and make simple inferences.

Mathematics Year 2  

Year 2 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes connecting number calculations with counting sequences, partitioning and combining numbers flexibly and identifying and describing the relationship between addition and subtraction and between multiplication and division fluency includes readily counting numbers in sequences, using informal units iteratively to compare measurements, using the language of chance to describe outcomes of familiar chance events and describing and comparing time durations problem-solving includes formulating problems from authentic situations, making models and using number sentences that represent problem situations, and matching transformations with their original shape reasoning includes using known facts to derive strategies for unfamiliar calculations, comparing and contrasting related models of operations and creating and interpreting simple representations of data.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Identify a question of interest based on one categorical variable. Gatherrelevant to the question (ACMSP048)

  • determining the variety of birdlife in the playground and using a prepared table to record observations

Content description

Elaborations

Collect, check and classify (ACMSP049)

  • recognising the usefulness of tally marks
  • identifying categories of data and using them to sort data

Mathematics - Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students recognise increasing and decreasing number sequences involving 2s, 3s and 5s. They represent multiplication and division by grouping into sets. They associate collections of Australian coins with their value. Students identify the missing element in a number sequence. Students recognise the features of three-dimensional objects. They interpret simple maps of familiar locations. They explain the effects of one-step transformations. Students make sense of collected information. Students count to and from 1000. They perform simple addition and subtraction calculations using a range of strategies. They divide collections and shapes into halves, quarters and eighths. Students order shapes and objects using informal units. They tell time to the quarter-hour and use a calendar to identify the date and the months included in seasons. They draw two-dimensional shapes. They describe outcomes for everyday events. Students collect, organise and represent data to make simple inferences.

Mathematics Year 3  

Year 3 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes connecting number representations with number sequences, partitioning and combining numbers flexibly, representing unit fractions, using appropriate language to communicate times, and identifying environmental symmetry fluency includes recalling multiplication facts, using familiar metric units to order and compare objects, identifying and describing outcomes of chance experiments, interpreting maps and communicating positions problem-solving includes formulating and modelling authentic situations involving planning methods of data collection and representation, making models of three-dimensional objects and using number properties to continue number patterns reasoning includes using generalising from number properties and results of calculations, comparing angles and creating and interpreting variations in the results of data collections and data displays.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Identify questions or issues for categorical variables. Identifysources and plan methods ofcollection and recording (ACMSP068)

  • refining questions and planning investigations that involve collecting data, and carrying out the investigation (for example narrowing the focus of a question such as ‘which is the most popular breakfast cereal?’ to ‘which is the most popular breakfast cereal among Year 3 students in our class?’)

Content description

Elaborations

Collect data, organise into categories and create displays using lists, tables,and simple column graphs, with and without the use of digital technologies (ACMSP069)

  • exploring meaningful and increasingly efficient ways to record data, and representing and reporting the results of investigations
  • collecting data to investigate features in the natural environment

Mathematics - Year 3 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 3, students recognise the connection between addition and subtraction and solve problems using efficient strategies for multiplication. They model and represent unit fractions. They represent money values in various ways. Students identify symmetry in the environment. They match positions on maps with given information. Students recognise angles in real situations. They interpret and compare data displays. Students count to and from 10 000. They classify numbers as either odd or even. They recall addition and multiplication facts for single-digit numbers. Students correctly count out change from financial transactions. They continue number patterns involving addition and subtraction. Students use metric units for length, mass and capacity. They tell time to the nearest minute. Students make models of three-dimensional objects. Students conduct chance experiments and list possible outcomes. They conduct simple data investigations for categorical variables.

Mathematics Year 5  

Year 5 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes making connections between representations of numbers, using fractions to represent probabilities, comparing and ordering fractions and decimals and representing them in various ways, describing transformations and identifying line and rotational symmetry fluency includes choosing appropriate units of measurement for calculation of perimeter and area, using estimation to check the reasonableness of answers to calculations and using instruments to measure angles problem-solving includes formulating and solving authentic problems using whole numbers and measurements and creating financial plans reasoning includes investigating strategies to perform calculations efficiently, continuing patterns involving fractions and decimals, interpreting results of chance experiments, posing appropriate questions for data investigations and interpreting data sets.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Pose questions and collect categorical or numericalby observation or survey (ACMSP118)

  • posing questions about insect diversity in the playground, collecting data by taping a one-metre-square piece of paper to the playground and observing the type and number of insects on it over time

Mathematics - Year 5 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 5, students solve simple problems involving the four operations using a range of strategies. They check the reasonableness of answers using estimation and rounding. Students identify and describe factors and multiples. They identify and explain strategies for finding unknown quantities in number sentences involving the four operations. They explain plans for simple budgets. Students connect three-dimensional objects with their two-dimensional representations. They describe transformations of two-dimensional shapes and identify line and rotational symmetry. Students interpret different data sets. Students order decimals and unit fractions and locate them on number lines. They add and subtract fractions with the same denominator. Students continue patterns by adding and subtracting fractions and decimals. They use appropriate units of measurement for length, area, volume, capacity and mass, and calculate perimeter and area of rectangles. They convert between 12- and 24-hour time. Students use a grid reference system to locate landmarks. They measure and construct different angles. Students list outcomes of chance experiments with equally likely outcomes and assign probabilities between 0 and 1. Students pose questions to gather data, and construct data displays appropriate for the data.

Mathematics Year 6  

Year 6 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes describing properties of different sets of numbers, using fractions and decimals to describe probabilities, representing fractions and decimals in various ways and describing connections between them, and making reasonable estimations fluency includes representing integers on a number line, calculating simple percentages, using brackets appropriately, converting between fractions and decimals, using operations with fractions, decimals and percentages, measuring using metric units and interpreting timetables problem-solving includes formulating and solving authentic problems using fractions, decimals, percentages and measurements, interpreting secondary data displays and finding the size of unknown angles reasoning includes explaining mental strategies for performing calculations, describing results for continuing number sequences, explaining the transformation of one shape into another and explaining why the actual results of chance experiments may differ from expected results.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Interpret and compare a range ofdisplays, including side-by-side column graphs for two categorical variables (ACMSP147)

  • comparing different student-generated diagrams, tables and graphs, describing their similarities and differences and commenting on the usefulness of each representation for interpreting the data
  • understanding that data can be represented in different ways, sometimes with one symbol representing more than one piece of data, and that it is important to read all information about a representation before making judgments

Mathematics - Year 6 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 6, students recognise the properties of prime, composite, square and triangular numbers. They describe the use of integers in everyday contexts. They solve problems involving all four operations with whole numbers. Students connect fractions, decimals and percentages as different representations of the same number. They solve problems involving the addition and subtraction of related fractions. Students make connections between the powers of 10 and the multiplication and division of decimals. They describe rules used in sequences involving whole numbers, fractions and decimals. Students connect decimal representations to the metric system and choose appropriate units of measurement to perform a calculation. They make connections between capacity and volume. They solve problems involving length and area. They interpret timetables. Students describe combinations of transformations. They solve problems using the properties of angles. Students compare observed and expected frequencies. They interpret and compare a variety of data displays including those displays for two categorical variables. They interpret secondary data displayed in the media. Students locate fractions and integers on a number line. They calculate a simple fraction of a quantity. They add, subtract and multiply decimals and divide decimals where the result is rational. Students calculate common percentage discounts on sale items. They write correct number sentences using brackets and order of operations. Students locate an ordered pair in any one of the four quadrants on the Cartesian plane. They construct simple prisms and pyramids. Students describe probabilities using simple fractions, decimals and percentages.

Mathematics Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes describing the relationship between graphs and equations, simplifying a range of algebraic expressions and explaining the use of relative frequencies to estimate probabilities and of the trigonometric ratios for right-angle triangles fluency includes applying the index laws to expressions with integer indices, expressing numbers in scientific notation, listing outcomes for experiments, developing familiarity with calculations involving the Cartesian plane and calculating areas of shapes and surface areas of prisms problem-solving includes formulating and modelling practical situations involving surface areas and volumes of right prisms, applying ratio and scale factors to similar figures, solving problems involving right-angle trigonometry and collecting data from secondary sources to investigate an issue reasoning includes following mathematical arguments, evaluating media reports and using statistical knowledge to clarify situations, developing strategies in investigating similarity and sketching linear graphs.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate Pythagoras’ Theorem and its application to solving simple problems involving right angled triangles (ACMMG222)

  • understanding that Pythagoras' Theorem is a useful tool in determining unknown lengths in right-angled triangles and has widespread applications
  • recognising that right-angled triangle calculations may generate results that can be integers, fractions or irrational numbers

Content description

Elaborations

Identify everyday questions and issues involving at least one numerical and at least one categorical variable, and collectdirectly and from secondary sources (ACMSP228)

  • comparing the annual rainfall in various parts of Australia, Pakistan, New Guinea and Malaysia

Content description

Elaborations

Find the distance between two points located on the Cartesian plane using a range of strategies, including graphing software (ACMNA214)

  • investigating graphical and algebraic techniques for finding distance between two points
  • using Pythagoras' theorem to calculate distance between two points

Mathematics - Year 9 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 9, students solve problems involving simple interest. They interpret ratio and scale factors in similar figures. Students explain similarity of triangles. They recognise the connections between similarity and the trigonometric ratios. Students compare techniques for collecting data from primary and secondary sources. They make sense of the position of the mean and median in skewed, symmetric and bi-modal displays to describe and interpret data. Students apply the index laws to numbers and express numbers in scientific notation. They expand binomial expressions. They find the distance between two points on the Cartesian plane and the gradient and midpoint of a line segment. They sketch linear and non-linear relations. Students calculate areas of shapes and the volume and surface area of right prisms and cylinders. They use Pythagoras’ Theorem and trigonometry to find unknown sides of right-angled triangles. Students calculate relative frequencies to estimate probabilities, list outcomes for two-step experiments and assign probabilities for those outcomes. They construct histograms and back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots.

Mathematics Year 10A  

Year 10A Description

The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Apply Pythagoras’ Theorem and trigonometry to solving three-dimensional problems in right-angled triangles (ACMMG276)

  • investigating the applications of Pythagoras' theorem in authentic problems

Content description

Elaborations

Solve right-angled triangle problems including those involving direction and (ACMMG245)

  • applying Pythagoras' Theorem and trigonometry to problems in surveying and design

Mathematics - Year 10 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 10, students recognise the connection between simple and compound interest. They solve problems involving linear equations and inequalities. They make the connections between algebraic and graphical representations of relations. Students solve surface area and volume problems relating to composite solids. They recognise the relationships between parallel and perpendicular lines. Students apply deductive reasoning to proofs and numerical exercises involving plane shapes. They compare data sets by referring to the shapes of the various data displays. They describe bivariate data where the independent variable is time. Students describe statistical relationships between two continuous variables. They evaluate statistical reports. Students expand binomial expressions and factorise monic quadratic expressions. They find unknown values after substitution into formulas. They perform the four operations with simple algebraic fractions. Students solve simple quadratic equations and pairs of simultaneous equations. They use triangle and angle properties to prove congruence and similarity. Students use trigonometry to calculate unknown angles in right-angled triangles. Students list outcomes for multi-step chance experiments and assign probabilities for these experiments. They calculate quartiles and inter-quartile ranges.

Modern Greek - Modern Greek Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Children enter the early years of schooling with established communication skills in one or more languages and varying degrees of early literacy capability. For young students, learning typically focuses on their immediate world of family, home, school, friends and neighbourhood. They are learning how to socialise with new people, share with others, and participate in structured routines and activities at school. Typically, they have little to no experience of Modern Greek language and culture. Modern Greek language learning and use Modern Greek is learnt in parallel with English language and literacy. While the learning of Modern Greek differs from the learning of English, each supports and enriches the other. Modern Greek is used in classroom interactions, routines and activities, supported by the use of materials and resources, gestures and body language. At this stage, there is a focus on play, imaginative activities, games, music, dance and familiar routines, which provide scaffolding for language development. Learners listen to the sounds and patterns specific to the Modern Greek language and try to reproduce them through activities such as rhymes, songs, clapping and action games. Repetition and consolidation help learners to identify high-frequency words and simple phrases, and to recognise the purpose of simple texts. Learners identify and use Modern Greek non-verbal communication strategies, including gestures, and experiment with one- or two-word responses and simple expressions when prompted. They progress to using Modern Greek for functions such as greeting, asking and answering questions (Πώς σε λένε; Τι κάνεις; Τι κάνετε;), responding to directions (έλα, έλατε, κάθισε, καθίστε, σήκω, σηκωθείτε), singing songs, and taking turns in games and simple shared tasks. There is a natural transition from spoken to written language. Learners use a variety of cues, including images, context and frequently used word patterns, to comprehend texts and communicate. Contexts of interaction Learners interact with each other and the teacher within the learning environment. The use of information and communication technologies (ICT) enriches the experience of Modern Greek language and culture by providing alternative modes of learning, numerous resources and opportunities to access authentic language in different contexts. Texts and resources Learners engage with a variety of spoken, written and visual texts such as traditional children’s songs and nursery rhymes, stories from big books, plays and interactive resources. Writing skills progress from alphabet recognition to tracing, labelling and copying letters, then to constructing simple, short texts using familiar vocabulary. Features of Modern Greek language use Learners become familiar with the sound system of the Modern Greek language, such as syllables using consonants and vowels, and new sounds, such as the guttural γ, ρ and γκ and ξ and ψ in words. They learn to identify and write letters, words and simple sentences using the Greek alphabet, making comparisons with the English alphabet. They begin to notice that Modern Greek speakers may communicate in ways which are different to their own, and that language can be used in a variety of ways. Level of support Rich language input characterises the first stages of learning. Learning experiences are supported by the teacher through scaffolding, modelling, cueing, monitoring, feedback and encouragement. Multiple and varied sources of input and stimulus are used, including visual cues and resources such as pictures, realia, objects, maps and charts. The role of English Modern Greek is used whenever possible as the medium for class interaction. English is used for discussion and explanation. This allows learners to share ideas about differences and similarities between Modern Greek and other languages and cultures, and how language and culture are interconnected, giving them opportunities to consider perspectives other than their own and to reflect on their learning.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise and reproduce the sounds and letters of the Greek alphabet, identifying how they are represented in words, andvowel–consonant combinations, including the most common digraphs/diphthongs such as oυ and μπ

[Key concepts: stress, intonation, letters, pronunciation; Key processes: listening, reading, recognising]

(ACLMGU114)

  • building phonic awareness by pronouncing and writing alphabet letters with familiar sounds, for example, Οο, Ιι, Εε, Αα, Κκ, Ττ, Λλ, Ππ, Σσς, Μμ, Νν, Ηη, Υυ, Ωω, Ββ, Ζζ, Φφ, and building to more unfamiliar sounds, for example Γγ, Ρρ, Δδ, Θθ, Ξξ, Ψψ, Χχ
  • experimenting with sounds, rhythms, intonation and stress
  • noticing that there are 24 letters in the Greek alphabet with individual names and that there are upper case and lower case letters, seven vowels and 17 consonants, and that ‘ς’ (τελικό σίγμα) only appears on the ends of words
  • locating and highlighting specific alphabet letters and accent marks in names, and categorising names according to their first consonant
  • developing pronunciation and intonation skills by singing, reciting and repeating alphabet names in context, for example, songs
  • focusing on those letters that are different and initially difficult and correctly pronouncing words starting with the sounds Ψψ and Ξξ (ψάρι, ξύλο), recognising that these two sounds only appear in the middle or at the end of words in English
  • recognising and making simple syllables from vowel–consonant combinations, for example, μα, με, μη, μι, μο, μυ, μω and understanding that syllables can be joined together to make words such as α-λά-τι and μά-τι
  • recognising the most common digraphs, including ου as in μου and μπ as in μπαμπάς

Content description

Elaborations

Identify key words and information with guidance, in simple written, spoken, digital and visual texts

[Key concepts: language, texts; Key processes: listening, gathering, naming, grouping]

(ACLMGC106)

  • listening for key words in stories, rhymes or songs, using intonation and visual cues such as gestures (hot and cold, the owl song)
  • identifying key words from different written and spoken texts by labelling, matching, selecting, miming and using actions, for example, on an interactive whiteboard
  • obtaining information from multimodal texts to identify, describe, draw and name a variety of people and objects
  • sorting and categorising information, using graphic representations such as tables, for example, to record likes and dislikes; masculine, feminine and neuter words

Modern Greek - Modern Greek Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with teachers and peers through action-related talk and play. They introduce themselves, (for example, Καλημέρα, Mε λένε Γιώργο) and their family and exchange greetings, farewells, (for example, Γεια σου, Kαληνύχτα) and express thanks such as Eυχαριστώ πολύ. They use simple, repetitive language when participating in shared activities and simple exchanges, respond to simple instructions such as, Έλα εδώ , and imitate frequently used classroom language, for example, Όλοι μαζί, Mπράβο, Kλείσε την πόρτα . When speaking, they reproduce distinctive sounds and letters of the Greek language such as, γ-γάτα, ρ-νερό, μπ-μπαμπάς, ξ-ξέρω, ψ-ψάρι, ου-μου. Students identify specific words, such as names of people (for example, Ο Γιάννης ), places (for example, το σχολείο ) or objects (for example , η γόμα ), in simple spoken and written texts and respond to imaginative experiences through singing and performing. They present information about themselves (for example, Το σκυλάκι μου ), their family (for example, Να η γιαγιά μου ), friends (for example, οι φίλοι μου ) and possessions such as, το βιβλίο μου , using gestures and modelled language. They create simple texts, such as captions to images, using familiar words, phrases and sentence patterns (for example, Σ’ αγαπώ μαμά ). They use vocabulary related to their classroom and family (for example, Η οικογένειά μου, Η τάξη μου ). They recognise questions such as, Τι κάνετε; and commands such as, Καθίστε κάτω, and use short sentences with appropriate word order, verb forms and personal pronouns to communicate about themselves, their family and classroom (for example, Είμαι έξι, Να η μαμά μου, Να το σχολείο μου). They translate frequently used words and simple phrases relating to their immediate environment, using visual cues and identifying similarities and differences. They give examples of ways the Greek language sounds and looks different from other languages that they bring to the classroom. Students identify how letters of the Greek alphabet are represented in words and read vowel–consonant combinations (for example, τα, τε, τη, τι, το, τυ, τω ). They identify features of familiar texts such as songs, labels and captions. They provide examples of the different titles and greetings that are used to address people in different situations (for example, κύριε, κυρία ). They list different languages that are spoken in Australia and identify words in English that have been borrowed from Greek and vice versa. They identify similarities and differences between Greek and their own language and culture.

Spanish - Spanish Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners These years represent a transition to secondary school. Students in this sequence are continuing to study Spanish, bringing with them an established capability to interact in different situations, to engage with a variety of texts, and to communicate with some assistance about their immediate world and that of Spain and other Spanish-speaking communities. They have experience in analysing the major features of the language system and in reflecting on the nature of intercultural exchanges in which they are involved. Spanish language learning and use Spanish is used for classroom interactions and transactions, for creating and maintaining a class dynamic, for explaining and practising language forms, and for developing cultural understanding. Learners work both collaboratively and independently in Spanish, exploring a variety of texts (such as online forums, songs/raps, debates and role-plays) with particular reference to their current social, cultural and communicative interests. They share language knowledge and resources in small groups to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They use modelled and rehearsed language in familiar and unfamiliar contexts and increasingly generate original language. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural perspectives and experiences. They plan, draft and present imaginative, informative and persuasive texts; design interactive events and collaborative tasks; and participate in discussions and games. They use vocabulary and grammar with increasing accuracy, drafting and editing to improve structure and clarify meaning. Contexts of interaction The primary context for learning and using Spanish remains the language classroom; however, there may be increasing opportunities for interaction with peers in a range of Spanish-speaking communities through the use of technologies and social networks, partner-school arrangements and community connections. Learners have access to additional Spanish-language resources through websites, social media and radio streaming. Texts and resources Learners work with a variety of texts specifically designed for learning Spanish in schools, such as textbooks, videos, readers and online resources. They also access materials created for Spanish-speaking communities, such as films (subtitled), websites, magazines and advertisements, providing opportunities to make connections between texts and cultural contexts, perspectives and experiences. Features of Spanish language use Learners expand their range of vocabulary beyond their immediate world and familiar experiences. They make clearer distinctions between stress and intonation patterns to increase fluency and enhance expression. They develop broader grammatical knowledge, using present, past and future tenses of regular and irregular verbs to describe and sequence events. They recognise and apply characteristic features of additional types of texts. Learners develop an awareness of the diversity of languages and cultures in the Spanish-speaking world. They analyse more critically and imaginatively the relationship between language and culture, identifying cultural references in texts and considering how language reflects and influences perspectives and values. They make comparisons between their own language(s) and Spanish, and reflect on the complexities involved in moving between languages and cultural systems. They monitor and reflect on their own intercultural experience and capability as language learners, and identify their own personal and community practices that reflect cultural influences. Level of support Opportunities to review and consolidate prior learning are balanced against provision of engaging and relevant new experiences and connections. Learners are supported to develop increasing autonomy as language learners and users, and to self-monitor and adjust language in response to their experiences in different contexts. The role of English While Spanish is used in more extended and elaborated ways for classroom interactions and routines, task participation and structured discussion, English is used for more complex elements of instruction and for more substantive discussion, analysis and reflection. Learners continue to develop a metalanguage for thinking and talking about language, culture and identity and the experience of learning and using Spanish.

Content description

Elaborations

Understand and control grammatical structures such as different forms of the past tense, regular and irregular verbs, interrogative and imperative moods, and conjunctions in a range of familiar types of texts

[Key concepts: parts of speech, tense, mood; Key processes: analysing, categorising, distinguishing]

(ACLSPU175)

  • conjugating common regular verbs and high-frequency irregular verbs (ir, tener, ser, haber) in the present (hablo inglés) past (nadasteis en el río) and present perfect (¿han llegado ya?) tenses
  • using present, past and future tenses of modal verbs, for example, no pudo comer, debemos dormir bien
  • using adjectives to describe and compare people and some aspects of the environment, for example, mi tía es generosa, los Andes son inmensos
  • using adverbs to modify the meaning of verbs and adjectives, for example, casi nunca, demasiado
  • using subject-verb-object word order and comparing it to English structures, for example, Simón busca la información para la tarea en la red
  • expressing quantity, for example, miles de personas, mucha gente, varios libros, tanto dinero, pocas ideas, bastante calor, algunos amigos
  • joining elements of more complex sentences using conjunctions, for example, y, pero, porque, además
  • using interrogative and imperative moods, for example, ¿Has comido? ¡Abre la puerta!
  • indicating possession by using de followed by a pronoun (de él) or noun, for example, El carro de mi mamá, Las camisas de mi hermano

Spanish - Spanish Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use written and spoken Spanish for classroom interactions, to carry out transactions and to exchange views and experiences with peers and others in a range of contexts. They use rehearsed and spontaneous language to give and follow instructions and engage in discussions, such as expressing or rejecting points of view (for example, ¿Estás de acuerdo?, verdadero/falso, ¿qué te parece?, ¿cuándo?, ¿cómo?, ¿por qué?). They apply appropriate pronunciation and rhythm in spoken Spanish to a range of sentence types (for example, ¿Nos vamos?, ¡Nos vamos!, Pasó por aquí/Paso por aquí ), and use interrogative and imperative moods (for example, ¿Has comido? ¡Abre la puerta! ). They locate, summarise and analyse information and ideas on topics of interest from a range of texts, and communicate information, different perspectives and their own opinions such as a mí me parece… , using different modes of presentation. They describe their responses to different imaginative texts by expressing opinions (for example, en mi opinión, personalmente yo prefiero, estoy de acuerdo ), stating preferences (for example, después de pensarlo, yo…, prefiero más bien...es buena/mala idea ), and comparing ways in which people, places and experiences are represented (for example, mejor que… peor que….más... menos ). They draw on past experiences or future possibilities to create imaginative texts using regular (for example, caminar, beber, vivir ) and irregular verbs (for example, estar, tener, ir ) in a range of tenses including present ( vivo ), present perfect ( he vivido ), preterite ( viví ), imperfect ( vivía ) and future ( viviré ). They use descriptive vocabulary, such as numbers, adjectives (for example, generoso, simpático, listo, amistoso, azul, rosa, café ) and adverbs (for example, generalmente, raramente, nunca ), to extend and elaborate their texts. They use cohesive devices such as y, o, porque, cuando, por eso, pero, puesto que, debido a, y, pues, para and prepositions such as antes del atardecer, dentro de la casa in own language production to create cohesion. Students translate texts on familiar topics and produce texts in Spanish and English, comparing their different versions and considering possible explanations for variations. When participating in intercultural experiences they identify similarities and differences in language use and cultural expression. They identify significant people, places, events and influences in their lives and explain why these are important to their own sense of identity. Students know that in Spanish there are words that are spelled and pronounced the same but that have different meanings, such as pila (pile or battery), and that a word often takes on a different meaning when an accent is added, for example, papá (‘father’) and papa (‘potato’), and the definite article el and pronoun él (‘he’ or ‘him’). They use metalanguage to explain features of language, texts and grammar and to identify how text structures and language features vary between different types of texts. Students explain how elements of communication such as gestures, facial expressions or the use of silence vary according to context, situation and relationships. They identify how Spanish both influences and is influenced by other languages and is spoken in a variety of forms in communities around the world. They explain why meanings and reactions vary according to the cultural assumptions that people bring to intercultural experiences and interactions.

Turkish - Turkish Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners Students coming into this pathway are background learners of Turkish with varying degrees of proficiency in the language. All have family and community connections with the language and associated cultures, or with languages or dialects related to Turkish. Some may have recently arrived in Australia, may have completed the primary years of schooling in Turkish and may have established literacy as well as oracy skills in the language. Others will have participated in community language programs during these years and have some literacy capabilities. Others may have minimal experience of formal learning of Turkish, with no literacy proficiency and varying degrees of oral capabilities, depending on their home language environment. All students share the experience of belonging to worlds in which languages play a key role and diversity of language use is common. The curriculum takes into account the diversity of learners, ensuring that tasks and activities are flexible to cater for different language capabilities while being appropriately pitched to all learners’ cognitive and social levels. Turkish language learning and use Students use Turkish to interact with each other, the teacher and other speakers of the language, to access and exchange information, to express ideas and feelings, to compete and to cooperate in learning tasks and activities. They build vocabulary resources, grammatical knowledge and communicative capabilities such as active listening skills and interactional strategies through shared learning experiences that provide a context for purposeful language use and through focused learning episodes that develop understanding of language systems and an ability to use metalanguage. They use modelled and rehearsed language to compose and present different types of texts, for example, shared stories, media and hypermedia texts, songs, poems, reports or journal entries. They plan, draft and present imaginative and informative texts, design interactive events and participate in discussions. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural perspectives and experiences. Learners use ICT to support their learning in increasingly independent and intentional ways, exchanging resources with each other and with learners in different contexts. Contexts of interaction Students interact primarily with each other and the teacher in class, with some access to broader Turkish-speaking networks in the school and local community. ICT resources, such as email, online chats or wikis, provide access to additional experiences of authentic communication, connecting learners’ social worlds with those of Turkish-speaking peers in other contexts. Learners have additional access to Turkish language experience through media, community events, websites, social media and radio streaming. Texts and resources Learners work with a range of texts designed for in-school learning of Turkish, such as textbooks, readers, literary texts, videos, online media resources and materials. They also access materials created for Turkish-speaking communities, such as songs, films, magazines and social media texts such as blogs and advertisements and websites. They interact with a range of texts created for different purposes, for example, informational, transactional, communicative, expressive and imaginative texts, and make connections between these text types in Turkish and the work they do around similar texts in the English learning area. Features of Turkish language use Learners recognise and use key elements of Turkish grammar, such as word order, positions of adjectives, adverbs and postpositions, and recognise how grammatical forms and functions are represented through agglutination. They apply the principles of vowel harmony, for example, when adding nominal case endings, -(e), -(i), -d(e), -d(e)n to nouns, such as ev-e, ev-i, ev-de, ev-den, ev-in. They understand and use simple verb tenses, using negation and affirmation and suffixes to form sentences, such as biliyorum/bilmiyorum, okur/okumaz, uyudu/uyumadı, geleceğim/gelmeyeceğim, gitmiş/gitmemiş. They use a range of adjectives, adverbs and postpositions to describe actions, places and people in their own texts, for example, mavi köşkte, Kısa saçlı biriydi, Çok dikkatli yürü, Dün sabah geldi ; and understand and use the conditional marker -s(e) and/or the word eğer in compound sentences, for example, Eğer kitap okursan hayal gücün gelişir. They develop their range of vocabulary to domains beyond their personal experience and interests, use and analyse grammatical forms and structures and develop awareness of how these shape textual features. They use descriptive and expressive language to create particular effects and engage interest. They develop language knowledge, processing strategies and understanding of text conventions and patterns to assist in comprehending unfamiliar texts. They make connections between texts and cultural contexts, identifying how values and perspectives are embedded in language and how language choices determine how people, issues and experiences are represented. They are aware of the nature of the relationship between languages and cultures, noticing, for example, how particular Turkish words or expressions ‘carry’ cultural values or experiences. They reflect on the nature of bicultural and multicultural experience, on how languages change in response to broader social and cultural shifts, and how they perceive their own identities as users of two or more languages in a multicultural society. Level of support Differentiated support is required for learners with different levels of oracy and literacy proficiency. All learners require opportunities to review and consolidate learning; different degrees of balance between consolidation work and provision of more challenging tasks ensure learners at different levels are catered for. Teachers provide scaffolding, modelling and material and resource support for the development of fluency and accuracy in spoken language and of grammatical and literacy capabilities. Learners are supported to develop autonomy as language learners and users, and to self-monitor and adjust language in response to their experience in different communicative contexts. They are encouraged to engage critically with resources such as websites and translating tools and other resources designed to strengthen their receptive and productive language use. The role of English Learners are encouraged to use Turkish whenever possible. English is used when appropriate for discussion, explanation, comparison and reflection, for example, when considering the nature and relationship of language and culture or in tasks which involve bilingual work that includes comparison and analysis of Turkish and English. The process of moving between and using both languages consolidates learners’ already established sense of what it means to be bilingual or multilingual and provides opportunities for reflection on the experience of living interculturally in intersecting language communities.

Content description

Elaborations

Recognise that the Turkishhas evolved and developed through different periods of time, across different contexts and as a result of different influences and interactions, and that it is related to many other languages and has influenced other languages used in the Australian community

[Key concepts:change,contact, loan words, globalisation; Key processes: investigating, identifying, classifying]

(ACLTUU101)

  • understanding that all languages, including Turkish, change over time, that some grow, adding new words and borrowing from other languages, as in the case of both Turkish and Australian English, while others are no longer spoken (often referred to as ‘sleeping’ by owners) as in the case of many Indigenous languages of Australia and North America
  • investigating the influence of different languages on Turkish through different periods, such as Persian and Arabic after the adoption of the religion of Islam, and of French during the 19th century following reforms in the Ottoman Empire
  • understanding reasons for historical developments and reforms in relation to the Turkish language, such as changes implemented under the leadership of Atatürk, for example, changing the script from the Arabic to the Latin alphabet in 1928
  • understanding that Turkish culture and language constantly change due to contact with other cultures and languages and in response to developments in communications, popular culture and technology, for example, through the adoption and adaptation of new words and expressions, such as e-posta, yazıcı, tarayıcı, genel ağ, fare, tıklamak, sanal âlemde gezmek, sanal gerçek
  • recognising connections between language families and individual languages, for example, between Turkish and languages such as Azeri
  • identifying examples of Turkish word-borrowings from other languages, noticing groups of words or expressions in particular categories or areas of interest, such as food, music and sport, for example, hamburger, nota, gitar and Avustralya futbolu
  • recognising the influence of Turkish on English, for example, by identifying words commonly used in Australian English, such as yoghurt (yoğurt), coffee (kahve), horde (ordu), kiosk (köşk), kebab (kebap), turquoise (turkuaz);
  • classifying loan words from English used in Turkish in terms of domains of language use, for example, technological words such as, televizyon, radyo, internet, video, cd

Turkish - Turkish Years 7–10 (Year 7 Entry) Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students interact with the teacher and peers to exchange information and express opinions, for example, Arkadaşlarımla sinemaya gitmeyi severim. They use descriptive and expressive language to share feelings and to express preferences such as Suyu gazoza tercih ederim. Students use action-related and rehearsed language to engage in shared activities that involve planning, collaborating, transacting and negotiating, for example, Haftada kaç kez … yapıyorsun? … hakkında ne düşünüyorsun? They interact in classroom routines and exchanges by asking and responding to questions, for example, Ben ne yapabilirim? Sen not alır mısın?, requesting help or permission, for example, Sence bu doğru mu? Tekrar eder misiniz? Arkadaşlar bakar mısınız? Bunu nasıl yapacağız? and giving praise or encouragement, such as çok güzel, aferin, harika, tebrikler, başarılarının devamını dilerim, seninle gurur duyuyorum. When interacting, they use the features of the sound system to their pronunciation of Turkish, including applying stress, rhythm and intonation patterns to statements, for example, kapı açık kaldı, inanmıyorum, and questions, for example, gerçekten mi? Students locate key points of information from a range of spoken, written and visual texts, and present information related to social, cultural and environmental contexts using different modes of presentation. They share their responses to different imaginative texts by identifying and comparing favourite elements and discussing events, characters and messages, for example, beni… çok etkiledi çünkü …, Çok komikti çok sürükleyiciydi, akıcıydı, dili anlaşılırdı, biraz uzundu. Sıkıcıydı, karmaşıktı… Çok üzücüydü , Anlaşılması zordu . Students use imaginative language to create original or adapt familiar imaginative texts in different genres. They use key elements of Turkish grammar in spoken and written texts, such as basic rules of word order, for example, Ali topu attı , Ali topu al ve at! and Ali topu Tarkan dan sonra bana atar mısın?, adjectives, for example, mavi köşkte adverbs, for example, çok dikkatli yürü , postpositions, for example, dün sabah geldi , verb tenses and subject–verb agreement, for example, Defne yemekten sonra ödevini yaptı ve uyudu . They apply rules of agglutination to verbs, for example , bilmiyorum/biliyorum, okur/okumaz, uyudu/uyumadı, geleceğim/gelmeyeceğim, gitmiş/gitmemiş , and nouns, for example, ev-e, ev-i, ev-de, ev-den, kebap ç ı, simit ç i . They translate and interpret familiar texts from Turkish into English and vice versa, identifying words and phrases that are not easily translated, such as imece , hayırlı olsun , nazar değmesin, and create shared bilingual texts to support their own learning. They compare ways of communicating in Turkish and English and explain how being bilingual influences their cultural identity and ways of communicating. Students apply elements of the Turkish writing system to write and spell unfamiliar words, including symbols and characters, for example, hala-hâlâ, kar-kâr, kitap-kitabı, ağaç-ağacı , vowel harmony and sound assimilation of consonants. They identify how grammatical forms and functions are represented through agglutination. They identify the characteristic features of different types of texts and compare these features with texts in English to identify similarities and differences. They describe how language use varies according to age, gender, social position or region. Students provide examples of how the Turkish language has changed over time due to different influences and interactions, identifying Turkish words that have emerged through contact with other languages, for example, e-posta, yazıcı, tarayıcı, genel ağ, fare, tıklamak, sanal âlemde gezmek, sanal gerçek . They identify the relationship between language and culture and describe how languages reflect personal and community experience and values.

Turkish - Turkish Years F–10 Sequence Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

The nature of the learners Children in this pathway enter the early years of schooling with established oracy skills in Turkish, English and sometimes other languages or dialects. There will be variation in terms of proficiency in Turkish depending on variables such as home language environment, generational language shift and parental cultural and linguistic background. Children will have varying degrees of literacy capability in both/either Turkish and/or English, and share the experience of belonging to worlds in which languages play a key role. Cognitive and social development at this stage is exploratory and egocentric. The curriculum builds on children’s interests, sense of enjoyment and curiosity, with an emphasis on active learning and confidence building. Turkish is learnt in parallel with English language and literacy, which for some children will be being learned as a second or additional language. Learning in the two areas differs significantly but each supports and enriches the other. Turkish language learning and use Rich language input characterises the first stages of learning. Children are familiar with the sounds and patterns of Turkish and their fluency and accuracy is further developed through activities such as rhymes, songs, clapping and action games. Children identify and use high-frequency sentences and phrases, and recognise the purpose and intention of simple texts. They use culturally appropriate non-verbal strategies, and produce statements and expressions in response to prompts and cues. They are supported to use Turkish for different language functions, such as asking and responding to questions, expressing wishes, responding to directions, and taking turns in games and simple shared learning activities. They notice differences between the languages they know and use, and differences in how they communicate in some situations when using Turkish or English. Creative play provides opportunities for exploring these differences and for using Turkish for purposeful interaction in some less familiar contexts. Contexts of interaction Children interact with one another and the teacher, with some access to wider school and community members. Information and communications technology (ICT) resources provide additional access to Turkish language and cultural experience, connecting children’s social worlds with those of Turkish-speaking children in communities other than their own. Turkish is the dominant language used in classroom interactions, routines and activities, supported by the use of English when required. The early stage of language and literacy development is supported by use of concrete materials and resources, gestures and body language. Play and imaginative activities, games, music, movement and familiar routines provide essential scaffolding and context for language development. Texts and resources Children engage with a variety of spoken, visual, written and digital texts. They listen and respond to teacher talk, share ideas and join in songs, rhymes, stories and chants, and various forms of play and conversational exchanges. Written and digital texts include stories, shared Big Books, walls charts and teacher-generated materials, such as games, labels, captions and flashcards. Features of Turkish language use Children’s familiarity with the spoken form of Turkish supports their introduction to the written form of the language. They become familiar with the Turkish alphabet and writing conventions, and are introduced to the sound–letter correspondence of the 21 consonants and eight vowels that make up the alphabet. Writing skills progress from labelling and copying high-frequency words to co-constructing simple texts using familiar vocabulary, language features and structures such as subject–object–verb word order. They apply this order to simple statements, imperatives and questions such as Ali gel. Ali okula gel. Ali okula geldi. Ali okula geldi mi? They learn to describe things, such as colour, mavi, size, büyük/küçük, and shape, üçgen, and recognise that adjectives come before nouns. They use cardinal numbers such as bir-yüz and ordinal numbers such as birinci, ikinci, and use the ending -ler/-lar to express plurality with countable nouns such as çocuklar, ördekler. They form affirmative and negative responses, such as evet, hayır, değil, doğru, yanlış, and use simple suffixes and subject and possessive pronouns, for example, ben/benim, sen/senin, o/onun and evim/evimiz, evin/eviniz, evi/evleri. They describe actions using simple verbs, such as otur, kalk, elini kaldır, koş, yürü, gel, git, oku, yaz. As children learn to adjust language to suit different purposes and situations, they begin to understand how culture shapes language use. They are supported to talk about differences and similarities they notice between Turkish, English and other languages they know, and also between cultural behaviours and ways of communicating. They talk about how they feel when they use different languages, and how they view different languages and the people who use them. This introduction to the meta- dimension of intercultural learning develops the ability to ‘decentre’, to consider different perspectives and ways of being, and to become aware of themselves as communicators and cultural participants. Level of support Learning is supported via the provision of experiences which are challenging but achievable with appropriate scaffolding and support. This involves modelling, monitoring and moderating by the teacher; provision of multiple and varied sources of input; opportunities for revisiting, recycling and reviewing; and continuous cueing, feedback, response and encouragement. The role of English While learners are encouraged to use Turkish whenever possible, English is used, when appropriate, for discussion, comparison, reflection and explanations. Mixing the two languages is common at this level and reflects children’s experience in their home communities.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate key phrases and points of information in simple texts such as messages, announcements, charts, lists or illustrated reference materials, and use the information to complete guided oral and written tasks

[Key concepts: information, meaning, context; Key processes: identifying, matching, creating]

(ACLTUC004)

  • demonstrating comprehension of individual words, phrases and sentences in simple spoken, written and digital texts, for example, by labelling, drawing, miming or onscreen pointing, clicking or dragging
  • locating specific details about places, events or objects featured in picture books, charts or posters, for example, by responding to questions such as, Masaldaki kişiler kimler? Nerede yaşıyorlar? Neyi kutluyorlar? Bu masal bize ne anlatmak istiyor?
  • matching items from picture dictionaries or word lists to vocabulary sets associated with particular categories, such as people, animals or food groups, for example, meyveler, sebzeler, evcil hayvanlar, çiftlik hayvanları, vahşi hayvanlar
  • collecting information from texts such as charts, calendars, posters, timetables or tuckshop menus to create their own resources, such as lists of favourite lessons, colours, animals or food
  • listening to spoken texts such as class and school announcements or recorded phone messages, identifying key words and facts, such as names, places, numbers or times

Turkish - Turkish Years F–10 Sequence - Foundation to Year 2 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 2, students interact with the teacher and peers to share information about themselves and to exchange greetings, for example, Merhaba! Günaydın! Tünaydın! İyi günler! İyi akşamlar! İyi geceler! Hoşça kal! Güle güle! Hoş geldiniz! Hoş bulduk! They describe familiar objects and experiences that are important to them, for example, Benim bir köpeğim var. Onun adı Minnoş. Benim en sevdiğim oyuncak, Bugün benim doğum günüm, and compare likes and dislikes, for example, Ben çileği çok severim, Ben elmayı hiç sevmem. They use repetitive language when participating in guided activities and use movement, gestures, pictures and objects to support meaning-making, for example, by singing and performing actions to songs such as Mini mini bir kuş donmuştu. They respond to familiar classroom routines, such as the opening and closing of lessons, and transition activities. They interact in classroom routines, by following instructions, for example, Ayağa kalkın! Oturun! Konuşmak için elinizi kaldırın! Sıraya girin! Defterlerinizi açın,Tabletlerinizin ekranını açın, and taking turns. When interacting, they reproduce the sounds of Turkish and use intonation to distinguish between questions, statements and exclamations, for example, G eliyor musun? / Geliyorsun / Gelsene! They locate key words and information in simple spoken and written texts, such as names of people, places, or categories of objects, for example, meyveler, sebzeler, evcil hayvanlar, çiftlik hayvanları, vahşi hayvanlar, and convey factual information about themselves, their family, friends and experiences, using gestures, support materials and simple statements such as Bugün ben en sevdiğim oyuncağı tanıtacağım . They respond to imaginative experiences through singing, drawing, movement and action, and create and perform simple imaginative texts, such as adaptations to Turkish songs, puppet performances and texts such as Keloğlan stories, using familiar language and non-verbal forms of expression. Students use vocabulary related to familiar contexts, for example, anne, kitap, kedi, and cognates, such as ev, okul, aile, hayvanlar. They use simple sentences with appropriate word order to communicate information about themselves. Students translate the meaning of Turkish words, phrases and gestures used in everyday contexts and situations, and create simple print or digital texts that use both Turkish and English. They identify differences in the ways they communicate and behave in Turkish- and English-speaking contexts, and identify themselves as members of different groups, including the Turkish class and their family and community. Students identify the sounds of the Turkish language and Turkish spellings of specific phonemes, for example, /ı/, /ö/, /ü/, /ç/, /ğ/, /ş/. They identify parts of speech and basic rules of word order in simple sentences. They identify similarities and differences in features and structures of different types of familiar texts. They provide examples of different words, expressions and gestures that are used by speakers of Turkish to address and greet people in different contexts and situations. They identify words and expressions that different languages, including Turkish, have borrowed from each other. They identify how ways in which people use language reflect where and how they live and what is important to them.

Turkish - Turkish Years F–10 Sequence Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

The nature of the learners The transition to secondary schooling involves social and academic demands that coincide with a period of maturational and physical change. Learners are adjusting to a new school culture with sharper divisions between curriculum areas. There is a need for continuity through change in relation to their language learning. Learners at this level may find themselves in classes that include learners with a range of previous experience with Turkish language-culture. A multilevel and differentiated approach to teaching and task design responds to this diversity of prior experience. Turkish language learning and use Turkish is used for classroom interactions and transactions, for creating and maintaining classroom relationships, for explaining and practising language forms, and for developing cultural understanding. Additional opportunities for interaction in the target language are provided by purposeful and integrated use of ICT. Learners work collaboratively and independently, exploring different modes and genres of communication with particular reference to their current social, cultural and communicative interests. They pool language knowledge and resources to plan, problem-solve, monitor and reflect. They use modelled and rehearsed language in familiar and unfamiliar contexts, and increasingly generate original and personal language. They compose and present more complex and varied texts, for example, media and hypermedia texts, shared stories, poetry, songs/raps, blogs, advertisements, reports and journal entries, and plan, draft and present imaginative and informative texts. They design interactive events and collaborative tasks and participate in discussions and activities. They use vocabulary and grammar with increasing accuracy, drafting and editing written work to improve structure and clarify meaning. They make cross-curricular connections and explore intercultural perspectives and experience. Contexts of interaction While the primary context of interaction remains the Turkish language classroom, learners are encouraged to engage in interactions with peers in Turkey and other Turkish-speaking regions of the world, including Australia, through electronic means of communication. Learners will have additional occasional access to Turkish speakers through media and community events, websites, social media and radio streaming. Texts and resources Learners work with a range of texts specifically designed for learning Turkish in school, such as textbooks, literary texts, videos, readers and online media resources. They also access materials created for Turkish-speaking communities, such as songs, films, magazines, advertisements and websites. They read, view and interact with a growing range of texts for a wider range of purposes, for example, informational, transactional, communicative, imaginative and expressive. Features of Turkish language use Learners continue to expand their range of vocabulary to domains beyond their personal experience and interests. They use a range of grammatical forms and language structures to convey more complex ideas and experiences, for example, by using reflexive, reciprocal, causative and passive verbal mood suffixes, Ozan yıkandı ve sonra giyindi. (reflexive), Maçtan sonra arkadaşı ile buluştu. (reciprocal), Dün kuaförde saçını kestirdi. (causative), Bugün işten kovuldu. (passive). They recognise and use formal and informal honorific forms, such as Bey/Hanım, Amca/Teyze, Efendi, Ağa/Hanımağa, Sayın, abi/ağabey/abla, hoca/öğretmen, bay/bayan, different types of reduplication for emphasis and more complex conjunctions, such as hem...hem de, ne...ne, - ki,), ancak, yoksa, oysa, hatta, rağmen, yani, --e göre. They use interrogative word endings and interrogative pronouns, such as kim, hangi, ne, kaç, for example, Bu akşam bize kim geliyor? Babam kahveyi yapacak mı? They use different auxiliary verb forms by adding verbs such as etmek, kılmak and olmak to nouns and attaching them onto single-syllable words, for example, reddetmek, affetmek, kaybolmak but yardım etmek, namaz kılmak geç kalmak. Learners develop awareness of how language structures shape textual features. They use descriptive and expressive language, including onomatopoeic and mimetic words to create particular effects and engage interest. They adopt a wider range of processing strategies and broader language knowledge when encountering unfamiliar texts, drawing increasingly on their understanding of text conventions and patterns. Learners make connections between texts and cultural contexts, identifying how cultural values and perspectives are embedded in language and how language choices determine how people, issues and circumstances are represented. They are increasingly aware of the nature of the relationship between languages and cultures, noticing, for example, values such as family commitment and respect expressed in cultural practices as well as embedded in Turkish grammatical and vocabulary systems. They reflect on the nature of bicultural and intercultural experience, on how languages change in response to social and cultural change, and on their individual identities as users of two or more languages in a multicultural social context. Level of support Particular support is required at this stage of learning to manage the transition to secondary schooling and to encourage continued engagement with language learning. Opportunities to review and consolidate prior learning are balanced against provision of engaging and relevant new experiences and more challenging tasks. Learners require continued scaffolding, modelling and material support at paragraph and whole-text level for written language and for developing fluency and accuracy in spoken language. They are supported to develop increasing autonomy as language learners and users, and to self-monitor and adjust language in response to their experience in various contexts. They are encouraged to engage more critically with resources such as websites, dictionaries, translating tools and other language resources designed to enrich their receptive and productive language use. The role of English Turkish is used in more extended and elaborated ways, and English is used when required for comparison or for explanations that are more easily articulated in English. Opportunities to express ideas and feelings, exchange opinions and manage shared learning experiences increasingly involve ‘cultural’ as well as ‘linguistic’ choices, personal and social elements as well as grammatical ones, such as making decisions about the use of titles and polite prefixes. At this stage, learners can move from the what considerations to the why and how questions: from noticing that language and communication are culturally shaped to thinking about the values, experiences and perspectives which lie inside these cultural differences, and about how these impact on their own experience as they move between linguistic and cultural systems.

Content description

Elaborations

Translate andshort texts from Turkish into English and vice versa, comparing versions and considering how to explain elements that involve cultural knowledge or understanding

[Key concepts: meaning, equivalence, culture, translation; Key processes: translating, approximating, explaining, comparing]

(ACLTUC059)

  • identifying language associated with cultural categories such as aile hayatı, kıyafetler or batıl inançlar encountered when translating short texts from Turkish into English, noticing when expressions require explanation as well as translation
  • paraphrasing words or expressions that require cultural knowledge of events such as bayram or personal celebrations, such as sünnet and kına gecesi, noting the dangers of literal translation, for example, çay, kahve alır mısın? instead of çay, kahve içer misin?
  • translating short excerpts of folktales, stories, songs or plays into English, demonstrating how cultural elements cannot be translated literally, for example, the opening rhymes of Bir varmış, bir yokmuş; vocabulary such as Evvel zaman içinde, kalbur saman içinde, pireler berber, develer tellâl iken ben anamın beşiğini tıngır mıngır sallar iken; or the closing ryhmes of stories such as Gökten üç elma düşmüş, biri masalı anlatana, biri dinleyene, biri de bütün iyi insanlara
  • comparing translations of fairytales such as Snow White, Little Red Riding Hood and Cinderella into Turkish, noticing challenges related to the use of tenses, such as -miş’li Geçmiş Zaman, to vocabulary equivalence and to the translation of cultural elements
  • comparing their own translations of short texts with those of their classmates, then comparing both to versions produced by digital or electronic translators, discussing reasons for variations and discrepancies
  • interpreting for a guest speaker to their class or wider school community, explaining cultural references and reflecting on their significance in terms of effective intercultural communication
  • identifying and interpreting examples of colloquialisms, slang and idioms typically used by young people, such as fırça çekmek, tuzlu, kafa ütülemek, cebi delik

Turkish - Turkish Years F–10 Sequence - Years 7 and 8 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 8, students use spoken and written Turkish to initiate and sustain social interactions and to reflect on their experiences. They exchange ideas on topics such as Türkiye’ye ilk ziyaret, Avustralya’ya ilk geliş and offer and justify opinions, for example, Sana katılmıyorum çünkü..., Seninle tamamen aynı fikirdeyim. Students use action-related and spontaneous language to engage in shared activities that involve planning, transacting, negotiating and taking action, for example, Bana göre... Diğeri bence daha uygun, Nasıl bir yol izleyelim? Sen karar ver. They use reflective and evaluative language to support their own and others’ learning, for example, Türkçe öğrenmek İngilizce öğrenmekten daha kolay , Bu sorularda çok zorlandım, Hem tekrar ederek hem yazarak öğreniyorum, and to manage discussion and debate, for example, inanıyorum ki, bana kalsa, anlıyorum ama katılmıyorum, bence, aynı fikirde değilim . When interacting, they apply pronunciation, rhythm and intonation in spoken Turkish to a range of sentence types. Students locate, collate and analyse information from a variety of texts to develop a deep understanding of events, personalities or circumstances. They convey information, ideas and perspectives on issues of interest in different modes of presentation using specialised and less familiar language. They respond to traditional and contemporary imaginative texts by interpreting and comparing how values, characters and events are represented and present, reinterpret or create alternative versions of imaginary texts in different modes. When creating texts, they use a variety of verb tenses and moods, for example, Ozan yıkandı ve sonra giyindi, Maçtan sonra arkadaşı ile buluştu. Dün kuaförde saçını kestirdi, Bugün işten kovuldu ; reduplication, for example, kapkara, upuzun, çirkin mirkin, Selma’yı Melma’yı görmedim; doubling, for example , yavaş yavaş, ikişer ikişer, koşa koşa, ağlaya ağlaya ; auxiliary verbs, for example, reddetmek, affetmek, kaybolmak; particles and honorific forms, for example , Bey/Hanım, Amca/Teyze, Efendi, Ağa/Hanımağa, Sayın, abi/ağabey/abla, hoca/öğretmen, bay/bayan . They translate and interpret texts from Turkish into English and vice versa, compare their versions and explain cultural elements. They produce short multimodal resources in Turkish and English that reflect the bilingual experience. They reflect on their own bilingualism, on the importance of language in intercultural communication and how their own biography contributes to their sense of identity and influences their ways of communicating. Students identify and apply features of the Turkish sound and writing system to convey meaning in a range of texts, including identifying when sound assimilation in spoken Turkish does not exist in the written form, for example, onbaşı/ombaşı, herkes/herkez and eczane/ezzane. They use metalanguage to identify and explain different types of adverbs, adjectives and sentence structures relating to grammatical functions, such as predicates, subjects and objects. They explain how structure and organisation of texts depend on the context, audience and purpose of the exchange, for example, beğenmiyorum, hiç beğenmedim, bana yaramaz or iğrenç bir şey! They identify and explain regional and national variations in language use and how language use also varies according to context, mode of delivery and relationship between participants. They explain how and why their own use of Turkish has changed over time and depends on context. They explain how cultural values, ideas and perspectives are embedded in language use and communication styles.

Work Studies Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The content of this year level is organised into two main interrelated strands: skills for learning and work, and career and life design. Each strand in turn contains three sub-strands outlining the content descriptions and elaborations that contain the knowledge, understanding and skills and form the core content of the curriculum for that year level. In Year 9 students are exposed to concepts and contexts, and focus on familiarising themselves with skills, knowledge and capacities required to build foundations for learning and work in the 21st century. Within this context, students explore their preferences as learners and engage in a range of activities to develop understanding of work, careers and post-school destinations.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify types of workplace communication and the effect of context on the choice of communication (ACWSCL007)

  • contrasting the types of communication used among peers, in the classroom, within schools, across cultures and in workplaces
  • categorising types of communication according to their suitability in work contexts
  • describing the value of cross-cultural communication in 21st century workplaces, both in the context of regional engagement with Asia and reconciliation in Australia

Work Studies - Year 9 Achievement Standard

By the end of Year 9 students understand the importance and components of self-directed and lifelong learning. They investigate the skills and personal qualities associated with a range of occupations and explain the importance of teamwork and collaboration. They identify the types and purposes of communication in workplaces, including social media. Students understand entrepreneurial behaviours and their importance for work and in addressing a range of challenges. They explain the relationships between self-awareness and career planning resources. They investigate the changes occurring in work, workplaces and work-related relationships and the factors contributing to the changes. They identify opportunities associated with these changes. Students identify the contribution of diverse cultures to work and workplaces. They describe formal and informal recruitment processes. Students plan and implement strategies to improve their learning and strengthen their individual learning skills. Students research and analyse information, organise teams, and communicate effectively using appropriate types of communications in a given context. They propose explanations and predict outcomes. Students practise entrepreneurial skills and attributes and propose actions in response to identified work and community challenges. They research and filter relevant career information resources. Students create career scenarios and identify the skills to manage career transitions. Students collect and evaluate data and information to draw conclusions about changes to work arrangements and their potential impact on their future. Students synthesise data and information to form reasoned conclusions. Students present their findings and explanations.

 
Back to top

Your search for 'Gor' returned 52 results within Catholic Perspectives

Civics and Citizenship Year 7  

Year 7 Description

The Year 7 curriculum provides a study of the key features of Australia’s system of government and explores how this system aims to protect all Australians. Students examine the Australian Constitution and how its features, principles and values shape Australia’s democracy. They look at how the rights of individuals are protected through the justice system. Students also explore how Australia’s secular system of government supports a diverse society with shared values. The civics and citizenship content at this year level involves two strands: civics and citizenship knowledge and understanding, and civics and citizenship skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ civics and citizenship knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the followingkey questions: How is Australia’s system of democratic government shaped by the Constitution? What principles of justice help to protect the individual’s rights to justice in Australia’s system of law? How is Australia a diverse society and what factors contribute to a cohesive society?
Catholic Perspectives in civics and citizenship may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings.

Content description

Elaborations

Identify, gather and sort information and ideas from a range of sources (ACHCS055)

  • using a range of sources of information to show religious diversity in Australia, such as articles, graphs, charts and statistics
  • categorising information under headings that are the focus for research

Civics and Citizenship Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The Year 9 curriculum builds students’ understanding of Australia’s political system and how it enables change. Students examine the ways political parties, interest groups, media and individuals influence government and decision making processes. They investigate the features and principles of Australia’s court system, including its role in applying and interpreting Australian law. Students also examine global connectedness and how this is shaping contemporary Australian society. The civics and citizenship content at this year level involves two strands: civics and citizenship knowledge and understanding, and civics and citizenship skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ civics and citizenship knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: What influences shape the operation of Australia's political system? How does Australia's court system work in support of a democratic and just society? How do citizens participate in an interconnected world?
Catholic Perspectives in civics and citizenship may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1).

Content description

Elaborations

Identify, gather and sort information and ideas from a range of sources and reference as appropriate (ACHCS083)

  • developing categories for sorting information from surveys about people’s views on political or legal issues
  • identifying why some information has greater accuracy and reliability than other information

Content description

Elaborations

The key features of Australia’s court system and how courts apply and interpret the law, resolve disputes and makethrough judgements (ACHCK077)

  • creating a visual representation of the court jurisdictions in Australia
  • categorising sample cases in relation to the courts in which they would be heard (for example, cases from criminal, consumer, family, human rights and environmental law)
  • describing the role of a particular court (for example, a supreme court, a magistrates court or the Family Court of Australia)
  • exploring how court judgements impact on the development of law (for example, the role of precedents)

Civics and Citizenship Year 10  

Year 10 Description

The Year 10 curriculum develops student understanding of Australia’s system of government through comparison with another system of government in the Asian region. Students examine Australia’s roles and responsibilities within the international context, such as its involvement with the United Nations. Students also study the purpose and work of the High Court. They investigate the values and practices that enable a democratic society to be sustained. The civics and citizenship content at this year level involves two strands: civics and citizenship knowledge and understanding, and civics and citizenship skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ civics and citizenship knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: How is Australia’s democracy defined and shaped by the global context? How are government policies shaped by Australia’s international legal obligations? What are the features of a resilient democracy?
Catholic Perspectives in civics and citizenship may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1).

Content description

Elaborations

The key features and values of Australia’s system of government compared with at least ONE other system of government in the Asia region (ACHCK090)

  • categorising the key features of Australia’s system of government (for example, democratic elections and the separation of powers) and comparing and contrasting these to the key features found in another country in the Asia region, such as Japan, India or Indonesia
  • interviewing people with connections to a country in the Asia region to compare the values they associate with the system of government in that country with those of Australia

Dance Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

In Years 3 and 4, learning in The Arts builds on the experience of the previous band. It involves students making and responding to artworks independently and collaboratively with their classmates and teachers. As they experience The Arts, students draw on artworks from a range of cultures, times and locations. They explore the arts of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples and of the Asia region and learn that they are used for different purposes. While the arts in the local community should be the initial focus for learning, students are also aware of and interested in the arts from more distant locations and the curriculum provides opportunities to build on this curiosity. As they make and respond to artworks, students explore meaning and interpretation, elements and forms, and social and cultural contexts of the arts. They make personal evaluations of their own and others’ artworks, making connections between their own artistic intentions and those of other artists. Students continue to learn about safe practices in the arts and in their interactions with other artists. Their understanding of the role of the artist and the audience builds on their experience from the previous band. As an audience, students focus their attention on the artwork and respond to it. They consider why and how audiences respond to artworks. In Years 3 and 4, students’ awareness of themselves and others as audiences is extended beyond the classroom to the broader school context. In Dance, students: extend their awareness of the body as they incorporate actions using different body parts, body zones and bases explore and experiment with directions, time, dynamics and relationships using groupings, objects and props extend their fundamental movement skills by adding and combining more complex movements use technical skills including accuracy and awareness of body alignment explore meaning and interpretation, elements and forms including shapes and sequences of dances as they make and respond to dance use expressive skills including projection and focus when performing dance for themselves and others.
Students participate in Arts learning from a Catholic Perspective when they engage as both artist and audience with religious artworks from a range of cultures, times and locations including the local community.As students make and respond to the arts, they use viewpoints, including religious viewpoints, to explore meaning and interpretation.In Dance, students: • explore meaning and interpretation, elements and forms including shapes and sequences as they make and respond to dance including movement as a form to communicate faith, beliefs and religious story. 

Content description

Elaborations

Perform dances usingto communicate ideas, including telling cultural or community stories (ACADAM007)

  • using expressive skills of projection and focus to communicate dance ideas to an audience (school assembly, community festival, etc.); for example, looking out and up to the ceiling and extending movements outwards to express a feeling of joy
  • exploring the elements of dance to communicate ideas clearly, such as telling cultural stories in a dance with or without music; for example, travelling lightly using hands and feet to represent a bilby, or skipping vigorously and at a high level to express joy, or rolling softly on the floor using different body shapes to represent shells washed by the sea
  • Considering viewpoints – meanings and interpretations: For example – Is there a story in the dance? How are you using grouping or pathways to communicate ideas or intentions in your dance?
  • rehearsing and presenting an appropriate dance to celebrate and appreciate diversity of cultures, based on research into dance tradition, in the school or at a local community event
  • presenting their dance using internet-based technologies
  • respecting other students’ dancing when dancing and being an attentive audience member

Design and Technologies Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

Learning in Design and Technologies builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in the Early Years Learning Framework, revisiting, strengthening and extending these as needed. By the end of Year 2 students will have had the opportunity to create designed solutions at least once in each of the following technologies contexts: Engineering principles and systems; Food and fibre production and Food specialisations; and Materials and technologies specialisations. Students should have opportunities to experience designing and producing products, services and environments. This may occur through integrated learning. In Foundation to Year 2 students explore and investigate technologies - materials, systems, components, tools and equipment - including their purpose and how they meet personal and social needs within local settings. Students develop an understanding of how society and environmental sustainability factors influence design and technologies decisions. Students evaluate designed solutions using questions such as ‘How does it work?’, ‘What purpose does it meet?’, ‘Who will use it?’, ‘What do I like about it?’ or ‘How can it be improved?’ They begin to consider the impact of their decisions and of technologies on others and the environment including in relation to preferred futures. They reflect on their participation in a design process. This involves students developing new perspectives, and engaging in different forms of evaluating and critiquing products, services and environments based on personal preferences. Using a range of technologies including a variety of graphical representation techniques to communicate, students draw, model and explain design ideas; label drawings; draw objects as two-dimensional images from different views; draw products and simple environments and verbalise design ideas. They plan (with teacher support) simple steps and follow directions to complete their own or group design ideas or projects, and manage their own role within team projects. Students are aware of others around them and the need to work safely and collaboratively when making designed solutions
A Catholic Perspective emphasizes the importance of, and the needs of families, places and the environment. Students consider the concept of stewardship of God's creation as they explore and investigate technologies that meet the needs of the Common Good with an early understanding of a preferred future for God's Creation.

Content description

Elaborations

Explore how plants and animals are grown for food, clothing and shelter and how food is selected and prepared for (ACTDEK003)

  • exploring which plants and animals can provide food or materials for clothing and shelter and what basic needs those plants and animals have
  • identifying products that can be designed and produced from plants and animals, for example food products, paper and wood products, fabrics and yarns, and fertilisers
  • considering the suitability of a range of tools when cultivating gardens, mulching and building garden structures and preparing and cooking food from recipes
  • identifying and categorising a wide range of foods, including Aboriginal bush foods, into food groups and describing tools and equipment needed to prepare these for healthy eating
  • exploring how people from different cultures including those of Asia design and produce different cuisines based on the plants and animals in their region and available tools and equipment
  • exploring the tools, equipment and techniques used to prepare food safely and hygienically for healthy eating

Digital Technologies Foundation to Year 2  

Foundation to Year 2 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in the Early Years Learning Framework. It focuses on developing foundational skills in computational thinking and an awareness of personal experiences using digital systems. By the end of Year 2, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions through guided play and integrated learning, such as using robotic toys to navigate a map or recording science data with software applications. In Foundation – Year 2, students begin to learn about common digital systems and patterns that exist within data they collect. Students organise, manipulate and present this data, including numerical, categorical, text, image, audio and video data, in creative ways to create meaning. Students use the concept of abstraction when defining problems, to identify the most important information, such as the significant steps involved in making a sandwich. They begin to develop their design skills by conceptualising algorithms as a sequence of steps for carrying out instructions, such as identifying steps in a process or controlling robotic devices. Students describe how information systems meet information, communication and/or recreational needs. Through discussion with teachers, students learn to apply safe and ethical practices to protect themselves and others as they interact online for learning and communicating.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Follow, describe and represent a sequence of steps and decisions (algorithms) needed to solve simple problems (ACTDIP004)

  • experimenting with very simple, step-by-step procedures to explore programmable devices, for example providing instructions to physical or virtual objects or robotic devices to move in an intended manner, such as following a path around the classroom
  • writing and entering a simple set of instructions jointly to sequence events and instructions, for example scanning personal photographs and collating and ordering significant personal events or milestones and describing the steps involved in the process
  • presenting a sequence of instructions or events in a series of slides or screens with text and pictures
  • recognising sequences of instructions or events that are commonly experienced such as the sequence of traffic lights or instructions for recording a TV show or how their lunch order is taken and delivered
  • following a series of instructions to use a piece of hardware or software, for example taking a photograph, editing and storing it to include in a slow motion

Content description

Elaborations

Collect, explore and sort data, and use digital systems to present thecreatively (ACTDIP003)

  • collecting, and sorting data through play, for example collecting data about favourite toys and sorting them into categories such as toys they like or dislike
  • locating and purposefully using visual or text data, for example searching through a digital photo library to select an image, taking into account cultural considerations such as awareness of appropriate use of images and audio recordings of deceased persons
  • exploring, imagining and comparing the usefulness of different data displays, for example jointly creating simple column graphs and picture graphs to represent different types of items
  • exploring and creating graphs to represent classroom data, for example collecting data on the country of birth of each student and presenting the results as a picture graph
  • using digital systems to organise data to improve meaning, for example using word processing software to create a list of tasks or visualisation software to create a mind map (diagram) showing relationships between characters in a story
  • using common software to present data creatively, for example as a slideshow, movie, sounds, image, chart, word art, poster or drawing

Digital Technologies Years 3 and 4  

Years 3 and 4 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking, such as categorising and outlining procedures; and developing an increasing awareness of how digital systems are used and could be used at home, in school and the local community. By the end of Year 4, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions, such as interactive adventures that involve user choice, modelling simplified real world systems and simple guessing games. In Year 3 and 4, students explore digital systems in terms of their components, and peripheral devices such as digital microscopes, cameras and interactive whiteboards. They collect, manipulate and interpret data, developing an understanding of the characteristics of data and their representation. Using the concept of abstraction, students define simple problems using techniques such as summarising facts to deduce conclusions. They record simple solutions to problems through text and diagrams and develop their designing skills from initially following prepared algorithms to describing their own that support branching (choice of options) and user input. Their solutions are implemented using appropriate software including visual programming languages that use graphical elements rather than text instructions. They explain, in general terms, how their solutions meet specific needs and consider how society may use digital systems to meet needs in environmentally sustainable ways. With teacher guidance, students identify and list the major steps needed to complete a task or project. When sharing ideas and communicating in online environments they develop an understanding of why it is important to consider the feelings of their audiences and apply safe practices and social protocols agreed by the class that demonstrate respectful behaviour.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Define simple problems, and describe and follow a sequence of steps and decisions (algorithms) needed to solve them (ACTDIP010)

  • explaining what the problem is and some features of the problem, such as what need is associated with the problem, who has the problem and why
  • describing, using drawings, pictures and text, the sequence of steps and decisions in a solution, for example to show the order of events in a game and the decisions that a player must make
  • experimenting with different ways of describing a set of instructions, for example writing two versions of the same simple set of instructions for a programmable robotic device
  • explaining to others how to follow technical instructions, for example how to capture and download images from a mobile device
  • defining and describing the sequence of steps needed to incorporate multiple types of data in a solution, for example sequencing the steps in selecting and downloading images and audio to create a book trailer

Content description

Elaborations

Implement simple digital solutions as visual programs with algorithms involving(decisions) and user (ACTDIP011)

  • designing and implementing a simple interactive digital solution using a visual programming language, for example preparing the content and design of a simple guessing game that provides options in English and an Asian language
  • using different design tools to record ways in which digital solutions will be developed, for example creating storyboards or flowcharts to record relationships or instructions about content or processes
  • exploring common elements of standard user interfaces that are familiar and appeal to users, for example navigation links on the left and top of web pages to help users interact with the site
  • implementing programs that make decisions on the basis of user input or choices such as through selecting a button, pushing a key or moving a mouse to ‘branch’ to a different segment of the solution
  • creating options for users to make choices in solutions, for example a user input and branching mechanism such as buttons in a slideshow

Content description

Elaborations

Collect, access and present different types ofusing simple software to create information and solve problems (ACTDIP009)

  • selecting appropriate formats or layout styles to present data as information depending on the type of data and the audience, for example lists, tables, graphs, animations, info graphics and presentations
  • using different techniques to present data as information, for example creating a column chart in a spreadsheet by colouring cells to represent different items
  • improving the appearance and usability of data, for example using colour, headings and labelling of images to organise and accurately identify data
  • using software to sort and calculate data when solving problems, for example sorting numerical and categorical data in ascending or descending order and automating simple arithmetic calculations using nearby cells and summing cell ranges in spreadsheet or database software
  • exploring different online sources to access data, for example using online query interfaces to select and retrieve data from an online database such as a library catalogue or weather records
  • recognising that all types of data are stored in digital systems and may be represented in different ways such as files and folders with names and icons

Digital Technologies Years 5 and 6  

Years 5 and 6 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking such as identifying similarities in different problems and describing smaller components of complex systems. It also focuses on the sustainability of information systems for current and future uses. By the end of Year 6, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions, such as games or quizzes and interactive stories and animations. In Year 5 and 6, students develop an understanding of the role individual components of digital systems play in the processing and representation of data. They acquire, validate, interpret, track and manage various types of data and are introduced to the concept of data states in digital systems and how data are transferred between systems. They learn to further develop abstractions by identifying common elements across similar problems and systems and develop an understanding of the relationship between models and the real-world systems they represent. When creating solutions, students define problems clearly by identifying appropriate data and requirements. When designing, they consider how users will interact with the solutions, and check and validate their designs to increase the likelihood of creating working solutions. Students increase the sophistication of their algorithms by identifying repetition and incorporate repeat instructions or structures when implementing their solutions through visual programming, such as reading user input until an answer is guessed correctly in a quiz. They evaluate their solutions and examine the sustainability of their own and existing information systems. Students progress from managing the creation of their own ideas and information for sharing to working collaboratively. In doing so, they learn to negotiate and develop plans to complete tasks. When engaging with others, they take personal and physical safety into account, applying social and ethical protocols that acknowledge factors such as social differences and privacy of personal information. They also develop their skills in applying technical protocols such as devising file naming conventions that are meaningful and determining safe storage locations to protect data and information.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Design, modify and follow simple algorithms involving sequences of steps, branching, and(repetition) (ACTDIP019)

  • following a diagram of a simple method of sorting numbers or words
  • following, modifying and describing the design of a game involving simple algorithms represented diagrammatically or in English, for example creating a flowchart with software that uses symbols to show decisions, processes and inputs and outputs
  • experimenting with different ways of representing an instruction to make a choice, for example branches in a tree diagram or using an ‘IF’ statement (a common statement used to branch) to indicate making a choice between two different circumstances using a spreadsheet or a visual program
  • experimenting with different ways of representing an instruction to make a repetition, for example loops in a flowchart diagram or using a ‘REPEAT’ statement
  • designing the instructions for a robot, for example a robot vacuum cleaner to clean a room
  • using different design tools to record ways in which digital solutions will be developed, for example creating storyboards or flowcharts to record relationships or instructions about content or processes

Digital Technologies Years 7 and 8  

Years 7 and 8 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking such as decomposing problems and prototyping; and engaging students with a wider range of information systems as they broaden their experiences and involvement in national, regional and global activities. By the end of Year 8, students will have had opportunities to create a range of digital solutions, such as interactive web applications or programmable multimedia assets or simulations of relationships between objects in the real world. In Year 7 and 8, students analyse the properties of networked systems and their suitability and use for the transmission of data types. They acquire, analyse, validate and evaluate various types of data, and appreciate the complexities of storing and transmitting that data in digital systems. Students use structured data to model objects and events that shape the communities they actively engage with. They further develop their understanding of the vital role that data plays in their lives, and how the data and related systems define and are limited by technical, environmental, economic and social constraints. They further develop abstractions by identifying common elements while decomposing apparently different problems and systems to define requirements, and recognise that abstractions hide irrelevant details for particular purposes. When defining problems, students identify the key elements of the problems and the factors and constraints at play. They design increasingly complex algorithms that allow data to be manipulated automatically, and explore different ways of showing the relationship between data elements to help computation, such as using pivot tables, graphs and clearly defined mark-up or rules. They progress from designing the user interface to considering user experience factors such as user expertise, accessibility and usability requirements. They broaden their programming experiences to include general-purpose programming languages, and incorporate subprograms into their solutions. They predict and evaluate their developed and existing solutions, considering time, tasks, data and the safe and sustainable use of information systems, and anticipate any risks associated with the use or adoption of such systems. Students plan and manage individual and team projects with some autonomy. They consider ways of managing the exchange of ideas, tasks and files, and techniques for monitoring progress and feedback. When communicating and collaborating online, students develop an understanding of different social contexts, for example acknowledging cultural practices and meeting legal obligations.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Design algorithms represented diagrammatically and in English, and trace algorithms to predictfor a givenand to identify errors (ACTDIP029)

  • investigating and designing some common algorithms, such as to search, sequence, sort, merge, control data structures
  • checking the accuracy of an algorithm before it is implemented, for example desk checking it with test data to see if the instructions produce the expected results
  • using diagrams to describe key decisions, for example creating flowcharts using digital systems to describe a set of computational instructions
  • using structured English to express algorithmic instructions, for example using conventional statements such as ‘while’ and ‘endwhile’ in a ‘while loop’ when describing interactive instruction

Content description

Elaborations

Analyse and visualiseusing a range of software to create information, and use structuredtoobjects or events (ACTDIP026)

  • using features and functions of software to summarise data to create information, for example calculating a simple budget of income and payments and creating a summary table for analysis
  • visualising data to create information, for example identify trends and outlier data from spreadsheets using plots, or displaying geocoded data on a map
  • applying a set of conditions to a spreadsheet to organise and filter data, for example using conditional formatting to highlight the state of particular cells, and filtering and sorting categorical data using column filters
  • querying an existing database to extract data for analysis, for example devising multiple selection criteria or using simple structured query language (SQL) SELECT statements to select records and retrieve specified fields
  • describing the attributes of complex objects, for example defining the records, fields, formats and relationships of a simple dataset
  • modelling the attributes of real-world objects for a computer game

Content description

Elaborations

Implement and modify programs with user interfaces involving branching,and functions in a general-purpose programming language (ACTDIP030)

  • developing and modifying digital solutions by implementing instructions contained in algorithms through programs
  • developing a digital game that manipulates models of real-world objects
  • programming a robot to recognise particular objects and to treat them differently, for example choose objects based on colour
  • creating digital solutions that provide user navigation and prompts with controlled repetitions, for example an information kiosk that has layers of buttons and prompts the user three times before returning to the beginning

Digital Technologies Years 9 and 10  

Years 9 and 10 Description

Learning in Digital Technologies focuses on further developing understanding and skills in computational thinking such as precisely and accurately describing problems and the use of modular approaches to solutions. It also focuses on engaging students with specialised learning in preparation for vocational training or learning in the senior secondary years. By the end of Year 10, students will have had opportunities to analyse problems and design, implement and evaluate a range of digital solutions, such as database-driven websites and artificial intelligence engines and simulations. In Year 9 and 10, students consider how human interaction with networked systems introduces complexities surrounding access to, and the security and privacy of, data of various types. They interrogate security practices and techniques used to compress data, and learn about the importance of separating content, presentation and behavioural elements for data integrity and maintenance purposes. Students explore how bias can impact the results and value of data collection methods and they use structured data to analyse, visualise, model and evaluate objects and events. They learn how to develop multilevel abstractions, identify standard elements such as searching and sorting in algorithms, and explore the trade-offs between the simplicity of a model and the faithfulness of its representation. When defining problems students consider the functional and non-functional requirements of a solution through interacting with clients and regularly reviewing processes. They consolidate their algorithmic design skills to incorporate testing and review, and further develop their understanding of the user experience to incorporate a wider variety of user needs. Students develop modular solutions to complex problems using an object-oriented programming language where appropriate, and evaluate their solutions and existing information systems based on a broad set of criteria including connections to existing policies and their enterprise potential. They consider the privacy and security implications of how data are used and controlled, and suggest how policies and practices can be improved to ensure the sustainability and safety of information systems. Students progressively become more skilled at identifying the steps involved in planning solutions and developing detailed plans that are mindful of risks and sustainability requirements. When creating solutions, both individually and collaboratively, students comply with legal obligations, particularly with respect to the ownership of information, and when creating interactive solutions for sharing in online environments.
Science, Technologies, Engineering and Mathematics (STEM) touch every aspect of our world, and the innovations that emerge from these fields underpin the global community. Embedding Catholic perspectives in the teaching and learning of Technologies is grounded in the belief that each learner’s knowledge, deep understanding, skills and values about justice, peace and ecological stewardship are developed across the curriculum.Christian Anthropology identifies the human person as a co-creator with God reflected in STEM as characterised by creative responses to complex problems; collaborative and relational approaches to learning and positive action for, and in, the broader community. Catholic Epistemology orientates scientific learning and teaching towards practical scientific and technological knowledge that is ethical connecting faith and life, life and culture.Catholic View of Cosmology emphasises stewardship and sacramentality and requires learners to take responsibility to cultivate creative solutions to complex problems of life and living.  When embedding Catholic Perspectives in the Technologies curriculum teachers look for the most appropriate and powerful opportunity that develops a natural understanding of the connection between Technologies and Catholic teaching.  On 18th November 2017, Pope Francis received the participants in the Plenary of the Pontifical Council for Culture, dedicated to the theme “The future of humanity: new challenges to anthropology”.Pope Francis: Science and technology have helped us further the boundaries of knowledge of nature and, in particular, of the human being. But they alone are not enough to provide all the answers. Today, we increasingly realize that it is necessary to draw on the treasures of wisdom preserved in religious traditions, popular wisdom, literature and the arts, which touch the depths of the mystery of human existence, not forgetting, but rather rediscovering those contained in philosophy and in theology.

Content description

Elaborations

Design algorithms represented diagrammatically and inand validate algorithms and programs through tracing and test cases (ACTDIP040)

  • designing algorithms to solve real-world problems and describing algorithms using flow charts and structured English, for example START, END, IF and UNTIL
  • recognising that different algorithms can solve a problem with different trade-offs
  • tracing algorithms to predict results and program state for a given input, for example desk checking or using an interactive debugging tool
  • using tracing techniques to test algorithms, for example desk checking an algorithm for a given input by stepping through the algorithm while keeping track of contents of the variables
  • developing test cases that correspond to the requirements of the specifications, for example validating program behaviour on a range of valid and invalid user input

Content description

Elaborations

Implement modular programs, applying selected algorithms andstructures including using an object-oriented programming language (ACTDIP041)

  • coding separate modules that perform discrete functions but collectively meet the needs of the solution
  • defining classes that represent the attributes and behaviour of objects in the real world or in a game
  • considering different algorithms and selecting the most appropriate based on the type of problem, for example choosing appropriate algorithms for particular problems
  • selecting different types of data structures such as an array, record and object to model structured data

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate the role of hardware and software in managing, controlling and securing the movement of and access toin networked digital systems (ACTDIK034)

  • explaining how an operating system manages the relationship between hardware, applications and system software
  • comparing the similarities and differences of two common operating systems
  • identifying how changes to the configuration of an operating system change the operation of hardware and software components in a networked digital system
  • explaining the role of hardware and software components in allowing people to interact with digital systems, for example using a mouse or touch pad or screen, speech, accelerometer
  • investigating the operation and use of robotic process control systems
  • explaining encryption of data as a means of protecting data, for example secret keys and ‘exclusive or’ (XOR) and hashing algorithms to digitally sign data

Economics and Business Year 8  

Year 8 Description

The Year 8 curriculum gives students the opportunity to further develop their understanding of economics and business concepts by exploring the ways markets – including traditional Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander markets – work within Australia, the participants in the market system and the ways they may influence the market’s operation. The rights, responsibilities and opportunities that arise for businesses, consumers and governments are considered along with the influences on the ways individuals work now and into the future. The emphasis in Year 8 is on national and regional issues, with opportunities for the concepts to also be considered in relation to local community or global issues where appropriate. The economics and business content at this year level involves two strands: economics and business knowledge and understanding, and economics and business skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Students are expected to be taught the content through contemporary issues, events and/or case studies. Teachers will design programs that cover appropriate contexts and meet the needs of their students. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ economics and business knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: Why are markets needed, and why are governments involved? Why do consumers and businesses have both rights and responsibilities? What may affect the ways people work now and in the future? How do different businesses respond to opportunities in the market?
Catholic Perspectives in business and economics may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1), in particular economic justice, option for the poor and common good.

Content description

Elaborations

Gather relevant data and information from a range of digital, online and print sources (ACHES033)

  • organising and categorising data and/or information (for example, constructing a table showing the differences between types of businesses)
  • accessing reliable information (for example, from departments of fair trading) to access advice on the rights and responsibilities of consumers and businesses, or finding information on strategies to resolve consumer and business disputes

Economics and Business Year 10  

Year 10 Description

The Year 10 curriculum gives students the opportunity to further develop their understanding of economics and business concepts by considering Australia’s economic performance and standard of living. The ways governments manage economic performance to improve living standards is explored, along with the reasons why economic performance and living standards differ within and between economies. Students explore the nature of externalities and why the government intervenes to ensure that prices reflect the depletion of resources or costs to society. Students examine the consequences of decisions and the responses of business to changing economic conditions, including the way they manage their workforce. The economics and business content at this year level involves two strands: economics and business knowledge and understanding, and economics and business skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Students are expected to be taught the content through contemporary issues, events and/or case studies. Teachers will design programs that cover different contexts (personal, local, national, regional, global) and meet the needs of their students. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ economics and business knowledge, understanding and skills at this year level is provided by the following key questions: How is the performance of an economy measured? Why do variations in economic performance in different economies exist? What strategies do governments use to manage economic performance? How do governments, businesses and individuals respond to changing economic conditions?
Catholic Perspectives in business and economics may be explored predominantly through the application of Catholic Social Teachings (1), in particular economic justice, option for the poor and common good.

Content description

Elaborations

Analyse data and information in different formats to explain cause-and-effect relationships, make predictions and illustrate alternative perspectives (ACHES057)

  • categorising and interpreting data and information collected into a form that shows multiple perspectives around an issue/event
  • interpreting a range of measures of economic performance and standards of living to identify differences within and between economies
  • explaining relationships identified in data (for example, the relationship between standards of living, infant mortality and access to health services)
  • analysing information to make informed choices (for example, when purchasing goods and services)

English Year 4  

Year 4 Description

The English curriculum is built around the three interrelated strands of language, literature and literacy. Teaching and learning programs should balance and integrate all three strands. Together, the strands focus on developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills in listening, reading, viewing, speaking, writing and creating. Learning in English builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in earlier years, and teachers will revisit and strengthen these as needed. In Years 3 and 4, students experience learning in familiar contexts and a range of contexts that relate to study in other areas of the curriculum. They interact with peers and teachers from other classes and schools in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments. Students engage with a variety of texts for enjoyment. They listen to, read, view and interpret spoken, written and multimodal texts in which the primary purpose is aesthetic, as well as texts designed to inform and persuade. These encompass traditional oral texts including Aboriginal stories, picture books, various types of print and digital texts, simple chapter books, rhyming verse, poetry, non-fiction, film, multimodal texts, dramatic performances and texts used by students as models for constructing their own work. The range of literary texts for Foundation to Year 10 comprises Australian literature, including the oral narrative traditions of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, as well as the contemporary literature of these two cultural groups, and classic and contemporary world literature, including texts from and about Asia. Literary texts that support and extend students in Years 3 and 4 as independent readers describe complex sequences of events that extend over several pages and involve unusual happenings within a framework of familiar experiences. Informative texts include content of increasing complexity and technicality about topics of interest and topics being studied in other areas of the curriculum. These texts use complex language features, including varied sentence structures, some unfamiliar vocabulary, a significant number of high-frequency sight words and words that need to be decoded phonically, and a variety of punctuation conventions, as well as illustrations and diagrams that support and extend the printed text. Students create a range of imaginative, informative and persuasive types of texts including narratives, procedures, performances, reports, reviews, poetry and expositions.
When planning for learning in Prep - Year 10 English Catholic perspectives include: Human dignityChoicesHumans are sacred and socialGenuine belongingSelecting literature in a Catholic, Christian schooling contextIt is through the study of English that individuals learn to analyse, understand, communicate and build relationships with others and with the world around them.Exploration of Catholic perspectives in the area of English identifies the value of each person created in the image and likeness of God. Respectful interactions are encouraged so that everyone is enabled to flourish.This would be explored as students communicate with a range of familiar and unfamiliar audiences in face to face and online environments.  Engagement with the traditions and contemporary perspectives of Aboriginal and Torres strait islander people, and Asian cultures should be interwoven with a Catholic perspective. How we respond to the objective dimensions of our identity arises from our relationships with God and the world; with others, institutions, and history. Catholic perspectives would be further explored through engaging with the English purposes of enriching the lives of students, developing a sense of English and its richness and power to evoke feelings, conveying information, forming ideas, facilitating interaction with others, entertaining, persuading and arguing. Thoughtful engagement with the selection of literature and resources should support critical analysis of contemporary culture and a synthesis of faith and life in the context of gospel values and Church teachings.  Literature and resources used should aim to challenge students to think, to feel, to value and to act in accordance with Gospel values and should not shy away from an ethical dimension and the promotion of a critical response to dilemmas.  

Content description

Elaborations

Make connections between the ways different authors may represent similar storylines, ideas and relationships (ACELT1602)

  • commenting on how authors have established setting and period in different cultures and times and the relevance of characters, actions and beliefs to their own time
  • comparing different authors’ treatment of similar themes and text patterns, for example comparing fables and allegories from different cultures and quest novels by different authors

English Year 5  

Year 5 Description

The English curriculum is built around the three interrelated strands of language, literature and literacy. Teaching and learning programs should balance and integrate all three strands. Together, the strands focus on developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills in listening, reading, viewing, speaking, writing and creating. Learning in English builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in earlier years, and teachers will revisit and strengthen these as needed. In Years 5 and 6, students communicate with peers and teachers from other classes and schools, community members, and individuals and groups, in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments. Students engage with a variety of texts for enjoyment. They listen to, read, view, interpret and evaluate spoken, written and multimodal texts in which the primary purpose is aesthetic, as well as texts designed to inform and persuade. These include various types of media texts including newspapers, film and digital texts, junior and early adolescent novels, poetry, non-fiction and dramatic performances. The range of literary texts for Foundation to Year 10 comprises Australian literature, including the oral narrative traditions of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, as well as the contemporary literature of these two cultural groups, and classic and contemporary world literature, including texts from and about Asia. Literary texts that support and extend students in Years 5 and 6 as independent readers describe complex sequences, a range of non-stereotypical characters and elaborated events including flashbacks and shifts in time. These texts explore themes of interpersonal relationships and ethical dilemmas within real-world and fantasy settings. Informative texts supply technical and content information about a wide range of topics of interest as well as topics being studied in other areas of the curriculum. Text structures include chapters, headings and subheadings, tables of contents, indexes and glossaries. Language features include complex sentences, unfamiliar technical vocabulary, figurative language, and information presented in various types of graphics. Students create a range of imaginative, informative and persuasive types of texts including narratives, procedures, performances, reports, reviews, explanations and discussions.
When planning for learning in Prep - Year 10 English Catholic perspectives include: Human dignityChoicesHumans are sacred and socialGenuine belongingSelecting literature in a Catholic, Christian schooling contextIt is through the study of English that individuals learn to analyse, understand, communicate and build relationships with others and with the world around them.Exploration of Catholic perspectives in the area of English identifies the value of each person created in the image and likeness of God. Respectful interactions are encouraged so that everyone is enabled to flourish.This would be explored as students communicate with a range of familiar and unfamiliar audiences in face to face and online environments.  Engagement with the traditions and contemporary perspectives of Aboriginal and Torres strait islander people, and Asian cultures should be interwoven with a Catholic perspective. How we respond to the objective dimensions of our identity arises from our relationships with God and the world; with others, institutions, and history. Catholic perspectives would be further explored through engaging with the English purposes of enriching the lives of students, developing a sense of English and its richness and power to evoke feelings, conveying information, forming ideas, facilitating interaction with others, entertaining, persuading and arguing. Thoughtful engagement with the selection of literature and resources should support critical analysis of contemporary culture and a synthesis of faith and life in the context of gospel values and Church teachings.  Literature and resources used should aim to challenge students to think, to feel, to value and to act in accordance with Gospel values and should not shy away from an ethical dimension and the promotion of a critical response to dilemmas.  

Content description

Elaborations

Understand how the grammatical category of possessives is signalled through apostrophes and how to use apostrophes with common and proper nouns (ACELA1506)

  • learning that in Standard Australian English regular plural nouns ending in ‘s’ form the possessive by adding just the apostrophe, for example ‘my parents' car’
  • learning that in Standard Australian English for proper nouns the regular possessive form is always possible but a variant form without the second ‘s’ is sometimes found, for example ‘James’s house’ or ‘James’ house’

English Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The English curriculum is built around the three interrelated strands of language, literature and literacy. Teaching and learning programs should balance and integrate all three strands. Together, the strands focus on developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills in listening, reading, viewing, speaking, writing and creating. Learning in English builds on concepts, skills and processes developed in earlier years, and teachers will revisit and strengthen these as needed. In Years 9 and 10, students interact with peers, teachers, individuals, groups and community members in a range of face-to-face and online/virtual environments. They experience learning in familiar and unfamiliar contexts, including local community, vocational and global contexts. Students engage with a variety of texts for enjoyment. They interpret, create, evaluate, discuss and perform a wide range of literary texts in which the primary purpose is aesthetic, as well as texts designed to inform and persuade. These include various types of media texts, including newspapers, film and digital texts, fiction, non-fiction, poetry, dramatic performances and multimodal texts, with themes and issues involving levels of abstraction, higher order reasoning and intertextual references. Students develop a critical understanding of the contemporary media and the differences between media texts. The range of literary texts for Foundation to Year 10 comprises Australian literature, including the oral narrative traditions of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, as well as the contemporary literature of these two cultural groups, and classic and contemporary world literature, including texts from and about Asia. Literary texts that support and extend students in Years 9 and 10 as independent readers are drawn from a range of genres and involve complex, challenging and unpredictable plot sequences and hybrid structures that may serve multiple purposes. These texts explore themes of human experience and cultural significance, interpersonal relationships, and ethical and global dilemmas within real-world and fictional settings and represent a variety of perspectives. Informative texts represent a synthesis of technical and abstract information (from credible/verifiable sources) about a wide range of specialised topics. Text structures are more complex and include chapters, headings and subheadings, tables of contents, indexes and glossaries. Language features include successive complex sentences with embedded clauses, a high proportion of unfamiliar and technical vocabulary, figurative and rhetorical language, and dense information supported by various types of graphics presented in visual form. Students create a range of imaginative, informative and persuasive types of texts including narratives, procedures, performances, reports, discussions, literary analyses, transformations of texts and reviews.
When planning for learning in Prep - Year 10 English Catholic perspectives include: Human dignityChoicesHumans are sacred and socialGenuine belongingSelecting literature in a Catholic, Christian schooling contextIt is through the study of English that individuals learn to analyse, understand, communicate and build relationships with others and with the world around them.Exploration of Catholic perspectives in the area of English identifies the value of each person created in the image and likeness of God. Respectful interactions are encouraged so that everyone is enabled to flourish.This would be explored as students communicate with a range of familiar and unfamiliar audiences in face to face and online environments.  Engagement with the traditions and contemporary perspectives of Aboriginal and Torres strait islander people, and Asian cultures should be interwoven with a Catholic perspective. How we respond to the objective dimensions of our identity arises from our relationships with God and the world; with others, institutions, and history. Catholic perspectives would be further explored through engaging with the English purposes of enriching the lives of students, developing a sense of English and its richness and power to evoke feelings, conveying information, forming ideas, facilitating interaction with others, entertaining, persuading and arguing. Thoughtful engagement with the selection of literature and resources should support critical analysis of contemporary culture and a synthesis of faith and life in the context of gospel values and Church teachings.  Literature and resources used should aim to challenge students to think, to feel, to value and to act in accordance with Gospel values and should not shy away from an ethical dimension and the promotion of a critical response to dilemmas.  

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate and experiment with the use and effect of extended metaphor, metonymy, allegory, icons, myths and symbolism in texts, for example poetry, short films, graphic novels, and plays on similar themes (ACELT1637)

  • identifying examples of language devices in a range of poems, ballads or poetic extracts, and considering how their use adds to meaning and may also influence the emotional responses of listeners or readers, in varying ways
  • exploring how language devices look or sound in written or spoken texts, how they can be identified, purposes they serve and what effect they might have on how the audience responds
  • taking a particular area of study, a topic or theme and examining how different authors make use of devices like myth, icons and imagery in their work

Content description

Elaborations

Experiment with the ways that language features, image and sound can be adapted in literary texts, for example the effects of stereotypical characters and settings, the playfulness of humour andand the use of hyperlink (ACELT1638)

  • making language choices and choosing particular language devices to achieve intended effects, for example building in a surprise or twist in the ending of a short story or final scene of a film
  • taking an existing short story, poem, play or speech in print form and creating a short visual text which is accompanied by a sound track containing music and sound effects, and which is intended to amuse audiences who are familiar with the original text
  • creating written interpretations of traditional and contemporary literature which employs devices like metaphor, symbol, allegory and myth, and evaluating the contribution of these devices to the interpretation of the text
  • creating written interpretations of traditional and contemporary poetry (for example sonnets and contemporary song lyrics) focusing on their use of symbol, myth, icons and imagery

Health and Physical Education Foundation Year  

Foundation Year Description

The Foundation Year curriculum provides the basis for developing knowledge, understanding and skills for students to lead healthy, safe and active lives. The content gives students opportunities to learn about their strengths and simple actions they can take to keep themselves and their classmates healthy and safe. The content explores the people who are important to students and develops students’ capacity to initiate and maintain respectful relationships in different contexts, including at school, at home, in the classroom and when participating in physical activities. The Foundation curriculum provides opportunities for students to learn through movement. The content enables students to develop and practise fundamental movement skills through active play and structured movement activities. This improves competence and confidence in their movement abilities. The content also provides opportunities for students to learn about movement as they participate in physical activity in a range of different settings. Focus areas to be addressed in Foundation include: safe use of medicines (AD) food and nutrition (FN) health benefits of physical activity (HBPA) mental health and wellbeing (MH) relationships (RS) safety (S) active play and minor games (AP) fundamental movement skills (FMS) rhythmic and expressive movement activities (RE).
Students learn that humans are made in the image of God and that each person is to be respected, cared for and kept safe.   Students learn that, as whole people, boys and girls are equal and have both strengths and limitations. They understand that their body is a good and precious gift from God and they are supported to use the anatomical names of private body parts when learning about body ownership, privacy, respect, and responsibility.Students learn about respectful relationships, love and forgiveness.  They learn about God’s plan for people to help each other to be happy, healthy and safe. Students identify people who are important to them and can help to keep them safe. They are guided to use clues to recognise safe and unsafe situations and identify possible actions. Students learn strategies including persistence, to react to and report unsafe situations. 

Content description

Elaborations

Identify actions that promote health,and (ACPPS006)

  • identifying household substances that can be dangerous and suggesting examples of how they can be stored safely in the home
  • grouping foods into categories such as food groups and ‘always’ and ‘sometimes’ foods
  • recognising and following safety symbols and procedures at home and in water and road environments
  • understanding the importance of personal hygiene practices, including hand washing, face washing, nose blowing and toilet routines
  • recognising that being kind, fair and respectful to others can support class health and wellbeing
  • looking at different ways the community keeps them safe, for example devices like lights, procedures like safe swimming or safe food handling and safety volunteers

History Year 7  

Year 7 Description

The ancient world The Year 7 curriculum provides a study of history from the time of the earliest human communities to the end of the ancient period, approximately 60 000 BC (BCE) – c.650 AD (CE). It was a period defined by the development of cultural practices and organised societies. The study of the ancient world includes the discoveries (the remains of the past and what we know) and the mysteries (what we do not know) about this period of history, in a range of societies in places including Australia, Egypt, Greece, Rome, India and China. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 7 are: How do we know about the ancient past? Why and where did the earliest societies develop? What emerged as the defining characteristics of ancient societies? What have been the legacies of ancient societies?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 7 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate, compare, select and use information from a range of sources as (ACHHS210)

  • creating categories (that is, concepts) with which to organise information obtained from sources
  • identifying a range of archaeological sources (for example, the physical remains of the Colosseum, gladiatorial equipment such as helmets, mosaics showing gladiatorial combat, written accounts of what happened in the Colosseum)

History Year 8  

Year 8 Description

The ancient to the modern world The Year 8 curriculum provides a study of history from the end of the ancient period to the beginning of the modern period, c.650– 1750 AD (CE). This was when major civilisations around the world came into contact with each other. Social, economic, religious and political beliefs were often challenged and significantly changed. It was the period when the modern world began to take shape. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 8 are: How did societies change from the end of the ancient period to the beginning of the modern age? What key beliefs and values emerged and how did they influence societies? What were the causes and effects of contact between societies in this period? Which significant people, groups and ideas from this period have influenced the world today?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 8 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Locate, compare, select and use information from a range of sources as (ACHHS153)

  • creating categories to organise the information obtained from sources
  • designing a table to list sources and the aspects of the past about which they provide information (for example, social structure, economy, governance)

Content description

Elaborations

Significant developments and/or cultural achievements, such as changing relations between Islam and the West (including the Crusades), architecture,manuscripts and music (ACDSEH050)

  • describing the features of castles and churches of the period (for example, Warwick Castle in England and Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris) as examples of the Church’s power in terms of its control of wealth and labour
  • researching inventions and developments in the Islamic world and their subsequent adoption in the Western world
  • recognising that the medieval manuscripts of monastic scribes contributed to the survival of many ancient Greek and Roman literary texts
  • examining the religious nature of illuminated manuscripts and how they were the product of a complex and frequently costly process
  • listening to the Gregorian chants of Western Christianity and exploring how they reflect the nature and power of the Church in this period

Content description

Elaborations

The immediate- and long-term effects of the Black Death on Asian, European and African populations, and conflicting theories about the impact of the plague  (ACDSEH071)

  • using studies of church records from the period to identify the effect of the Black Death on human populations and to consider the reliability of these statistics
  • investigating the effects of the Black Death on society (for example, labour shortages, peasant uprisings, the weakening of feudal structures and increased social mobility)
  • categorising the effects of the Black Death as either short term or long term and drawing conclusions about the severity of the Black Death

History Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The making of the modern world The Year 9 curriculum provides a study of the history of the making of the modern world from 1750 to 1918. It was a period of industrialisation and rapid change in the ways people lived, worked and thought. It was an era of nationalism and imperialism, and the colonisation of Australia was part of the expansion of European power. The period culminated in World War I, 1914–1918, the ‘war to end all wars’. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 9 are: What were the changing features of the movements of people from 1750 to 1918? How did new ideas and technological developments contribute to change in this period? What was the origin, development, significance and long-term impact of imperialism in this period? What was the significance of World War I?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 9 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

The extension of settlement, including the effects of contact (intended and unintended) between European settlers in Australia and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples (ACDSEH020)

  • explaining the effects of contact (for example, the massacres of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people; their killing of sheep; the spread of European diseases) and categorising these effects as either intended or unintended
  • investigating the forcible removal of children from Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander families in the late nineteenth century/early twentieth century (leading to the Stolen Generations), such as the motivations for the removal of children, the practices and laws that were in place, and experiences of separation.

History Year 10  

Year 10 Description

The modern world and Australia The Year 10 curriculum provides a study of the history of the modern world and Australia from 1918 to the present, with an emphasis on Australia in its global context. The twentieth century became a critical period in Australia’s social, cultural, economic and political development. The transformation of the modern world during a time of political turmoil, global conflict and international cooperation provides a necessary context for understanding Australia’s development, its place within the Asia-Pacific region and its global standing. The content provides opportunities to develop historical understanding through key concepts, including evidence, continuity and change, cause and effect, perspectives, empathy, significance and contestability. These concepts may be investigated within a particular historical context to facilitate an understanding of the past and to provide a focus for historical inquiries. The history content at this year level involves two strands: historical knowledge and understanding, and historical skills. These strands are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Key inquiry questions A framework for developing students’ historical knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions through the use and interpretation of sources. The key inquiry questions for Year 10 are: How did the nature of global conflict change during the twentieth century? What were the consequences of World War II? How did these consequences shape the modern world? How was Australian society affected by other significant global events and changes in this period?
The history of the Catholic Church is part of world history. Belonging to a tradition means we learn from the past in order to inform the future. One way of exploring a Catholic perspective is studying the history of the Catholic Church. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History (Year 10 Church History in RE curriculum) provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Significant events and campaigns that contributed to popular awareness of environmental issues, such as the campaign to prevent the damming of Australia’s Gordon River, the nuclear accident at Chernobyl and the Jabiluka mine controversy in 1998 (ACDSEH127)

  • investigating a range of environmental impacts (for example, the flooding of Lake Pedder in Tasmania, deforestation in Indonesia, the decline of the Aral Sea, the Exxon Valdez oil spill, the whaling industry)
  • explaining the struggle over French nuclear weapon testing in the Pacific 1966–1996 (for example, the sinking of the ship, the Rainbow Warrior, in 1985)

Content description

Elaborations

Develop texts, particularly descriptions and discussions that usefrom a range of sources that are referenced (ACHHS192)

  • developing a historical argument that identifies different possibilities in interpretation and argues a particular point of view, with consistent and specific reference to the evidence available
  • explaining the significance of the fall of Singapore (1942) in the changes in Australia’s military alliances and use of troops during World War II, using a range of sources (for example, accounts of prisoners of war, commanders such as General Gordon Bennett, politicians such as Prime Minister John Curtin, and Japanese and British sources)

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 1  

Year 1 Description

How my world is different from the past and can change in the future The Year 1 curriculum provides a study of the recent past, the present and the near future within the context of the student’s own world. Students are given opportunities to explore how changes occur over time in relation to themselves, their own families, and the places they and others belong to. They examine their daily family life and how it is the same as and different to previous generations. They investigate their place and other places, their natural, managed and constructed features, and the activities located in them. They explore daily and seasonal weather patterns and how different groups describe them. They anticipate near future events such as personal milestones and seasons. The idea of active citizenship is introduced as students explore family roles and responsibilities and ways people care for places. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; place and space; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from two sub-strands: history and geography. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How has family life and the place we live in changed over time? What events, activities and places do I care about? Why?
When planning for learning in Year 1 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: Students would consider the concept of stewardship of God's creation as they explore the features of their place and how their place can be cared for. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Sort and record information and data, including location, in tables and on plans and labelled maps (ACHASSI020)

  • creating and sharing concept maps to show personal understanding of their world (for example, a web of family relationships and connections, or a mental map of their place and its important features or spaces)
  • making artefact and photo displays to show the features of a place (for example, collections of natural and constructed things from the environment) or to show the passing of time (for example, collections of things used when growing older, toys used by different generations) and labelling the display with simple captions
  • recording data about the location of places and their features on maps and/or plans (for example, labelling the location of their home and daily route to school on a map of the local area, drawing a plan of their classroom and labelling its activity spaces)
  • developing a pictorial table to categorise information (for example, matching clothes with seasons, activities with the weather, features and places, places with the work done)

Content description

Elaborations

Compare objects from the past with those from the present and consider how places have changed over time (ACHASSI023)

  • identifying similarities and differences between activities over time by comparing objects of the past with those currently used (for example, comparing toys, games, clothes, phones, cooking utensils, tools, homework books)
  • using comparative language when describing family life over time and/or comparing features of places, such as ‘smaller than’, ‘bigger than’, ‘closer’, ‘further’, ‘not as big as’, ‘younger/older than’, ‘more rainy days’, ‘fewer/less’, ‘hottest/coldest’, ‘sunnier’, ‘windier than’
  • exploring Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander stories, traditional and contemporary, about places and the past and how places have changed
  • categorising objects, drawings or images by their features and explaining their reasoning, for example, categorising the features of a local place into natural (native forest), constructed (street of houses) and managed (windbreak of trees)

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 3  

Year 3 Description

Diverse communities and places and the contribution people make The Year 3 curriculum focuses on the diversity of people and places in their local community and beyond, and how people participate in their communities. Students study how places are represented geographically and how communities express themselves culturally and through civic participation. Opportunities are provided to learn about diversity within their community, including the Country/Place of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples, and about other communities in Australia and neighbouring countries. Students compare the climates, settlement patterns and population characteristics of places, and how these affect communities, past and present. Students examine how individuals and groups celebrate and contribute to communities in the past and present, through establishing and following rules, decision-making, participation and commemoration. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from three sub-strands: history, geography and civics and citizenship. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How do symbols, events, individuals and places in my community make it unique? How do people contribute to their communities, past and present? What events do different people and groups celebrate and commemorate and what does this tell us about our communities?
When planning for learning in Year 3 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: Within the Christian tradition people live in relationship with God and others. They are called to contribute to the fullness of life and live peacefully and safely with each other. Many communities consist of diverse people, cultures and religions.  All are dignified, respected and included. Individuals within the community are encouraged to contribute to the life of wider society and to remember and commemorate the traditions and accomplishments of those who have come before. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

The similarities and differences between places in terms of their type of settlement, demographic characteristics and the lives of the people who live there, and people’s perceptions of these places (ACHASSK069)

  • exploring people’s feelings for place and the factors that influence people’s attachment to place, through reading and viewing poems, songs, paintings and stories
  • discussing why it is important to protect places that have special significance for people (for example, a wetland, a sacred site, a national park or a World Heritage site)
  • exploring different types of settlement, and classifying them into hierarchical categories (for example, isolated dwellings, outstations, villages, towns, regional centres and large cities)
  • investigating the diversity of people who live in their place (for example, surveying the school community about age, birthplace and ancestry) and comparing them with a school in another place in Australia or neighbouring country
  • examining the similarities and differences between their daily lives and those of people in another place in Australia or neighbouring country, and inferring what it would be like to live in these places

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 5  

Year 5 Description

Australian communities – their past, present and possible futures The Year 5 curriculum focuses on colonial Australia in the 1800s and the social, economic, political and environmental causes and effects of Australia’s development, and on the relationship between humans and their environment. Students’ geographical knowledge of Australia and the the world is expanded as they explore the continents of Europe and North America, and study Australia’s colonisation, migration and democracy in the 1800s. Students investigate how the characteristics of environments are influenced by humans in different times and places, as they seek resources, settle in new places and manage the spaces within them. They also investigate how environments influence the characteristics of places where humans live and human activity in those places. Students explore how communities, past and present, have worked together based on shared beliefs and values. The curriculum introduces studies about Australia’s democratic values, its electoral system and law enforcement. In studying human desire and need for resources, students make connections to economics and business concepts around decisions and choices, gaining opportunities to consider their own and others’ financial, economic, environmental and social responsibilities and decision-making, past, present and future. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from four sub-strands: history, geography, civics and citizenship and economics and business. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How have individuals and groups in the past and present contributed to the development of Australia? What is the relationship between environments and my roles as a consumer and citizen? How have people enacted their values and perceptions about their community, other people and places, past and present?
When planning for learning in Year 5 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: The environment is God's gift to everyone and in our use of it we have a responsibility to the poor, future generations and humanity as a whole. Choices have consequences and students should consider who benefits and who might be harmed. As human beings we are fundamentally good but sometimes we make inappropriate choices. When we make choices and decisions we should try to choose the good. Our flourishing is intimately tied up with the flourishing of others. When we use our freedom in this way, we respect not only the dignity of all human beings, but come closer to realizing the kind of just, peaceful, and joyful community that God wants for humanity that is truly good. The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Why regulations and laws are enforced and the personnel involved (ACHASSK117)

  • categorising the different types of laws and regulations in their community and who enforces them (road laws – police; health laws – public health department; pollution laws – environmental protection officer)
  • identifying and researching the role of different people associated with law enforcement (for example, quarantine and customs officials, police) and the legal system (for example, judges and lawyers)

Content description

Elaborations

Types of(natural, human, capital) and the ways societies use them to satisfy theandof present and future generations (ACHASSK120)

  • categorising resources as natural (water, coal, wheat), human (workers, business owners, designing, making, thinking) and capital (tools, machines, technologies)
  • brainstorming resources that a local community might use
  • identifying and categorising the factors of production used in the production of goods and services that satisfy the needs and wants of a local community
  • listing the needs and wants of a local community and exploring the ways resources are currently used to meet these needs and wants and how resources might be used more sustainably to meet these needs and wants into the future
  • exploring how Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Peoples' traditional and contemporary use of resources reflects their spiritual connections to the land, sea, sky and waterways

Content description

Elaborations

Influences onchoices and methods that can be used to help make informed personaland financial choices (ACHASSK121)

  • identifying goods they have purchased and categorising and explaining factors that influence consumer purchasing decisions (for example, personal preferences, social trends, economic factors such as budgets and the amount of money available to spend; psychological factors such as advertising and peer pressure; cultural, environmental, legal and ethical factors)
  • comparing the influence of a variety of selling and advertising strategies used by businesses on consumer choices (for example, the influence of television and internet advertising compared to email promotions)
  • recognising that financial transactions can include the use of notes, coins, credit and debit cards, and barter items; explaining the advantages and disadvantages of the different transaction types; and considering how these may influence the way people purchase items
  • exploring the strategies that can be used when making consumer and financial decisions (for example, finding more information, comparing prices, keeping a record of money spent, saving for the future)

Content description

Elaborations

Organise and representin a range of formats including tables, graphs and large- and small-scale maps, using discipline-appropriate (ACHASSI096)

  • categorising information using digital and non-digital graphic organisers (for example, flowcharts, consequence wheels, futures timelines, Venn diagrams, scattergrams, decision-making matrixes and bibliography templates)
  • constructing maps, tables and graphs using appropriate digital applications and conventions (such as border, source, scale, legend, title and north point) to display data and information (for example, information about the movement of peoples over time in colonial Australia; the different climates of Europe and North America; population growth of Australian colonies; cultural and religious groups in Australia at different times; influences on consumer purchasing decisions)
  • deciding which recording methods and tools (for example, graphs, tables, field sketches, questionnaires, scattergrams, audio-recorders, video recorders, cameras, water or air quality testing kits, binoculars, clinometers, calculators) suit the data or information to be collected
  • mapping geographical data using spatial technologies (for example, the location of recent bushfires in Australia, or information they have collected through fieldwork)

Humanities and Social Sciences Year 6  

Year 6 Description

Australia in the past and present and its connections with a diverse world The Year 6 curriculum focuses on the social, economic and political development of Australia as a nation, particularly after 1900, and Australia’s role within a diverse and interconnected world today. Students explore the events and developments that shaped Australia as a democratic nation and stable economy, and the experiences of the diverse groups who have contributed to and are/were affected by these events and developments, past and present. Students investigate the importance of rights and responsibilities and informed decision-making, at the personal level of consumption and civic participation, and at the national level through studies of economic, ecological and government processes and systems. In particular, students examine Asia’s natural, demographic and cultural diversity, with opportunities to understand their connections to Asian environments. These studies enable students to understand how they are interconnected with diverse people and places across the globe. The content provides opportunities for students to develop humanities and social sciences understanding through key concepts including significance; continuity and change; cause and effect; place and space; interconnections; roles, rights and responsibilities; and perspectives and action. These concepts may provide a focus for inquiries and be investigated across sub-strands or within a particular sub-strand context. The content at this year level is organised into two strands: knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills. The knowledge and understanding strand draws from four sub-strands: history, geography, civics and citizenship and economics and business. These strands (knowledge and understanding, and inquiry and skills) are interrelated and have been developed to be taught in an integrated way, which may include integrating with content from the sub-strands and from other learning areas, and in ways that are appropriate to specific local contexts. The order and detail in which they are taught are programming decisions. Inquiry Questions A framework for developing students’ knowledge, understanding and skills is provided by inquiry questions. The following inquiry questions allow for connections to be made across the sub-strands and may be used or adapted to suit local contexts: inquiry questions are also provided for each sub-strand that may enable connections within the humanities and social sciences learning area or across other learning areas. How have key figures, events and values shaped Australian society, its system of government and citizenship? How have experiences of democracy and citizenship differed between groups over time and place, including those from and in Asia? How has Australia developed as a society with global connections, and what is my role as a global citizen?
When planning for learning in Year 6 HASS, relevant Catholic Perspectives include: Global solidarity binds the rich to the poor. It is action on behalf of the human family to overcome divisions in our world. It requires the gaining of knowledge and respect of diverse cultures and beliefs.  It drives the comfortable and secure to support those inflicted by tyranny and war. It opens homes and hearts to those in need. Solidarity is a recognition that we are 'all in this together and is a commitment to strengthen community and promote a just society.  The Archdiocesan Religious Education Curriculum, P-12, sub-strand Church History provides a means to learn from the past about Church history. The time frames and topics are aligned to the Australian history curriculum. Consequently, no specific Catholic perspective descriptors have been added to the content descriptions in history.

Content description

Elaborations

Organise and representin a range of formats including tables, graphs and large- and small-scale maps, using discipline-appropriate (ACHASSI124)

  • categorising information using digital and non-digital graphic organisers (for example, flowcharts, consequence wheels, futures timelines, mapping software, decision-making matrixes, digital scattergrams, spreadsheets, and bibliography templates)
  • constructing tables and graphs with digital applications as appropriate to display or categorise data and information for analysis (for example, a table to show the similarities and differences in official languages and religions across a number of countries)
  • creating maps using spatial technologies and cartographic conventions as appropriate (including border, source, scale, legend, title and north point) to show information and data, including location (for example, a large-scale map to show the location of places and their features in Australia and countries of Asia; a flow map or small-scale map to show the connections Australia has with Asian countries such as shipping or migration)
  • explaining spatial representations (for example, describing how the representation of the spherical globe on flat paper produces distortions in maps)

Mathematics Year 1  

Year 1 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes connecting names, numerals and quantities, and partitioning numbers in various ways fluency includes readily counting number in sequences forwards and backwards, locating numbers on a line and naming the days of the week problem-solving includes using materials to model authentic problems, giving and receiving directions to unfamiliar places, using familiar counting sequences to solve unfamiliar problems and discussing the reasonableness of the answer reasoning includes explaining direct and indirect comparisons of length using uniform informal units, justifying representations of data and explaining patterns that have been created.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Representwith objects and drawings where one object or drawing represents onevalue. Describe the displays (ACMSP263)

  • understanding one-to-one correspondence
  • describing displays by identifying categories with the greatest or least number of objects

Mathematics Year 2  

Year 2 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes connecting number calculations with counting sequences, partitioning and combining numbers flexibly and identifying and describing the relationship between addition and subtraction and between multiplication and division fluency includes readily counting numbers in sequences, using informal units iteratively to compare measurements, using the language of chance to describe outcomes of familiar chance events and describing and comparing time durations problem-solving includes formulating problems from authentic situations, making models and using number sentences that represent problem situations, and matching transformations with their original shape reasoning includes using known facts to derive strategies for unfamiliar calculations, comparing and contrasting related models of operations and creating and interpreting simple representations of data.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Identify a question of interest based on one categorical variable. Gatherrelevant to the question (ACMSP048)

  • determining the variety of birdlife in the playground and using a prepared table to record observations

Content description

Elaborations

Collect, check and classify (ACMSP049)

  • recognising the usefulness of tally marks
  • identifying categories of data and using them to sort data

Mathematics Year 3  

Year 3 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes connecting number representations with number sequences, partitioning and combining numbers flexibly, representing unit fractions, using appropriate language to communicate times, and identifying environmental symmetry fluency includes recalling multiplication facts, using familiar metric units to order and compare objects, identifying and describing outcomes of chance experiments, interpreting maps and communicating positions problem-solving includes formulating and modelling authentic situations involving planning methods of data collection and representation, making models of three-dimensional objects and using number properties to continue number patterns reasoning includes using generalising from number properties and results of calculations, comparing angles and creating and interpreting variations in the results of data collections and data displays.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Identify questions or issues for categorical variables. Identifysources and plan methods ofcollection and recording (ACMSP068)

  • refining questions and planning investigations that involve collecting data, and carrying out the investigation (for example narrowing the focus of a question such as ‘which is the most popular breakfast cereal?’ to ‘which is the most popular breakfast cereal among Year 3 students in our class?’)

Content description

Elaborations

Collect data, organise into categories and create displays using lists, tables,and simple column graphs, with and without the use of digital technologies (ACMSP069)

  • exploring meaningful and increasingly efficient ways to record data, and representing and reporting the results of investigations
  • collecting data to investigate features in the natural environment

Mathematics Year 5  

Year 5 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes making connections between representations of numbers, using fractions to represent probabilities, comparing and ordering fractions and decimals and representing them in various ways, describing transformations and identifying line and rotational symmetry fluency includes choosing appropriate units of measurement for calculation of perimeter and area, using estimation to check the reasonableness of answers to calculations and using instruments to measure angles problem-solving includes formulating and solving authentic problems using whole numbers and measurements and creating financial plans reasoning includes investigating strategies to perform calculations efficiently, continuing patterns involving fractions and decimals, interpreting results of chance experiments, posing appropriate questions for data investigations and interpreting data sets.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Pose questions and collect categorical or numericalby observation or survey (ACMSP118)

  • posing questions about insect diversity in the playground, collecting data by taping a one-metre-square piece of paper to the playground and observing the type and number of insects on it over time

Mathematics Year 6  

Year 6 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes describing properties of different sets of numbers, using fractions and decimals to describe probabilities, representing fractions and decimals in various ways and describing connections between them, and making reasonable estimations fluency includes representing integers on a number line, calculating simple percentages, using brackets appropriately, converting between fractions and decimals, using operations with fractions, decimals and percentages, measuring using metric units and interpreting timetables problem-solving includes formulating and solving authentic problems using fractions, decimals, percentages and measurements, interpreting secondary data displays and finding the size of unknown angles reasoning includes explaining mental strategies for performing calculations, describing results for continuing number sequences, explaining the transformation of one shape into another and explaining why the actual results of chance experiments may differ from expected results.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Interpret and compare a range ofdisplays, including side-by-side column graphs for two categorical variables (ACMSP147)

  • comparing different student-generated diagrams, tables and graphs, describing their similarities and differences and commenting on the usefulness of each representation for interpreting the data
  • understanding that data can be represented in different ways, sometimes with one symbol representing more than one piece of data, and that it is important to read all information about a representation before making judgments

Mathematics Year 9  

Year 9 Description

The proficiency strands understanding, fluency, problem-solving and reasoning are an integral part of mathematics content across the three content strands: number and algebra, measurement and geometry, and statistics and probability. The proficiencies reinforce the significance of working mathematically within the content and describe how the content is explored or developed. They provide the language to build in the developmental aspects of the learning of mathematics. The achievement standards reflect the content and encompass the proficiencies. At this year level: understanding includes describing the relationship between graphs and equations, simplifying a range of algebraic expressions and explaining the use of relative frequencies to estimate probabilities and of the trigonometric ratios for right-angle triangles fluency includes applying the index laws to expressions with integer indices, expressing numbers in scientific notation, listing outcomes for experiments, developing familiarity with calculations involving the Cartesian plane and calculating areas of shapes and surface areas of prisms problem-solving includes formulating and modelling practical situations involving surface areas and volumes of right prisms, applying ratio and scale factors to similar figures, solving problems involving right-angle trigonometry and collecting data from secondary sources to investigate an issue reasoning includes following mathematical arguments, evaluating media reports and using statistical knowledge to clarify situations, developing strategies in investigating similarity and sketching linear graphs.
The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Investigate Pythagoras’ Theorem and its application to solving simple problems involving right angled triangles (ACMMG222)

  • understanding that Pythagoras' Theorem is a useful tool in determining unknown lengths in right-angled triangles and has widespread applications
  • recognising that right-angled triangle calculations may generate results that can be integers, fractions or irrational numbers

Content description

Elaborations

Identify everyday questions and issues involving at least one numerical and at least one categorical variable, and collectdirectly and from secondary sources (ACMSP228)

  • comparing the annual rainfall in various parts of Australia, Pakistan, New Guinea and Malaysia

Content description

Elaborations

Find the distance between two points located on the Cartesian plane using a range of strategies, including graphing software (ACMNA214)

  • investigating graphical and algebraic techniques for finding distance between two points
  • using Pythagoras' theorem to calculate distance between two points

Mathematics Year 10A  

Year 10A Description

The ability to problem solve and apply mathematical knowledge and understanding within real world contexts supports students to develop 21st century numeracy skills.  Applying mathematics knowledge and understanding in the Australian Curriculum Mathematics is developed through the introduction of contexts. Authentic contexts can also be located in other areas of the curriculum by connecting the mathematical content to be applied across the curriculum. Numeracy is the application of mathematical knowledge and skills in real world contexts. The general capability of numeracy provides a pathway for exploring  Catholic Perspectives and Catholic Social Teachings. When students are asked to solve problems and understand social contexts through a mathematics lens they deepen their understanding of the world, the views of others and connect more authentically with their community and society. Developing numeracy skills provides students with the processes and skills to understand and participate in their world, justify their viewpoints and critique information.Application in real world context – numeracy skillsBring CONTEXT to the curriculumSocial context – connecting with real world The Australian curriculum mathematical content descriptions can be taught through social contexts that connect learners to apply mathematics in order to understand their world and bring about social change.  From a Catholic perspective, contexts can be developed by teachers at different year levels depending on the relevant learning development and knowledge of students.From the Australian Curriculum Mathematics, an understanding and application of data and statistics can be enhanced through the introduction of contexts that support a Catholic perspective.   For instance, data and statistics can be used to inform our judgement and justify how we might respond to the poor and marginalised and those in greatest need, both locally and globally.  Using data and statistics to make judgements and reason thinking strengthens students’ knowledge of their call to action, to live in the image and likeness of God.  Numeracy skills and understandings support the development of the whole learner to live with dignity with a vision for a just and fair world. From a Catholic perspective, teachers are required to teach students the mathematical knowledge and skills that support their development as numerate learners and users who can bring a critical lens to real world contexts.  Teachers have an obligation to support students to apply their numeracy knowledge and skills in social contexts both locally and globally to enhance student capacity to improve their social and economic well-being for human flourishing.  Schools and teachers provide equitable access and opportunity for all students to learn mathematics relevant to their year level.  

Content description

Elaborations

Apply Pythagoras’ Theorem and trigonometry to solving three-dimensional problems in right-angled triangles (ACMMG276)

  • investigating the applications of Pythagoras' theorem in authentic problems

Content description

Elaborations

Solve right-angled triangle problems including those involving direction and (ACMMG245)

  • applying Pythagoras' Theorem and trigonometry to problems in surveying and design
 
Back to top

Your search for 'Gor' returned 6 sections within Theological Background

Though most human beings are either male or female, and most human beings identify as such, there are some human beings who do not, or do not feel that they fall into either of categories, male or female. For some, this arises from genetic or biological divergence from the norm. For others psychological factors have an influence on perception of gender identity. The gender identity of others is influenced by a combination of biological and psychological factors. Examples include Sex Chromosome Aneuploidy, Intersex, and Gender Dysphoria or Transsexualism. As with all instances in which people feel like their situation (whatever that may be) is unusual or outside of what is 'normal', and especially where they associate this feeling of being unusual or outside of what is 'normal' with potentially negative treatment by others, these situations are often a struggle for the people who experience them and for those close to them. What will people think of me? Will anybody ever be able to love me? Will I be able to live a 'normal' life? These are some of the questions that people struggling with their sexual identity might ask. Indeed, they are questions that we all ask when we feel like we are 'not normal' or when we are deciding whether to do something that is 'not normal'. They are questions that arise from a fear of exclusion, or from being deemed less worthy of respect, care, love and justice. It is a fear that most people experience at some time in their lives, but a fear that for some people is a constant companion. These feelings are further exacerbated when we feel like we did not choose to be this way or to be in this situation. From a Catholic Perspective, the first and most important thing is to reaffirm that all human beings are created fundamentally equal in the image of God, worthy of equal respect, care, love and justice. In moral terms our being human is prior to our being a man or a woman. Consequently, no person who experiences a situation in which they feel they are 'not normal' should ever be made to feel like they are 'not worthy' of the respect, care, love and justice that is due to every human being by virtue of their being human. In particular they should never be made to feel like they are not respected, cared for, loved or treated justly. Bullying, teasing, violence, exclusion and any other kind of demonizing or dehumanizing treatment is never acceptable from a Catholic perspective. How an individual concretely deals with working out his or her sexual identity in these complicated situations is not something that should be taken lightly or treated flippantly. As we shall see below, sexuality is an important part of who we are as human beings. Taking sexuality seriously is part of what it means to live life whole-heartedly. Effective support for a person with regard to their sexuality is more likely to be achieved in a supportive environment in which emotional, intellectual, physical and spiritual support are at hand and understanding, and guidance are made available in a sensitive and dignity-affirming manner. However one resolves one's sexual identity, and one's identity as a person, one is always called upon to love responsibly and chastely as described below. Yet another challenge is posed by the various forms of an ideology of gender that 'denies the difference and reciprocity in nature of a man and a woman and envisages a society without sexual differences, thereby eliminating the anthropological basis of the family. This ideology leads to educational programmes and legislative enactments that promote a personal identity and emotional intimacy radically separated from the biological difference between male and female. Consequently, human identity be- comes the choice of the individual, one which can also change over time'. It is a source of concern that some ideologies of this sort, which seek to respond to what are at times understand- able aspirations, manage to assert themselves as absolute and unquestionable, even dictating how children should be raised. It needs to be emphasized that 'biological sex and the socio-cultural role of sex (gender) can be distinguished but not separated'. n the other hand, 'the techno- logical revolution in the field of human procreation has introduced the ability to manipulate the reproductive act, making it independent of the sexual relationship between a man and a woman. In this way, human life and parenthood have become modular and separable realities, subject mainly to the wishes of individuals or couples'. It is one thing to be understanding of human weakness and the complexities of life, and another to accept ideologies that attempt to sunder what are inseparable aspects of reality. Let us not fall into the sin of trying to replace the Creator. We are creatures, and not omnipotent. Creation is prior to us and must be received as a gift. At the same time, we are called to protect our humanity, and this means, in the first place, accepting it and respecting it as it was created (Pope Francis, 2016 Amoris Laetitia).

Issues relating to people who are erotically attracted to someone of the same sex are complex. First of all, a word about language. In the past people spoke about homosexuality and 'homosexuals'. The latter expression tended to reinforce the idea of identifying the person with his or her sexual orientation. Today it is more common to talk about persons with same-sex attraction. This identifies such people as first of all persons with all that implies, and only secondarily refers to their sexual orientation. It is very common for some to use the acronym LGTBI (and sometimes other letters are added) to identify a group of people: Lesbians, Gays, Transsexuals, Bi-sexuals and Intersex. Sometimes they will be referred to as a community. However, there are many people who fall under one of these 'categories' who may resent being labelled in this way and are offended by it. It is best to avoid such labelling together with the presumption that all those who are same-sex attracted form part of this community. There is not one kind of experience of being same-sex attracted. For this reason definitions can be difficult. For example, some people experience transient same-sex attraction but it is not a permanent condition for them, so they would not generally be considered as part of the same group as those who would identify themselves as same-sex attracted persons. It is very important to realise this when dealing with young people who might be thinking they are erotically attracted to people of the same sex.

The severity of the sin, of the wrongdoing, is traditionally divided into two categories, venial sin and mortal sin. Mortal sin is the more serious of the two. Mortal sin is a conscious and freely chosen turning away from goodness, from the ultimate good and from God. It is a free rejection of our capacity to love and of our capacity to seek and find the truth. Mortal sin is a rejection of what we know to be the right thing to do in our conscience. In other words, it is a rejection of our very own dignity as beings created in the image of God. Such sins are called mortal because, in the language of the tradition, mortal sins lead to death and eternal damnation in Hell, unless the person sincerely seeks forgiveness. But one doesn't need to believe in Hell, or damnation, or eternal punishment to realise that the kinds of wrongdoings that are called mortal sin can have very serious and sometimes really deadly consequences for the flourishing of the whole community. For example, in the case of murder, in addition to the death of another person, there is significant trauma associated with suffering, anger, resentment, mistrust, fear, financial burdens and costs, disruption of work, destruction of families, and so on. There are specific conditions that must be met for a sin to be a mortal sin. First, it must be done with full knowledge; second, it must be freely chosen or willed, and third, it must concern grave or serious matter. Grave matter are those things that concern a fundamental good of the human person. Grave matter includes unjustifiably killing or physically harming a person, taking something that does not belong to you, having sexual relations with someone who is not your spouse, and withholding the truth from or deceiving people who have a right to certain information from you. In other words, a sin is only mortal in the strict sense when you freely choose to do it, knowing that it is the wrong thing to do. Of course, we are also very good at deceiving ourselves about what we really know, or finding ways to justify our behaviour to make it look like we didn't know or didn't choose. Being really honest with ourselves about these things is essential if we are going live whole-hearted, morally responsible lives. Whether a sin meets the strict definition of mortal sin or not intentions and actions must be wrong when they break down the kind of just and loving human community that God desires for us and that we really should desire for ourselves. Such actions break down the kind of community that we described in the previous section about Love, being free and being responsible means avoiding doing the wrong thing and trying sincerely to do the right thing for ourselves and for others.

The basic conditions include the provision of basic goods necessary for human flourishing. These goods are both concrete and abstract. We have seen that as beings made in the image of God, we are created with a capacity for free choice. Indeed our lives are only morally meaningful to the extent that we engage this freedom of choice. Consequently, one of the basic goods that must be provided as part of the common good is our ability to use our freedom. We also have a reciprocal duty to make sure that the use of our freedom does not diminish the capacity of others to use their freedom. This idea of certain basic goods necessary for all human beings to flourish is given expression in the idea of human rights. The Catholic perspective, in its social teaching, lists several rights necessary for the common good. Consider the following extensive quote taken from Pope Saint John XXIII's 1963 Encyclical 'On Establishing Universal Peace in Truth, Justice, Charity and Liberty'—Pacem in Terris: Man has the right to live. He has the right to bodily integrity and to the means necessary for the proper development of life, particularly food, clothing, shelter, medical care, rest, and, finally, the necessary social services. In consequence, he has the right to be looked after in the event of ill health; disability stemming from his work; widowhood; old age; enforced unemployment; or whenever through no fault of his own he is deprived of the means of livelihood. Moreover, man has a natural right to be respected. He has a right to his good name. He has a right to freedom in investigating the truth, and—within the limits of the moral order and the common good—to freedom of speech and publication, and to freedom to pursue whatever profession he may choose. He has the right, also, to be accurately informed about public events. He has the natural right to share in the benefits of culture, and hence to receive a good general education, and a technical or professional training consistent with the degree of educational development in his own country. Furthermore, a system must be devised for affording gifted members of society the opportunity of engaging in more advanced studies, with a view to their occupying, as far as possible, positions of responsibility in society in keeping with their natural talent and acquired skill. Also among man's rights is that of being able to worship God in accordance with the right dictates of his own conscience, and to profess his religion both in private and in public. According to the clear teaching of Lactantius, 'this is the very condition of our birth, that we render to the God who made us that just homage which is His due; that we acknowledge Him alone as God, and follow Him. It is from this ligature of piety, which binds us and joins us to God, that religion derives its name. 'Hence, too, Pope Leo XIII declared that 'true freedom, freedom worthy of the sons of God, is that freedom which most truly safeguards the dignity of the human person. It is stronger than any violence or injustice. Such is the freedom which has always been desired by the Church, and which she holds most dear. It is the sort of freedom which the Apostles resolutely claimed for themselves. The apologists defended it in their writings; thousands of martyrs consecrated it with their blood. 'Human beings have also the right to choose for themselves the kind of life which appeals to them: whether it is to found a family—in the founding of which both the man and the woman enjoy equal rights and duties—or to embrace the priesthood or the religious life. The family, founded upon marriage freely contracted, one and indissoluble, must be regarded as the natural, primary cell of human society. The interests of the family, therefore, must be taken very specially into consideration in social and economic affairs, as well as in the spheres of faith and morals. For all of these have to do with strengthening the family and assisting it in the fulfilment of its mission. Of course, the support and education of children is a right which belongs primarily to the parents. In the economic sphere, it is evident that a man has the inherent right not only to be given the opportunity to work, but also to be allowed the exercise of personal initiative in the work he does.The conditions in which a man works form a necessary corollary to these rights. They must not be such as to weaken his physical or moral fibre, or militate against the proper development of adolescents to manhood. Women must be accorded such conditions of work as are consistent with their needs and responsibilities as wives and mothers. A further consequence of man's personal dignity is his right to engage in economic activities suited to his degree of responsibility. The worker is likewise entitled to a wage that is determined in accordance with the precepts of justice. This needs stressing. The amount a worker receives must be sufficient, in proportion to available funds, to allow him and his family a standard of living consistent with human dignity. Pope Pius XII expressed it in these terms: 'Nature imposes work upon man as a duty, and man has the corresponding natural right to demand that the work he does shall provide him with the means of livelihood for himself and his children. Such is nature's categorical imperative for the preservation of man. 'As a further consequence of man's nature, he has the right to the private ownership of property, including that of productive goods. This, as We have said elsewhere, is a right which constitutes so efficacious a means of asserting one's personality and exercising responsibility in every field, and an element of solidity and security for family life, and of greater peace and prosperity in the State. Finally, it is opportune to point out that the right to own private property entails a social obligation as well. Men are by nature social, and consequently they have the right to meet together and to form associations with their fellows. They have the right to confer on such associations the type of organization which they consider best calculated to achieve their objectives. They have also the right to exercise their own initiative and act on their own responsibility within these associations for the attainment of the desired results. As We insisted in Our encyclical Mater et Magistra, the founding of a great many such intermediate groups or societies for the pursuit of aims which it is not within the competence of the individual to achieve efficiently, is a matter of great urgency. Such groups and societies must be considered absolutely essential for the safeguarding of man's personal freedom and dignity, while leaving intact a sense of responsibility. Again, every human being has the right to freedom of movement and of residence within the confines of his own State. When there are just reasons in favor of it, he must be permitted to emigrate to other countries and take up residence there. The fact that he is a citizen of a particular State does not deprive him of membership in the human family, nor of citizenship in that universal society, the common, world-wide fellowship of men. Finally, man's personal dignity involves his right to take an active part in public life, and to make his own contribution to the common welfare of his fellow citizens. As Pope Pius XII said, 'man as such, far from being an object or, as it were, an inert element in society, is rather its subject, its basis and its purpose; and so must he be esteemed.' As a human person he is entitled to the legal protection of his rights, and such protection must be effective, unbiased, and strictly just. To quote again Pope Pius XII: 'In consequence of that juridical order willed by God, man has his own inalienable right to juridical security. To him is assigned a certain, well-defined sphere of law, immune from arbitrary attack.'

HISTORY of SCIENCE and RELIGION: Historically, Catholics are numbered among the most important scientists of all time, including Rene Descartes, who discovered analytic geometry and the laws of refraction; Blaise Pascal, inventor of the adding machine, hydraulic press, and the mathematical theory of probabilities; Augustinian priest Gregor Mendel, who founded modern genetics; Louis Pasteur, founder of microbiology and creator of the first vaccine for rabies and anthrax; and cleric Nicolaus Copernicus, who first developed scientifically the view that the earth rotated around the sun; Laura Bassi. Jesuit priests in particular have a long history of scientific achievement. Catholic Education Resource Centre

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE: Catholic perspectives in the study of biological science calls us to always reflect on our humanness and the respect for each individual, created in the image and likeness of God. There are many complex issues surrounding the ethical considerations of biological scientific studies. Fostering [students'] capacities and skills of discerning, interpreting, thinking critically, seeking truth and making meaning” is a significant aim of Religious Education in Australian Catholic schools. In his most recent Apostolic Exhortation (Gaudete et Exsultate, March 2018), Pope Francis refutes a closed theology that does not honour questioning, doubting and inquiring. “When somebody has an answer for every question, it is a sign that they are not on the right road” (n.41). Catholic perspectives call us to remain faithful to the truth entrusted to Catholic education, honouring the reality of people's lives: their questions, suffering, dreams, struggles and worries? This apparent opposition needs to be held as paradox; needing the ability to hold this tension in life-giving ways, allowing it to open our minds and hearts to new ways of seeing and being. (Framing Paper: Religious Education in Catholic Schools, NCEC, 2017). Bioethics is a branch of ethical inquiry that examines the nature of biological and technological discoveries and the responsible use of biomedical advances, with particular emphasis upon their moral implications for our individual and common humanity. The gory/issues/bioethics">Centre for Bioethics and Human Dignity Ethical considerations in this area of study are not limited to religious values and teachings. The Australian National Health and Medical Research Council (NHMRC) released revised Ethical guidelines on the use of assisted reproductive technology in clinical practice and research (ART guidelines).? The ART guidelines are used by professional organisations to set standards for the practice of ART. The ART guidelines are primarily intended for ART clinicians, clinic nurses, embryologists, counsellors and administrators, researchers, Human Research Ethics Committees, and governments. Guiding Principle 7: Processes and policies for determining an individual's or a couple's eligibility to access ART services must be just, equitable, transparent and respectful of human dignity and the natural human rights of all persons, including the right to not be unlawfully or unreasonably discriminated against. Catholic perspectives provide a clear lens for understanding Catholic social teachings about human dignity. Social action is closely linked to the Catholic Social Teaching principles. Social action is a call to live out the Gospel through focusing on human dignity  and caring for God's creation through opportunities for public advocacy and action. Steps to moral decision making Be very clear about the moral question you are asking. The more you deal with moral issues, the more you will realise how often the issues at stake come down to careful use of words, and clearly understanding what different terms mean when used by various parties.
 
Back to top

Your search for 'Gor' returned 0 results within Scripture Topics

Back to top

Your search for 'Gor' returned 0 results within Teacher Background

 
Back to top

Your search for 'Gor' returned 0 results within Three Worlds of the Text

 
Back to top

Your search for 'Gor' returned 0 results within Glossary

 
Back to top